NC0066150_ATC Application_20190426

Request for Authorization to Construct
Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant
Tertiary Filter Relocation Project
F U Q U A A R 11 N A
north corolrna
Bid Number:
Date: April 2019
Hazen

Hazen
April 12, 2019
Hazen and Sawyer
4011 WestChase Blvd, Suite 500
Raleigh, NC 27607 • 919-755.8657
Mr. Bing Bai
NC DEQ Water Quality
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
Re: Authorization to Construct Application for Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant Cloth
Media Tertiary Filter Relocation Project (NPDES #NC0066150)
Dear Mr. Bai:
On behalf of the Town of Fuquay-Varina, Hazen and Sawyer is submitting this letter of request for
authorization to construct (ATC) a disk tertiary filter at the Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant
(WWTP), NPDES Permit number NC0066150. This project does not include a capacity increase. The
Brighton Forest WWTP is currently configured with two 0.059 MGD treatment trains. Each of the 0.059
MGD capacity treatment trains includes two 0.029 MGD capacity fixed media tertiary filters. This
project includes the addition of a new disk tertiary filter to treat the flows from the two 0.059 MGD
treatment trains at the Terrible Creek WWTP. The new filter is designed to treat in excess of the average
day capacity of 0.117 MGD and a peak hourly flow of 0.288 MGD. The existing fixed media tertiary
filters will remain in service to provide for redundancy. This project is expected to be completed and
operational in the summer of 2020. The following items are enclosed with this letter:
• Tab 1: Application for ATC (Form ATC-12-14)
• Tab 2: Design Calculations
• Tab 3: Brighton Forest WWTP NPDES Permit Part I
• Tab 4: Specifications
• Paper Copy of Plans
• CD Containing Digital Copy of Plans and Specifications
If you have any questions or if you require anything further please call me at 919-755-8657 or email me
at [e-mail].
Respectfully,
Tim Devine, P
Senior Associate
hazenandsawyer.com

Tab 1: Application for ATC
(Form ATC-12-14)

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION
A. The Division of Water Resources will accept this application package for review only if all of the items are provided and the
application is complete. Failure to submit all of the required items will result in the application package being returned as incomplete
per 15A NCAC 02T .0105(b).
B. Plans and specifications must be prepared in accordance with 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute
133-3, North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES
Wastewater Treatment Facilities.
C. The plans and specifications submitted must represent a completed final design that is ready to advertise for bid.
D. Any content changes made to this Form ATC-12-14 shall result in the application package being returned.
E. The Applicant shall submit ONE ORIGINAL and ONE DIGITAL COPY (CD) of the application, all supporting documentation and
attachments. All information must be submitted bound or in a 3-ring binder, with a Section tab for each Section, except the
Engineering Plans.
F. Check the boxes below to indicate that the information is provided and the requirements are met.
G. If attachments are necessary for clarity or due to space limitations, such attachments are considered part of the application
package and must be numbered to correspond to the item referenced.
H. For any project that requires review under the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), an Authorization to Construct cannot be
issued prior to the completion of a State Clearinghouse advertisement period for a FONSI, EIS, etc. unless the project qualifies for
a Determination of Minor Construction Activity.
I. For more information, visit the Division of Water Resources web site at: https://deg.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/water-
resources-permits/wastewater-branch/npdes-wastewater/authorization-to-construct.
J. In addition to this Authorization to Construct, the Applicant should be aware that other permits may be required from other Sections
of the Division of Water Resources (for example: reclaimed water facilities permits; Class A or B biosolids residuals permit).
SECTION 2: APPLICANT INFORMATION AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. APPLICANT
Applicant's name
Town of Fuquay-Varina
Signature authority's name per 15A NCAC 02T .0106(b)
Jay Meyers, PE
Signature authority's title
Public Utilities Director
Complete mailing address
401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, NC 27526
Telephone number
[phone]
Email address
[e-mail]
B. PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's name
Tim Devine, PE
Professional Engineer's title
Senior Associate
North Carolina Professional Engineer's License No.
042005
Firm name
Hazen and Sawyer, PC
Firm License number
C 0381
Complete mailing address
4011 WestChase Blvd, Suite 500, Raleigh, NC 27607
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 1

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
Telephone number [phone]
Email address [e-mail]
C. NPDES PERMIT
NPDES Permit number
NCO066150
Current Permitted flow (MGD) — include permit
0.117 MGD (monthly average)
flow phases if applicable
D. PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Provide a brief description of the project: The purpose of this project is to improve tertiary filtration at the Brighton Forest
WWTP. This Droiect involves the relocation of a cloth media tertiary disk filtration unit from the Town's Terrible Creek WWTP to
the Brighton Forest WWTP. The filter is no longer in service as part of the Terrible Creek WWTP treatment train following that
plant's recent upgrade and expansion. The relocated filter will be put in service as the primary tertiary filtration process, with
the existing fixed media filtration system being left in place for tertiary treatment redundancy. In order to fit the cloth media
filter into the Plant's hydraulic profile a duplex submersible pump station will also be added as part of this project.
N 3: APPLICATION ITEMS REQUIRED FOR SUBMITTAL FOR ALL PROJECTS
A. Cover Letter
® The letter must include a request for the Authorization to Construct; the facility NPDES Number; a brief project description
that indicates whether the project is a new facility, facility modification, treatment process modification, or facility expansion;
the construction timeline; and a list of all items and attachments included in the application package.
® If any of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-31 North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities are not met by the proposed design, the letter must include an itemized list of the requirements that are not met.
B. NPDES Permit
® Submit Part I of the Final NPDES permit for this facility that includes Part A (Effluent Limitations and Monitoring Requirements)
for the monthly average flow limit that corresponds to the work that is requested for this project.
C. Special Order by Consent
❑ If the facility is subject to any Special Orders by Consent (SOC), submit the applicable SOC.
® Not Applicable.
D. Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision
❑ Submit a copy of the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision for this project.
❑ Provide a brief description of any of the mitigating factors or activities included in the approved Environmental Document
that impact any aspect of design of this project, if not specified in the Finding of No Significant Impact or Record of Decision.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 2

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
)Maier Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
E. Engineering Plans
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(1), submit one set of detailed plans that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Per 21 NCAC 56 .1103(a)(6), the name, address and License number of the Licensee's firm shall be included on each sheet of
the engineering drawings.
® Plans must be labeled as follows: FINAL DRAWING — FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY— NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION.
® 15A NCAC 02H .0124 requires multiple (dual at a minimum) components such as pumps, chemical feed systems, aeration
equipment and disinfection equipment. Is this requirement met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide an
explanation:
Plans shall include:
® Plans for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project (check as appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Structural ® Not Applicable
® Electrical ❑ Not Applicable
❑ Instrumentation/Controls ® Not Applicable
❑ Architectural M Not Applicable
❑ Building Mechanical ® Not Applicable
❑ Building Plumbing ® Not Applicable
® Plan and profile views and associated details of all modified treatment units including piping, valves, and equipment (pumps,
blowers, mixers, diffusers, etc.)
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the hydraulic profile of the treatment facility? ® Yes or ❑ No. If yes, provide
a hydraulic profile drawing on one sheet that includes all impacted upstream and downstream units. The profile shall include
the top of wall elevations of each impacted treatment unit and the water surface elevations within each impacted treatment
unit for two flow conditions: (1) the NPDES permitted flow with all trains in service and (2) the peak hourly flow with one
treatment train removed from service.
® Are any modifications proposed that impact the process flow diagram or process flow schematic of the treatment facility?
® Yes or ❑ No. If yes, provide the process flow diagram or process flow schematic showing all modified flow paths including
aeration, recycle/return, wasting, and chemical feed, with the location of all monitoring and control instruments noted.
SEE ATTACHMENT 1
F. ® Engineering Specifications
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(2), submit one set of specifications that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North Carolina
Licensed Professional Engineer.
® Specifications must be labeled as follows: FINAL SPECIFICATIONS — FOR REVIEW PURPOSES ONLY — NOT RELEASED FOR
CONSTRUCTION.
Specifications shall include:
® Specifications for all applicable disciplines needed for bidding and construction of the proposed project (check as
appropriate):
® Civil ❑ Not Applicable
® Process Mechanical ❑ Not Applicable
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 3

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
®
Structural
❑ Not Applicable
®
Electrical
❑ Not Applicable
❑
Instrumentation/Controls
® Not Applicable
❑
Architectural
M Not Applicable
❑
Building Mechanical
® Not Applicable
❑
Building Plumbing
® Not Applicable
® Detailed specifications for all treatment units and processes including piping, valves, equipment (pumps, blowers, mixers,
diffusers, etc.), and instrumentation.
® Means of ensuring quality and integrity of the finished product including leakage testing requirements for structures and
pipelines, and performance testing requirements for equipment.
® Bid Form for publicly bid projects.
G. Construction Sequence Plan
® Construction Sequence Plan such that construction activities will not result in overflows or bypasses to waters of the State.
The Plan must not imply that the Contractor is responsible for operation of treatment facilities. List the location of the
Construction Sequence Plan as in the Engineering Plans or in the Engineering Specifications or in both: Construction Sequence
Plan is located in Paragraph 1.6 of the General Project Requirements Specification
H. Engineering Calculations
® Per 15A NCAC 02T .0504(c)(3), submit one set of engineering calculations that have been signed, sealed and dated by a North
Carolina Licensed Professional Engineer; the seal, signature and date shall be placed on the cover sheet of the calculations.
For new or expanding facilities and for treatment process modifications that are included in Section 4.C, the calculations shall
include at a minimum:
® Demonstration of how peak hour design flow was determined with a justification of the selected peaking factor.
® Influent pollutant loading demonstrating how the design influent characteristics in Section 4.13.2 of this form were
determined.
® Pollutant loading for each treatment unit demonstrating how the design effluent concentrations in Section 4.13.2 of this form
were determined.
® Hydraulic loading for each treatment unit.
® Sizing criteria for each treatment unit and associated equipment (blowers, mixers, pumps, etc.)
® Total dynamic head (TDH) calculations and system curve analysis for each pump specified that is included in Section 4.C.6.
® Buoyancy calculations for all below grade structures.
® Supporting documentation that the specified auxiliary power source is capable of powering all essential treatment units.
I. Permits
® Provide the following information for each permit and/or certification required for this project:
Permit/
If Not Issued Provide
Not
Date
Date
Certification
Status and Expected
Permit/Certification
Applicable
Submitted
Approved
Number
Issuance Date
Dam Safety
X
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 4

J.
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
X
USCOE / Section 404 Permit
X
Water Quality Certification (401)
X
USCOE / Section 10
X
Stormwater Management Plan
X
CAMA
X
NCDOT Encroachment Agreement
X
Railroad Encroachment Agreement
X
Other:
Residuals Management Plan
❑ For all new facilities, expanding facilities, or modifications that result in a change to sludge production and/or sludge
processes, provide a Residuals Management Plan meeting the requirements of 15A NCAC 02T .0504(i) and 15A NCAC 02T
.0508; the Plan must include:
❑ A detailed explanation as to how the generated residuals (including trash, sediment and grit) will be collected, handled,
processed, stored, treated, and disposed.
❑ An evaluation of the treatment facility's residuals storage requirements based upon the maximum anticipated residuals
production rate and ability to remove residuals.
❑ A permit for residuals utilization or a written commitment to the Applicant from a Permittee of a Department approved
residuals disposal/utilization program that has adequate permitted capacity to accept the residuals or has submitted a
residuals/utilization program application.
❑ If oil, grease, grit or screenings removal and collection is a designated unit process, a detailed explanation as to how the
oil/grease will be collected, handled, processed, stored and disposed.
® Not Applicable.
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 5

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Wafer Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL ❑UALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 4: PROJECT INFORMATION
A. WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT FLOW INFORMATION —COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES
1. Provide the following flow information: Not Applicable, not a new or expanding facility
Plant Flows
Existing Plant Design
MGD
Current NPDES Permit Limit
MGD
Current Annual Average
(past 12 months)
MGD
For Past 12 Months:
Start Date:
End Date:
For Past 24 Months:
Start Date:
End Date:
Maximum Month
MGD
MGD
Maximum Day
MGD
MGD
Peak Hour
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 6

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
B. WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY DESIGN INFORMATION —COMPLETE FOR NEW OR EXPANDING FACILITIES AND
FOR TREATMENT PROCESS MODIFICATIONS
1. Have all of the requirements of 15 NCAC 02H. 0100, 15A NCAC 02T, North Carolina General Statute 133-31 North Carolina
General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment
Facilities been met by the proposed design and specifications? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide justification as to why the
requirements are not met, consistent with 15A NCAC 02T .0105(n):
2. Provide the design influent and effluent characteristics that are used as the basis for the project design, and the NPDES
permit limits for the following parameters:
Project Basis of Design
Design Influent
Design Influent
Influent
Concentration
Load
Concentration -
(Must be
(Must be
Current Annual
supported by
supported by
Design Effluent
Average (past
Engineering
Engineering
Concentration and/or
NPDES Permit Limits
12 months) if
Calculations
Calculations
Load
(monthly average)
Parameter
Available
[Section 3.H])
[Section 3.H])
Ammonia Nitrogen
2.0 mg/L Summer
2.0 mg/L Summer
(NH3-N)
mg/L
lb/day
4.0 mg/L Winter
4.0 mg/L Winter
Biochemical
5.0 mg/L Summer
5.0 mg/L Summer
Oxygen Demand
mg/L
mg/L
lb/day
(BOD5)
10.0 mg/L Winter
10.0 mg/L Winter
Fecal Coliform
200 per 100 mL
200 per 100 mL
Nitrate + Nitrite
Nitrogen (NO3-N +
N/A
N/A
NO2-N)
Total Kjeldahl
Nitrogen
N/A
N/A
Total Nitrogen
2,366lb/year
2,366lb/year
2.0 mg/L quarterly
2.0 mg/L quarterly
Total Phosphorus
mg/L
lb/day
N/A
N/A
Total Suspended
mg/L
mg/L
lb/day
30.0 mg/L
30.0 mg/L
Solids (TSS)
3. Based on the "Project Basis of Design" parameters listed above, will the proposed design allow the treatment facility to
meet the NPDES Permit Limits listed above? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, describe how and why the Permit Limits will not be
met:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 7

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
4. Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(i), by-pass and overflow lines are prohibited. Is this condition met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, describe the treatment units bypassed, why this is necessary, and where the bypass discharges:
Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(k), multiple pumps shall be provided wherever pumps are used. Is this condition met by the
design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide an explanation:
6. Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(1), power reliability shall be provided consisting of automatically activated standby power supply
onsite capable of powering all essential treatment units under design conditions, or dual power supply shall be provided
per 15A NCAC 02H. 0124(2)(a). Is this condition met by the design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, provide (as an attachment
to this Application) written approval from the Director that the facility:
➢ Has a private water supply that automatically shuts off during power failures and does not contain elevated water
storage tanks, and
➢ Has sufficient storage capacity that no potential for overflow exists, and
➢ Can tolerate septic wastewater due to prolonged detention.
Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(o), a minimum of 30 days of residual storage shall be provided. Is this condition met by the
design? ® Yes or ❑ No. If no, explain the alternative design criteria proposed for this project in accordance 15A NCAC
8. Per 15A NCAC 02T .0505(g , the public shall be prohibited from access to the wastewater treatment facilities. Explain how
the design complies with this requirement: The wastewater treatment plant is located within a fenced area with controlled
access.
9. Is the treatment facility located within the 100-year flood plain? ® Yes or ❑ No. If yes, describe how the facility is
protected from the 100-year flood: The top of slab of structures are greater than 2 feet above base flood elevation.
C. WASTEWATER TREATMENT UNIT AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INFORMATION —COMPLETE FOR NEW OR
EXPANDING FACILITIES AND FOR MODIFIED TREATMENT UNITS
1. PRELIMINARY AND PRIMARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical removal operations and flow equalization):
Calculations
No. of
Plan Sheet
SReferencepecification
Treatment Unit
Units
Type
Size per Unit
f
Reerence
Provided?
(Yes or No)
Manual Bar Screen
MGD at peak hourly flow
Mechanical Bar
MGD at peak hourly flow
Screen
Grit Removal
MGD at peak hourly flow
Flow Equalization
-
gallons
ft diameter; ft side
Primary Clarifier
Circular
water depth
square feet; ft side
Primary Clarifier
Rectangular
water depth
Other
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 8

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
SECONDARY TREATMENT (BIOLOGICAL REACTORS AND CLARIFIERS) (i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove
organics and nutrients)
No. of
Plan Sheet
Specification
Calculations
Treatment Unit
Units
Type
Size per Unit
Reference
Reference
Provided?
(Yes or No)
Aerobic Zones/
Tanks
gallons
Anoxic Zones/
Tanks
gallons
Anaerobic
gallons
Zones/Tanks
Sequencing Batch
--
gallons
Reactor (SBR)
Membrane
-
gallons
Bioreactor (MBR)
Secondary Clarifier
Circular
ft diameter; ft
side water depth
Secondary Clarifier
Rectangular
square feet; ft
side water depth
Other
3. TERTIARY TREATMENT
No. of
Plan Sheet
Specification
Calculations
Treatment Unit
Units
Type
Size per Unit
Reference
Reference
Provided?
(Yes or No)
Tertiary Clarifier
Circular
ft diameter; ft
side water depth
square feet; ft
Tertiary Clarifier
Rectangular
side water depth
8 Disk
Tertiary Filter
1
Disc Filter
215.2 square feet
M101
Filtration
Yes
System
Tertiary Membrane
square feet
Filtration
Post -Treatment
-
gallons
Flow Equalization
Post -Aeration
gallons
Other
4. DISINFECTION
No. of
Plan Sheet
Specification
Calculations
Treatment Unit
Units
Type
Size per Unit
Reference
Reference
Provided?
(Yes or No)
gal/day per bank at
Ultraviolet Light
(Parallel; in
peak hourly flow;
series)
number of banks;
number of lamps/bank
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 9

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
Chlorination
(Gas;
gallons of contact
tablet; liquid)
tank/unit
Dechlorination
(Gas;
gallons of contact
tablet; liquid)
tank/unit
S. RESIDUALS TREATMENT
No. of
Plan Sheet
Specification
Calculations
Treatment Unit
Units
Type
Size per Unit
Reference
Reference
Provided?
(Yes or No)
Gravity Thickening
square feet; ft side
Tank
water depth
Mechanical
Thickening/
dry lb/hour
Dewatering
Aerobic Digestion
gallons
Anaerobic
gallons
Digestion
Composting
dry lb/hour
Drying
dry lb/hour
Other
6. PUMP SYSTEMS (include influent, intermediate, effluent, major recycles, waste sludge, thickened waste sludge and plant
drain pumps)
Location
No. of
Pumps
Purpose
Type
Capacity of
each pump
plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
GPM
I TDH
Intermediate Pump
Station
2
Secondary Effluent
Pumping
Submersible Non-
Clog
200
23
M102
14
Submersible
Pump
7. MIXERS
Location
No. of
Mixers
Purpose
Type
Power of
each MP ixer
plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 10

Water Resources
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
8. BLOWERS
State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
Location
No. of
Blowers
purpose
Type
Capacity of
each Blower
(Clo
plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
9. ODOR CONTROL
Location
No. of
Units
Purpose
Type
Plan Sheet
Reference
Specification
Reference
D. SETBACKS —COMPLETE FOR NEW WASTEWATER TREATMENT STRUCTURES
The minimum distance for each setback parameter to the wastewater treatment/storage units per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(b
are as follows:
Minimum Distance
Is Minimum Distance
Required from Nearest
Requirement met by the
Setback Parameter
Treatment/Storage
Design? If "No", identify
Unit
Setback Waivers in Item D.2
Below
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate
100 ft
®Yes
❑ No
ownership or not to be maintained as part of the project site
Any private or public water supply source
100 ft
® Yes
❑ No
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial
50 ft
® Yes
❑ No
waterbodies, and wetlands)
Any well with exception of monitoring wells
100 ft
® Yes
❑ No
Any property line
50 ft
® Yes
❑ No
Have any setback waivers been obtained per 15A NCAC 02T .0506(d)? ❑ Yes or ® No. If yes, have these waivers been
written, notarized and signed by all parties involved and recorded with the County Register of Deeds? ❑ Yes or ❑ No. If
no, provide an explanation:
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 11

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources w
LNVIRONMEWAL ounu I APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 5: APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER
Professional Engineer's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T .0105:
I, Tim Devine, attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Professional Engineer)
for the Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
(Facility and Project Name)
was prepared under my direct supervisory control and to the best of my knowledge is accurate, complete and consistent
with the information supplied in the engineering plans, specifications, calculations, and all other supporting
documentation for this project. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been
prepared in accordance with all applicable regulations and statutes, 15 NCAC 02H. 0100. 15A NCAC 021, North Carolina
General Statute 133-3 North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, and Division of Water Resources Minimum Design
Criteria for NPDES Wastewater Treatment Facilitiesand this Authorization to Construct Permit Application, except as
provided for and explained in Section 4.13.1 of this Application. I understand that the Division of Water Resources'
issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based solely upon this Certification and that the Division may
waive the technical review of the plans, specifications, calculations and other supporting documentation provided in this
�plication package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit by the Division.
Although certain portions of this submittal package may have been prepared, signed and sealed by other professionals
licensed in North Carolina, inclusion of these materials under my signature and seal signifies that I have reviewed the
materials and have determined that the materials are consistent with the project design.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.6B, any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000, as well as civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation.
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal with written signature placed over or adjacent to the seal and dated:
+�H CX40 ��•�
�P
� � w
EAI-
4200
��. �?�pFN�lNE�S •,tip.•'
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 12

State of North Carolina
Department of Environmental Quality
Division of Water Resources
Water Resources
ENVfR0Nr1rENTgL QUALITY APPLICATION FOR AUTHORIZATION TO CONSTRUCT PERMIT (FORM ATC-12-14)
SECTION 6: APPLICATION CERTIFICATION BY APPLICANT
Applicant's Certification per 15A NCAC 02T.0106 b :
1, lay Meyers, attest that this application package for an Authorization to Construct
(Typed Name of Signature Authority and Title)
for the Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary_Filter Relocation
(Facility and Project Name)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I also understand that if all
required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all required supporting information and
attachments are not included, this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I further certify that in
accordance with 15A NCAC 02T .0120(b), the Applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of environmental crimes,
has not abandoned a wastewater facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all
appeals have been abandoned or exhausted, are compliant with any active compliance schedule, and does not have any
overdue annual fees.
I understand that the Division of Water Resources' issuance of the Authorization to Construct Permit may be based
solely upon acceptance of the Licensed Professional Engineer's Certification contained in Section 5, and that the Division
may waive the technical review of the plans, specifications, calculations and other supporting documentation provided
in this application package. I further understand that the application package may be subject to a future audit.
I understand that in accordance with General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.613 any person who knowingly makes
any false statement, representation, or certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor,
which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000, afsas civil penalties up to $25,000 per violation.
Signat
Date: v5-
THE COMPLETED APPLICATION AND SUPPORTING INFORMATION SHALL BE SUBMITTED TO:
NORTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES/NPDES
By U.S. Postal Service BV Courier/Special Delivery:
1617 MAIL SERVICE CENTER S12 N. SALISBURY STREET, 9TH FLOOR
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27699-1617 RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27604
TELEPHONE NUMBER: [phone]
Application for Authorization to Construct Permit (FORM ATC-12-14) Page 13

Brighton Forest WWTP Process Flow Diagram
Attachment 1: Filter Relocation ATC
Application (NPDES: N00066150)
Op 11\
Influent EQ Basin
Pump (x2 Trains)
Station
Aeration Basin
(x2 Trains)
Fixed Media
Filter (x2)
UV (x2)
Intermediate Disk Filter
Pump Station
L------------------
New Treatment Processes
2° Clarifiers
(x2 Trains)
Middle Creek
00%*.0 r./*0%.

Tab 2: Design Calculations

Hazen
� J0uA2r-vnPNn
Town of Fuquay-Varina, NC
Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant
Tertiary Filter Relocation Project
ATC Engineering Calculations
Hazen and Sawyer • 4011 WestChase Boulevard, Suite 500 • Raleigh, NC 27607. 919.833.7152

Hazen
Section 3 Part G: Engineering Calculations
3.1 Peak Hour Design Flow
The Brighton Forest WWTP is separated into two treatment trains of equal flow per train. The relocated
tertiary disk filter is designed to handle flows from all four treatment trains and replace the current plant
filters. The current plant filters will remain in place to receive any overflow volume from the disk filter.
At the current NPDES discharge limit of 0.117 MGD, the relocated filter would receive all of the plant
flow. This flow was used as the design average daily flow. The plant was designed based on a maximum
hourly flow peaking factor of 2.5. Using the design peaking factor of 2.5, the new filter has a design peak
hourly flow rate of 0.288 MGD.
Brighton Forest WWTP Disk Filter Design Flows
Average Daily Flow 0.117 MGD
Peaking Factor 2.5
Design Peak Hour Flow 0.288 MGD
3.2 Design Influent and Effluent TSS Concentrations
Brighton Forest WWTP Disk Filter Design TSS
Concentrations
Design Peak Influent TSS 30 mg/L
Design Average Influent TSS 10 mg/L
Design Average Effluent TSS 30 mg/L
3.3 Filter Pollutant Loading
Brighton Forest WWTP Disk Filter Design Solids Loading
Rates
Design Average Day Solids Loading Rate' 0.045 Ib/day/ft2
Design Maximum Day Solids Loading Rate2 0.335 Ib/day/ft2
' Based on design average TSS concentration and design
average flow.
2 Based on peak design TSS concentration and peak design
flow.
Page 2 of 4
ATC Engineering Calculations

Hazen
3.4 Filter Hydraulic Loading
Brighton Forest WWTP Disk Filter Design Hydraulic Loading
Rates
Average Day Hydraulic Loading Rate 0.378 gpm/ft2
Peak Day Hydraulic Loading Rate 0.929 gpm/ft2
Media Peak Hydraulic Loading Rate 6.0 gpm/ft2
3.5 Filter Sizing Criteria
Brighton Forest WWTP Disk Filter Sizing Criteria E
Number of Disks
4
Submerged Area per Disk
53.8 ft2
Total Submerged Area
215.2 ft2
Filter Media Pore Size
10 Pm
3.6 Total dynamic head (TDH) Calculations
Two equally sized submersible, non -clog pumps will be installed to provide influent to the relocated
tertiary disk filter. The system is designed for 100% redundancy for flows required for plant operation.
With one of the two pumps in service, the capacity is sufficient to pump peak plant capacity flows to the
new tertiary filter.
W MWBrighton Forest WWTP Intermediate Pump Station Summary
Manufacturers / Vendors Considered
ABS / Flygt / Pentair
No. of Installed Pumps
2
Pump Capacity
200 gpm
Maximum Operating Pressure
23 ft TDH
Operating Speed
1,800 rpm
Motor Type
460 VAC / 3PH
Motor Size
3 hp
Determination of the system demand, hydraulic calculations, and curves for the pumps are shown on the
following pages. A Hazen -Williams C factor of 100 (secondary effluent water, ductile iron pipe) was used
for long term conditions.
Page 3 of 4
ATC Engineering Calculations

Hazen
3.7 Buoyancy Calculations for Below Grade Structures
See attached page for buoyancy calculations of the Below Grade Structures.
3.8 Supporting Documentation that the Specified Auxiliary Power Source is
Capable of Powering All Essential Treatment Units
The Brighton Forest facility is served by a single 225 ampere 480 volt electrical service from a Duke
Energy 75kVA padmount transformer. In the event of a power outage, standby power is supplied to the
facility by an existing onsite 125kW diesel generator. The relocated disc -filter will add an additional 6
hp load which is approximately 4.8kW. In addition, a tertiary pump station is being installed to support
the disc -filter. The tertiary pump station consists of two 3 hp submersible pumps, however, only one
pump can operate at a time. The 3 hp pump is approximately 2.24 kW. These additions will add
approximately 7.04kW to the facility. A review of several months of utility bills shows that the
maximum electrical load on the electrical service was 52kW which occurred in January of 2018. It is
anticipated that after the additions, the facility maximum demand load will be approximately 59.07kW.
This load is still less than one-half of the existing generator capacity.
3.9 Hydraulic Profile Calculations
See attached spreadsheet detailing the calculations of the updates to the Brighton Forest WWTP hydraulic
profile with the filter improvement.
Page 4 of 4
ATC Engineering Calculations

Town of Fuquay-Varina
Brighton Forest WWTP
Tertiary Filter Relocation
PUMP DATA
Full Speed Pump Curve:
Mfr 1: Flygt
Model No: NP3085 MT 462
Full Speed 1700 RPM
Flow Head NPSHr
Efficiency
(gpm) (ft) (ft)
0 36.0 16.5
0%
50 32.5 15.8
18%
100 30.0 15.1
32%
150 27.5 14.5
44%
200 25.5 14.0
52%
250 23.5 13.6
58%
300 21.5 13.2
62%
350 19.3 12.8
63%
400 17.0 12.6
62%
450 14.5 12.3
60%
Miscellaneous Pump Information
No Stages/Bowls 1
Single or Double Suction 1
Enter 1 or 2
Min Submergence (in) = 12
per Mfr
Bell Diameter (in) = 3
per Mfr
BEP of Selected Pump Curve
Define BEP, FOR, and AOR for Reduced Speed Pump Curves
Flow = 354
Head = 19.0
Flow Head
BEP at Max Impeller Diameter
(gpm) (ft)
Flow = 354
BEP 354 19.0
Head = 19.0
NPSHr = 12.8
Define Preferred Operating Region
Specific Speed = 3515
Low End (POR1)
High End (POR2)
POR1 (% of BEC) = 70%
per HI 9.6.3
Flow Head
Flow Head
POR2 (% of BEC) = 120%
per HI 9.6.3
(gpm) (ft)
(gpm) (ft)
POR1 (gpm) = 248
FOR 248 23.6
425 15.8
POR2 (gpm)= 425
Define Allowable Operating Region
Low End of AOR = 50
per Mfr (or MCSF)
Low End (AOR1)
High End (AOR2)
High End of AOR = 450
per Mfr
Flow Head
Flow Head
Suction Specific Speed = 4727
(gpm) (ft)
(gpm) (ft)
Minimum Continuous Stable Flow
AOR 50 32.5
445 14.8
MCSF (% of BEC) = 39%
per HI 9.6.3
MCSF(gpm)= 138

Town of Fuquay-Varina
Brighton Forest WWTP
Tertiary Filter Relocation
SYSTEM CURVE SUMMARY
Maximum Loss System Curve
Total Flow
Flow per Pump TDH
(gpm)m ft
NPSHa
ft
Typical Loss System Curve
Total Flow
Flow per Pump
m m
TDH
ft
NPSHa
ft
Minimum Loss System Curve
Total Flow
Flow per Pump TDH
m m ft
NPSHa
ft
0
0
19.7
34.0
0
0
19.7
34.0
0
0
19.7
34.0
50
50
19.8
34.0
50
50
19.8
34.0
50
50
19.8
34.0
100
100
20.3
34.0
100
100
20.1
34.0
100
100
20.1
34.0
150
150
21.0
34.0
150
150
20.6
34.0
150
150
20.6
34.0
200
200
21.9
34.0
200
200
21.2
34.0
200
200
21.2
34.0
250
250
23.1
34.0
250
250
22.0
34.0
250
250
22.0
34.0
300
300
24.5
34.0
300
300
23.0
34.0
300
300
23.0
34.0
350
350
26.2
34.0
350
350
24.1
34.0
350
350
24.1
34.0
400
400
28.1
34.0
400
400
25.4
34.0
400
400
25.4
34.0
450
450
30.2
34.0
450
450
26.8
34.0
450
450
26.8
34.0
OPERATING CURVES
Pump
Operating Conditions
40.0
35.0
30.0
x
0
E 25.0
a
20.0
15.0
10.0
0
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Pump Flow (gpm)
Summary of Operating
Points
Pump
Pump
Pump
Total
System
Pump/Sys
Pump
Speed
System
Flow
Head
Flow
TDH
Pump
Operating
Head Diff
Speed
(rpm)
Curve
(gpm)
(ft)
(gpm)
(ft)
Effic
HP/Pump
Solved?
(ft) Description
Full Spd
1700
Max Loss
256
23.3
256
23.3
58.5%
3
Yes
0.00 Design
Full Spd
1700
Typ loss
275
22.5
275
22.5
60.0%
3
Yes
0.00
Full Spd
1700
Min Loss
275
22.5
275
22.5
60.0%
3
Yes
0.00 Runout

HAZEN AND SAWYER, P.c.
* ENGINEERS
' +` r, r,., .,
d-- Tr o . , , F �'ttr
Date..!'4rE .!...... .L�...
r P b l
By..:....a....:,......Chkd....>�..
of
.
r
it.i .; r .- }\\4.�
PrI 4-
-G .e.-
Job ..............................................
J �
—
C.{ 7.. f ti r { : c 1� a , n g. `� kr e •i b C,i a •. i S Gr, r.[
Vtccf- 4 I .- Ll e rt.. c A'., r 01. ( i "c -� I, 3
W cA- W le.11
Ths,lnnr,� e� L1�t1,. cl "
(I (lf J h cl u., c. c r 7T`�5 . -bU = ' } L) •- - Z �, �+ • '2- r'k
Eva,, a +tir. cu-c r- +c .
&"'" - (11/')j ( - ,' 7- ( 0, 0. is Q >L 4 1 - LI . 'i k
0,11 f�IL+�(I,SFr`— V+' Il,• F1 �a�IS� t�'� -L-4.'-I3
Toe - -4,5ki
W -r - 3 � . 0 3 k-
(�.��r.�.a�.1�r 1G �.'L �•a
CIO

Brighton Forest WWTP Hyd Profiile_CN1
4/18/2019 7:04 PM
HAZENPRO - Hydraulic Profile Template
Fuquay-Varina
Brighton Forest WWTP
Hydraulic Profile
Tertirary Filter Relocation
Average
Flow Peak Flow Min Flow
Plant Influent Flow mgd 0.117 0.288 0.02
Downstream Controlling WSEL 266 266 266
Legend:
Start Major Treatment Unit
Start/End Alternative Flow Path
Start/End Flow Condition
Freeboard Calculation
User Input Data
User Input Data that Requries Verification
Included for Reference Only
0.0 Final Effluent Piping �a
-
0.1 Effluent Piping from Effluent Manhole 1 to Effluent Sewer
Outfall
Module PIPI Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter = 8 in
Q (mgd) =
0.02
Length = 308.9 ft
V (fps) =
0.52
1.28
0.10
Hazen & Will. C = 100
Hv (ft) =
0.00
0.03
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Entr / Exit 1.5
Hf (ft) =
0.09
0.47
0.00
Him (ft) =
0.01
0.04
0.00
HL (ft) =
0.10
0.51
0.00
Sum K= 1.5
EGL = HGL
266.10
266.51
266.00
0.2 Effluent Piping from UV to Effluent Manhole 1
Module PIPI Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter= 8in
Q(mgd)=i12
�2
Length = 33 ft
V (fps) =
0.52
1.28
0.10
Hazen & Will. C = 100
Hv (ft) =
0.00
0.03
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Entr / Exit 1.5
Hf (ft) =
0.01
0.05
0.00
45 Bend 0.2
Him If) =
0.01
0.04
0.00
HL (ft) =
0.02
0.09
0.00
Sum K= 1.7
EGL = HGL
266.11
266.60
266.01
Freeboard on Flow Meter Weir
5.73
5.24
5.83
1.0 UV Disinfection and Flow Measurement
Number of UV Channels Available
2
2
2
Number of UV Channels
in Service
2
2
2
Flow per UV Channel
0.1
0.1
0.0
1.1 Flow Meter Weir
Module WV V-Notch Weir
Weir El= ft
# Notches =
Depth of Notch = Min
EGL_
Q (mgd) =
Q/Notch (mgd) =
0.117
0.288
0.0234
Hw (ft) =
0.35
0.50
0.18
Weir Submergence (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
Weir Submerged?
Ni
No
No
Notch Overtopped?
No
No
No
272.19
272.34
272.02
1.2 Flow Meter Channel
Module OCR Short Rectangular Open Channel
Invert Ell = 270.82
Q (mgd) =
0.12
0.29
0.02
Width = 2.00 ft
Backwater (ft) =
1.37
1.52
1.20
Length = 1.25 ft
Yc (ft) -
0.06
0.12
0.02
Manning n = 0.015
Yn (ft) =
1.17
1.50
1.54
Slope = 0000 ft/ft
Iterate 0 »
N/A
N/A
N/A
K-ent = 0.50
Area (sf) =
2.35
2.99
3.08
Downstream Conditions
Actual Depth (ft) =
1.37
1.52
1.20
Area (sf) =
2.74
3.04
2.41
V (fps) =
0.07
0.15
0.02
Sf (ft/ft) =
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Upstream Conditions
Upstrm Depth (ft) =
1.37
1.52
1.20
Iterate 0 »>1
0.000
1 0.000
0.000
Check ­1
ok
I ok
ok
Area (sf) =
2.74
3.04
2.41
V (fps) =
0.07
0.15
0.02
Sf (ft/ft)=
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Him (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
EGL_
272.19
272.34
272.02
1 of 4

Brighton Forest WWTP Hyd Profile_CN1
4/18/2019 7:04 PM
1.3 Aluminum Baffle
Module BWWCR Baffle Wall with Weirs and Submerged Circular and Rectangular Ports
Total Flow through Baffle Wall [Ill (mgd) =
0.12W
0.29
0.02
Weirs:
I
Weir Elev =M't
Weir Flow (mgd) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
Weir Length =
Lang
Iterate 0 »>
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIVl0!
Check
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
#DIV/0!
Hw (ft) _
#DIV/01
#DIV/0!
#DIV/01
Weir Submergence (ft) =
0.000
0.000
0.000
Port: Type 1 (Circular)
No. of Ports =
Total Port Flow (mgd) _
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
Diameter= in
Flow/port (mgd) =
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
Length = in
V (fps) _
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
Total Port Area = 0.00 sf
HL (ft) _
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
#DIV/01
UP = 0.027
Cd = 0.62
Port: Type 2 RectanV=ft
No. of PoTotal
Port Flow (mgd) =
0.12
0.29
0.02
Heighlft
Flow/port (mgd) =
0.12
0.29
0.02
Widt
V (fps) =
0.27
0.67
0.05
Length of Pin
HL (ft) =
0.003
0.017
0.000
No. Suppressed Co(0-3)
Total Port Area = 0.67 sf
UP (See B&K) = 0.054
Cd = 0.64
EGL_
1.4 UV Effluent Channel
Module OCR Short Rectangular Open Channel
272.19 272.36 272.02
Invert El =
Q (mgd) _ �2
0.29
0.02
Width = 2.00 ft
Backwater (ft) =
1.37
1.54
1.20
Length = 3.63 ft
Yc (ft) =
0.06
0.12
0.02
Manning n = 0.015
Yn (ft) =
1.17
1.50
1.54
Slope = 0.0000 ft/ft
Iterate 0 »>
N/A
N/A
N/A
K-ent = 0.50
Area (sf) =
2.35
2.99
3.08
Downstream Conditions
Actual Depth (ft) =
1.37
1.54
1.20
Area (sf) =
2.75
3.08
2.41
V (fps) =
0.07
0.14
0.02
Sf (fuft) =
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Upstream Conditions
Upstrm Depth (ft)
1.37
1.54
1.20
Iterate 0 >=
0.000
0.000
0.000
Check »>
ok
ok
ok
Area (sf) =
2.75
3.08
2.41
V (fps) =
0.07
0.14
0.02
Sf (Wft)=
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Him (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
EGL = HGL
272.19
272.36
272.02
Freeboard
on UV Ef0uent Weir
-0.11
-0.28
0.06
1.5 UV Effluent Serpentine Weirs
Module WS Sharp Crested Weir
Weir Elev = 272.08 ft
Length = 2.1 ft
Cw = 3.3
No. of End Contractions
Q (mgd) _
Nominal H. (ft) =
0.06
0.10
0.02
Effective Weir Length =
2.08
2.07
2.09
H. (ft) =
0.12
0.28
0.02
Weir Submergence (Hz)=
0.11
0.28
0.00
<If Subm> H, (ft) =
0.12
0.28
1.00
,If Subm> Iterate 0 »>
0.000
0.200
0.000
Check -1
ok
ok
Not Subm
1.6 UV Manufacturer Head Loss
Module MFR Manufacturer Head Loss Info
Reference Q = mgd
Reference HL = It
EGL_
1.7 Influent Gate for UV
Module FPR Free Surface Rectangular Port
Invert El = 67 ft
Width= ft
Length = in
No. Suppressed Contr = (0 - 3)
272.20 272.36 272.10
Q(mgd)=� 0.14 0.01
HL (ft) = 0.13 0.13 0.13
272.32 272.49 272.22
Q (mgd) _
Backwater (ft) =
0.65
0.82
0.55
Yc (ft) =
0.05
0.10
0.02
Act. Depth (ft) =
0.65
0.82
0.55
LIP =
0.03
0.03
0.03
Cd =
0.63
0.63
0.63
V (fps) =
0.11
0.22
0.03
HL (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
EGL■
1.8 UV Influent Channel
Module OCR Short Rectangular Open Channel
272.32 272.49 272.22
Invert El = Q (mgd) _ _.12 -
Width = ft Backwater (ft) = 1.99 2.16 1.89
2 of

Brighton Forest WWTP Hyd Profile_CN1
4/18/2019 7:04 PM
Length =.ft
Yc (ft) =
0.06
0.12
0.02
Manning n =
Yn (ft) =
1.17
1.50
1.54
Slope = ft/ft
Iterate 0 »>
N/A
NIA
I N/A
K-ent =
Area (sf) =
2.35
2.99
3.08
Downstream Conditions
Actual Depth (ft) =
1.99
2.16
1.89
Area (sf) =
3.99
4.32
3.79
V (fps) =
0.05
0.10
0.01
Sf (ft/ft) =
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Upstream Conditions
Upstrm Depth (ft) =
1.99
2.16
1.89
Iterate 0 »>
0.000
0.000
0.000
Check ­1
ok
I ok
ok
Area (sf) =
3.99
4.32
3.79
V (fps) =
0.05
0.10
0.01
Sf (fttft)=
0.0000
0.0000
0.0000
Him (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
EGL_
272.32
272.49
272.22
Number of Filters Available
1
1
1
Number of Filters in Service
1
1
1
Flow per Filter
0.12
0.29
0.02
2.1 12" Piping From Filter Effluent to UV
Module PIPI Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter= bin
Q(mgd)=
Length = 45 ft
V (fps) =
0.92
2.27
0.18
Hazen & Will. C = 100
Hv (ft) =
0.01
0.08
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Entr / Exit 1.5
Hf (ft) =
0.05
0.28
0.00
90 Bend (5) 1.5
Him (ft) =
0.07
0.42
0.00
Reducer 0.1
HL (ft) =
0.12
0.70
0.01
Buterfly Valve 0.6
Branch of Tee 1.5
Run of Tee 0.1
Sum K = 5.3
EGL = HGL
272.45
273.19
272.23
2.2 Filter Effluent Channel
Module OCR Short Rectangular Open Channel
Invert El =r 278.23
Q(mgd)=M 0.12
0.29
0.02
Width = 5.08 ft
Backwater (ft) _
-5.79
-5.04
-6.00
Length = 1.40 ft
Yc (ft) =
0.03
0.06
0.01
Manning n = 0.015
Yn (ft) =
1.17
1.50
1.54
Slope =�
0.6000 ftlft
Iterate 0 »
N/A
N/A
N/A
K-ent =
0.50
Area (sf) =
5.97
7.60
7.83
Downstream Conditions
Actual Depth (ft) =
0.03
0.06
0.01
Area (sf) =
0.17
0.32
0.06
V (fps) =
1.04
1.41
0.61
Sf (ft/ft) =
0.0102
0.0085
0.0143
Upstream Conditions
Upstrm Depth (ft) =
0.05
0.08
0.03
Iterate 0 »>1
0.000
1 0.000
0.000
Check ­1
ok
I ok
ok
Area (sf) =
0.27
0.43
0.14
V (fps) =
0.68
1.04
0.26
Sf (ft/ft)=
0.0024
0.0031
0.0009
Hm (ft) =
0.00
0.01
0.00
EGL = HGL
278.29
278.34
278.26
Freeboard
on Filter Effluent Weir
4.48
4.43
4.51
2.3 Filter Effluent Weir
Module WS Sharp Crested Weir
Weir Elev = ft
Length = ft
Cw =
No. of End Contractions
EGL=HGL
Q (mgd) _
Nominal Hw (ft) =
0.05
0.09
0.02
Effective Weir Length =
5.07
5.06
5.08
Hw (ft) =
0.05
0.09
0.02
Weir Submergence (Hz)=
0.00
0.00
0.00
<If Subm> H, (ft) =
1.00
2.14
1.31
<If Subm> Iterate 0 »>
0.000
0.000
0.000
Check ­1
Not Subm
I Not Subm
Not Subm
282.82
282.86
282.79
L Alternate Flow Path A - Normal flow throu
2.4a Filter Manufacturer Head Loss
Module MFR Manufacturer Head Loss Info
Reference Q =� mgd
Q (mgd) _ _2
0.29
0.02
Reference HL = ft
HL (ft) = 0.00
0.00
0.00
EGL = HGL
282.82
282.86
282.79
=11111111kii Freeboard on
Influent Weir 1.37
1.33
1.40
2.5a Filter Influent Weir
Module WS Sharp Crested Weir
Weir Elev =-ft
Q (mgd) = 0.12 0.29 0.02
3 of

Brighton Forest WWTP Hyd Profile_CN1
4/18/2019 7:04 PM
Length - ft Nominal H. (ft) =
0.07
0.13
0.02
Cw = Effective Weir Length =
2.91
2.89
2.92
No. of End Contractions Hw (ft) =
0.07
0.13
0.02
Weir Submergence (H2)=
0.00
0.00
0.00
<If Subm> H' (ft) =
1.00
2.14
1.31
,If Subm> Iterate 0 »>
0.000
0.000
0.000
Check »>
Not Sub m
Not Subm
Not Subm
EGL=HGL
284.26
284.32
284.21
2.6a Lift Pumps to Filters
Amount of Head Needed (ft) =
10.76
10.82
10.71
Wetwell Operating WSEL=
273.50
273.50
273.50
Summarize Alternate Flow Paths (Lift Pumps for Filters)
Amount of Head Needed (ft) = Path Through Filters
10.76
10.82
10.71
Amount of Head Needed (ft) = Filter Bypass
11.45
11.51
11.40
Amount of Head Needed (ft) =
11.45
11.51
11.40
End Alternate Flow Path
3.0 Secondary
Number of SC Available
4
4
4
Number of SC in Service
4
4
4
Flow per SC
0.03
0.07
0.01
3.1 12" Piping From Secondary Clarifier Effluent Header to Pump Station
Module PIPE Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter= bin Q(mgd)=
Length = 10 ft V (fps) =
0.92
2.27
0.18
Hazen & Will. C = 100 Hv (ft) =
0.01
0.08
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Entr / Exit 1.5 Hf (ft) =
0.01
0.06
0.00
Run of Tee 0.1 Hm (ft) =
0.02
0.13
0.00
HL (ft) =
0.03
0.19
0.00
Sum K= 1.6
EGL_
273.53
273.69
273.50
3.2 8" Piping From Clarifier 3A to Header
Module P/Pl Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter=
in Q(mgd)=�g
�Z
Length =
ft V (fps) =
0.69
1.70
0.14
Hazen & Will. C =
Hv (ft) =
0.01
0.05
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Hf (ft) =
0.01
0.03
0.00
Hm (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
Run of Tee 0.1 HL (ft) =
0.01
0.03
0.00
Sum K = 0.1
EGL_
273.54
273.72
273.50
3.3 8" Piping From Clarifier 2A to Clarifier 3A
Module P/Pl Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter = in Q(mgd)=�
Length = ftV (fps) =
0.46
1.14
0.09
Hazen & Will. C = Hv ift) =
0.00
0.02
0.00
Minor Loss K's : Hf (ft) =
0.00
0.01
0.00
Hm (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
Run of Tee 0.1 HL (ft) =
0.00
0.02
0.00
Sum K = 0.1
EGL_
273.54
273.74
273.50
3.4 8" Piping From Clarifier 1A to Clarifier 2A
Module P/Pl Piping by Hazen -Williams Equation
Diameter=
in Q(mgd)=-
0.07
0.01
Length =
ft V (fps) =
0.23
0.57
0.05
Hazen & Will. C =
Hv ift) =
0.00
0.01
0.00
Minor Loss K's
Hf (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
ends 0.2 Hm (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
of Tee 0.1 HL (ft) =
0.00
0.01
0.00
Sum K = 0.8
EGL = HGL
273.54
273.75
273.50
_
Freeboard on Secondary Weir
1.04
0.83
1.08
3.5 Secondary Clarifier 1A Weir
Module WV V-Notch Weir
Weir El = ft Q (mgd) _
# Notches = Q/Notch (mgd) = 0.00073125
0.0018
0.00014625
Depth of Notch = in Hw (ft) =
0.05
0.07
0.02
Weir Submergence (ft) =
0.00
0.00
0.00
Weir Submerged?
No
No
No
Notch Overtopped?
No
No
No
EGL_
274.63
274.65
274.60
4 of

Tab 3: Brighton Forest WWTP NPDES
Permit Part I

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 03021
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY
DIVISION OF WATER RESOURCES
PERMIT
TO DISCHARGE WASTEWATER UNDER THE
NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM
In compliance with the provision of North Carolina General Statute 143-215.1, other
lawful standards and regulations promulgated and adopted by the North Carolina
Environmental Management Commission, and the Federal Water Pollution Control
Act, as amended, the
Town of Fuquay-Varina
is hereby authorized to discharge wastewater from a facility located at the
Brighton Forest Subdivision WWTP
4809 Goldleaf Court
Fuquay-Varina
Wake County
to receiving waters designated as Middle Creek in the Neuse River Basin in accordance
with effluent limitations, monitoring requirements, and other conditions set forth in Parts
I, 11, III, and IV hereof.
This permit shall become effective November 01, 2018.
This permit and authorization to discharge shall expire at midnight on April 30,
2023.
Signed this day October 05, 2018.
C-
�Cz�,
a Culpepper, Interim Dire
Division of Water Resources
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Page I of 9

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 03021
SUPPLEMENT TO PERMIT COVER SHEET
All previous NPDES Permits issued to this facility, whether for operation or discharge are hereby
revoked, and as of this issuance, any previously issued permit bearing this number is no longer
effective. Therefore, the exclusive authority to operate and discharge from this facility arises under the
permit conditions, requirements, terms, and provisions included herein.
The Town of Fuquay-Varina is hereby authorized to:
1. Continue to operate a 0.117 MGD wastewater treatment facility that includes the
following components:
➢ Influent pump station
➢ Two train carbon steel package treatment plant with
➢ Equalization basin
➢ Sludge holding basin
➢ Aeration basin
➢ Hopper bottom clarifiers
➢ Tertiary filters
➢ Ultraviolet disinfection system
This facility is located at the Brighton Forest Subdivision WWTP, 4809 Goldleaf
Court, Fuquay-Varina, Wake County.
2. Discharge from said treatment works at the location specified on the attached map
into Middle Creek, currently classified C; NSW waters in hydrologic unit
030202010901 of the Neuse River Basin.
Page 2 of 9

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC OSG. 03021
Part I
A. (1) EFFLUENT LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
[15A NCAC 02B .0400 et seq., 15A NCAC 02B .0500 et seq.]
During the period beginning on the effective day of this permit and lasting until expiration,
the Permittee is authorized to discharge treated wastewater from outfall 001. Such
discharges shall be limited and monitored' by the Permittee as specified below:
PARAMETER
[:eDMRCode]',
LIMITS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
Monthly.
Avers e .
'Weekly
° .;A�era e :
Daily
'Maximum
Measurement
Frequency
Sample
Type
Sample
Locations
Flow [600501
0.117 MGD
Continuous
Recording
Influent or
Effluent
Total Monthly Flow [822201
Monitor & Report (MGI Month)
Monthly
Calculated
Influent or
Effluent
BOD, 5-day (20°C) 3 [C0310]
(April 1 through October 31
5.0 mglL
7.5 mglL
31Week
Composite
Influent &
Effluent
BOD, 5-day (20°C) 3 [C0310]
November 1 through March 31
10.0 mglL
15.0 mg/L
31Week
Composite
Influent &
Effluent
Total Suspended Solids2 [CO530]
30,0 mglL
45.0 mglL
3Meek
Composite
Influent &
Effluent
NI-13 as N [C0610]
(April 1 through October 31
2.0 mglL
10.0 mglL
3Meek
Composite
Effluent
NH3 as N [C0610]
November 1 through March 31
4.0 mglL
20.0 mglL
Week
Composite
Effluent
Dissolved Oxygen 00300
Daily
average >_ 5.0 m IL
31Week
Grab
Effluent
Dissolved Oxygen [003001
Footnote 2
Footnote 2
Upstream &
Downstream
Temperature (°C) 100010]
Footnote 2
Footnote 2
Upstream &
Downstream
Fecal Coliform [31616]
(geometric mean
200/100 ml
400/100 ml
3/Week
Grab
Effluent
Total Residual Chlorine (TRC)4.5
50060
17 pgIL
31Week
Grab
Effluent
Temperature °C 00010
Daily
Grab
Effluent
TKN m IL [006251
Monitor & Report
2/Month
Composite
Effluent
NO2-N + NO3-N m 1L [006301
Monitor & Report
2/Month
Composite
Effluent
TN m IL 6 C0600
Monitor & Report
2/Month
Composite
Effluent
Total Nitrogen Load' [QM600]
QY600
Monitor & Report (pounds/month)
Monitor & Report oundsl ear a
Monthly
Annually
Calculated
Calculated
Effluent
Effluent
Total Mhos horus9 C0665
2.0 m IL quarterly averse
2/Month
Composite
Effluent
N 00400
> 6.0 and < 9.0 standard units
3Ndeek
Grab
Effluent
Footnotes:
1. The permittee shall submit discharge monitoring reports electronically using the Division's eDMR
system [see A. (5)].
2. Upstream= at least 100 feet upstream from the outfall. Downstream = at U.S. Highway 401. Instream
samples shall be grab samples collected 3 times per week during June, July, August, September,
and October; weekly sampling is required during the other months of the year. Instream monitoring
is provisionally waived in light of the permittee's participation in the Lower Neuse Basin Association.
Instream monitoring shall be conducted as stated in this permit should the permittee end its
participation in the Association.
Page 3 of 9

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 03021
3. The monthly average effluent BOD5 and Total Suspended Solids concentrations shall not exceed
15% of the respective influent value (85% removal).
4. This limit and associated monitoring will apply only if chlorine is used for disinfection.
5. The Division shall consider all effluent TRC values reported below 50 pg/L to be in compliance with
the permit. However, the Permittee shall continue to record and submit all values reported by a
North Carolina certified laboratory (including field certified), even if these values fall below 50 µg/L.
6. For a given wastewater sample, TN=TKN+NO3-N+NO2-N, where TN is Total Nitrogen, TKN is Total
Kjeldahl Nitrogen, and NO3-N and NO2-N are Nitrate and Nitrite Nitrogen, respectively.
7. TN Load is the mass load of Total Nitrogen discharged in a given period of time [see A. (3)].
8. Compliance with this limit shall be determined in accordance with A. (4).
9. The quarterly average for total phosphorus shall be the average of composite samples collected
2/month during each calendar quarter (January -March, April -June, July -September, October -
December).
There shall be no discharge of floating solids or visible foam in other than trace amounts.
A. (2) CALCULATION OF TOTAL NITROGEN LOADS
[G.S. 143-215.1 (b)]
a. The Permittee shall calculate monthly and annual TN Loads as follows:
i. Monthly TN Load (lb/month) = TN x TMF x 8.34
where:
TN = the average Total Nitrogen concentration (mg/L) of the composite
samples collected during the month
TMF = the Total Monthly Flow of wastewater discharged during the
month (MG/month)
8.34 = conversion factor, from (mg/L x MG) to pounds
H. Annual TN Load (pounds/year) = Sum of the 12 Monthly TN Loads for the
calendar year
b. The Permittee shall report monthly Total Nitrogen results (mg/Land lb/month) in the
appropriate discharge monitoring report for each month and shall report each year's
results (lb/year) in the December report for that year.
Page 4 of 9

Permit NC0066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 03021
A. (3) ANNUAL LIMITS FOR TOTAL NITROGEN
[G.S. 1.43-215.1 (b)]
a. Total Nitrogen (TN) allocations and TN Load limits for NPDES dischargers in the Neuse
River basin are annual limits and are applied for the calendar year.
b. For any given calendar year, the Permittee shall be in compliance with the annual TN
Load limit in this Permit if:
i. the Permittee's annual TN Load is less than or equal to the said limit, or
ii. the Permittee is a Co-Permittee Member of a compliance association.
c. If the Permittee is not a co-permittee member of a compliance association and the
Permittee's cumulative annual TN discharge exceeds the effective TN Load limit in this
permit at any point during the calendar year, the Permittee is in violation of its TN
Load limit, and each day of a continuing violation shall constitute a separate violation.
d. The TN Load limit in this Permit (if any) may be modified as the result of allowable
changes in the Permittee's TN allocation.
i. Allowable changes include those resulting from the purchase of TN allocation
from the Wetlands Restoration Fund; purchase, sale, trade, or lease of
allocation between the Permittee and other dischargers; regionalization; and
other transactions approved by the Division.
ii. The Permittee may request a modification of the TN Load limit in this Permit to
reflect allowable changes in its TN allocation. Upon receipt of timely and proper
application, the Division will modify the permit as appropriate and in
accordance with state and federal program requirements.
iii Changes in TN limits become effective on January 1 of the year following permit
modification. The Division must receive application no later than August 31 for
changes proposed for the following calendar year.
iv. Application shall be sent to:
NC DEQ / DWR / NPDES
Attn: Neuse River Basin Coordinator
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1617
e. If the Permittee is a member and co-permittee of an approved compliance association,
its TN discharge during that year is governed by that association's group NPDES
permit and the TN limits therein.
i. The Permittee shall be considered a Co-Permittee Member for any given
calendar year in which it is identified as such in Appendix A of the association's
group NPDES permit.
ii. Association roster(s) and members' TN allocations will be updated annually and
in accordance with state and federal program requirements.
iii. If the Permittee intends to join or leave a compliance association, the Division
must be notified of the proposed action in accordance with the procedures
defined in the association's NPDES permit.
Page 5 of 9

Permit NC0066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 0302]
(1) Upon receipt of timely and proper notification, the Division will modify the
permit as appropriate and in accordance with state and federal program
requirements.
(2) Membership changes in a compliance association become effective on
January 1 of the year following modification of the association's permit.
f. The TN monitoring and reporting requirements in this Permit remain in effect until the
expiration of this Permit and are not affected by the Permittee's membership in a
compliance association.
A. (4) TOTAL NITROGEN ALLOCATIONS
[G.S. 143-215.1 (b)]
a. The following table lists the Total Nitrogen (TN) allocation(s) assigned to, acquired by,
or transferred to the Permittee in accordance with the Neuse River nutrient
management rule (T15A NCAC 02B .0234) and the status of each as of permit
issuance. For compliance purposes, this table does not supersede any TN limit(s)
established elsewhere in this permit or in the NPDES permit of a compliance
association of which the Permittee is a Co-Permittee Member.
(1) Transport Factor = 50%
b. Any addition, deletion, or modification of the listed allocation(s) (other than to correct
typographical errors) or any change to Active status of any of the listed allocations shall be
considered a major modification of this permit and shall be subject to the public review
process afforded such modifications under state and federal rules.
Page 6 of 9

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 03021
A. (5) ELECTRONIC REPORTING OF MONITORING REPORTS
[G.S. 143-215.1 (b)]
Federal regulations require electronic submittal of all discharge monitoring reports (DMRs)
and program reports. The final NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule was adopted and became
effective on December 21, 2015.
NOTE: This special condition supplements or supersedes the following sections within Part II
of this permit (Standard Conditions for NPDES Permits):
• Section B. (11.) Signatory Requirements
• Section D. (2.) Reporting
• Section D. (6.) Records Retention
• Section E. (5.) Monitoring Reports
1. Reporting Re uirements [Supersedes Section D. (2.1 and Section E. 5. a
The permittee shall report discharge monitoring data electronically using the NC DWR's
Electronic Discharge Monitoring Report (eDMR) internet application.
Monitoring results obtained during the previous month(s) shall be summarized for each
month and submitted electronically using eDMR. The eDMR system allows permitted
facilities to enter monitoring data and submit DMRs electronically using the internet. Until
such time that the state's eDMR application is compliant with EPA's Cross -Media Electronic
Reporting Regulation (CROMERR), permittees will be required to submit all discharge
monitoring data to the state electronically using eDMR and will be required to complete the
eDMR submission by printing, signing, and submitting one signed original and a copy of the
computer printed eDMR to the following address:
NC DEQ / Division of Water Resources / Water Quality Permitting Section
ATTENTION: Central Files
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
If a permittee is unable to use the eDMR system due to a demonstrated hardship or due to
the facility being physically located in an area where less than 10 percent of the households
have broadband access, then a temporary waiver from the NPDES electronic reporting
requirements may be granted and discharge monitoring data may be submitted on paper
DMR forms (MR 1, 1. 1, 2, 3) or alternative forms approved by the Director. Duplicate signed
copies shall be submitted to the mailing address above. See "How to Request a Waiver from
Electronic Reporting" section below.
Regardless of the submission method, the first DMR is due on the last day of the month
following the issuance of the permit or in the case of a new facility, on the last day of the
month following the commencement of discharge.
Starting on December 21, 2020, the permittee must electronically report the following
compliance monitoring data and reports, when applicable:
• Sewer Overflow/Bypass Event Reports;
• Pretreatment Program Annual Reports; and
Page 7 of 9

Permit NCO066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [ 15 A NCAC 080. 0302]
Clean Water Act (CWA) Section 316(b) Annual Reports.
The permittee may seek an electronic reporting waiver from the Division (see "How to Request
a Waiver from Electronic Reporting" section below).
2. Electronic Submissions
In accordance with 40 CFR 122.41(1)(9), the permittee must identify the initial recipient at the
time of each electronic submission. The permittee should use the EPA's website resources to
identify the initial recipient for the electronic submission.
Initial recipient of electronic NPDES information from NPDES-regulated facilities, means the
entity (EPA or the state authorized by EPA to implement the NPDES program) that is the
designated entity for receiving electronic NPDES data [see 40 CFR 127.2(b)].
EPA plans to establish a website that will also link to the appropriate electronic reporting tool
for each type of electronic submission and for each state. Instructions on how to access and
use the appropriate electronic reporting tool will be available as well. Information on EPA's
NPDES Electronic Reporting Rule is found at http:_f Zwww2.epa.aov/compliance/final-
national-pollutant-discharge-elimination-system-npdes-electronic-reporting-rule,
Electronic submissions must start by the dates listed in the "Reporting Requirements"
section above.
3. How to Request a Waiver from Electronic Reporting
The permittee may seek a temporary electronic reporting waiver from the Division. To obtain
an electronic reporting waiver, a permittee must first submit an electronic reporting waiver
request to the Division. Requests for temporary electronic reporting waivers must be
submitted in writing to the Division for written approval at least sixty (60) days prior to the
date the facility would be required under this permit to begin submitting monitoring data and
reports. The duration of a temporary waiver shall not exceed 5 years and shall thereupon
expire. At such time, monitoring data and reports shall be submitted electronically to the
Division unless the permittee re -applies for and is granted a new temporary electronic
reporting waiver by the Division. Approved electronic reporting waivers are not transferrable.
Only permittees with an approved reporting waiver request may submit monitoring data and
reports on paper to the Division for the period that the approved reporting waiver request is
effective.
Information on eDMR and the application for a temporary electronic reporting waiver are
found on the following web page:
htty: / /deamc.p-ov /about/ divisions /water -resources /edmr
4. Signatory Requirements [Supplements Section B. (11.1 (b) and Supersedes Section B.
1[ 1.1 (dil
All eDMRs submitted to the permit issuing authority shall be signed by a person described in
Part Il, Section B. (11.)(a) or by a duly authorized representative of that person as described
in Part 11, Section B. (11.)(b). A person, and not a position, must be delegated signatory
authority for eDMR reporting purposes.
For eDMR submissions, the person signing and submitting the DMR must obtain an eDMR
user account and login credentials to access the eDMR system. For more information on
North Carolina's eDMR system, registering for eDMR and obtaining an eDMR user account,
please visit the following web page:
Page 8 of 9

Permit NC0066150
Grade III Biological Water Pollution Control System [15 A NCAC 08G. 0302]
hLtp_.//deg.nc.gov/about/divisions/water-resources/­edmr
Certification. Any person submitting an electronic DMR using the state's eDMR system shall
make the following certification [40 CFR 122.22]. NO OTHER STATEMENTS OF
CERTIFICATION WILL BE ACCEPTED:
"I certify, under penalty of law, that this document and all attachments were prepared under
my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified
personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the
person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering
the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true,
accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false
information, including the possibility of f nes and imprisonment for knowing violations. "
5. Records Retention [Supplements Section D. (6.11
The permittee shall retain records of all Discharge Monitoring Reports, including eDMR
submissions. These records or copies shall be maintained for a period of at least 3 years
from the date of the report. This period may be extended by request of the Director at any
time [40 CFR 122.411.
Page 9 of 9

�. ) •
.f
• .y ' r
1 �� _,yam- �' •a a� .... _
73
• Q
a "IdleCreek
•, =�~D
Outfall001
Ce
!/ N
_ i Lake Wheeler Rd
■ w
di
lie
1161
' r
Cop"yrig ht 2413/ atitV onal 4k graphic Society,, i-cubed
Town of Fuquay-Varina, Brighton Forest Subdivision WWTP
NPDES Permit NC0066150
4809 Goldleaf Court
Receiving Stream: Middle Creek Stream Class: C; NSW
Stream Segment: 27-43-15-(1) Sub -Basin #: 03-04-03
River Basin: Neuse HUC: 030202010901
County: Wake
N
SCALE
1:20,000
35038'09" N,78°43'45" W

Tab 4: Specifications

Hazen
FUQUAY-VARINA
north caroling
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Department of Public Utilities
Specifications for
Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant
Tertiary Filter Relocation Project
FINAL SPECIFICATIONS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
Hazen and Sawyer • 4011 WestChase Boulevard, Suite 500 • Raleigh, NC 27607 • 919.833.7152

Hazen
FUOU A-(-\/ A P I non
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant
Tertiary Filter Relocation Project
Final Specifications
,•�:�H�CAR47�'••�,
-,
p �oFE95t�;�.'L.y
042 fly 00
� • •.FjyCi I NEic.. ,`2 .

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
2019 Tertiary Filter Relocation
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Date of Advertisement: May 1, 2019
Separate, sealed bids will be received by the Town of Fuquay-Varina, referred to as the "OWNER", for the
construction of Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation.
Sealed bids must be submitted to:
Office of the Assistant Finance Director
Town of Fuquay-Varina
401 Old Honeycutt Road
Fuquay-Varina, NC 27526
Each sealed envelope containing a bid must be plainly marked on the outside as "Bid for 2019 Filter Relocation,
Town of Fuquay-Varina" and should bear on the outside the name of the bidder and his address. Bids will be
received at the Fuquay-Varina Town Hall, 401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina until 2:00
P.M., May 21, 2019, at which time and place the BIDS will be publicly opened and read aloud.
The Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation includes but is not limited to the following:
Relocating a tertiary filter from the Terrible Creek WWTP to the Brighton Forest WWTP and furnishing
and installing an intermediate pump station as shown on the drawings and specifications.
The Bidding Documents may be examined at the following locations:
Fuquay-Varina Town Hall - Fuquay-Varina, NC
Hazen and Sawyer, P.C. — 4011 Westchase Blvd., Raleigh, North Carolina 27607
Copies of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the HAZEN AND SAWYER, 4011 Westchase Blvd.,
Raleigh, North Carolina 27607 upon payment in the amount of $25.00 (non-refundable) for each set of
documents thus obtained. An electronic copy of the bidding documents saved to a CD is available for $35.00.
Shipping via Federal Express may be requested for an extra cost of $15.00. Checks shall be made payable to
HAZEN AND SAWYER.
Contractors offering a proposal on this project must possess the proper license classification to perform the
Work elements contained in the specifications in accordance with North Carolina General Statutes; and if
selected, provide a copy of their active license to the OWNER.
A mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held with the Owner at 10:00 a.m. on Thursday, May 9,
2019 at the Fuquay-Varina Town Hall, 401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, North
Carolina to discuss the project and answer pertinent questions.
The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive formalities, to reject nonconforming, non-
responsive, or conditional bids. The BIDDER to whom a contract may be awarded shall fully comply with the
requirements of all North Carolina General Statutes governing the practice of general contracting. No BIDDER
may withdraw his BID within 60 calendar days after the actual date of the opening thereof.
Questions regarding this request for bids should be directed to Tim Devine, P.E., Hazen and Sawyer, 919-755-
8657 or tdevinekhazneandsawyer.com.
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
END OF SECTION

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS
Separate, sealed informal bids will be received by the Town of Fuquay-Varina (herein called the
OWNER) at the Fuquay-Varina Town Hall in the Conference Room until 2:00 P.M., May 21, 2019
and then at said office publicly opened and read aloud.
Each proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to Office of Assistant Finance
Director, Town of Fuquay-Varina, 401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina 27526.
Each sealed envelope containing a bid must be clearly marked on the outside as a bid for
Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
The envelope shall also be marked with the Bidder's name, address, North Carolina contractor license
number, and name and phone number of a contact person. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope
containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to the Owner, c/o Office of
Assistant Finance Director, Town of Fuquay-Varina, 401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, North
Carolina 27526.
A mandatory pre -bid meeting will be held with the Owner at 10:00 a.m. on Thursday, May 9,
2019 at the Fuquay-Varina Town Hall, 401 Old Honeycutt Road, Fuquay-Varina, North
Carolina to discuss the project and answer pertinent questions. No oral interpretations will be
made as to the meaning of the Contract Documents. Interpretation, if deemed necessary, will be in the
form of a written Addendum. Attendance at this pre -bid meeting is required to bid the project.
All bids must be made on the required form. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in, in ink or
typewritten, and the form must be fully completed and executed when submitted. Only one copy of
the bid form is required. Altered bid forms will be rejected. A conditional or qualified bid will not be
accepted.
The Owner may waive any informalities or minor defects or reject any and all bids. Any bid may be
withdrawn prior to the above scheduled time for the opening of bids or authorized postponement
thereof. Any bid received after the time and date specified shall not be considered. No bidder may
withdraw a bid within 60 days after the actual date of the opening thereof. Should there be reasons
why the contract cannot be awarded within the specified period, the time may be extended by mutual
agreement between the Owner and the Bidder.
Bidders must satisfy themselves of the accuracy of the work description by examination and review of
specifications including addenda. The failure or omission of any Bidder to do any of the foregoing
shall in no way relieve any Bidder from any obligation in respect to his/her/its bid. After bids have
been submitted, the Bidder shall not assert that there was a misunderstanding concerning quantities of
work or the nature of the work to be done.
The contract documents contain the provisions required for the construction of the project.
Information obtained from an officer, agent, or employee of the Owner or any other person shall not
affect the risks or obligations assumed by the Contractor or relieve him/her from fulfilling any
conditions of the contract.

The Owner may make such investigations as he/she deems necessary to determine the ability of the
Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data
for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the
evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is
properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the agreement and to complete the work contemplated
therein.
The award of the Contract, if it is awarded, will be to the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder whose
qualifications indicate the award will be in the best interest of the Owner. The Owner reserves the
right to waive technicalities and/or reject any or all proposals.
The low Bidder shall supply the names and addresses of material suppliers and subcontractors when
requested to do so by the Owner.
The party to whom the contract is awarded will be required to execute the Contract within ten (10)
calendar days from the date when the Notice to Award is delivered to the Bidder. The Notice of
Award shall be accompanied by the necessary agreement forms. In case of failure of the Bidder to
execute the agreement, the Owner may, at his option, consider the Bidder in default.
The Owner, within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of an acceptable agreement, signed by the party to
whom the bid was awarded, shall sign the agreement and return to such party an executed duplicate of
the agreement.
The Notice to Proceed shall be issued within ten (10) calendar days of the execution of the agreement
by the Owner.
Owner and Contractor recognize and agree as follows: (i) that time is of the essence as to
Contractor's performance of the Work herein described and that Owner will suffer a financial
loss if the subject Work is not completed within the time prescribed herein, (ii) that there is
delay, expense and difficulty associated with proving, in a proceeding at law or equity, Owner's
actual loss caused by Contractor's failure to complete the Work within the time prescribed, and
(iii) in lieu of requiring such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages (and
not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner $300.00 per day for every calendar day of delay for
the following:
a) The project is not complete after one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days from
receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
A Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the
contract price, with a corporate surety approved by the Town of Fuquay-Varina, will be required for
the faithful performance of the contract. Bidders shall provide certification that performance and
payment bond sureties are licensed in North Carolina.
All applicable laws, ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over
the project shall apply to the contract throughout.
al

BID
Town of Fuquay-Varina
2019 Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
TO: THE TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA, NORTH CAROLINA ("Owner")
FROM: "BIDDER"
ADDRESS
DATE OF BID May 21, 2019
The Bidder hereby signifies that it is his/her/its/its intention and purpose to enter into a formal Contract with the
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina, to furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, apparatus, supplies,
and the like required, and to do all the work necessary, for and because of the construction, erection, demolition,
and/or installation of the proposed "Project":
Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
for the Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina in accordance with the Contract Documents, including Addenda
attached thereto** under the conditions of and in accordance with the terms of this Bid Proposal, which
are as follows:
THAT: The Bidder has carefully examined the Drawings, Specifications and all other Contract Documents and
fully understands them.
THAT: The Bidder has carefully examined the site of the Project and is familiar with the conditions under
which the Work, or any part thereof, is to be performed and the conditions which must be fulfilled in furnishing
and/or installing, erecting or constructing any or all items of the Project.
THAT: The Bidder shall provide all necessary tools, machinery, equipment, apparatus, and all other means
necessary to do all the work and shall furnish all labor, materials and all else required to complete such Contract
as may be entered into, in the manner prescribed in and in accordance with the terms of the Drawings,
Specifications and the Contract and in accordance with the true intent and meaning thereof, and in accordance
with the requirements of the Owner, in a first class manner.
[Terms continued on the following page.]
** Fill in appropriate Addenda number(s):
5

THAT: Owner may reject any and all bids and award the contract to the bidder that it determines, in its sole and
absolute discretion, to be the lowest responsible bidder after taking into consideration the best interest of Owner.
THAT: The Work under each Section of the Technical Specifications will be awarded under one Contract and
the Owner shall have the right to include or exclude such component(s) of Work under each Section of the
Technical Specifications as the Owner may deem to be in the best interests of the Owner, and reduce the Bid
price accordingly.
THAT: Upon being notified of being the apparent lowest responsible Bidder, the Bidder shall execute a
Performance Bond and a Payment Bond, on the forms included herein, each equal to one hundred percent
(100%) of the Contract Price (Contract Sum), as security for the faithful performance of the Contract and
payment for all materials and labor.
THAT: The Bidder shall submit, in the blank spaces provided, all data, guarantees and other information called
for.
THAT: This Bid Proposal shall be signed and submitted in the manner prescribed in the Instructions to Bidders.
THAT: The Bidder shall be prepared to execute a Contract within the time specified in the Information to
Bidders.
THAT: The Bidder proposes to enter into a Contract in accordance with this Bid Proposal, the Specifications
and the Contract Documents included herein, for the prices shown on the following pages.
THAT: The successful Bidder shall be required to submit a complete detailed cost breakdown of the Lump Sum
Bid Price amount (if project is a lump sum bid) for payment purposes, for approval by the Public Utilities
Director, prior to the Award of the Contract.
THAT: It is the intent of these Contract Documents to obtain a Contract based on a Lump Sum Price. Where a
discrepancy exists between words and numbers in the Bid amount, the written words shall govern. Where a
discrepancy exists between unit prices and mathematical computations in the Itemized Proposal, the unit prices
and quantities in the Itemized Proposal shall govern.
THAT: The successful Bidder shall have all proper Contractor licenses with applicable classifications and
privilege licenses required under North Carolina state laws governing their respective trade(s), and be in good
standing with their respective North Carolina Licensing Board.
THAT: The lowest bid will be determined by the total cost of the Contract with the prices of any alternates
accepted, if applicable, being added to or deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid to give the total cost of the
project.
Con

BID FORM for Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s):
A. The Total Base Bid shall consists of all work identified in the Contract Documents to make a complete
and operable facility.
BASE BID
ITEM DESCRIPTION I TOTAL LUMP SUM AMOUNT
1. All work for the Brighton Forest WWTP $
Tertiary Filter Relocation project.
TOTAL BID AMOUNT — (in words):
ALTERNATE BID ITEMS
The Bidder must include pricing for the Alternate Bid Item listed below. Owner reserves the right to
select either the Base Bid Manufacturer or any combination of the Alternative Bid Manufacturers
provided. The Bidder must enter an addition or deduction amount for each alternate bid item reflecting
actual increase or savings to Owner and circle the word addition or deduction as appropriate.
A. ALTERNATE NO.1— WET -WELL MOUNTED NON -CLOG PUMPS
In lieu of providing two installed and one spare submersible pump, provide two installed wet -well
mounted non -clog pumps (no spare). The Bidder shall include in the Alternate No.1 Bid Item amount
all incremental cost additions or reductions associated with providing wet -well mounted non -clog
pumps. Any required modification to the wet well and/or piping layout shall be included in the
incremental cost addition or reduction. See Section 16 — Wet Well Mounted Non -Clog Pumps.
ALTERNATE NO.1 BID ITEM (Circle One)
ADDITION or DEDUCTION AMOUNT (in numbers): $
ALTERNATE NO.1 BID ITEM (Circle One) ADDITION or DEDUCTION AMOUNT
(in words):
7

(IF AN INDIVIDUAL, PARTNERSHIP OR NON -CORPORATE ORGANIZATION)
Signature of Bidder
Address:
Names & Addresses of Members of Firm
Signature of Bidder
(IF A CORPORATION)
Address:
Incorporated under the Laws of the State of
President:
Secretary:
Treasurer:
Name and Address
Names and Address
Name and Address

ADDITIONAL BIDDER'S CERTIFICATION
Acceptance of Terms
In submitting this Bid Proposal, the undersigned agrees that this bid will remain in effect for a period
of 60 days following the opening of the Bids, that the undersigned agrees to enter into a Contract with
the Owner, if awarded, on the basis of this Bid Proposal, and that the undersigned agrees to complete
the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Non -Collusion in Bidding
The Bidder specifically agrees to abide by all applicable provisions of Article 3 of Chapter 133 of the
North Carolina General Statutes. By submission of this Bid, each Bidder and each person signing on
behalf of any Bidder certifies, and in case of a joint Bid each party thereto certifies as to its own
organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of knowledge and belief:
1) The prices in this Bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,
communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating
to such prices with any other Bidder or with any competitor;
2) Unless otherwise required by Law, the prices quoted in the Bid have not been knowingly disclosed
by the Bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the Bidder prior to opening, directly or
indirectly, to any other Bidder or to any competitor; and
3) No attempt has been made or will be made by the Bidder to induce any other person, partnership,
or corporation to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition.
Type of Business
The undersigned hereby represents that it is a
(corporation, partnership, or an individual). If a corporation, the undersigned further represents that it
is duly qualified as a corporation under the Laws of the State of North Carolina and it is authorized to
do business in this State.
Firm
Authorized Signature
Title
Address of Firm
Date
9
Name of Project

NOTICE OF AWARD
TO: CONTRACTORBIDDER:
OWNER: Town of Fuquay-Varina
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
PROJECT: Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
You are hereby notified that the Owner has considered the Bid Proposal submitted by you for the
above -described project in response to its Bid Documents dated May 2019.
It appears that you are the apparent lowest responsible Bidder and it is in the best interest of said Owner to
accept your Bid Proposal in the amount of: .You are therefore hereby
notified that your Bid Proposal has been accepted for the Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
project.
The Bidder is required by as a condition of its Award of the Contract to execute and deliver the formal Contract
with the Owner and to furnish the required Bidder's Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (10) days from
the date of the delivery of this Notice to you.
If you fail to execute said Contract and to furnish said Bonds within ten (10) days from the date of delivery of
this Notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner's acceptance of your
Bid Proposal as abandoned and to award the work covered by your Bid Proposal to another bidder, or to re -
advertise the work or otherwise dispose thereof as the Owner may see fit.
Dated this day of , 2019.
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Adam Mitchell, Town Manager
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged this day of
.2019
Bidder:
By: _
Title:
10

INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS AND REQUIREMENTS AS TO FORM FOR TOWN OF
FUQUAY-VARINA CONTRACTS
Do Not Remove From Contract
Please observe the following in executing the attached document:
1) The Town may contract with three types of legal entities.
a) If the agreement is with an Individual, that individual should sign the agreement exactly as
his/her/its/its name is set out. If the Contractor is with an individually owned business, the
Contract should be with the individual owner, and not the named business.
b) Execution on behalf of a Corporation should be by the president or a vice president, attested by
the corporate secretary, with the corporate seal affixed. An official other than the president or
vice president should attach documentation of his/her/its/its authority to execute and bind the
company.
c) If the agreement is with a Partnership, all members of the Partnership should execute unless an
authorized partner is designated to execute. Documentation of such should be attached.
2) The Contractor signs the Contract and his/her/its signature should be notarized.
3) The Contractor must fill in the following form:
Subcontractors and Material Suppliers List
4) Additional bidders certification signed.
5) After signing the Contract, the appropriate notary's acknowledgment, either in the corporate form
or individual/partnership form should be completed.
6) The instrument should not be dated, except by the last person executing the Contract, normally the
Town Clerk.
7) Non-discrimination provisions should be included with the Contract.
8) Five (5) copies of the contract are sent to the Contractor. The original and duplicates should be
signed and returned to the Town of Fuquay-Varina for signature, after which two (2) duplicates
will be returned to the Contractor. One copy may be retained by the Contractor and the other, for
the use of the Bonding Company(s).
11

SUBCONTRACTORS AND MATERIAL SUPPLIERS LIST
Bidder shall provide the following information concerning minorities and women owned
subcontractors. All information shall be complete for acceptable award.
A. List of Subcontractors to be used:
Subcontractor Work Dollar % of
I ff p Amount Total
B. Material Suppliers List:
Supplier Material Dollar % of
Amount Total
12

PROCEDURE FOR REPORTING NORTH CAROLINA
SALES TAX EXPENDITURES ON TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA CONTRACTS
The following procedure in handling the North Carolina Sales Tax is applicable to this project.
Contractors shall comply fully with the requirements outlined hereinafter, in order that the owner may
recover the amount of the tax permitted under the law.
(a) It shall be the General Contractor's responsibility to furnish the owner documentary evidence
showing the materials used and sales tax paid by the General Contractor and each of the
subcontractors.
(b) The documentary evidence shall consist of a certified statement by the General Contractor and each
of the subcontractors individually, showing total purchases of materials from each separate vendor
and total sales taxes paid to each vendor. A certified statement must show the invoice numbers
covered and inclusive dates of such invoices.
(c) Materials used from General Contractor's or Subcontractor's warehouse stock shall be shown in a
certified statement at warehouse stock prices.
(d) The General Contractor shall not be required to certify the subcontractor's statements.
(e) The documentary evidence to be furnished to owners eligible for sales or use tax refunds covers
sales and/or use taxes paid on building materials used by Contractors and Subcontractors in the
performance of contracts with churches, orphanages, hospitals not operated for profit, educational
institutions not operated for profit and other charitable or religious institutions or organizations not
operated for profit and incorporated cities, towns, and counties in this State. The documentary
evidence is to be submitted to the above -named institutions, organizations, and governmental units
to be included in claims for refunds to be prepared and submitted by them to obtain refunds
provided by G.S. 105-164.14 and is to include the purchases of building materials, supplies,
fixtures, and equipment which become part of or annexed to buildings or structures being erected,
altered, or repaired under contracts with such institutions, organizations, or governmental units.
(f) The Contractor or Contractors to whom an award is made on this project will be required to follow
the procedure outlined above. The Contractor is advised that all requests for payment, partial or
final, for work completed under this contract must include a sales tax report submitted in
accordance with the procedures outlined above.
13

WORKERS COMPENSATION AND PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE
CERTIFICATE
(Attach to this page)
14

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER'S FINANCE OFFICER
Provisions for payment of the monies to fall due under this agreement
have been made by appropriation duly made or bonds or notes authorized,
as required by the "Municipal Fiscal Control Act."
Signature of Finance Officer
Printed Name
Date
15

NORTH CAROLINA
WAKE COUNTY
CONTRACT
THIS CONTRACT is made and executed by and between the TowN OF FUQUAY-VARINA, NORTH
CAROLINA, a municipal corporation hereinafter designated as the "TOWN" and; ,
hereinafter designated as the "CONTRACTOR":
WITNESSETH:
In consideration of the payments agreed to be made by the TOWN, hereinafter specified, the TOWN and
the CONTRACTOR agree as follows:
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The CONTRACTOR, at his/her/its own proper cost and expense and with skill and diligence shall furnish
all labor, tools, materials and equipment and do all things necessary for the proper construction and
completion ready for use of the following improvements:
Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
Work includes, but is not limited to, relocating a tertiary filter (AquaDisk® by Aqua -Aerobic Systems)
from the Terrible Creek WWTP to the Brighton Forest WWTP and furnishing and installing an
intermediate pump station as shown on the contract drawings and specifications.
In strict accordance with and as shown in the specifications, schedules and other documents set forth
herein or incorporated by reference:
"Bid Documents for Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation " dated May 2019 by the Town
of Fuquay- marina, including addenda;
"Brighton Forest Wastewater Treatment Plant Tertiary Filter Relocation " drawing dated May 2019
by the Town of Fuquay-marina
The CONTRACTOR shall further perform, consistent with the Terms herein setout, the Contract Work in
accordance with the directions given from time to time during the construction by the Public Utilities
Director, and such other official, employee, or other agent of the TOWN as the TowN may designate.
II. GENERAL OBLIGATION OF THE CONTRACTOR
The CONTRACTOR will accept the sum of lump sum and unit price work elements specified in this
Contract in full compensation and satisfaction for the performance of this Contract and as
consideration of this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all loss and damages of
every kind and nature which may arise out of or on account of the performance of the work required by
this Contract, and for all risks of every description connected with the said work; and the CONTRACTOR
16

shall be responsible for well and faithfully completing the whole work according to all applicable
specifications and the terms and conditions of this Contract, the General, Supplementary, and Special
Conditions are annexed hereto and incorporated herein by reference.
III. TIME OF COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION
The work required by this Contract shall be commenced by the CONTRACTOR not later than five (5)
calendar days after the date of the execution of this Contract and issuance of the Notice to Proceed, and
the entire work shall be completed no later than one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days after the
date of the Notice to Proceed.
Owner and Contractor recognize and agree as follows: (i) that time is of the essence as to
Contractor's performance of the Work herein described and that Owner will suffer a financial
loss if the subject Work is not completed within the time prescribed herein, (ii) that there is
delay, expense and difficulty associated with proving, in a proceeding at law or equity, Owner's
actual loss caused by Contractor's failure to complete the Work within the time prescribed, and
(iii) in lieu of requiring such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages (and
not as a penalty) Contractor shall pay Owner $300.00 per day for every calendar day of delay for
the following:
a) The project is not complete after one hundred and eighty (180) calendar days from
receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
IV. OUALITY AND WORKMANSHIP
All work under this Contract shall be done and performed in accordance with the Town of Fuquay-
Varina Standard Specifications and Details, MUTCD, OSHA standards, and any other applicable local,
State and/or Federal requirements, and to the satisfaction of the Public Utilities Director and such other
official, employee, or agent of the Town of Fuquay-Varina as may be designated by the Towle.
V. COMPENSATION
In consideration of the performance of this Contract and the full completion of the work required of the
CONTRACTOR by the terms and conditions of this Contract, the TOWN agrees to pay to the
CONTRACTOR the sum of $ , payable as follows:
An amount equal to percentage of work completed on a monthly basis minus a 5% retainage fee.
Upon final inspection and acceptance of the Work, in accordance with Article 14 of the General
Conditions of the Contract, Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price.
VI. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTIES
The CONTRACTOR, in executing this Contract, warrants that he will be responsible for the maintenance
or correction of any work completed under this Contact that may become defective due to faulty
workmanship or materials for a period of one year after final acceptance of the work performed.
17

It is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that work done under this Contract shall be subject to
all ordinances of the Town of Fuquay-Varina relating to work done in public property of the Town.
The CONTRACTOR has provided and attached hereto a Certificate of Insurance indicating compliance
with the insurance requirements set forth in the General Conditions and applicable hereto.
VII. CONTRACTOR'S ASSURANCE
CONTRACTOR, has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work,
locality, and with all local conditions and Federal, State and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations
that in any manner may affect cost, progress or performance of the Work.
CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all reports of investigations and latent conditions at the project site
or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which were relied upon by the Owner
in the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications, including Addenda, and which have been
identified in the Special Conditions section of the Contract.
CONTRACTOR has made or caused to be made examinations, investigations and tests and studies of such
reports and related data in addition to those referred to in the previous paragraph as he deems
necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price within the Contract Time and in
accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional
examinations, investigations, tests, reports or similar data are or will be required by him for such
purposes.
CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests,
reports and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
CONTRACTOR has given the Owner written notice of any conflict, error or discrepancy that he
discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by the Owner is acceptable to
the Contractor.
CONTRACTOR agrees that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and
convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work.
VIII. NON-DISCRIMINATION ASSURANCES
It is specifically agreed as part of the consideration of the signing of this Contract that the parties
hereto, their agents, officials, employees, or servants will not discriminate in any manner on the basis
of age, handicap, sex, race, color, creed, sexual orientation, or national origin with reference to the
subject matter of this Contract, no matter how remote.
This provision shall be binding on the successors and assigns of the parties hereto with reference to the
subject matter of this Contract.
18

This CONTRACT is entered into this, the day of , 2019.
Attest:
(Town Seal)
Attest:
(PLEASE THOROUGHLY EXECUTE THIS INSTRUMENT)
Rose Rich
Town Clerk
Secretary
(Company Seal)
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
Adam Mitchell
Town Manager
Company Name:
19
President

CONSTRUCTION PAYMENT BOND
(Attach to this page)
Provide completed bond with Power of Attorney for review
20

(Attach to this page)
Provide completed bond with Power of Attorney for review
21

NOTICE TO PROCEED
TO: CONTRACTOR:
ADDRESS:
FROM: Town of Fuquay-Varina
401 Old Honeycutt Road
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina 27526
OWNER: Town of Fuquay-Varina
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
PROJECT: Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
' ' e=418►[611
CONTRACT PRICE/SUM:
You are hereby notified to commence Work on the referenced project on or before TBD (the "Commencement
Date"), and are to finally and fully complete the Work within 180 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS of
the Commencement Date. Your Contract final completion date is therefore TBD.
The Agreement provides for assessment of liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day after the above
established completion date that the Work remains incomplete to the standard and degree required.
Dated this day of 92019.
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Adam Mitchell, Town Manager
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice of Proceed is hereby acknowledged this day of
.2019
Contractor:
By:
Title:
22

AjIs IW��
Date of Issuance:
PROJECT:
PROJECT NO.:
OWNER:
M7MM2191S
Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation
Town of Fuquay-Varina
Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
CONTRACTOR:
You are directed to make the following changes in the contract documents.
Description:
Purpose of Change Order:
Attachments: (List documents supporting change)
CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE: CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME:
Original Contract Price Original Contract Time
$ days
Previous Change Orders Net change from previous
No —to _ Change Orders
$ days
Contract Price prior to this Contract Time prior to this
Change Order Change Order
$ days
Net Increase (Decrease) this Net Increase (Decrease) this
Change Order Change Order
$ days
Contract Price with all approved Contract Time with all approved
Change Orders Change Orders
$ days
RECOMMENDED: APPROVED: APPROVED:
By: By: By:
Public Utilities Director Town Manager CONTRACTOR
23

(REQUIRED AT TIME OF FINAL PAYMENT
The Town of Fuquay-Varina Project No.
In the State of
deposes and says that he/she/it is
A FFIn A VIT
County of
County of
being duly sworn,
of
and that he/she has full and official knowledge of all and every
debt and obligation for labor and materials which have entered into and become a part of the public
facilities constructed under the Town of Fuquay-Varina project number ; and,
acting in his/her/its official capacity, and for the specific purpose of obtaining the funds due on this
final estimate, he/she/it further deposes and says that all debts or obligations for such labor and
materials have been fully and completely paid and discharged in good and lawful money of the United
States of America or by evidence of exchange or trade acceptances endorsed and guaranteed by a
solvent National or State bank, and that there are no suits for damages against the contractor, pending,
prospective, or otherwise, in consequence of his/her/its operations on the said project, except as
follows:
In witness whereof he has hereto set his/her/its hand and seal,
I, , a notary public of the County and State aforesaid, hereby
certify that personally known to me to be the affiant in the foregoing
affidavit, personally appeared before me this day and having been by me duly sworn deposes and says
that the facts set forth in the above affidavit are true and correct.
WITNESS my hand and official seal this the
My Commission Expires
(Seal)
24
day of , 2019.
Notary Public

GENERAL CONDITIONS
ART.I DEFINITIONS:
(a) The contract documents shall consist of the Contract, the accepted Bid Proposal and
Instructions, the General Conditions of the Contract, the Drawings and Specifications,
Addenda, including all modifications thereof incorporated in the documents before their
execution.
(b) Whenever the term "CONTRACTOR" is used, it shall be understood as referring to the
GENERAL CONTRACTOR, SUBCONTRACTOR, and all other CONTRACTORS or their duly
authorized agent to whom the work here described is awarded by Contract.
(c) Whenever the term PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR is mentioned, it is understood to mean the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR of the TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA or his/her assistant or duly
authorized agent. The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall make all necessary explanations as
to the meaning and intent of the Specifications and may correct proper fulfillment of its
intentions.
(d) Whenever the term "TOWN" is used it is to mean the TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA, NORTH
CAROLINA.
(e) The term "WORK" of the CONTRACTOR or SUBCONTRACTOR includes labor, materials, or both
equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the Contract.
ART. 2 INTENT OF DOCUMENTS:
The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation
necessary for the proper execution of the WORK. It is not intended, however, that materials or
WORK not covered by or properly inferable from any heading, branch, class, or trade of the
specifications shall be supplied unless distinctly so noted on the drawings. Materials or WORK
described in words so applied have a well-known technical meaning shall be held to refer to such
recognized standards.
ART. 3 DETAIL DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS:
The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall furnish with reasonable promptness, additional
instructions, by means of drawings or otherwise, necessary for the proper execution of the WORK.
All such drawings and instructions shall be consistent with CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, true
developments thereof, and reasonably inferable therefrom.
ART. 4 ORDER OF COMPLETION:
The CONTRACTOR shall submit at such time as may be requested by the PUBLIC UTILITIES
DIRECTOR, schedules which show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the
work with dates at which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the WORK and the
estimated dates of their completion.
25

ART. 5 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING:
It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied
himself/herself/itself as to the nature and location of the WORK, the conformation of the ground,
the character, quality of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities
needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the WORK, the general and local conditions,
and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this CONTRACT. No verbal
agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the TOWN, either before or
after the execution of the CONTRACT shall affect any terms of obligations herein contained.
ART. 6 MATERIALS, APPLIANCES, EMPLOYEES:
Unless otherwise specified, the CONTRACTOR shall provide any pay for all materials, labor, water,
tools, lights, equipment, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution
and completion of the work.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall
be good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind
and quality of materials.
The CONTRACTOR shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his/her/its
employees, and shall not employ on the WORK any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the work
assigned to him/her/it.
As determined by the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR or his representative the CONTRACTOR shall at
all times have an adequate number of employees present to perform WORK in a professional
manner.
ART. 7 ROYALTIES & PATENTS:
The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and patent fees. He/she/it shall defend all suits or claims
for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the TowN harmless from loss on account
thereof, except that the TOWN shall be responsible for such loss when a particular process or the
product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified, but if the CONTRACTOR has
information that the process or article specified in an infringement of a patent, he/she/it will be
responsible for such loss unless he/she/it promptly gives such information to the PUBLIC
UTILITIES DIRECTOR.
ART. 8 SURVEYS, PERMITS & REGULATIONS:
The TowN shall furnish any available surveys unless otherwise specified. Permits, licenses of a
temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the WORK shall be secured and paid for by the
CONTRACTOR. Permits, licenses, and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes
in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the TowN unless otherwise stipulated.
If the CONTRACTOR observes that the drawings and specifications are at variance therewith,
he/she/it shall promptly notify the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR in writing, and any necessary
changes will be adjusted in the CONTRACT for changes in WORK.
26

ART. 9 PROTECTION OF WORK & PROPERTY:
The CONTRACTOR shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his/her/its work from
damage and shall protect the TowN's and private property from injury or loss arising in
connection with this CONTRACT. He/she/it shall make good any such damages, injury, or loss,
except such as may directly be due to errors in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS or caused by agents
or employees of the TOwN.
ART. 10 INSPECTION OF WORK:
The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR and his representatives shall at all times have access to the
WORK whenever it is in preparation or progress and the CONTRACTOR shall provide facilities for
such access and for inspection.
If the specifications, the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR'S instructions, laws, or ordinances, or any
public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the CONTRACTOR shall give
the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR timely notice of its readiness for inspection. Inspections by the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall be promptly made.
If any WORK should be covered up without approval or consent of the PUBLIC UTILITIES
DIRECTOR, it must, if required by the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR, be uncovered for examination
at the CONTRACTOR's expense.
ART. 1 1 CHANGES IN WORK:
The TowN, without invalidating the CONTRACT, may order extra work or make changes by
altering, adding, or deducting from the WORK, the CONTRACT SUM being adjusted accordingly.
All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original CONTRACT except that any
claims for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time ordering such changes,
as mutually agreed upon by the TowN and CONTRACTOR. As long as additional work does not
exceed original estimates, additional days will not be granted.
For extra work, the value of any such extra work or change shall be determined in one or more of
the following ways;
(a) By estimate and acceptance of a lump sum.
(b) By unit prices subsequently agreed upon.
(c) By cost and percentage or by cost and fixed fee.
No extra work shall be performed without prior written approval from the Town. Any work
performed beyond the scope of the project without prior written approval from the Town shall
not be paid for.
ART. 12 DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK:
If the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR deems it expedient to correct WORK injured or done not in
accordance with CONTRACT, an equitable deduction from the CONTRACT price shall be made
therefore.
27

ART. 13 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT:
The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from the premises all materials determined to be unfit,
unsafe, or unsuitable by the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR in his sole discretion as failing to
conform with the CONTRACT, whether incorporated in the WORK or not, and the CONTRACTOR
shall promptly replace and re -execute his/her/its own WORK in accordance with the CONTRACT
and without expense to the Towle and shall bear the expense of making good all work by
themselves or other CONTRACTORS hired by them.
ART. 14 PROGRESS PAYMENTS:
Progress Payments may submitted by the CONTRACTOR based upon number of units completed as
measured and agreed upon per Article 32- MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES and as described in the
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS. Progress pay requests may be submitted at a maximum of one per
month, beginning one month after the NOTICE TO PROCEED. The TOWN shall have 28-calendar
days to review the pay request and issue payment to the CONTRACTOR.
The TowN may refuse to pay the whole, or any part of the pay request per Article 18 - PAYMENT
WITHHELD.
When the TowN refuses to pay the whole or any part of the pay request, the TOWN shall provide
written notice to the CONTRACTOR stating the reasons for such action. If it is subsequently
determined that the refusal of payment is not justified, the TOWN shall issue payment of the
unpaid portion of the pay request within 10-calendar days of the resolution of the matter.
Payment of the pay requests shall include a 5% deduction for retainage. When it has been
determined that the Work is substantially complete, the retainage may be reduced to 1 %.
Final payment may be applied for after a final inspection of the WORK has been completed,
identified deficiencies corrected by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the TOWN, release of liens
per Article 22 — LIENS has been submitted to the TowN, and other applicable documentation
related to the project has been completed, submitted and approved by the TowN.
Each application for progress payment must include, as a minimum, the following information:
1. Progress payment cover letter (Supplement 1) on CONTRACTOR'S company letterhead
2. Town of Fuquay-Varina Application for Payment Cover Sheet (Supplement 2)
3. Town of Fuquay-Varina Application for Payment itemized quantity sheet (Supplement 3)
4. A Certificate of Sales Tax Paid (Supplement 4). If no sales tax was paid during the pay
request period, the certificate should be included stating that no sales tax was paid.
ART. 15 TOWN's RIGHT TO DO WORK:
If the CONTRACTOR should neglect to prosecute the WORK promptly or fail to perform any
provisions of the CONTRACT, the TowN, after three (3) days written notice to the CONTRACTOR,
may without prejudice to any other remedy he/she/it may have, make good such deficiencies and
may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the CONTRACTOR.

ART. 16 TOWN' S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT:
If the CONTRACTOR should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he/she/it should make a general
assignment for the benefit of his/her/its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account
of insolvency, or if he/she/it cannot complete the CONTRACT during agreed time schedule, or if
he/she/it should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which
extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or if
he/she/it should fail to make proper payment to SUBCONTRACTORS or for material or labor, or
disregard laws, ordinances or the instructions of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR, or otherwise be
guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the CONTRACT, then the TOWN, upon the
certificate of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR that sufficient cause exists to justify such action
may without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the CONTRACTOR seven (7)
days written notice, terminate the Contract and take possession of the premises and of all
materials, tools appliances there and finish the WORK, including compensation for additional
managerial and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the CONTRACTOR. If such
expense shall exceed the unpaid balance, the CONTRACTOR shall pay the difference to the TOWN.
The expense incurred by the owner as herein provided, and the damage incurred through the
CONTRACTOR's default, shall be certified by the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR.
ART. 17 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT:
If the WORK should be stopped under an order of any COURT, or other PUBLIC AUTHORITY, for a
period of three (3) months, through no act or fault of the CONTRACTOR or if anyone employed by
him/her/it or if the Town fails to process payments in accordance with Article 14 — Progress
Payments then the CONTRACTOR may, upon seven (7) days written notice to the TOWN and the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR, stop work or terminate this CONTRACT and may recover from the
TowN payment for all WORK executed.
ART. 18 PAYMENT WITHHELD:
The TowN may withhold payment to the CONTRACTOR or on account of subsequently discovered
evidence, nullify the whole or part of any Application for Payment to such extent as may be
necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of:
(a) Defective WORK not remedied or WORK not done in a workmanlike manner.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments properly to SUBCONTRACTOR or for
materials or labor.
(d) A reasonable doubt that the CONTRACT can be completed for the balance unpaid.
(e) Damage to another CONTRACTOR.
When the above items have been cleared to the satisfaction of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR,
payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
ART 19. LIABILITY INSURANCE:
The CONTRACTOR shall maintain such insurance as will protect him/her/it from claims under
worker's compensation acts and such other insurance as will protect him/her/it and the TOWN
29

from any other claims for damages for property damage and personal injury, including death,
which may arise from operations under this CONTRACT whether such operations be by
himself/herself/itself, or by a SUBCONTRACTOR or anyone directly or indirectly employed by
either of them. Certificates of insurance shall be filed with the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR, if
he/she/it so requires, and shall be subject to his/her/its approval for adequacy of protection.
Policies of insurance coverage for personal liability and property damage shall be submitted. The
amounts of such insurance shall be as follows:
Contractors Liabilitv Insurance
The limits of liability provided by such policy or polices shall be no less that $1,000,000 for
injuries, including wrongful death, to any one person and, subject to the same limits for each
person, and an amount not less than $5,000,000 for damages on account of all occurrences.
Property damage insurance shall carry liability limits of at least $1,000,000 for damages on
account of any one occurrence and $5,000,000 for damages on account of all occurrences.
Such policy shall specifically protect the TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA by either naming the
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA as named insured under the policy or in the alternative by
providing an endorsement under the terms of which the insuror specifically agrees not only to
pay any claim or claims incurred by or resulting to the Town of Fuquay-Varina, but also
agrees to enter a defense on behalf of the OWNER to any and all suits or actions, in which the
liability of the OWNER is vicarious and is predicated upon allegations of such act of omission
by the OWNER, CONTRACTOR, or CONTRACTOR'S agents.
Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance
• The Contractor shall take out and maintain during the term of this Contract, Workers'
Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance for all of his employees, employees
employed at the site, and in case any work is sublet, the Contractor shall require the
Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability
Insurance for all employees of the latter unless such employees are covered by the protection
afforded by the Contractor.
• Any Subcontractors shall carry no less insurance than is required of the Contractor.
ART. 20 INDEMNITY:
The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify, save harmless, and defend the TOWN against all losses and
claims, demands, payments, suits, actions, recoveries, and judgments, including attorney's fees
and costs associated with the aforementioned, of every nature and description brought or
recovered against it by reason of any act or omission of the said CONTRACTOR, his/her/its agent
and employees, in the execution of the WORK or in the guarding of it. This Indemnity shall
include CONTRACTOR providing OWNER legal defense against any claim or cause of action
asserted against TOWN which may arise from the performance of the WORK.
ART.21 CLAIMS:
Any claim for damage arising under the CONTRACT shall be made in writing in a reasonable
time of the first observance of such damage.
gre

ART.22 LIENS:
Neither the final payment nor any part of the retained percentage shall become due until the
CONTRACTOR, if required, shall deliver to the TowN a complete release of all liens arising out of
this CONTRACT, or receipts in full in lien thereof and, if required in either case, an affidavit that
so far as he/she/it has knowledge or information the releases and receipts include all labor and
materials for which a lien could be filed but the CONTRACTOR may, if any SUBCONTRACTOR
refuses to furnish a release or receipt in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to the PUBLIC UTILITIES
DIRECTOR, to indemnify the TowN against any lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all
payments are made, the CONTRACTOR shall refund to the TowN all monies that the latter may be
compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all cost and a reasonable attorney's fee. A
copy of affidavit is included and shall be submitted with the CONTRACTOR's request for final
payment.
ART.23. ASSIGNMENTS:
Neither party to the CONTRACT shall assign the CONTRACT or sublet it as a whole without the
written consent of the other, nor shall the CONTRACTOR assign any monies due or to become due
to him/her/it hereunder, without previous written consent of the TOWN COUNCIL of the TOWN OF
FUQUAY-VARINA, NORTH CAROLINA.
ART. 24 SEPARATE CONTRACTS:
The TowN reserves the right to let other CONTRACTS in connection with the WORK. The
CONTRACTOR shall afford other CONTRACTORS reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and the execution of their WORK, and shall properly connect and
coordinate his/her/its WORK with others.
ART.25 SUBCONTRACTORS:
The CONTRACTOR shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the CONTRACT notify the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR in writing of the names of SUBCONTRACTORS proposed for the
WORK and shall not employ any the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR may within a reasonable time
object to as unlicensed, incompetent or unfit. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he/she/it is as fully
responsible to the TOwN for the acts and omissions of his/her/its SUBCONTRACTORS and of
persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he/she/it is for the acts and omissions
of persons directly employed by him/her/it. Nothing in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS shall create
any contractual relation between any SUBCONTRACTOR and the TowN.
ART. 26 STATUS OF PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR:
The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall have responsibility for and direction of the WORK. He
has authority to stop the WORK whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure proper
execution of the CONTRACT. He shall also have authority to reject all WORK and materials
which do not conform to the CONTRACT, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the
WORK, as in his judgment is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, as to
decide questions which arise in the execution of the WORK. The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR
shall have authority to issue instructions, directions and notices to the CONTRACTOR when
31

possible in writing. The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR will not be responsible in supervising the
WORK or the staff of the CONTRACTOR.
ART. 27 PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR'S DECISION:
The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall, within a reasonable time after their presentation to him,
make decisions in writing on all claims, of the TOWN or the CONTRACTOR and on all other
matters relating to the execution and progress of the WORK or the interpretation on the
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. All such decisions of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall be final.
ART. 28 LANDS FOR WORK:
The TOWN shall provide the lands upon which the WORK under this CONTRACT is to be done,
and land required for the erection of temporary construction of facilities and storage of
his/her/its materials, together with right of access to same.
ART. 29 CLEANING UP:
The CONTRACTOR shall, as directed by the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR remove from the Town's
property and from all other public and private property at his/her/its own expense, all temporary
structures, rubbish and waste materials resulting from his/her/its own operations.
ART. 3 0 EXISTING UTILITIES AND STRUCTURES:
The existence and location of underground utilities shall be investigated by the CONTRACTOR
and verified in the field before starting WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for
any damages to, and for maintenance and protection of, existing utilities and structures.
ART. 31 TOOLS, PLANT, AND EQUIPMENT:
If at any time before the commencement or during the WORK, tools, plants, or equipment appear
to the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR to be insufficient, inefficient, or inappropriate to secure the
quality of the WORK required or the proper rate of progress, the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR
may order the CONTRACTOR to increase their efficiency, to improve their character, to augment
their number, or to substitute new tools, plant, or equipment as the case may be, and the
CONTRACTOR must conform to such order; but the failure of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR to
give such an order shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR to secure the quality of WORK and the rate
of progress necessary to complete the WORK within the time required.
ART. 32 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES:
The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR, on the basis of measurements taken by him, or his assistants,
and the CONTRACTOR, and agreed upon by both, will compute the quantities of WORK
performed, and these measurements shall be final and binding.
32

ART. 33 WORKING DAY DEFINED:
A day shall be counted as a working day in the opinion of the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR,
whether conditions would permit the CONTRACTOR to do six (6) hours of WORK within daylight
hours. Days of delay due to acts of GOD, strikes, court orders, and things of like nature causing
delay of the work shall not be counted a working day. The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall
keep a daily record of working conditions and when requested to do so, he shall furnish the
CONTRACTOR within a reasonable time the number of working days that have elapsed.
ART. 34 PROJECT TIME DEFINED:
Project time shall consist of all calendar days, including weekends and holidays, from the
CONTRACT Notice to Proceed date through the specified number of days allowed for the
completion of the project in the CONTRACT DOCUMENT. The CONTRACTOR has been given a
project time inclusive of an anticipated amount of bad weather, be it due to the winter months or
normal rainfall during the remainder of the calendar year. Days of delay due to acts of GOD,
strikes, court orders, and things of like nature causing delay of the WORK beyond the control of
the CONTRACTOR may be reason for extension of the project time if determined justified by the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR. The PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR shall keep a daily record of
working conditions and when requested to do so, he shall furnish the CONTRACTOR within a
reasonable time the number of actual days worked up to that point in time.
ART. 35 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND DELAYS:
A. Liquidated Damages: If the WORK cannot be completed within the time stipulated in the
CONTRACT, including any extensions of time for excusable delays as herein provided, the
CONTRACTOR shall have withheld monies due it, fixed and agreed amount, as liquidated
damages for each calendar day of delay, until the work is completed, the amount as set forth in
the CONTRACT and the CONTRACTOR and his sureties shall be liable to the TOWN OF FUQUAY-
VARINA for the amount thereof.
B. Excusable Delays: The CONTRACTOR shall not be found in default nor shall the CONTRACTOR be
charged with liquidated damages for any delays in achieving completion of the WORK on or by
the CONTRACT deadline due to:
1. Any act or omission of the Town outside the scope of the Contract, including extra
WORK, acts of GOD, unusually severe and abnormal weather conditions; or,
2. Any delay of any subcontractor occasioned by any of the causes specified in
subparagraph (1) above.
Provided however, the CONTRACTOR shall provide written notice within three (3) days from the
occurrence, condition, event or other cause which is claimed to have delayed the completion of
the WORK. Such notice shall state what effect, if any, such occurrence, condition, event or other
cause is claimed to have upon the time for completing the CONTRACT WORK, and shall state in
what respects, if any, the contract completion deadline should be revised and the reasons
therefore. No claim by the CONTRACTOR for an extension of time for completion shall be
considered unless notice of such delay claim is given the Town in accordance with the
provisions of this subparagraph.
C. No Damages for Delays: The TOWN shall not be obligated or liable to the CONTRACTOR for, and
the CONTRACTOR hereby expressly waives any claims against the TOWN for, any damages, costs
33

or expenses of any nature occasioned by delays, WORK disruptions or interference, changes in
WORK sequence, WORK suspension or rescheduling arising from any act or omission of the
TOwN outside the scope of the CONTRACT, acts of GOD, unusually severe and abnormal weather
conditions or other causes beyond the CONTRACTOR'S control, it being understood and agreed
the CONTRACTOR'S sole and exclusive remedy in the event of his inability to achieve completion
by the CONTRACT deadline due to claimed delays shall be an extension of the CONTRACT
schedule, but only if a claim for such extension is properly made in accordance with the
provisions of subparagraph (B) above.
ART. 36 CONTRACTOR LICENSE:
All invited BIDDERS and CONTRACTORS shall be advised that those who submit formal bids on
this project must be properly licensed in the State of North Carolina whether he/she (they) is/are
a resident or non-resident of this State, in accordance with N.C.G.S. §87-1, et.seq., and shall be
advised that they must show evidence of a license with appropriate classification issued by the
North Carolina Licensing Board for General Contractor's before the bid is considered.
The BIDDERS are advised that Article 25 entitled SUBCONTRACTORS of the General Conditions
shall be strictly adhered to during the term of this CONTRACT.
ART. 37 SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR:
Except where the CONTRACTOR is an individual and gives his/her/its personal superintendence to
the work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide a competent superintendent, satisfactory to the TowN
OF FUQUAY-VARINA on the work at all times during working hours with full authority to act for
him/her/it. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide an adequate staff for the proper coordination
and prosecution of the WORK.
ART. 38 SANITARY FACILITIES:
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, and maintain ample sanitary facilities for the workers.
As the needs arise, a sufficient number of enclosed temporary toilets shall be conveniently
placed as required by the sanitary codes of the STATE and the TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA.
Drinking water shall be provided from an approved source, so piped or transported as to keep it
safe and fresh and served from single service containers or satisfactory types of sanitary
drinking stands or fountains. All such facilities and services shall be furnished in strict
accordance with existing and governing health regulations.
ART. 39 SUBCONTRACTED WORK AND SUBCONTRACTORS:
A.The CONTRACTOR shall perform a minimum 40 percent of the WORK under the CONTRACT
with his/her/its own forces. Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the CONTRACT, the
CONTRACTOR shall not subcontract more than 60 percent of the work stipulated in this
CONTRACT.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the CONTRACT, notify the
PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR in writing of the names of SUBCONTRACTORS proposed for the
WORK and shall not employ any SUBCONTRACTORS that the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR
may within a reasonable time object to as incompetent or unfit. The CONTRACTOR agrees
M

that he/she/it is as fully responsible to the TOwN for the acts and omissions of his/her/its
SUBCONTRACTOR and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by him/her/it.
Nothing in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS shall create any contractual relation between any
SUBCONTRACTOR and the TowN.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of SUBCONTRACTORS as well as any change in
SUBCONTRACTORS during the work on the CONTRACT from the PUBLIC UTILITIES DIRECTOR.
A period of seven (7) days minimum is required for the approval of a SUBCONTRACTOR.
ART. 40 GUARANTEE OF WORK:
The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee his/her/its work performed under his/her/its CONTRACT
against failures or trouble due to faulty workmanship or materials for a period of twelve (12)
months from the date of acceptance of the work. This shall include any alternate bids accepted
with this CONTRACT. The equipment installed shall be warranted as required in the Technical
Specifications.
35

STANDARD
FORMS
36

* * * PUT ON CONTRACTOR'S LETTERHEAD * * *
DATE:
TO: Town of Fuquay-Varina
We hereby certify that the labor and materials listed on this request for payment have been used in the
construction of this Work, or that all materials included in this request for payment and not yet incorporated into
the construction are now on the site or stored at an approved location with proper insurance to protect these
stored materials; and that all lawful charges for labor, materials and the like, covered by previous Certificates of
Payment have been paid and that all other lawful charges on which this request for payment is based have been
paid for in full or will be paid for in full from the funds received in payment of this request within ten (10)
calendar days from receipt of this partial payment from the OWNER.
CONTRACTOR:
M.
TIME:
State of
County of
Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20
My Commission Expires
37
Notary Public (Seal)

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
Contractor
Period
Project No.
Payment No.
Project
SHEET OF
The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of its knowledge and belief, all items, units, quantities and prices of all work and material indicated on
sheet(s) of this periodic estimate are correct; that all Work has been performed and Materials supplied in full accordance with the terms and conditions
of the construction Contract Documents between the undersigned as Contractor and the Town of Fuquay-Varina as Owner, dated ,
and all authorized changes thereto; that the following is a true and correct statement of the Contract amount up to and including the last day of the period
covered by this estimate; and that no part of the "Total Amount Due" has been received.
Total Contract Amount, Including Change Orders
Total Amount Earned, To Date
5% Retainage
Total Earned Less Retainage
Total Previously Approved
Amount Due This Estimate
Unpaid From Previous Estimate
Current Amount Due
Balance to Finish, Including Retainage
% Earned
The Contractor further certifies that all claims outstanding as of this date against the undersigned as Contractor for labor, materials, and expendable
equipment employed in the performance of said Contract up to the date of this estimate have been paid in full accordance with the requirements of this
Contract.
CONTRACTOR BY TITLE DATE
APPROVAL FOR PAYMENT:
Resident Project Representative
Engineer Town of Fuquay-Varina — Owner's Representative

SHEET OF
APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
Town of Fuquay-Varina, North Carolina
PAYMENT NO.
PROJECT
PERIOD
CONTRACTOR
ITEM
NO
DESCRIPTION OF ITEMS
UNIT
UNIT
PRICE
BID
QUANTITIES
CURRENT
QUANTITY
QUANTITY
TO DATE
CURRENT
AMOUNT
CONTRACT
AMOUNT
% COMP
AMOUNT
EARNED TO
DATE
TOTAL EARNED TO DATE _
TOTAL PAID TO DATE
10% RETAINAGE
AMOUNT DUE THIS ESTIMATE
39

CERTIFICATE OF SALES TAX PAID
PAYMENT NO.
PROJECT OWNER - Town Of Fuquay-Varina, Wake County, North Carolina
CONTRACTOR FOR PERIOD TO
VENDOR ADDRESS INVOICE # DATE AMOUNT NC TAX COUNTY COUNTY TAX
I hereby certify that the above listed vendors were paid sales tax upon purchases of building materials during the period covered by this
construction estimate, and the property upon which such taxes were paid was or will be used in the performance of this Contract. No tax on
purchases or rentals of tools and/or equipment is included in the above list. All of the materials listed above became a part of or are annexed in the
above referenced construction project.
LM
Signature Title
, being duly sworn, certifies that the foregoing statement of sales taxes paid in connection with the referenced Contract is
true to the best of his or her knowledge and belief.
Sworn to before me this day of , 20
My commission expires , 20_
M
Notary Public

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
2019 Tertiary Filter Relocation - 41 -

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

1- GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Work to be done under these Contracts and in accordance with these Specifications
consists of furnishing all equipment, superintendence, labor, skill, material and all other
items necessary for the Filter Relocation.
The Contractor shall perform all work required for such construction in accordance with
the Contract Documents and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract,
complete and ready for use.
B. The principal features of the Work to be performed under this Contract includes, but is
not limited to the following:
Relocation of a Tertiary Disc Filter Unit from Terrible Creek WWTP to Brighton Forest
WWTP. Installation of an intermediate pump station, a valve vault, new pump station
influent and effluent piping, new filter effluent piping, an area light, and a concrete pad at
Brighton Forest WWTP. Reinstallation of the original filter control panel and platform to
access the filter unit.
C. The foregoing description(s) shall not be construed as a complete description of all work
required.
1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The work to be done is shown and described in the set of Specifications and on the
drawings entitled Brighton Forest WWTP Tertiary Filter Relocation.
1.3 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT
A. Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the work for the pump station
installation with a precast concrete wetwell and submersible pumps. If wet -well mounted
suction -lift pumps are selected as an alternate, departures from the Drawings as
deemed necessary by the Contractor to accommodate the materials and equipment he
proposes to furnish, shall be detailed and submitted as soon as practicable to the
Engineer for approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written
approval of the Engineer. Approved changes shall be made without additional cost to
the Owner for this work or related work under other Contracts of the Project.
1.4 TIME OF WORK
A. The normal time of work for this Contract is limited to 40 hours per week and shall
generally be between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday
unless specifically allowed by the Owner.
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.5 LIMITS OF WORK AREA
A. The Contractor shall confine his construction operations to the defined limits of
disturbance (LOD) area as shown on the Project Drawing C4. The Contractor shall use
the dirt road on the west side of the WWTP for access.
1.6 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING OPERATIONS
A. The existing fixed media filters shall remain in operation allowing for wastewater
treatment through the existing plant during construction of the pump station and the
relocation of the AquaDisk Filter from Terrible Creek WWTP.
B. A maximum 4 hour shutdown of the Brighton Forest WWTP in order to tie in piping
between the new pump station and the existing Clarifier header and between the
existing UV system and the AquaDisk shall be allowed and coordinated with the Owner.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Progress Schedule
Within thirty (30) days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor
shall prepare and submit five (5) copies of his proposed progress schedule to the
Engineer for review and approval.
2. Schedule shall be updated monthly, depicting progress to the last day of the
month and five (5) copies submitted to the Engineer not later than the fifth day of
the month, and prior to the application for progress payment. Failure to provide
monthly schedule updates will be grounds for the Engineer or Owner to withhold
progress payment approval.
3. Schedule shall be prepared in the form of a horizontal bar chart showing in detail
the proposed sequence of the work and identifying construction activities for
each structure and for each portion of work.
4. Schedule shall be time scaled, identifying the first day of each week. The
Schedule shall be provided with estimated dates for Early Start, Early Finish,
Late Start and Late Finish. The work shall be scheduled to complete the Project
within the Contract time. The Late Finish date shall equal the Contract
Completion Date.
B. Working Drawings
Shop Drawings
a. Contractor shall submit for review by the Engineer Shop Drawings for all
fabricated work and for all manufactured items required to be furnished by
the Contract Documents.
Where manufacturer's publications in the form of catalogs, brochures,
illustrations or other data sheets are submitted in lieu of prepared Shop
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Drawings, such submittals shall specifically indicate the item for which
approval is requested. Identification of items shall be made in ink, and
submittals showing only general information are not acceptable.
2. Layout and Installation Drawings
a. Contractor shall prepare and submit for review by the Engineer layout and
installation drawings for pumps, piping, valves, fittings, and electrical
work.
3. Contractor Responsibilities
a. If the submittals contain any departures from the Contract Documents,
specific mention thereof shall be made in the Contractor's letter of
transmittal. Otherwise, the review of such submittals shall not constitute
approval of the departure.
b. No materials or equipment shall be ordered, fabricated, shipped or any
work performed until the Engineer returns to the Contractor the
submittals, herein required, annotated "Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish
as Corrected".
C. Where errors, deviations, and/or omissions are discovered at a later date
in any of the submittals, the Engineer's prior review of the submittals does
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for correcting all errors,
deviations, and/or omissions.
4. Procedure for Review
a. Submittals shall be transmitted in sufficient time to allow the Engineer at
least thirty (30) working days for review and processing.
b. Contractor shall transmit seven (7) copies of all technical data or drawing
to be reviewed.
C. Submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal containing date,
project title, Contractor's name, number and titles of submittals, a list of
relevant specification sections, notification of departures from any
Contract requirement, and any other pertinent data to facilitate review.
d. Submittals will be annotated by the Engineer in one of the following ways:
e. "Furnish as Submitted" (FAS) - no exceptions are taken
f. "Furnish as Corrected" (FAC) - minor corrections are noted and shall be
made.
g. "Revise and Resubmit" (R&R) - major corrections are noted and a full
resubmittal is required.
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

"For Information Only — Not Reviewed" (FIO) — submittal was received
and was distributed for record purposes without review.
If a submittal is satisfactory to the Engineer in full or in part, the Engineer
will annotate the submittal "Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish as
Corrected", retain four (4) copies and return remaining copies to the
Contractor. If reproducible transparencies are submitted, the Engineer
will retain the copies and return the reproducible transparencies to the
Contractor.
If a full resubmittal is required, the Engineer will annotate the submittal
"Revise and Resubmit" and transmit three (3) copies to the Contractor for
appropriate action. If reproducible transparencies are submitted, the
Engineer will retain the copies and return the reproducible transparencies
to the Contractor.
Contractor shall continue to resubmit submittals if they are returned
"Revise and Resubmit" as required by the Engineer until submittals are
acceptable to the Engineer. It is understood by the Contractor that Owner
may charge the Contractor the Engineer's charges for review in the event
a submittal is not approved (either "Furnish as Submitted" or "Furnish as
Corrected") by the third submittal for a system or piece of equipment.
These charges shall be for all costs associated with engineering review,
meetings with the Contractor or manufacturer, etc., commencing with the
fourth submittal of a system or type of equipment submitted for a
particular Specification Section.
5. Record Working Drawings
a. Contractor shall maintain current record drawings onsite for the
Engineer's review. Record drawings shall be updated monthly at a
minimum.
Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer one
complete set of all accepted Working Drawings, including equipment shop
drawings, piping, electrical work, instrumentation system, etc.
C. Working Drawings furnished shall be corrected to include any departures
from previously accepted Drawings.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Two (2) paper copies and one (1) digital copy in PDF format of the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, prepared specifically for this Project, shall be furnished for
the Filters furnished under this Contract. The manuals shall be provided to the
Engineer not less than 30 days prior to the start-up of the equipment.
2. Manuals shall contain complete information in connection with assembly,
operation, lubrication, adjustment, wiring diagrams and schematics,
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

maintenance, and repair, including detailed parts lists with drawings or
photographs identifying the parts.
1.8 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Final Cleaning
At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from and
about the site of the work, and all temporary structures, construction signs, tools,
scaffolding, materials, supplies and equipment he used in the performance of the
work. Contractor shall broom clean paved surfaces and rake clean other
surfaces of grounds.
2. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all materials, equipment and structures; all
marred surfaces shall be touched up to match adjacent surfaces; dirty filters and
burned out lights replaced as required; all glass surfaces cleaned and floors
cleaned and polished so as to leave work in a clean and new appearing
condition.
3. Contractor shall maintain cleaning until project, or portion thereof, is occupied by
the Owner.
B. Final Cleanup; Site Rehabilitation
Before finally leaving the site, the Contractor shall wash and clean all exposed
surfaces which have become soiled or marked, and shall remove from the site of
work all accumulated debris and surplus materials of any kind which result from
his operation, including construction equipment, tools, sheds, sanitary
enclosures, etc. The Contractor shall leave all equipment, fixtures, and work,
which he has installed, in a clean condition. The completed project shall be
turned over to the Owner in a neat and orderly condition.
2. The site of the work shall be rehabilitated or developed in accordance with other
sections of the Specifications and the Drawings. In the absence of any portion of
these requirements, the Contractor shall completely rehabilitate the site to a
condition and appearance equal or superior to that which existed just prior to
construction, except for those items whose permanent removal or relocation was
required in the Contract Documents or ordered by the Owner.
C. Final Inspection
Final cleaning and repairing shall be so arranged as to be finished upon
completion of the construction work. The Contractor will make his final cleaning
and repairing, and any portion of the work finally inspected and accepted by the
Engineer shall be kept clean by the Contractor, until the final acceptance of the
entire work.
2. When the Contractor has finally cleaned and repaired the whole or any portion of
the work, he shall notify the Engineer that he is ready for final inspection of the
whole or a portion of the work, and the Engineer will thereupon inspect the work.
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

If the work is not found satisfactory, the Engineer will order further cleaning,
repairs, or replacement.
3. When such further cleaning or repairing is completed, the Engineer, upon further
notice, will again inspect the work. The "Final Payment" will not be processed
until the Contractor has complied with the requirements set forth, and the
Engineer has made his final inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the
entire work is properly and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.9 PAINTING
A. Work shall include surface preparation, paint application, inspection of painted surfaces
and corrective action required, protection of adjacent surfaces, cleanup and appurtenant
work required for the proper painting of all surfaces to be painted. Surfaces to be
painted are all piping and fittings that are above grade.
B. Painting operations shall be accomplished by skilled craftsman and licensed by the state
to perform painting work.
C. Subject to compliance with the Specifications, provide products from one of the following
manufacturers:
Tnemec Company Inc.
2. Ameron
3. CARBOLINE
4. Sherwin-Williams
D. Shop Painting
Shop prime fabricated steel and equipment with at least one shop coat of prime
paint compatible with finish paint system specified. Prepare surface to be shop
painted in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations and as
specified. Finish coats may be shop applied, if approved by the Engineer.
Package, store and protect shop painted items until they are incorporated into
Work. Repair painted surfaces damaged during handling, transporting, storage,
or installation to provide a painting system equal to the original painting received
at the shop.
2. Identify surface preparation and shop paints on Shop Drawings. Verify
compatibility with field applied paints.
E. SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturers recommendation
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2. Surfaces to be painted shall be clean and dry, and free of dust, rust, scale, and
foreign matter. No solvent cleaning, power or hand tool cleaning shall be
permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
3. Protect or remove, during painting operations, hardware, accessories, machined
surfaces, nameplates, lighting fixtures, and similar items not intended to be
painted prior to cleaning and painting. Reposition items removed upon
completion of painting operations.
4. Examine surfaces to be coated to determine that surfaces are suitable for
specified surface preparation and painting. Report to Engineer surfaces found to
be unsuitable in writing. Do not start surface preparation until unsuitable
surfaces have been corrected. Starting surface preparation precludes
subsequent claim that such surfaces were unsuitable for the specified surface
preparation or painting.
5. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with specifications and
manufacturer's recommendations. Provide additional surface preparation, and fill
coats where manufacturer recommends additional surface preparation, in
addition to requirements of specification.
6. Touch-up shop or field applied coatings damaged by surface preparation or any
other activity, with the same shop or field applied coating; even to the extent of
applying an entire coat when required to correct damage prior to application of
the next coating. Touch-up coats are in addition to the specified applied
systems, and not considered a field coat.
7. Protect motors and other equipment during blasting operation to ensure blasting
material is not blown into motors or other equipment. Inspect motors and other
equipment after blasting operations and certify that no damage occurred, or
where damage occurred, the proper remedial action was taken.
8. Color charts shall be distributed to Owner for Owner selection of color
F. PAINTING SCHEDULE
APPLICATION
PAINTING SYSTEM & NO.
PRODUCT
REFERENCE
TOTAL MIN. DRY FILM
OF COATS
(BELOW)
THICKNESS (MILS)
1 coat epoxy polyamide primer
104
4-6
All new and existing
above piping, fittings,
1 coat epoxy polyamide
102
4-6
and valves.
1 coat aliphatic polyurethane
115
3-5
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PRODUCT
Tnemec
PPG /
Sherwin -
Series
REF.
SYSTEM
PURPOSE
AMERON
CARBOLINE
Williams
Epoxy
Finish coat
AMERLOCK
Carboguard
102
N69
2
890
Dura-Plate 235
polyamide
semi -gloss or gloss
Epoxy
AMERCOAT
Carboguard
Macropoxy
104
Primer
66
Polyamide —metal
385
893SG
646
Aliphatic
1074 or
AMERCOAT
Carbothane
Acrolon
115
Polyurethane
Finish coat
1075
450 HS
134HB
218HS
-END OF SECTION-
31240-008: 04-12-19 1-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2 - EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place in acceptable operation all
mechanical equipment and all necessary accessories as specified herein, as shown on
the Drawings, and as required for a complete and operable system.
B. The mechanical equipment shall be provided complete with all accessories, special
tools, spare parts, mountings, and other appurtenances as specified, and as may be
required for a complete and operating installation.
C. It is the intent of these Specifications that the Contractor shall provide the Owner
complete and operational equipment/systems. To this end, it is the responsibility of the
Contractor to coordinate all interfaces with related mechanical, structural, electrical,
instrumentation and control work and to provide necessary ancillary items such as
controls, wiring, etc., to make each piece of equipment operational as intended by the
Specifications.
D. The complete installation shall be free from excessive vibration, cavitation, noise, and oil
or water leaks.
1.2 GENERAL INFORMATION
A. All parts of the equipment furnished shall, be designed and constructed for the maximum
stresses occurring during fabrication, transportation, installation, testing, and all
conditions of operation. All materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials
shall be entirely suitable for the service to which the units are to be subjected and shall
conform to all applicable sections of these Specifications.
B. The equipment furnished under this Contract shall be guaranteed to be free from defects
in workmanship, design and/or materials for a period of two (2) years. The period of
such warranties shall start on the date the particular equipment is placed in use by the
Owner with corresponding start-up certification provided by the manufacturer's technical
representative as specified herein, provided that the equipment demonstrates
satisfactory performance during the thirty day operational period after the equipment
startup. If the equipment does not perform satisfactorily during the thirty day operational
period, the start of the warranty period will be delayed until the equipment demonstrates
proper operation. The Equipment Supplier shall repair or replace without charge to the
Owner any part of equipment which is defective or showing undue wear within the
guarantee period, or replace the equipment with new equipment if the mechanical
performance is unsatisfactory; furnishing all parts, materials, labor, etc., necessary to
return the equipment to its specified performance level.
31240-008: 04-11-19 2-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.3 ALIGNMENT
A. Grouting
Fill anchor bolt holes or sleeves with grout, after bolt alignment is proven, and
prior to placing grout under equipment bases.
2. Surface Preparation. Roughen surface by chipping, removing laitance, and
unsound concrete. Clean area of all foreign material such as oil, grease, and
scale. Saturate area with water at least 4 hours prior to grouting, removing
excess water ponds.
3. Application. Place grout after the equipment base has been set and its alignment
and level have been approved. Form around the base, mix grout, and place in
accordance with the grout manufacturers published instructions. Eliminate all air
or water pockets beneath the base using a drag chain or rope.
4. Finishing. Point the edges of the grout to form a smooth 45 degree slope.
5. After grout has cured (not before 3 days after placement) paint exposed surfaces
of grout with shellac.
6. Level Verification. After grout has cured, and immediately prior to drive
alignment, recheck equipment for level and plumb. Re -level and square as
necessary. Hold final checks for inspection and approval by Engineer.
B. Belt tensioning. Set drive belt tension to manufacturer's specification for the belt type.
Recheck alignment after drive tensioning.
1.4 WELDING
1. The Equipment Manufacturer's shop welding procedures, welders, and welding
operators shall be qualified and certified in accordance with the requirement of
AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding
Code - Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable.
2. The Contractor's welding procedures, welders, and welding operators shall be
qualified and certified in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code - Steel" or AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code -
Aluminum" of the American Welding Society, as applicable.
3. The Contractor shall perform all field welding in conformance with the information
shown on the Equipment Manufacturer's drawings regarding location, type, size,
and length of all welds in accordance with "Standard Welding Symbols" AWS
A2.0 of the American Welding Society, and special conditions, as shown by
notes and details.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-11-19 2-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all work associated with
excavation, including off -site borrow excavation, dewatering, backfill, drainage layers
beneath and around structures, foundation and backfill stone, filter fabric, embankments,
stockpiling topsoil and any excess suitable material in designated areas, in place
compaction of embankments, backfill and subgrades beneath foundations and roadways,
excavation support, disposing from the site all unsuitable materials, providing erosion and
sedimentation control grading, site grading and preparation of pavement and structure
subgrade, and other related and incidental work as required to complete the work shown on
the Drawings and specified herein.
B. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on
the Drawings or established by the Engineer.
C. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conduct the construction activities in
such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off -site sedimentation be absolutely
minimized.
D. All work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the limitations
of the latest editions of the North Carolina Department of Transportation Standard
Specifications for Roads and Structures and the North Carolina Erosion and Sediment
Control Planning and Design Manual.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work herein
shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced
Specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of
Bid.
North Carolina Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads and
Structures, latest edition.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
ASTM C 127 Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
ASTM C 136
ASTM D 422
ASTM D 423
ASTM D 424
31240-008: 04-18-19
Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
Test for Liquid Limit of Soils.
Test for Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
3-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

ASTM C 535 Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
ASTM D 698 Standard Method of Test for the Moisture - Density Relations of
Soils Using a 5.5 lb. (2.5 kg) Rammer and a 12-inch (305 mm)
Drop.
ASTM D1556 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method.
ASTM D1557 Test for Moisture -Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lbs. (4.5 kg) Rammer and 18-inch (457 mm)
Drop.
ASTM D2049 Test Method for Relative Density of Cohesionless Soils.
ASTM D2167 Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber -Balloon Method.
ASTM D2216 Test for Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of
Soil, Rock, and Soil Aggregate Mixtures.
ASTM D2487 Test for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
ASTM D2922 Test for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
1.03 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Attention is directed to the fact that there may be water pipes, storm drains and other utilities
located in the area of proposed excavation. Perform all repairs to same in the event that
excavation activities disrupt service. Contractor shall acquire the services of a licensed
Geotechnical Engineer in the State of North Carolina to evaluate subgrade for support of
relocated Tertiary Filter and Pump Station/Valve Vault. Prior to placing structures at new
grade locations Geotechnical Engineer shall ensure that soil is adequate to provide a
minimum of 1,500 psf allowable bearing capacity. Contractor shall submit a signed and
sealed soil bearing recommendation from a currently registered Professional Geotechnical
Engineer in the State of North Carolina prior to placing new structures at locations shown.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 1 —General Project
Requirements, the Contractor shall submit the following:
Name and location of all material suppliers.
2. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified above for each source of each
material.
3. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and all required permits for
use of those sites.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. Plans and cross sections of open cut excavations showing side slopes and limits of
the excavation at grade.
5. Samples of synthetic filter fabric and reinforced plastic membrane with
manufacturer's certificates or catalog cuts stating the mechanical and physical
properties. Samples shall be at least one (1) foot wide and four (4) feet long taken
across the roll with the warp direction appropriately marked.
6. Construction drawings and structural calculations for anytypes of excavation support
required. Drawings and calculations shall be sealed by a currently registered
Professional Engineer in the State of North Carolina.
7. Monitoring plan and pre -construction condition inspection and documentation of all
adjacent structures, utilities, and roadways near proposed installation of excavation
support systems and near areas where dewatering is required to facilitate
construction.
8. Dewatering procedures.
9. Contractor shall submit a signed and sealed soil bearing recommendation from a
currently registered Professional Geotechnical Engineer in the State of North
Carolina prior to placing new structures at locations shown. See Subsurface
Conditions above.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Soil and rock material shall be excavated, transported, placed, and stored in a manner so as
to prevent contamination, segregation and excessive wetting. Materials which have become
contaminated or segregated will not be permitted in the performance of the work and shall
be removed from the site.
1.06 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A. When the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the work, the Contractor
shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any and all damage or injury to persons or property resulting from the use of
explosives.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SELECT FILL
A. Soils from the excavations meeting requirements stipulated herein with the exceptions of
topsoil and organic material may be used as select fill for backfilling, constructing
embankments, reconstructing existing embankments, and as structural subgrade support.
B. Select fill used for embankment construction shall be a silty or clayey soil material with a
Maximum Liquid Limit (LL) of 50 and a Plasticity Index (PI) between 7 and 20.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Select fill used for backfilling shall either be material as described in Paragraph B above or a
granular soil material with a Maximum Plasticity Index (PI) of 6.
D. Regardless of material used as select fill, materials shall be compacted at a moisture
content satisfactory to the Engineer, which shall be approximately that required to produce
the maximum density except that the moisture content shall not be more than 1 % below nor
more than 4% above the optimum moisture content for the particular material tested in
accordance with the ASTM D698.
E. Select fill used as subgrade support shall be a coarse aggregate material meeting the
gradation requirements of #57 or #78 aggregates in accordance with ASTM C-33, or
Aggregate Base Course (ABC) as defined in Section 4 — Aggregate Materials.
F. Where excavated material does not meet requirements for select fill, Contractor shall furnish
off -site borrow material meeting the specified requirements herein. Determination of
whether the borrow material will be paid for as an extra cost will be made based on Article 4
of the General Conditions, as amended by the Supplementary Conditions. When the
excavated material from required excavations is suitable for use as backfill, bedding, or
embankments, but is replaced with off -site borrow material for the Contractor's convenience,
the costs associated with such work and material shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.02 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be considered the surface layer of soil and sod, suitable for use in seeding and
planting. It shall contain no mixture of refuse or any material toxic to plant growth.
2.03 GEOTEXTILES
A. The Contractor shall provide geotextiles as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
The materials and placement shall be as indicated under Section 6 - Geotextiles.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL
A. In all areas to be excavated, filled, paved, or graveled the topsoil shall be stripped to its full
depth and shall be deposited in storage piles on the site, at locations designated by the
Engineer, for subsequent reuse. Topsoil shall be kept separated from other excavated
materials and shall be piled free of roots and other undesirable materials.
3.02 EXCAVATION
A. All material excavated, regardless of its nature or composition, shall be classified as
UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. Excavation shall include the removal of all soil, rock,
weathered rock, rocks of all types, boulders, conduits, pipe, and all other obstacles
encountered and shown to be removed within the limits of excavation shown on the
Drawings or specified herein. The cost of excavation shall be included in the Lump Sum Bid
Price and no additional payment will be made for the removal of obstacles encountered
within the excavation limits shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Where blasting is necessary to perform the required excavations, blasting shall be
performed as stipulated.
C. All suitable material removed in the excavation shall be used as far as practicable in the
formation of embankments, subgrades, and shoulders, and at such other places as may be
indicated on the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer. No excavation shall be wasted
except as may be permitted by the Engineer. Refer to the drawings for specific location and
placement of suitable excavated materials in the formation of embankments, backfill, and
structural and roadway foundations. THE ENGINEER AND/OR MATERIALS TESTING
CONSULTANT WILL DESIGNATE MATERIALS THAT ARE UNSUITABLE. The Contractor
shall furnish off site disposal areas for the unsuitable material. Where suitable materials
containing excessive moisture are encountered above grade in cuts, the Contractor shall
construct above grade ditch drains prior to the excavation of the cut material when in the
opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant such measures are necessaryto
provide proper construction.
D. All excavations shall be made in the dry and in such a manner and to such widths as will
give ample room for properly constructing and inspecting the structures and/or piping they
are to contain and for such excavation support, pumping and drainage as may be required.
Excavation shall be made in accordance with the grades and details shown on the Drawings
and as specified herein.
E. Excavation slopes shall be flat enough to avoid slides that will cause disturbance of the
subgrade or damage of adjacent areas. Excavation requirements and slopes shall be as
indicated in the Drawings. The Contractor shall intercept and collect surface runoff both at
the top and bottom of cut slopes. The intersection of slopes with natural ground surfaces,
including the beginning and ending of cut slopes, shall be uniformly rounded as shown on
the Drawings or as may be indicated by the Engineer. Concurrent with the excavation of
cuts the Contractor shall construct intercepting berm ditches or earth berms along and on
top of the cut slopes at locations shown on the Drawings or designated by the Engineer. All
slopes shall be finished to reasonably uniform surfaces acceptable for seeding and mulching
operations. No rock or boulders shall be left in place which protrude more than 1 foot within
the typical section cut slope lines, and all rock cuts shall be cleaned of loose and
overhanging material. All protruding roots and other objectionable vegetation shall be
removed from slopes. The Contractor shall be required to submit plans of open -cut
excavation for review by the Engineer before approval is given to proceed.
F. It is the intent of these Specifications that all structures shall bear on an aggregate base,
crushed stone or screened gravel bedding placed to the thickness shown on the Drawings,
specified in these Specifications, or not less than 6-inches. Bedding for process piping shall
be as shown on the Drawings.
G. The bottom of all excavations for structures and pipes shall be examined by the Engineer
and/or materials testing consultant for bearing value and the presence of unsuitable
material. If, in the opinion of the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant, additional
excavation is required due to the low bearing value of the subgrade material, or if the
in -place soils are soft, yielding, pumping and wet, the Contractor shall remove such material
to the required width and depth and replace it with thoroughly compacted select fill, and/or
crushed stone or screened gravel as indicated by the Engineer. Payment for such additional
work ordered by the Engineer shall be made as an extra by a Change Order in accordance
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

with the General Conditions and Section 1. No payment will be made for subgrade
disturbance caused by inadequate dewatering or improper construction methods.
H. All cuts shall be brought to the grade and cross section shown on the Drawings, or
established by the Engineer, prior to final inspection and acceptance by the Engineer.
Slides and overbreaks which occur due to negligence, carelessness or improper
construction techniques on the part of the Contractor shall be removed and disposed of by
the Contractor as indicated by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. If grading
operations are suspended for any reason whatsoever, partially completed cut and fill slopes
shall be brought to the required slope and the work of seeding and mulching or other
required erosion and sedimentation control operations shall be performed.
Where the excavation exposes sludge, sludge contaminated soil or other odorous materials,
the Contractor shall cover such material at the end of each workday with a minimum of
6-inches and a maximum of 24-inches of clean fill. The work shall be an odor abatement
measure and the material shall be placed to the depth deemed satisfactory by the Engineer
for this purpose.
3.03 EXCAVATION SUPPORT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, place, and maintain such excavation support which may be
required to support sides of excavation or to protect pipes and structures from possible
damage and to provide safe working conditions. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any
point sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, he may order additional supports
put in at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
adequacy of all supports used and for all damage resulting from failure of support system or
from placing, maintaining and removing it.
B. Selection of and design of any proposed excavation support systems is exclusively the
responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall submit drawings and calculations on
proposed systems sealed by a Professional Engineer currently registered in the State of
North Carolina.
C. The Contractor shall exercise caution in the installation and removal of supports to insure
that excessive or unusual loadings are not transmitted to any new or existing structure. The
Contractor shall promptly repair at his expense any and all damage that can be reasonably
attributed to installation or removal of excavation support system.
D. Contractor shall monitor movement in the excavation support systems as well as movement
at adjacent structures, utilities and roadways near excavation supports. Contractor shall
submit a monitoring plan developed by the excavation support design engineer. All pre -
construction condition assessment and documentation of adjacent structures on -site and off -
site shall be performed by the Contractor. If any sign of distress such as cracking or
movement occurs in any adjacent structure, utility or roadway during installation of supports,
subsequent excavation, service period of supports, subsequent backfill and construction, or
removal of supports, Engineer shall be notified immediately. Contractor shall be exclusively
responsible for repair of any damage to any roadway, structure, utility, pipes, etc. both on -
site and off -site, as a result of his operations.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. All excavation supports shall be removed upon completion of the work except as indicated
herein. The Engineer may permit supports to be left in place at the request and expense of
the Contractor. The Engineer may order certain supports left permanently in place in
addition to that required by the Contract. The cost of the materials so ordered left in place,
less a reasonable amount for the eliminated expense of the removal work omitted, will be
paid as an extra by a Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and Division
1. Any excavation supports left in place shall be cut off at least two (2) feet below the
finished ground surface or as directed by the Engineer.
3.04 PROTECTION OF SUBGRADE
A. To minimize the disturbance of bearing materials and provide a firm foundation, the
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
Use of heavy rubber -tired construction equipment shall not be permitted on the final
subgrade unless it can be demonstrated that drawdown of groundwater throughout
the entire area of the structure is at least 3 feet below the bottom of the excavation
(subgrade). Even then, the use of such equipment shall be prohibited should
subgrade disturbance result from concentrated wheel loads.
2. Subgrade soils disturbed through the operations of the Contractor shall be
excavated and replaced with compacted select fill or crushed stone at the
Contractor's expense as indicated by the Engineer.
3. The Contractor shall provide positive protection against penetration of frost into
materials below the bearing level during work in winter months. This protection can
consist of a temporary blanket of straw or salt hay covered with a plastic membrane
or other acceptable means.
3.05 PROOFROLLING
A. The subgrade of all structures and all areas that will support pavements or select fill shall be
proofrolled. After stripping of topsoil, excavation to subgrade and prior to placement of fills,
the exposed subgrade shall be carefully inspected by probing and testing as needed. Any
topsoil or other organic material still in place, frozen, wet, soft, or loose soil, and other
undesirable materials shall be removed. The exposed subgrade shall be proofrolled with a
heavily loaded tandem -wheeled dump truck to check for pockets of soft material hidden
beneath a thin crust of better soil. Any unsuitable materials thus exposed shall be removed
and replaced with an approved compacted material.
3.06 DEWATERING
A. The Contractor shall do all dewatering as required for the completion of the work.
Procedures for dewatering proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for
review prior to any earthwork operations. All water removed by dewatering operations shall
be disposed of in accordance with the North Carolina Sedimentation Pollution Control Act.
B. The dewatering system shall be of sufficient size and capacity as required to control
groundwater or seepage to permit proper excavation operations, embankment construction
and reconstruction, subgrade preparation, and to allow concrete to be placed in a dry
condition. The system shall include a sump system or other equipment, appurtenances and
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

other related earthwork necessary for the required control of water. The Contractor shall
drawdown groundwater to at least 3 feet below the bottom of excavations (subgrade) at all
times in order to maintain a dry and undisturbed condition.
C. The Contractor shall control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source. Water
shall be controlled and its disposal provided for at each berm, structure, etc. The entire
periphery of the excavation areas shall be ditched and diked to prevent water from entering
the excavation. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for disposal of the water and shall
provide all necessary means at no additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall
be solely responsible for proper design, installation, proper operation, maintenance, and any
failure of any component of the system.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to the Owner, any
damage to work in place and the excavation, including damage to the bottom due to heave
and including removal of material and pumping out of the excavated area. The Contractor
shall be responsible for damages to any other area or structure caused by his failure to
maintain and operate the dewatering system proposed and installed by the Contractor.
E. The Contractor shall take all the steps that he considers necessaryto familiarize himself with
the surface and subsurface site conditions, and shall obtain the data that is required to
analyze the water and soil environment at the site and to assure that the materials used for
the dewatering systems will not erode, deteriorate, or clog to the extent that the dewatering
systems will not perform properly during the period of dewatering. Copies of logs of borings
and laboratory test results are available to the Contractor. This data is furnished for
information only, and it is expressly understood that the Owner and Engineer will not be held
responsible for any interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by the Contractor.
F. Prior to the execution of the work, the Contractor, Owner and Engineer shall jointly survey
the condition of adjoining structures. Photographs and records shall be made of any prior
settlement or cracking of structures, pavements, and the like, that may become the subject
of possible damage claims.
3.07 EMBANKMENTS
A. The Contractor shall perform the construction of embankments in such a manner that cut
and fill slopes will be completed to final slopes and grade in a continuous operation. The
operation of removing excavation material from any cut and the placement of embankment
in any fill shall be a continuous operation to completion unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer.
B. Surfaces upon which embankments are to be constructed shall be stripped of topsoil,
organic material, rubbish and other extraneous materials. After stripping and prior to placing
embankment material, the Contractor shall compact the top 12-inches of in place soil as
specified under Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
C. Any soft or unsuitable materials revealed before or during the in place compaction shall be
removed as indicated by the Engineer and/or materials testing consultant and replaced with
select fill.
D. Ground surfaces on which embankment is to be placed, shall be scarified or stepped in a
manner which will permit bonding of the embankment with the existing surface. The
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

embankment soils shall be as specified under Part 2 - Products, and shall be deposited and
spread in successive, uniform, approximately horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inches in
compacted depth for the full width of the cross section, and shall be kept approximately level
by the use of effective spreading equipment. Hauling shall be distributed over the full width
of the embankment, and in no case will deep ruts be allowed to form during the construction
of the embankment. The embankment shall be properly drained at all times. Each layer of
the embankment shall be thoroughly compacted to the density specified under
Paragraph 3.09, COMPACTION.
E. The embankment or fill material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before
rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material and
manipulation when necessary to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer
shall be required. Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction or rolling, all
work on all portions of the embankment thus affected shall be delayed until the material has
dried to the required moisture content. Samples of all embankment materials for testing,
both before and after placement and compaction, will be taken at frequent intervals. From
these tests, corrections, adjustments, and modifications of methods, materials, and moisture
content will be made to construct the embankment.
F. Where embankments are to be placed and compacted on hillsides, or when new
embankment is to be compacted against embankments, orwhen embankment is built in part
widths, the slopes that are steeper than 4:1 shall be loosened or plowed to a minimum depth
of 6 inches or, if in the opinion of the Engineer, the nature of the ground is such that greater
precautions should be taken to bind the fill to the original ground then benches shall be cut
in the existing ground as indicated by Engineer.
G. When rock and other embankment material are excavated at approximately the same time,
the rock shall be incorporated into the outer portions of the embankments and the other
material which meets the requirements for select fill shall be incorporated into the formation
of the embankments. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4-inches in their greatest
dimension will not be allowed within the top 6-inches of the final grade. Stones, fragmentary
rock, or boulders larger than 12-inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed in any
portions of embankments and shall be disposed of by the Contractor as indicated by the
Engineer. When rock fragments or stone are used in embankments, the material shall be
brought up in layers as specified or directed and every effort shall be exerted to fill the voids
with finer material to form a dense, compact mass which meets the densities specified for
embankment compaction.
3.08 BACKFILLING
A. All structures and pipes shall be backfilled with the type of materials shown on the Drawings
and specified herein. Select fill shall be deposited in successive, uniform, approximately
horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inches in compacted depth for the full width. Stones or
fragmentary rock larger than 4-inches in their greatest dimension will not be allowed within
the top 6-inches of the ground nor within 6 inches of pipes. No stone or fragmentary rock
larger than 12-inches in their greatest dimension will be allowed for any portion of backfill.
Compaction shall be in accordance with the requirements of Paragraph 3.09,
COMPACTION.
B. Where excavation support is used, the Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to
prevent loss of support beneath and adjacent to pipes and existing structures when supports
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

are removed. If significant volumes of soil cannot be prevented from clinging to the
extracted supports, the voids shall be continuously backfilled as rapidly as possible. The
Contractor shall thereafter limit the depth below subgrade that supports will be installed in
similar soil conditions or employ other appropriate means to prevent loss of support.
3.09 COMPACTION
A. The Contractor shall compact embankments, backfill, crushed stone, aggregate base, and in
place subgrade in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The densities specified
herein refer to percentages of maximum density as determined by the noted test methods.
Compaction of materials on the project shall be in accordance with the following schedule:
Density %
Density %
Max. Lift Thickness
Std. Proctor
Mod. Proctor
as Compacted
(D698)
(D1557)
Inches
Embankments Beneath Structures*
98
95
8
Other Embankments
95
92
8
Backfill Around Structures
95
92
8
Backfill in Pipe Trenches
95
92
8
Crushed Stone Beneath Structures
**
**
12
Select Sand
--
98
8
Aggregate Base Course (ABC)
--
98
8
Beneath Pavements and Structures
Crushed Stone Backfill
**
**
12
Crushed Stone Pipe Bedding
**
**
12
In place Subgrade Beneath Structures 98 95 Top 12-inches
* Embankments beneath structures shall be considered to include a zone 10 feet out
from the foundation of the structure extending down to the natural ground on a 450
slope.
** The aggregate shall be compacted to a degree acceptable to the Engineer by use of
a vibratory compactor and/or crawler tractor.
B. Field density tests will be made by the materials testing consultant to determine if the
specified densities have been achieved, and these tests shall be the basis for accepting or
rejecting the compaction. In -place density tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM
D 1556, ASTM D 2167, or ASTM D 2922. The Engineer in conjunction with the materials
testing consultant will be the judge as to which test method will be the most appropriate.
Failure to achieve the specified densities shall require the Contractor to re -compact the
material or remove it as required. The Contractor shall, if necessary, increase his
compactive effort by increasing the number of passes, using heavier or more suitable
compaction equipment, or by reducing the thickness of the layers. The Contractor shall
adjust the moisture contents of the soils to bring them within the optimum range by drying
them or adding water as required.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-10 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Testing will be performed as frequently as deemed necessary by the Engineer and/or
materials testing consultant. As a minimum, one in -place densitytest shall be performed for
each 1000 cubic yards of embankment placed and 500 cubic yards of backfill placed or one
test performed each day for either.
3.10 REMOVAL OF EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIALS
A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of off -site all unsuitable materials. Within thirty
(30) consecutive days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for review all required permits and a list of disposal sites for the unsuitable materials. If the
disposal site is located on private property, the submittal shall also include written
permission from the owner of record.
B. All unsuitable materials shall be disposed of in locations and under conditions that comply
with federal, state and local laws and regulations.
C. The Contractor shall obtain an off -site disposal area prior to beginning demolition or
excavation operations.
D. All excess and unsuitable materials shall be hauled in trucks of sufficient capacity and tight
construction to prevent spillage. Trucks shall be covered to prevent the propagation of dust.
E. When all excess and unsuitable material disposal operations are completed, the Contractor
shall leave the disposal sites in a condition acceptable to the Owner and Owner(s) of the
disposal site(s).
3.11 BORROW EXCAVATION
A. Description
The work covered by this section consists of the excavation of approved material from
borrow sources and the hauling and utilization of such material as required on the Drawings
or directed by the Engineer. It shall also include the removing, stockpiling, and replacement
of topsoil on the borrow source; the satisfactory disposition of material from the borrow
source which is not suitable for use; and the satisfactory restoration of the borrow source
and haul roads to an acceptable condition upon completion of the work.
Borrow excavation shall not be used before all available suitable unclassified excavation has
been used for backfill and incorporated into the embankments.
B. Coordination with Seeding Operations
The Contractor shall coordinate the work covered by this section with the construction of
embankments so that the requirements of Section 3 are met.
C. Materials
All material shall meet the requirements of the Sections shown below:
Borrow Material
31240-008: 04-18-19
...Section 3, Subsection 2.01 - Select Fill
3-11 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. Construction Methods
General
The surface of the borrow area shall be thoroughly cleared and grubbed and
cleaned of all unsuitable material including all organics, topsoil, etc., before
beginning the excavation. Disposal of material resulting from clearing and grubbing
shall be disposed by the contractor as part of the work of this Contract.
Each borrow operation shall not be allowed to accumulate exposed, erodible slope
area in excess of 1 acre at any one given time without the Contractor's beginning
permanent seeding and mulching of the borrow source or other erosion control
measures as may be approved by the Engineer.
The topsoil shall be removed and stockpiled at locations that will not interfere with
the borrow operations and that meet the approval of the Engineer. Temporary
erosion control measures shall be installed as may be necessary to prevent the
erosion of the stockpile material. Once all borrow has been removed from the
source or portion thereof, the stockpiled topsoil shall be spread uniformly over the
source.
Where it is necessary to haul borrow material over existing roads, the Contractor
shall use all necessary precautions to prevent damage to the existing roads. The
Contractor shall also conduct his hauling operations in such a manner as to not
interfere with the normal flow of traffic and shall keep the traffic lanes free from
spillage at all times.
2. Owner Furnished Sources
Where borrow sources are furnished by the Owner the location of such sources will
be as designated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
The Owner will furnish the necessary haul road right-of-way at locations designated
by the Engineer. All haul roads required shall be built, maintained, and when
directed by the Engineer, obliterated, at no cost to the Owner. Where the haul road
is to be reclaimed for cultivation the Contractor shall plow or scarify the area to a
minimum depth of 8 inches.
The borrow sources shall be left in a neat and presentable condition after use. All
slopes shall be smoothed, rounded, and constructed not steeper than 3:1. Where
the source is to be reclaimed for cultivation the source shall be plowed or scarified to
a minimum depth of 8 inches, disc harrowed, and terraces constructed. The source
shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect or stand and a functioning
drainage system shall be provided.
All sources shall be seeded and mulched in accordance with Section 7.
3. Contractor Furnished Sources
Prior to the approval of any off -site borrow source(s) developed for use on this
project, the Contractor shall obtain certification from the State Historic Preservation
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-12 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Officer of the State Department of Cultural Resources certifying that the removal of
the borrow material from the borrow source(s) will have no effect on any known
district, site building, structure, or object that is included or eligible for inclusion in the
National Register of Historic Places. A copy of this certification shall be furnished to
the Engineer prior to performing any work on the proposed borrow source.
The approval of borrow sources furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the
following conditions:
a. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring the right to take the
material and any rights of access that may be necessary; for locating and
developing the source; and any clearing and grubbing and drainage ditches
necessary.
Such right shall be in writing and shall include an agreement with the Owner
that the borrow source may be dressed, shaped, seeded, mulched, and
drained as required by these Specifications after all borrow has been
removed.
b. Except where borrow is to be obtained from a commercial source, the
Contractor and the property owner shall jointly submit a borrow source
development, use, and reclamation plan to the Engineer for his approval
prior to engaging in any land disturbing activity on the proposed source other
than material sampling that may be necessary. The Contractor's plan shall
address the following:
(1) Drainage
The source shall be graded to drain such that no water will collect or
stand and a functioning drainage system shall be provided. If
drainage is not practical, and the source is to serve as a pond, the
minimum average depth below the water table shall be 4 feet or the
source graded so as to create wetlands as appropriate.
(2) Slopes
The source shall be dressed and shaped in a continuous manner to
contours which are comparable to and blend in with the adjacent
topography, but in no case will slopes steeper than 3:1 be permitted.
(3) Erosion Control
The plan shall address the temporary and permanent measures that
the Contractor intends to employ during use of the source and as a
part of the reclamation. The Contractor's plan shall provide for the
use of staged permanent seeding and mulching on a continual basis
while the source is in use and the immediate total reclamation of the
source when no longer needed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-13 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. Maintenance
During construction and until final acceptance the Contractor shall use any
methods approved by the Engineer which are necessary to maintain the
work covered by this section so that the work will not contribute to excessive
soil erosion.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 3-14 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4 - AGGREGATE MATERIALS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials required to complete all
work associated with the installation of aggregate material beneath foundations, as
backfill and as roadway subgrades and other related and incidental work as required to
complete the work shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the Specifications, all work
herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available
at the time of Bid.
1. North Carolina Department of Transportation (NCDOT) Standard Specifications
for Roads and Structures; South Carolina State Highway Department Standard
Specifications for Highway Construction.
2. ASTM C 127 Test for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate.
3. ASTM C 136 Test for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
4. ASTM C 535 Test for Resistance to Degradation of Large Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 1 General Project Requirements.
1. Materials gradation and certification.
2. ASTM C127, ASTM C136, and ASTM C535 test results
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 CRUSHED STONE, SCREENED GRAVEL and AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABC)
A. Crushed stone or screened gravel shall meet the requirements of Aggregate Standard
Size No. 57 or No. 67 as defined by NCDOT Standard Specifications.
B. ABC shall meet the requirements of ABC as defined by NCDOT Standard
Specifications.
31240-008: 04-11-19 4-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.02 SELECT SAND
A. Select sand shall meet the requirements of Sections 1005 and 1014 of the NCDOT
Standard Specifications for materials and gradation. The size used shall be Standard
Size No. 2S or 2MS as listed and defined in Table 1005-2, "Aggregate Gradation", of the
NCDOT Standard Specifications.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 CRUSHED STONE, SCREENED GRAVEL AND AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABC)
A. Contractor shall install crushed stone, screened gravel and ABC in accordance with the
NCDOT Standard Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and indicated in the
Contract Documents.
Unless otherwise stated herein or shown on the Drawings, all mat foundations
(bottom slabs) for the proposed structures shall have a blanket of crushed stone
or ABC 6-inches thick minimum placed directly beneath the proposed mat. The
blanket shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the extremities of the mat.
2. For subgrade preparation at structures and structural fill, the foundation material
shall be ABC where specifically specified on Drawings, otherwise, crushed stone
or screened gravel shall be used.
3. For ground under drains, pipe bedding, and drainage layers beneath structures
the coarse aggregate shall meet the requirements of aggregate standard Size
No. 57 or No. 67, as defined by NCDOT Standard Specifications.
3.02 SELECT SAND
A. Contractor shall install select sand in accordance with the NCDOT Standard
Specifications and as shown on the Drawings and indicated in the Contract Documents.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-11-19 4-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

5 - Utility Structures
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment, and tools required forthe design, fabrication, delivery
and installment of utility structures and appurtenances in accordance with the Drawings and
as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 3 Earthwork
B. Section 9 — Cast -in -Place Concrete
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the other requirements of the specifications, all work herein
shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced
specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of
Bid.
1. ASTM C478 — Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
2. ASTM C857 — Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast
Concrete Utility Structures
3. ASTM C990 - Specifications for Joints in Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast
Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples and/or Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 1 — General Project
Requirements.
B. In addition to items listed in Section 10 — Precast Concrete, Shop Drawings shall include, but
not be limited to:
1. Complete layout and installation Drawings and schedules with clearly marked
dimensions.
0
A
2. Material certificates on all piping materials. A
3. Structural design calculations sealed by a P.E. registered in the State of North
Carolina. Design calculations for precast manholes and vaults shall include
confirmation structures adequately resist flotation when they are totally empty and
subjected to groundwater full height of structure.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. Results of leakage test
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST MANHOLES, VAULTS, AND METER BOXES
A. Precast utility structures shall be furnished with waterstops, sleeves and openings as noted
on the Drawings. Box out for wall pipes shall conform accurately to the sizes and elevations
of the adjoining pipes. Precast utility structures shall be watertight and conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 478 and ASTM C857 with the following modifications there to:
1. Materials shall conform to 10 — Precast Concrete.
2. Manholes shall meet the following:
a. Manhole section shall have an internal diameter of 4'-0", unless noted
otherwise.
b. Minimum manhole wall thicknesses shall be 5 inches for 4 foot and 5 foot
diameter manholes, 6 inches for 6 foot diameter manholes and 7 inches for 7
foot diameter manholes.
C. Manholes and utility structures shall include ballast concrete and/or other
means necessary to insure manholes resist flotation when empty and
subjected to groundwater full height of structure.
d. Precast manholes and utility structures shall be as manufactured by NC
Products/Oldcastle, Tindall Products, or equal.
3. The date and name of manufacturer shall be marked inside each precast section.
4. No more than two lift holes may be cast or drilled in each section.
5. Dimensions shall be as shown on the Drawings.
6. Covers and frames shall be as specified in Section 2.13.
7. Mechanical Details such as piping, electrical, and other details shall be as shown on
the Drawings.
B. Joints between manhole and utility structures riser sections and at base slabs shall be
groove type.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.02 STEPS
A. Steps shall be constructed of Grade 60 steel reinforcing rod (min. 1/2-inch) and completely
encapsulated with a wear resistant and chemical resistant rubber.
B. Each step shall have a minimum vertical load resistance of 800 pounds and a minimum pull-
out resistance of 400 pounds.
C. The steps shall have 11-inch minimum tread width and shall be placed at 16-inches on
center, as shown on the Drawings.
D. Steps shall be cast in place with the concrete.
E. Steps shall only be installed as shown on the Drawings or required in the Specifications.
2.03 JOINT SEALANT
A. Joint sealant shall be a preformed flexible sealant conforming to the requirements of ASTM
C990, paragraph 6.2, Butyl Rubber Sealant. Joint sealant shall be Pro-Stik Butyl Sealant by
Press -Seal, Butyl-Nek Join Sealant by Henry,CS-102 Butyl Rubber Sealant for all Precast
Structures by ConSeal, or equal.
2.04 FLEXIBLE RUBBER SLEEVE
A. The spring set type shall have a stainless steel interior power sleeve or expander and shall
be the PSX assembly by Press -Seal Gasket Corporation, the Kor-N-Seal assembly by
National Pollution Control Systems, or Lock Joint Flexible Manhole Sleeve by Interpace
Corp.
B. The cast -in -place type shall conform to ASTM C923 and shall include stainless steel take up
clamps.
C. Flexible seal assemblies shall permit at least an eight (8) degree deflection from the center
line of the opening in any direction while maintaining a watertight connection.
2.05 RUBBER BLADDER
A The rubber bladder seal shall conform to ASTM C923 suitable for pressure testing at 10 psi
minimum, with a 3/8 inch minimum wall thickness.
B. The rubber bladder seal shall contain an environmentally safe, anti -bacterial compound
which turns into a high viscosity gel when in contact with pressurized water.
C. The rubber bladder seal shall be NPC Contour Seal by Kor-N-Seal, or equal.
2.06 COVERS AND FRAMES
A. Covers and frames shall be provided by the utility structure manufacturer.
B. Manhole covers and frames shall meet the following requirements:
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1. Locate so that there is ready access to the manhole steps
2. Clear opening shall be a minimum of 22 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
3. Watertight manhole frames and covers shall be suitable for 20 psi internal pressure
and shall be Neenah Model R-1915, Type P or L or equal cast in place.
4. Non -watertight manhole covers shall be perforated and shall be Neenah Model R-
1668, or equal.
5. Storm drain grated inlet frames and grates shall be Neenah R-1878-137G, East
Jordan Iron Works V5660, or equal.
6. Curb inlet frames and grates shall be Neenah R-3067, East Jordan Iron Works EJ
7030, or equal, and shall include frame, grate, and hood.
C. Vault covers shall have lifting handles and shall be bolted with stainless steel bolts.
D. All frames and covers shall be given one shop coat of asphalt or coal tar varnish, unless
otherwise specified.
E. Frames and covers shall be identical throughout the Contract.
2.08 CONCRETE BALLAST
A. Concrete ballast shall be Class B concrete in conformance with Section 9 — Cast -in -Place
Concrete. Ballast shall be provided as necessary to insure manhole resists flotation when
empty and subjected to full height groundwater conditions.
2.09 FLEXIBLE JOINT SEALER
A. Flexible joint sealer shall be a rubber ring waterstop as manufactured by Fernco Joint Sealer
Co., or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Minimum structural design loading for underground precast concrete vaults shall be as
indicated in ASTM C857, unless otherwise noted herein. Precast items subjected to
vehicular traffic shall be designed for H-20 traffic loading. Other precast items shall be
designed for a vertical live load of 300 psf.
B. Walls of precast items shall be designed for a vertical surcharge of 100 psf.
C. Precast manholes and vaults shall be designed to resist flotation when totally empty and
subjected to groundwater full height of the manhole/vault.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.02 FABRICATION AND CASTING
A. Fabrication and casting shall conform to Section 10 — Precast Concrete, and to Section 9 —
Cast -in -Place Concrete.
B. All base sections designated to receive concrete ballast and all electrical manholes shall
extend monolithically a minimum of 6 inches beyond the outside face of the wall for the
entire periphery. All other utility structures shall have a standard base.
C. Utility structures built around existing pipe shall have a cast -in -place base slab.
3.03 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND STORING
A. Handling, transporting and storing of precast items shall comply with Section 10 — Precast
Concrete.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall conform with Section 10 — Precast Concrete and with the manufacturer's
recommendations or to Section 9 — Cast -in -Place Concrete.
B. Frames and covers or grates shall be set so that tops are at elevations indicated on the
Drawings or flush with finished grade where no elevation is indicated.
C. Joints between riser sections shall be sealed with joint sealant.
D. All openings in utility structures shall have flexible rubber sleeves sized to fit the connecting
pipe and installed to provide watertight joints in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. The interior of the sleeve shall be filled with Class B concrete.
E. Openings that are too large for flexible rubber sleeves shall utilize rubber bladder seals
which are expanded by water injected using a pressure pump.
F. All units shall be installed plumb and level.
G. All lift holes and joints shall be filled with non -shrink grout, grout inside and out.
H. The manhole frames shall be set to their required elevations either with grade rings or with
two or three courses of brick masonry laid around the top of the upper wall section. Such
brick work shall be given a 1-inch mortar coat on the inside and out.
Concrete ballast shall be placed so that it bears directly on the utility structure base against
the outer wall monolithically encircling the structure for the full height indicated on the
Drawings. Additional ballast may be required where the depth or elevation of the structure
varies from the Drawings.
Brick or Concrete Block
Brick or concrete block shall be laid with broken joints and all horizontal and vertical joints
filled with cement -sand mortar. Outside of walls shall be plastered with a minimum 1-inch
thick coat of cement -sand mortar troweled smooth.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

K. Connection to Existing Pipe
Verify the diameter and invert elevation of existing pipe to be connected to new utility
structures prior to beginning work on the structures.
2. Provide adequate protection to prevent damage to the existing pipe.
3. Provide adequate means for plugging and/or transferring the existing flow in the pipe
to allow for the construction of inverts and grouting.
4. Cut off the existing pipe sufficiently for connection to the new structure and remove.
5. Thoroughly clean all foreign matter and coat the pipe surface with epoxy adhesive
where the pipe joins the new structure.
6. Install a flexible joint sealer around the pipe.
7. Grout inside and outside of wall penetration with nonshrink grout.
L. Backfill structures in accordance with Section 3 — Earthwork.
M. Clean all structures of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign matter and keep clean until
final acceptance of the work.
N. Excavation shall conform to Section 3 — Earthwork.
O. Structure bases shall bear on a minimum of 8 inches of compacted stone unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
P. Channel Inverts
1. Inverts shall be placed using Class B concrete with forms sufficient to provide a
smooth half -round shape as shown on the Drawings. Manhole bases employing full
depth precast inverts are acceptable.
2. Where the slope of the line does not change through a manhole, a constant slope
shall be maintained in the invert. Where slope changes occur within a given
manhole, the transition shall be smooth and shall occur at the approximate center of
the manhole.
3. Inverts shown on the Drawings are taken at the center of the manhole unless
otherwise noted.
3.05 ADJUSTMENTS TO EXISTING UTILITY STRUCTURES
A. Adjust structures as indicated on the Drawings using concrete or cast iron adjustment rings
by approved methods.
B. Clean covers and inlet castings of all foreign material and paint with one coat of coal tar
epoxy.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.06 ADJUSTING COLLARS AND FINAL ADJUSTMENTS
A. Adjusting collars shall be as shown on the Drawings. Final adjustments shall be made so
that the manhole ring and cover will be smooth and flush with the finished grade of the
adjacent surface, or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings for manholes shown above
grade.
3.07 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. Obstruction - After backfilling, all sewers shall be inspected for obstructions and shall be
flushed with water. Flushing shall be a minimum velocity of 2.5 feet per second for a
duration acceptable to the Engineer. Flushing shall remove all dirt, stones, pieces of wood
and other debris which accumulated in the sewer during construction. The Contractor shall
provide a means acceptable to the Engineer for removal of debris flushed from each section
of sewer. If after flushing, any obstructions remain, they shall be removed at the
Contractor's expense.
B. Visual Inspection - Sewer lines shall be visually inspected from every manhole by use of
mirrors, television cameras, or other devices for visual inspection, and the lines shall all
exhibit a fully circular pattern when viewed from one manhole to the next. Lines which do
not exhibit a true line and grade or have structural defects shall be corrected to meet these
qualifications.
C. Leakage - Sewers shall be tested for leakage. The program of testing shall fit the conditions
as mutually determined by the Engineer and the Contractor. The Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions to prevent any joints from drawing while the sewers or their
appurtenances are being tested. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, correct any
excess leakage and repair any damage to the pipe and their appurtenances, or to any
structures resulting from or caused by these tests.
D. Leakage Test Procedure - Each section of sewer shall be tested by closing the lower end of
the sewer to be tested and the inlet sewer of the upper manhole with stoppers and filling the
pipe and manhole with water to a point 6 feet above the crown of the open sewer in the
upper manhole, or, if ground water is present, 6 feet above the sections average adjacent
ground water level as indicated by a monitor well installed adjacent to each manhole. The
line shall be filled with water prior to testing and allowed to stand until the pipe has reached
its maximum absorption, but not less than two (2) hours. After maximum absorption has
been reached, the head shall be re-established and tested for at least six (6) hours
maintaining the head specified above by measured additions of water. The sum of these
additions shall be the leakage for the test period.
If ground water is present to a height of at least 6 feet above the crown of the sewer at the
upper end of the pipe section to be tested, the leakage test may be made by measuring the
rate of infiltration using a suitable weir or other measuring device approved by the Engineer.
Whether the test is made by infiltration or exfiltration, the allowable leakage shall not exceed
100 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of sewer being tested.
Where the actual leakage exceeds the allowable, the Contractor shall discover the cause
and correct it before the sewer will be accepted. For the purpose of this subsection, a
section of sewer is defined as that length of sewer between successive manholes or special
structures or stubouts for future connections.
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. Low Pressure Compressed Air Test - If the leakage cannot be located by infiltration or
exfiltration testing, this type test may be used. The pipeline shall be considered acceptable,
when tested at an average pressure of 3.0 psi greater than the average back pressure of
any groundwater that may submerge the pipe, if the section under test does not lose air at a
rate greater than 0.0030 cfm per sq. ft. of internal pipe surface.
F. Deflection Test - No sooner than thirty (30) days after final backfill installation, each section
of PVC pipe shall be checked for vertical deflection using an electronic deflecto-meter or a
rigid "Go -No -Go" device. Vertical deflection shall not exceed five (5) percent of the inside
pipe diameter for PVC pipe.
Where the actual deflection exceeds the allowable, the Contractor shall discover the cause
and correct it before the pipe will be acceptable. For the purpose of this subsection, a
section of sewer is defined as that length of sewer between successive manholes or special
structures or stubouts for future connections.
G. Cost of Testing and Repairs - Any and all work necessary to bring the line into conformance
with the infiltration and deflection specifications shall be performed by the Contractor at no
extra cost to the Owner. All apparent sources of infiltration and excessive deflection shall be
repaired by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide all water, plugs, hoses, pumps, equipment, etc. necessary for
the proper flushing and testing of the sewers.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 5-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

6 - GEOTEXTILES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all Geotextiles, including all necessary and
incidental items, as detailed or required for the Contractor to complete the installation in
accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications.
B. For the location of each type of Geotextile see the Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO Standards
AASHTO M 288-06 (2011) Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to shipping to the site, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer two copies of a
mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official of the Manufacturer for
each type of Geotextile. The Supplier shall also submit three Geotextile samples of
each product, 1 yard square each, seamed and unseamed as appropriate, with the mill
certificate for each Geotextile type supplied. The mill certificate or affidavit shall attest
that the Geotextile meets the chemical, physical and manufacturing requirements stated
in the specifications. The samples shall be labeled with the manufacturer's lot number,
machine direction, date of sampling, project number, specifications, manufacturer and
product name.
B. The Engineer shall be furnished copies of the delivery tickets or other acceptable
receipts as evidence for materials received that will be incorporated into construction.
PART 2 -- MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Filter Geotextile shall be a minimum 6-ounce per square yard (nominal) nonwoven needle
punched synthetic fabric consisting of staple or continuous filament polyester or
polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The
Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long-term exposure to chemicals or liquids with
a pH range from 3 to 10. The Geotextiles shall have a minimum threshold water head of
0.25-inches in the "as received" condition.
1. Filter Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1, 2 or 3 in accordance
with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein.
31240-008: 04-16-19 6-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Cushion Geotextile shall be a minimum 16-ounce per square yard nonwoven needle
punched synthetic fabric consisting of continuous filament or staple polyester or
polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the Owner. The
Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long-term exposure to chemicals or liquids
with a pH range from 3 to 10.
Cushion Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 in accordance with
AASHTO M288.
C. Type I Separator Geotextile shall be a minimum 8-ounce per square yard (nominal)
nonwoven neddlepunched synthetic fabric consisting of staple or continuous filament
polyester or polypropylene manufactured in a manner accepted by the Engineer and the
Owner. The Geotextiles shall be inert and unaffected by long term exposure to
chemicals or liquids with a pH range from 3 to 10.
Type I Separator Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 or 2 in
accordance with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein.
D. Type II Separator Geotextile shall be a woven slit film or monofilament synthetic fabric
consisting of polyester or polypropylene in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Geotextile shall be treated to resist degradation due to exposure to ultraviolet light.
Type II Separator Geotextile shall have a Survivability Class of Class 1 in
accordance with AASHTO M288, unless otherwise specified herein.
E. All Geotextiles shall conform to the properties listed using the test methods listed in
Table 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for timely submittals of all confirmation test
data for Geotextiles.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. During all periods of shipment and storage, all Geotextiles shall be protected from direct
sunlight, temperature greater than 140OF water, mud, dirt, dust, and debris.
B. To the extent possible, the Geotextile shall be maintained wrapped in heavy-duty
protective covering until use. Geotextile delivered to the project site without protective
covering shall be rejected. After the protective covering has been removed, the
Geotextile shall not be left uncovered for longer than fourteen (14) days, under any
circumstances.
C. The Owner shall approve the shipping and delivery schedule prior to shipment. The
Owner shall designate the on -site storage area for the Geotextiles. Unloading and
storage of Geotextiles shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
D. Geotextiles that are damaged during shipping or storage shall be rejected and replaced
at Contractor expense.
31240-008: 04-16-19 6-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE CONFORMANCE TESTING
A. At the option of the Engineer representative samples of Geotextiles shall be obtained
and tested by the Engineer to assure that the material properties conform to these
Specifications. Conformance testing shall be conducted by the Engineer and paid for by
the Owner.
B. Conformance testing shall be completed at a minimum frequency of one sample per
100,000 square feet of Geotextile delivered to the project site. Sampling and testing
shall be as directed by the Engineer.
C. Conformance testing of the Geotextiles shall include but not be limited to the following
properties:
1. Mass Per Unit Area (ASTM D5261)
2. Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D4632)
3. Trapezoidal Tear (ASTM D4533)
4. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D6241)
D. The Engineer may add to, remove or revise the test methods used for determination of
conformance properties to allow for use of improved methods.
E. All Geotextile conformance test data shall meet or exceed requirements outlined in
Table 1 of these Specifications for the particular category of Geotextile prior to
installation. Any materials that do not conform to these requirements shall be retested or
rejected at the direction of the Engineer.
F. Each roll of Geotextile will be visually inspected by the Engineer or his representative.
The Engineer reserves the right to sample and test at any time and reject, if necessary,
any material based on visual inspection or verification tests.
G. A Geotextile that is rejected shall be removed from the project site and replaced at the
Contractor's expense. Sampling and conformance testing of the Geotextile supplied as
replacement for rejected material shall be performed by the Engineer at Contractor's
expense.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Geotextiles shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. At the time
of installation, the Geotextile shall be rejected by the Engineer if it has defects, rips,
holes, flaws, evidence of deterioration, or other damage.
B. It is the intent of these Specifications that Geotextiles used to protect natural drainage
media be placed the same day as the drainage media to prevent soil, sediment or
windblown soils to make contact with the drainage media.
C. The Geotextiles shall be placed smooth and free of excessive wrinkles. Geotextiles
shall conform to and be in contact with the approved subgrade.
31240-008: 04-16-19 6-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. When the Geotextiles are placed on slopes, the upslope fabric portion shall be lapped
such that it is the upper or exposed Geotextile.
E. Geotextiles shall be temporarily secured in a manner accepted by the Engineer prior to
placement of overlying materials.
F. In the absence of specific requirements shown on the Drawings, the following shall be
used for overlaps of adjacent rolls of Geotextile:
GEOTEXTILE TYPE/
APPLICATION
Filter Geotextile
Cushion Geotextile
Separator -Roadway
Applications
Separator -Slope Protection
Separator Geotextile
OVERLAP OF ADJACENT
ROLLSM
(INCHES)
6 min
12 min
12 min
18 min
12 min
TRANSVERSE END
OVERLAP (INCHES;
12 min
12 min
24 min
24 min
18 min
Overlaps may be reduced if adjacent panels are sewn or heat bonded where
approved by the Engineer.
G. Any Geotextile that is torn or punctured shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the
Engineer by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The repair shall consist
of a patch of the same type of Geotextile placed over the failed areas and shall overlap
the existing Geotextile a minimum of 12-inches from any point of the rupture.
H. Any Geotextile that is subjected to excessive sediment buildup on its surface during
construction shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to placement of overlying material.
31240-008: 04-16-19 6-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

TABLE 1 - MINIMUM REQUIRED GEOTEXTILE PROPERTIES*
TYPEI
TYPEII
GEOTEXTILE
FILTER
CUSHION
SEPARATOR
SEPARATOR
PROPERTY
GEOTEXTILE
GEOTEXTILE
GEOTEXTILE
GEOTEXTILE
Geotextile Construction
Nonwoven
Nonwoven
Nonwoven
Woven
Needlepunched
Needlepunched
Neddlepunched
Mass per Unit Area (Unit Weight),
5.6
15.7
7.8
N/A
ASTM D5261 oz/ d2
Ultraviolet Resistance, (500 hrs.)
ASTM D4355,
70
70
70
70
Average % Strength Retention
Grab Tensile Strength (Ibs.),
150
340
200
390(')X250(2)
ASTM D4632
Grab Tensile elongation (%)
50
50
50
20 MAX
ASTM D4632
Wide Width Tensile Strength, (Ibs./in.)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ASTM D4595
Trapezoid Tear Strength (Ibs)
65
155
90
100
ASTM D4533
Apparent Opening Size (AOS), (mm),
0.25
N/A
0.25
0.4
ASTM D4751
Permittivity at 50 mm constant head (sec-'),
ASTM D4491
1.6
N/A
1.2
0.1
Puncture Resistance,
430
1100
575
950
ASTM D6241(lb)
* MINIMUM AVERAGE ROLL VALUE (MARV)
Warp Direction
(2) Fill Direction
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-16-19 6-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

7 - EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor is responsible for implementing Best Management Practices (BMPs) to
prevent and minimize erosion and resultant sedimentation in all cleared and grubbed
areas during and after construction. This item covers the work necessary for the
installation of structures and measures for the prevention of soil erosion and control of
sedimentation. The Contractor shall furnish all material, labor and equipment necessary
for the proper installation, maintenance, inspection, monitoring, reporting, and removal
(where applicable) of erosion prevention and sediment control measures and, if
applicable, to cause compliance with all local permits and the State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources Division of Water Quality General
Permit — NCG 010000 to Discharge Stormwater under the National Pollution Discharge
Elimination System for Construction Activities, for any land disturbance or construction
activity of one (1) acre or more, under this Section.
B. Any land disturbance as the result of modifications to a site's drainage features or
topography requires protection from erosion and sedimentation.
C. All excavations shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown
on the Contract Drawings or established by the Engineer.
D. It is the intent of this Specification that the Contractor conducts the construction activities
in such a manner that erosion of disturbed areas and off site sedimentation be
absolutely minimized.
E. All work under this Contract shall be done in conformance with and subject to the
limitations of the North Carolina Rules and Regulations for Erosion and Sedimentation
Control as adopted by the North Carolina Sedimentation Control Commission (15A
NCAC, Chapter 4, latest edition).
F. The following excerpts from the regulations are particularly important:
Pursuant to North Carolina G.S. 113A-57(2), the angle of graded slopes and fills
shall be no greater than the angle that can be retained by vegetative cover or
other adequate erosion -control devices or structures.
2. As per North Carolina DWQ Construction General Permit NCG01, perimeter
dikes, swales, ditches and slopes, disturbed areas within High Quality Water
(HWQ) Zones, and slopes steeper than 3H:1V following completion of any phase
of grading, shall be planted or otherwise provided with temporary or permanent
ground cover, devices, or structures sufficient to restrain erosion within 7
calendar days.
3. All other slopes of 3H : 1V or flatter, except those with slopes greater than 50 feet
in length or within HWQ Zones, following completion of any phase of grading,
shall be planted or otherwise provided with temporary or permanent ground
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

cover, devices, or structures sufficient to restrain erosion within 14 calendar
days.
G. Due to the nature of the work required by this Contract, it is anticipated that the location
and nature of the erosion and sediment control devices will be adjusted on several
occasions to reflect the current phase of construction. The construction schedule
adopted by the Contractor will impact the placement and need for specific devices
required for the control of erosion. The Contractor shall develop and implement such
additional techniques as may be required to minimize erosion and off -site sedimentation.
The location and extent of erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be revised at
each phase of construction that results in a change in either the quantity or direction of
surface runoff from constructed areas. All deviations from the erosion and
sedimentation control provisions shown on the Contract Drawings shall have the prior
acceptance of the Engineer and shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. Erosion and sedimentation controls applicable to this project shall be as shown on the
Contract Drawings, as specified herein, as indicated by the Engineer and as detailed in
the North Carolina Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design Manual.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work
hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the
following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with
the provisions of this Section.
15A NCAC, Chapter 4
2. North Carolina Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and Design Manual,
latest edition
3. North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources General
Permit NCG 010000 to Discharge Stormwater under the National Pollution
Discharge Elimination System for Construction Activities, for any land
disturbance or construction activity of one (1) acre or more
4. North Carolina Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Roads
and Structures, latest edition
5. North Carolina Division of Water Quality Stormwater Best Management Practices
Manual, latest edition
1.03 REGULATORY COMPLIANCE
A. Land disturbance activities are not authorized to begin until after all required erosion and
sediment control permits are obtained from the United States, the State of North
Carolina and local authorities, as necessary. Contractor is the Co -Primary Permittee
and Operator under the provisions of the NPDES Permit. As such, the Contractor will be
required to sign certain certifications as described in the NPDES Permit. Contractor
shall comply with requirements specified in the Contract Documents, on the approved
Erosion Control Plan, and by the Engineer. Contractor shall also comply with all other
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

laws, rules, regulations, ordinances and requirements concerning soil erosion and
sediment control established in the United States, the State of North Carolina and local
authorities as applicable. The following documents and the documents referenced
therein define the regulatory requirements for this Section.
NPDES PERMIT: The North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural
Resources General Permit NCG 010000 to Discharge Stormwater under the
National Pollution Discharge Elimination System for Construction Activities
(NPDES permit) governs land disturbance or construction activities of one (1)
acre or more. On applicable sites, Contractor is responsible for complying with
terms and conditions of this permit.
2. Manual for Erosion and Sediment Control: Contractor shall follow Practices and
Standards of the North Carolina Erosion and Sediment Control Planning and
Design Manual (NC ESCPDM), latest edition.
B. During the period beginning on the effective date of the permit and lasting until
expiration, the Permittee is authorized to discharge stormwater associated with
construction activity including clearing, grading and excavation activities resulting in the
disturbance of land and related support activities. Such discharges shall be controlled,
limited and monitored as specified below.
The Contractor, as Co -Primary Permittee and Operator under the provisions of
the NPDES Permit, shall submit a plan for compliance with the Owner -provided
approved erosion and sedimentation control plan to the Engineer for approval.
Plans must include designation of where 7 and 14-day ground stabilization
requirements and where basins which comply with surface -withdrawal
requirements of the NPDES permit, if applicable, are located. Land disturbing
activity shall not commence until the plan is approved by the Engineer. Maintain
an up-to-date copy of the approved plan on the site.
2. Implement the approved plan. Deviation from the plan is allowed only to correct
emergency situations of sediment discharge offsite or when minor modifications
are made to improve performance of the measures and the approval authority
has been notified. Note allowed deviations on the plan maintained on the site.
3. Manage onsite activities such that no adverse impacts to water quality occur from
site activities or allowed discharges. The following activities, and others on a
site -specific basis, require oversight throughout the construction and
development process to assure that all water quality standards are protected.
a. Equipment Operation and Maintenance: Equipment utilized during the
construction activity on a site must be operated and maintained in such a
manner as to prevent the potential or actual pollution of the surface or
ground waters of the State. Fuels, lubricants, coolants, and hydraulic
fluids, or any other petroleum products, shall not be discharged onto the
ground or into surface waters. Spent fluids shall be disposed of in a
manner so as not to enter the waters, surface or ground, of the State and
in accordance with applicable state and federal disposal regulations. Any
spilled fluids shall be cleaned up to the extent practicable and disposed of
in a manner so as not to allow their entry into the waters, surface or
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

ground, of the State.
Material Handling: Herbicide, pesticide, and fertilizer usage during the
construction activity shall be consistent with the Federal Insecticide,
Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act and shall be in accordance with label
restrictions.
C. Building Material Waste Handling: All wastes composed of building
materials shall be disposed of in accordance with North Carolina General
Statutes, Chapter 130A, Article 9 - Solid Waste Management, and rules
governing the disposal of solid waste (North Carolina Administrative Code
Section 15A NCAC 13B). In particular, the following guidelines shall be
followed:
No paint or liquid wastes in streams or storm drains.
Dedicated area for demolition, construction, and other wastes
must be located a minimum of 50' from storm drains and streams
unless no reasonable alternatives are available.
iii. Earthen -material stockpiles must be located a minimum of 50'
from storm drains and streams unless no reasonable alternatives
are available.
iv. Concrete materials onsite, including excess concrete, must be
controlled to avoid contact with surface waters, wetlands, or
buffers. (Note discharges from onsite concrete plants may require
coverage under a separate NPDES permit — NCG140000).
d. Litter and Sanitary Waste: The Permittee shall control the management
and disposal of litter and sanitary waste from the site.
C. Violations and Fines
Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for any fines incurred
as a result of violations to the NC Sedimentation Pollution Control Act, the
NPDES General Permit for Stormwater Discharges on Construction Sites, and
any applicable delegated local program's sediment control regulations until
construction activities are complete and the project is accepted by the Owner.
These include fines levied by the NCDENR Division of Land Quality, NCDENR
Division of Water Quality and delegated local programs.
2. If violations result in the issuance of a Notice of Violation, the Contractor shall
comply with the requirements of the Notice within the specified time period for
compliance. Failure to comply could result in the assessment of a penalty for
each day of the continuing violation, beginning with the date of the violation.
3. Violations may result in civil and/or criminal penalties which include fines and
imprisonment.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of the work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a plan for
implementing the temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control
measures as shown on the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan approved by the
appropriate regulatory authority. Construction work shall not commence until the
schedule of work and the methods of operations have been reviewed and approved.
B. The Contractor shall perform inspections of erosion and sedimentation control measures
and stormwater discharge outfalls and prepare inspection reports as described in Part 3
of this Section. Copies of the inspection reports shall be submitted to the Engineer on a
monthly basis.
C. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Section 1 General
Project Requirements , the Contractor shall submit the following:
1. Name and location of all material suppliers.
2. Certificate of compliance with the standards specified above for each source of
each material.
3. List of disposal sites for waste and unsuitable materials and evidence of all
required permits for use of those sites.
1.05 GUARANTEE
A. All restoration and re -vegetation work shall be subject to the one-year guarantee period
of the Contract as specified in the General Conditions.
PART 2 -- MATERIALS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Materials for use in erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be in accordance
with the NC ESCPDM.
B. All erosion and sediment control bid prices shall include all excavation, grading,
maintenance, legal sediment disposal, permits and all other work and appurtenances
necessary to design, install and maintain the sediment and erosion control measures as
detailed herein and in accordance with the NC ESCPDM.
2.02 SILT FENCE
A. Silt (or sediment) fence shall be constructed as shown on the Contract Drawings, at
other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein, and as detailed in Section
6.62 of the NC ESCPDM. Silt fences shall be installed below small disturbed areas that
are less than '/4 acre disturbed per 100-feet of fence when slopes are less than 2%.
Contractor shall refer to Table 6.62a in the NC ESCPDM for criteria. Silt fence shall not
be installed across streams, ditches, or waterways or other areas of concentrated flows.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Silt fence shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this
Section and Section 6.62 of the NC ESCPDM. Silt fence shall be a woven geotextile
filter fabric made specifically for sediment control. Filter fabric shall not rot when buried
and shall resist attack from soil chemicals, alkalines and acids in the pH range from 2 to
13, and shall resist damage due to prolonged ultraviolet exposure. Filter fabric shall be
C-50NW as manufactured by Contech Earth Stabilization Solutions, GT 142 as
manufactured by SKAPS Industries, Soiltex ST 120N as manufactured by Geo-
Synthetics, Inc., or approved equal. The cost of silt fence shall include the materials,
excavation, backfill, aggregate, etc. and all maintenance and restoration activities
required.
C. Silt fence shall be stable for the 10-year peak storm runoff. Fabric shall meet the
following specifications:
Temporary Silt Fence Material Property Re uirements
Test
Supported'
Un-Supported'
Type of
Material
Units
Silt Fence
Silt Fence
Value
Grab Strength
ASTM
N (Ibs)
D 4632
Machine Direction
400
550
MARV
90
90
x-Machine
400
450
MARV
Direction
90
90
Permittivity2
ASTM
sec-1
0.05
0.05
MARV
D 4491
Apparent Opening
ASTM
mm
0.60
0.60
Max.
Size
D 4751
ARV3
US Sieve #
30
30
Ultraviolet Stability
ASTM
% Retained
70% after
70% after 500
Typical
D 4355
Strength
500 hours
hours exposure
exposure
' Silt Fence support shall consist of 14 gage steel wire with a mesh spacing of 150 mm (6 inches),
or prefabricated polymer mesh of equivalent strength.
2 These default values are based on empirical evidence with a variety of sediment. For
environmentally sensitive areas, a review of previous experience and/or site or regionally
specific geotextile tests in accordance with Test Method D 5141 should be performed by the
agency to confirm suitability of these requirements.
3 As measured in accordance with Test Method D 4632.
D. The synthetic filter fabric shall consist of at least 95% by weight of polyolefins or
polyester, certified by the manufacturer, and as specified by Section 6.62 of the NC
ESCPDM.
E. The posts for silt fences shall be 1.33 lb/linear feet steel with a minimum length of 5 feet;
posts shall have projections to facilitate fastening of the fabric.
F. For reinforcement of standard strength filter fabric use wire fence with a minimum 14
gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.03 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS (RECPs)
A. RECPs, including Turf Reinforcement Mat (TRM), shall be installed as shown on the
Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein, and
as detailed in Section 6.17 of the NC ESCPDM. RECPs should be utilized to aid
stabilization of slopes greater than 2:1 and with more than 10 feet of vertical relief.
RECPs should also be used when mulch cannot be adequately tacked and where
immediate ground cover is required to prevent erosion damage. Examples of RECPs
are blankets, nets and matting.
B. RECPs shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this
Section and Section 6.17 of the NC ESCPDM. The cost for RECPs shall include all
excavation, grading, and materials, and all maintenance activities.
A. RECPs shall be used to aid in permanent stabilization of vegetated channels where
runoff velocity will exceed 2 feet/second on bare earth during the 2-year rainfall event
that produces peak runoff.
D. RECPs shall be chosen based on the Design Criteria detailed in Section 6.17 of the NC
ESCPDM. Typically, nets shall be used in conjunction with mulch; the use of mulch is
typically not required with excelsior, woven straw blankets and coir blankets.
E. The recommended anchoring devices are 12-inch minimum length wooden stakes, 11-
gauge staples that are at least 6 inches long by 1 inch wide, or rigid, biodegradable
stakes of a minimum of 6 inches in length. If Manufacturer's recommendations are more
stringent, they shall supersede.
F. The minimum bare soil shear stress values for specific RECPs are as follows:
Straw with net temporary RECP shall be North American Green S150, American
Excelsior Co. Curlex I, Contech SFB1, or equal with a minimum bare soil shear
stress value of 1.5 Ib/ft2.
2 Curled wood or coconut fiber RECP shall be American Excelsior Curlex II, North
American Green C125, Contech EFB4 or equal matting with a minimum bare soil
shear stress value of 2.0 Ib/ft2.
3. Synthetic Turf Reinforcement Mat (TRM) shall be Enkamat 7020 as
manufactured by Colbond Geosynthetics, Synthetic Industries Landlock Erosion
Mat TRM 1060, TH8 as manufactured by TC Mirafi, or equal matting with a
minimum long-term vegetated shear stress value of 5.0 Ib/ft2.
2.04 TEMPORARY GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES/EXITS
A. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be located at points where vehicles
enter and leave a construction site, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as
specified herein, and as detailed in Section 6.06 of the NC ESCPDM.
B. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be constructed with a minimum 6
inch layer of 2 — 3 inch washed stone placed over a stable foundation and shall be a
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

minimum of 100 feet in length and 25 feet in width. Geotextile fabric shall be used under
stone as shown on the Contract Drawings.
C. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be designed, installed and
maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this Section and Section 6.06 of the NC
ESCPDM, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, until the site has been stabilized. The cost
of temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall include the materials and all
maintenance activities required, including additional tire washing as may be necessary.
2.05 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STABILIZATION OF DISTURBED AREAS
A. Temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas will be provided at the
locations shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer,
as specified herein, and as detailed in Sections 6.10, 6.11, 6.12 and 6.14 of the NC
ESCPDM. The Contractor shall provide ground cover adequate to restrain erosion on
disturbed areas that will be left un-worked for periods exceeding 7 to 14 days, as noted
in Section 1.01. F. of this specification.
B. Soil amendments, including lime and fertilizer, shall be as detailed in Sections 6.10, 6.11
and 6.12 of the NC ESCPDM.
C. Seed mixtures shall be selected based on site location and seasonal recommendations
outlined in Sections 6.10 and 6.11 of the NC ESCPDM. Sod shall be selected based on
site location and intended use as outlined in Section 6.12 of the NC ESCPDM.
D. Mulch shall be as detailed in Section 6.14 of the NC ESCPDM. RECPs shall be as
detailed in 2.05 herein and in Section 6.17 of the NC ESCPDM-
E. The temporary agent for soil erosion control shall consist of an especially prepared
highly concentrated powder which, when mixed with water, forms a thick liquid such as
"MA-60 Soil Stabilizer" by Enviroseal Corporation, "BIND I ATLAS SUPERDUTY" by
Quattro Environmental, Inc., or "VERTEX" by LSC Environmental Products, Inc., and
having no growth or germination inhibiting factors. The agent shall be used for
hydroseeding grass seed in combination with other approved amendments resulting in a
highly viscous slurry which, when sprayed directly on the soil, forms a gelatinous crust.
E. Temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas shall be achieved in
accordance with Part 3 of this Section and Sections 6.10, 6.11, 6.12, 6.14 and 6.17 of the
NC ESCPDM. The cost of temporary and permanent stabilization of disturbed areas
shall include all grading, excavation and materials as well as all reseeding and other
maintenance activities required until stabilization is achieved.
2.06 INLET EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A. Yard, Curb and other Inlet Erosion Control Measures shall be constructed at the
locations shown on the Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer,
as specified herein, and as detailed in Sections 6.50 through 6.55 of the NC ESCPDM.
Inlet erosion control measures shall be used to prevent or limit the introduction of
sediment to storm drain systems and allow early use of the of the storm drainage
system. Maximum drainage areas for inlet erosion control measures vary from 1 acre
for excavated drop inlet protection, hardware & cloth gravel inlet protection, and block
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

and gravel inlet protection to more than 5 acres for rock pipe inlet protection. In addition
to the inlet protection measures described in the NC ESCPDM, other measures may be
specified by the Engineer. For measures not detailed in the NC ESCPDM, the materials
will be as specified by the Engineer's and Manufacturer's instructions, with more
stringent specifications superseding.
B. Materials for Inlet Erosion Control Measures consist of silt fence, riprap, stone (gravel),
hardware wire, sod, concrete blocks, and sediment logs. Riprap and stone for erosion
control shall be as specified herein. Hardware wire shall be as specified in Section 6.51
of the NC ESCPDM. Sod shall conform to the specifications set forth in Section 6.12 of
the NC ESCPDM. Concrete blocks shall be as specified in Section 6.52 of the NC
ESCPDM. Material specifications for sediment logs appear within. If Manufacturer's
recommendations are more stringent, they shall supersede.
C. Inlet Erosion Control Measures shall be designed, installed and maintained in
accordance with Part 3 of this Section and Sections 6.50 through 6.55 of the NC
ESCPDM. Measures not described in the NC ESCPDM shall be designed, installed,
and maintained in accordance with the Engineer's and Manufacturer's instructions, with
more stringent instructions superseding. The cost of inlet erosion control measures shall
include all excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities
required.
2.07 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT CHANNELS
A. Temporary and permanent channels shall be installed at the locations shown on the
Contract Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein, and
as detailed in Sections 6.30, 6.31 and 8.05 of the NC ESCPDM. Temporary and
permanent channels shall be used to convey concentrated runoff without damage from
erosion, deposition or flooding.
B. Temporary and permanent channels shall be designed, installed and maintained in
accordance with Part 3 of this Section and Sections 6.30, 6.31 and 8.05 of the NC
ESCPDM. The cost of all temporary and permanent channels shall include all
excavation, grading and materials as well as all maintenance activities required.
2.08 FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
A. Flexible growth medium shall be applied at the locations shown on the Contract
Drawings, at other locations indicated by the Engineer, and as specified herein.
B. Flexible growth medium is a spray -on flexible blanket that controls soil erosion and
accelerates seed germination for establishment of vegetation. It is made of wood fibers,
man-made fibers, and additives that are applied wet to the prepared surface. The
flexible growth medium may be mixed with seed and fertilizer prior to application. Seed
and fertilizer rates shall comply with applicable stabilization of disturbed area
requirements of this Section.
C. Flexible growth medium shall not be used in areas of concentrated flow unless installed
in conjunction with a RECM or TRM.
D. Flexible growth medium shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

this Section. If Manufacturer's recommendations are more stringent, they shall
supersede. The cost of flexible growth medium shall include all materials as well as all
maintenance activities required.
2.09 TREE PROTECTION FENCE
A. Tree protection fence shall be installed at the locations shown on the Contract Drawings,
at other locations indicated by the Engineer, as specified herein, and as detailed in
Section 6.05 of the NC ESCPDM.
B. Tree protection fence shall used to protect trees and their root zones during
construction. Tree protection fence shall be brightly -colored, UV -resistant poly barricade
fabric. Signs designating the area as protected shall be installed on all sides of the
fence. Wording and spacing of the signage shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Tree protection fence shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Part 3 of this
Section and Section 6.05 of the NC ESCPDM. The cost of tree protection fence shall
include all materials as well as all maintenance activities required.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
A. All installation and maintenance shall be conducted in accordance with this specification
and the NC ESCPDM. In the event of a discrepancy between this specification,
Manufacturer's recommendations and the NC ESCPDM, the more stringent
requirements shall take precedence.
B. If applicable, all requirements of the NPDES Permit shall be followed. In the event of a
discrepancy between this specification and the NPDES Permit requirements, the more
stringent requirements shall take precedence.
C. If possible, erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be established prior to
clearing operations in a given area. Where such practice is not feasible, the erosion and
sedimentation control device(s) shall be established concurrent with the clearing
operations or immediately following completion of the clearing operations.
D. The Contractor shall furnish the labor, materials and equipment required for routine
maintenance of all erosion and sedimentation control devices. At a minimum,
maintenance shall be scheduled as required for a particular device to maintain the
removal efficiency and intent of the device. Note that specific maintenance intervals for
various measures and practices are specified within the NC ESCPDM. Of the
maintenance requirements specified herein and in the NC ESCPDM, the more stringent
shall take precedence for each and every sediment and erosion control measure utilized
on the site. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to 1) the removal and
satisfactory, legal disposal of accumulated sediment from traps or silt barriers and 2)
replacement of filter fabrics used for silt fences and stone impaired by sediment in stone
filters, gravel construction entrances, etc. Maintenance as noted in items 1) and 2)
above shall be performed as required, and at least once every 3 months for the duration
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-10 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

of construction activities. Sediment removed from erosion and sedimentation control
devices shall be disposed of in locations that will not result in off -site sedimentation as
acceptable to the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. If no suitable on site
locations are available, all such sediment will be legally disposed of off site, at no
additional cost to the Owner.
3.02 SILT FENCE
A. Silt Fence shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the
requirements of Section 6.62 of the NC ESCPDM. Silt fence shall be erected at the
locations shown on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed
by the Engineer. Silt fence shall be erected and maintained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer until a vegetative ground cover has been established. Replacement of the
filter fabric and its associated appurtenances, if required by the Engineer, will be at the
Contractor's expense.
B. Silt fence shall not be installed across streams, ditches, waterways or other areas of
concentrated flow.
C. Dig a trench approximately 8 inches deep and 4 inches wide and place the fabric in the
bottom of the excavated ditch or use the slicing method to insert the fabric into a cut
sliced in the ground with a disc. Ensure that the height of the sediment fence does not
exceed 24 inches above the ground surface.
D. Install posts 4 feet apart in critical areas and 6 feet apart on standard applications when
extra strength filter fabric is used. When wire mesh support is used, posts shall be
installed a maximum of 8 feet apart. Install posts 2 feet deep on the downstream side of
the silt fence, as close as possible to the fabric.
E. Joints should be avoided along the fencing. When joints are necessary, securely fasten
the filter cloth only at a support post with 4 feet minimum overlap to the next post.
F. Compaction is vitally important for effective results. Compact the soil immediately next
to the silt fence fabric with the front wheel of the tractor, skid steer or roller exerting at
least 60 pounds per square inch. Compact the upstream side first and then each side
twice for a total of 4 trips.
G. Stabilized outlets for silt fence shall be provided at locations shown on the Contract
Drawings. The outlet section shall have a maximum width of 4 feet. The height of silt
fence at the outlet shall be a maximum of 1 foot. A 5 foot x 5 foot (minimum) apron of
#57 washed stone shall be provided on the downstream side of the silt fence outlet.
H. Silt fence shall be erected around all catch basins which are located downstream from
any construction work unless other inlet protection is specified. Should any catch basins
be indicated to be relocated or modified, silt fence shall be utilized until work is
completed on the catch basins. Upon completion of the modification, the area shall be
rough graded, as shown on the Contract Drawings, until the end of the project, at which
time final grading shall occur.
I. Inspect silt fence at least once a week and after each rainfall event. Make any required
repairs immediately.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-11 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Should the fabric of any silt fence collapse, tear, decompose or become ineffective,
replace it promptly. All fabric shall be replaced after the first 3 months of construction
activity and every 3 months thereafter until construction activities are complete.
K. Remove sediment deposits as necessary to provide adequate storage volume for the
next rain and to reduce pressure on the fence. Take care to avoid undermining the
fence during cleanout.
L. Remove all fencing materials and unstable sediment deposits and bring the area to
grade and stabilize it after the contributing drainage area has been properly stabilized.
Removal of any silt fence shall be permitted only with the prior approval of the Engineer
or the local governing agency.
3.03 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS
A. RECPs shall be designed, installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements
of Section 6.17 of the NC ESCPDM. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to place
RECPs in permanent channels or on slopes at other locations in addition to those shown
on the Contract Drawings. If Manufacturer's instructions are more stringent, they shall
supersede.
B. The Contractor shall place the RECPs where directed immediately after the channel or
slope has been properly graded and, if applicable, prepared, fertilized, and seeded.
A. Grade the surface of the installation area so that the ground is smooth and loose. When
seeding prior to installation, follow the steps in Section 6.10 (Temporary Seeding) and
6.11 (Permanent Seeding) of the NC ESCPDM as applicable. Remove all large rocks,
debris, etc. so as to ensure that good contact between the RECP and the ground is
maintained so that no erosion occurs beneath the RECP. Terminal anchor trenches are
required at RECP ends and intermittent trenches must be constructed across channels
at 25-foot intervals. Terminal anchor trenches should be a minimum of 12 inches in
depth and 6 inches in width, while intermittent trenches should be a minimum of 6 inches
deep and 6 inches wide. Take care to maintain direct contact between the soil and the
RECP.
B. For slope installation, place RECP 2-3 feet over top of slope and into an approximately
12 inch deep by 6 inch wide excavated end trench. Using staples, stakes, or pins,
anchor the RECP at 1 foot intervals along the bottom of the trench, backfill, and
compact. Along the slope, pin the RECP in a 3 foot center -to -center pattern; provide a
minimum 3 inch overlap for adjacent rolls.
C. For channel installations, excavate 12 inch deep by 6 inch wide terminal trenches across
the upper and lower end of the lined channel. Anchor the RECP at a minimum of 25 foot
intervals utilizing either two rows of anchors or 6 inch by 6 inch cross trenches. Bury
outside RECP edges in longitudinal trenches 6 inches deep and wide along the channel
edges. Pin the RECP in at 1 foot intervals along the bottom of terminal trenches,
backfill, and compact. Overlap adjacent rolls a minimum of 3 inches and pin at 1 foot
intervals. Place the first RECP at the downstream end of the channel and unroll
upstream. When starting installation of a new roll, begin in a trench or shingle -lap ends
of rolls a minimum of 1 foot with upstream RECP on top to prevent uplifting.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-12 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. Staples, stakes, and pins shall be driven so that the top is flush with the ground.
E. During the establishment period, check RECPs at least weekly and within 24 hours after
any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Immediately make
repairs. Good contact with the ground must be maintained. Monitor and repair the
RECP as necessary until ground cover is established.
3.04 TEMPORARY GRAVEL CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES/EXITS
A. Temporary gravel construction entrances/exits shall be designed, installed and
maintained in accordance with the requirements of Section 6.06 of the NC ESCPDM.
The Contractor shall provide temporary gravel construction entrances/exits at all
locations noted on the Contract Drawings and at all other locations as may be directed
by the Engineer.
B. Maintain the gravel pad as specified in Section 6.06 of the NC ESCPDM and in a
condition to prevent mud or sediment from leaving the construction site. This may
require periodic topdressing with 2 — 3 inch stone. Inspect each construction entrance at
least weekly and after each rainfall event and replace stone impaired by sediment as
necessary. Immediately remove all objectionable materials spilled, washed, or tracked
onto public roadways.
C. If, despite the use of a gravel construction entrance/exit, most of the mud and sediment
are not removed from vehicle tires, tire washing may be necessary as detailed in Section
6.06 of the NC ESCPDM. If necessary this shall be done at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.05 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT STABILIZATION OF DISTURBED AREAS
A. The Contractor shall temporarily stabilize disturbed areas that will not be brought to final
grade within 14 calendar days unless as noted in 1.01 F. of this Section. Temporary
seeding shall be applied on areas that include diversions, dams, temporary sediment
basins, temporary road banks and topsoil stockpiles. Areas to be stabilized with
permanent vegetation must be seeded or planted within 14 working days after final
grade is reached, unless temporary stabilization is applied. Temporary seeding provides
protection for no more than 1 year, after which permanent stabilization should be
initiated.
B. Complete grading before preparing seedbeds, and install all necessary erosion control
measures. Minimize steep slopes. If soils become compacted during grading, loosen to
a depth of 6-8 inches.
C. Reseed and mulch temporary seeding areas where seedling emergence is poor, or
where erosion occurs, as soon as possible. Do not mow. Protect from traffic as much
as possible.
D. Refer to Section 6.10 of the NC ESCPDM for additional information and specifications
regarding seedbed requirements, plant selection, seeding and mulching for temporary
seeding applications.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-13 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. The operation of equipment is restricted on slopes steeper than 3:1. Provisions for
vegetation establishment can be made during final grading. Vegetation chosen for these
sites must not require mowing or other intensive maintenance. Good mulching practices
are critical for protecting against erosion on steep slopes.
F. Generally, a stand of vegetation cannot be determined to be fully established until soil
cover has been maintained for one full year from planting. Inspect seeded areas for
failure and make necessary repairs and reseedings within the same season, if possible.
G. Reseeding — If a stand has inadequate cover, re-evaluate choice of plant materials and
quantities of lime and fertilizer. Re-establish the stand after seedbed preparation or
over -seed the stand. Consider seeding temporary, annual species if the time of year is
not appropriate for permanent seeding.
F. If vegetation fails to grow, soil must be tested to determine if acidity or nutrient
imbalance is responsible.
G. Fertilization - On the typical disturbed site, full establishment usually requires re -
fertilization in the second growing season. Fine turf requires annual maintenance
fertilization. Use soil tests if possible or follow the guidelines given for the specific
seeding mixture.
H. Refer to Section 6.11 of the NC ESCPDM for additional information and specifications
regarding seedbed requirements, plant selection, seeding and mulching for permanent
seeding applications.
Refer to Section 6.12 of the NC ESCPDM for additional information and specifications
regarding soil preparation, sod selection, installation, and maintenance for sodding.
Inspect all seeded areas weekly and after heavy rains until permanent cover is
established. Inspect within 6 weeks of planting to see if stands are adequate. Fertilize,
reseed and mulch damaged and sparse areas immediately.
3.06 INLET EROSION CONTROL MEASURES
A. Inlet erosion control measures shall be designed, installed and maintained in
accordance with the applicable requirements of Sections 6.50 through 6.55 of the NC
ESCPDM. If inlet erosion control measures shown on the Contract Drawings are not
included in the NC ESCPDM, Engineer's and Manufacturer's instructions for design,
installation, and maintenance shall be followed, with more stringent instructions
superseding. The Contractor shall provide inlet erosion control measures at all locations
noted on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the
Engineer.
B. Excavated drop inlet protection shall be installed and maintained in accordance with
Section 6.50 of the NC ESCPDM. Drainage
volume of excavated area around the drop in
depth of the excavated area shall be 1 foot
measured from the crest of the inlet structure.
Inspect the excavated basin at least weekly
area is limited to 1 acre. The minimum
let is 1800 ft3/acre disturbed. Minimum
and maximum depth shall be 2 feet as
Weep holes shall be protected by gravel.
and after every storm event until the
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-14 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

contributing drainage area has been permanently stabilized. Remove sediment when
the storage volume has been reduced by one-half.
C. Block and gravel inlet protection shall be installed and maintained in accordance with
Section 6.52 of the NC ESCPDM. Drainage area shall be limited to 1 acre unless site
conditions allow for frequent removal of accumulated sediment. The height of the block
barrier shall be no more than 12 inches and no less than 24 inches. On the bottom row,
place some of the blocks on their side to allow for dewatering. Place wire mesh over all
block openings to hold gravel in place. Lateral support may be provided by placement of
2 x 4 wood studs through block openings. Place gravel 2 inches below the top of the
block barrier. The top elevation of the structure must be at least 6 inches below the
ground elevation downslope from the inlet to ensure that all stormwater flows over the
structure and enters the storm drain instead of bypassing the structure. Block and
gravel inlet protection shall not be used near the edge of fill material and shall not divert
water away from the storm drain. Inspect at least weekly and after every storm event
until the contributing drainage area has been permanently stabilized. Remove sediment
as necessary to provide adequate storage volume for subsequent rains. Replace stone
as needed.
D. Rock pipe inlet protection shall be installed and maintained in accordance with Section
6.55 of the NC ESCPDM. Rock pipe inlet protection may be used at pipes with a
maximum diameter of 36 inches. It shall not be installed in intermittent or perennial
streams. The minimum crest width of the riprap berm shall be 3 feet, with a minimum
bottom width of 11 feet and minimum height of 2 feet. The top of the riprap shall be 1
foot lower than the shoulder of the embankment or diversions. The outside face of the
riprap should be covered with a 12-inch thick layer of #5 or #57 washed stone. The
sediment storage area should be excavated upstream of the rock pipe inlet protection,
with a minimum depth of 18 inches below grade. The rock pipe inlet protection shall be
inspected at least weekly and after any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of rain per 24-
hour period. Repairs shall be made immediately. Remove sediment when the volume
of the sediment storage area has been decreased by one-half and replace the
contaminated part of the gravel facing.
3.07 TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT CHANNELS
A. Temporary and permanent channels shall be designed, installed and maintained in
accordance with the requirements of Sections 6.30, 6.31 and 8.05 of the NC ESCPDM.
The Contractor shall provide temporary and/or permanent channels at all locations noted
on the Contract Drawings, and at all other locations as may be directed by the Engineer.
B. Remove all trees, brush, stumps, etc. from the channel area and dispose of properly.
A. Excavate the channel to the dimensions shown on the plans, over -excavating to allow
for liner thickness. Remove and properly dispose of all excess soil so that surface water
may enter the channel freely.
B. Armor the channel as specified on the Contract Drawings. If the specified channel lining
requires an establishment period, protect the channel with mulch or a temporary liner
sufficient to withstand anticipated velocities during this period.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-15 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. During the establishment period, inspect channels weekly and after every rainfall. After
lining has been fully established, inspect channels after any storm event of greater than
'/2 inch of rain per 24-hour period. Immediately make repairs.
D. Perform all channel construction to keep erosion and water pollution to a minimum.
Immediately upon completion of the channel, vegetate all disturbed areas or otherwise
protect them against soil erosion. Where channel construction will take longer than 7
days, stabilize channels by reaches.
E. Inspect the channel outlet and all road crossings for bank stability and evidence of piping
or scour holes. Give special attention to outlets and points where concentrated flow
enters the channel.
F. Maintain all vegetation adjacent to and in the channel in a healthy, vigorous condition to
protect the area from erosion.
G. Remove all significant sediment accumulations to maintain the designed carrying
capacity.
3.08 FLEXIBLE GROWTH MEDIUM
A. Flexible growth medium shall be applied and maintained in accordance with the
requirements detailed herein. If Manufacturer's recommendations are more stringent,
they shall supersede.
B. Grade area according to the Contract Drawings and prepare seedbed in accordance
with this Section and Section 8 Final Grading and Landscaping.
C. Apply flexible growth medium at rate noted on the Contract Drawings. Application may
be made either in conjunction with application of seed and fertilizer or following
application of seed and fertilizer. Slope interruption devices are recommended when
slope lengths exceed 100 feet. Traffic shall be kept off treated areas.
D. Areas treated with flexible growth medium shall be inspected at least weekly and within
24 hours after any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of rain per 24-hour period until
vegetation is established. Reapply in areas where seedling emergence is poor.
3.09 TREE PROTECTION FENCE
A. Tree protection fence shall be installed and maintained in accordance with the
requirements of Section 6.05 of the NC ESCPDM. If Manufacturer's recommendations
are more stringent, they shall supersede.
B. Install tree protection fence around all designated tree protection areas prior to clearing,
deliveries, and other construction activities onsite. Post signs designating area as
protected on all sides of the fencing.
C. Inspect tree protection fence weekly. Repair and replace as needed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-16 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.10 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All storm sewer piping shall be blocked at the end of every working day until the inlet is
constructed above grade.
B. All streets around the construction area shall be scraped as necessary to prevent
accumulation of dirt and debris.
C. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to prevent any sediment from entering
any storm drains, curb inlets (curb inlet filter box), ditches, streams, or bodies of water
downstream of any area disturbed by construction. Excavation materials shall be placed
upstream of any trench or other excavation to prevent sedimentation of offsite areas.
Silt fence will be provided, at no additional cost to the Owner, around excavation
materials if deemed necessary by the Engineer. In areas where a natural buffer area
exists between the work area and the closest stream or water course, this area shall not
be disturbed.
D. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to place any additional sediment and erosion
control devices at other locations not shown on the Drawings.
3.11 INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall designate an Authorized Representative to perform inspections and
maintenance as described herein. Contractor shall perform regular inspections and
maintain records as follows:
1. Inspections shall be performed, at a minimum, once every seven calendar days
and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of rain per 24
hour period.
2. A rain gauge shall be maintained in good working order on the site and all rainfall
amounts recorded throughout the duration of construction activities.
3. Inspection reports must be available on -site during business hours unless a site -
specific exemption is approved.
4. Inspection records must be kept for 3 years following completion of construction
and be available upon request.
5. Electronically -available records may be substituted under certain conditions as
approved by Land Quality and DWQ.
B. During inspections the following will be observed and appropriate maintenance activities
shall be performed:
The conformance to specifications and current condition of all erosion and
sediment control structures.
2. The effectiveness and operational success of all erosion and sediment control
measures.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-17 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3. The presence of sediments or other pollutants in storm water runoff at all runoff
discharge points.
4. The presence of sediments or other pollutants in receiving waters.
6. Evidence of off -site tracking at all locations where vehicles enter or exit the site.
6. Evidence of impacts to water quality due to site activities pertaining to equipment
operation and maintenance, material handling, and material storage and
construction laydown areas exposed to precipitation.
C. Immediate action shall be taken to repair/maintain erosion and sediment control
measures that are not performing as designed. The State reserves the right to stop all
construction activities not related to these measures until such deficiencies are repaired.
D. In areas that have undergone fina
maintenance by Contractor will occur
contract or project, whichever is longer.
3.12 MONITORING AND REPORTING
stabilization, inspections and, if necessary,
at least once per month for the duration of the
A. Monitoring: The Contractor shall be responsible for the implementation of the
Inspections and Maintenance Procedures as included in the approved erosion and
sediment control plan. The implementation must comply with guidelines as set forth in
the NPDES General Permit NCG 010000 (Part I Section B: Minimum Monitoring and
Reporting Requirements), as well as those of any local regulatory authorities. Minimum
monitoring requirements are as follows:
A rain gauge shall be maintained in good working order on the site.
2. A written record of the daily rainfall amounts shall be retained. (Note: if no
rainfall occurred the Contractor must record "zero").
3. The control measures shall be inspected to ensure that they are operating
correctly. Inspection records must be maintained for each inspection event and
for each measure. All erosion and sedimentation control measures must be
inspected by the Contractor at least once every seven calendar days and within
24 hours after any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of rain per 24 hour period
unless otherwise noted herein. Some measures require inspection following
each rainfall event.
4. Once land disturbance has begun on the site, stormwater runoff discharge
outfalls shall be inspected by observation for erosion, sedimentation and other
stormwater discharge characteristics such as clarity, floating solids, and oil
sheens. Inspections of the outfalls shall be made at least once every seven
calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of greater than '/2 inch of
rain per 24 hour period. Inspection records must be maintained for each
inspection event and for each discharge location.
5. If any visible sedimentation is leaving the site or entering waters of the State,
corrective action shall be taken immediately to control the discharge of
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-18 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

sediments. Where visible deposition of sediment has occurred in surface
waters or wetlands, the Contractor must verbally contact the Engineer and
the Division of Water Quality within 24 hours of becoming aware of the
deposition. Written notification shall be made to the Engineer and the
Division of Water Quality within 5 days of becoming aware of the
deposition.
B. Reporting: The Contractor must keep a record of inspections onsite with a copy of the
approved erosion and sediment control plan. Inspection records shall be made available
to DWQ or its authorized agent upon request. Copies of inspection records shall be sent
to the Engineer on a monthly basis. The records must provide the details of each
inspection including observations and corrective actions taken as described below. The
required rainfall and monitoring observations shall be recorded on an "Inspection Record
for Activities Under Stormwater General Permit NCG010000" form provided by DWQ or
a similar inspection form that is inclusive of all of the elements contained in the Division's
form. A sample inspection form can be found at the end of this Section.
Control Measure Inspections: Inspection records must include at a minimum: 1)
identification of the measures inspected, 2) date and time of the inspection, 3)
name of the person performing the inspection, 4) indication of whether the
measures were operating properly, 5) description of maintenance needs for the
measure, 6) corrective actions taken and 7) date of actions taken.
2. Stormwater Discharge Inspections: Inspection records must include at a
minimum: 1) identification of the discharge outfall inspected, 2) date and time of
the inspection, 3) name of the person performing the inspection, 4) evidence of
indicators of stormwater pollution such as oil sheen, floating or suspended solids
or discoloration, 5) indication of visible sediment leaving the site, 6) actions taken
to correct/prevent sedimentation and 7) date of actions taken.
3. Visible Sedimentation Found Outside the Site Limits: Inspection records must
include 1) an explanation as to the actions taken to control future releases, 2)
actions taken to clean up or stabilize the sediment that has left the site limits and
3) the date of actions taken.
4. Visible Sedimentation Found in Streams or Wetlands: All inspections should
include evaluation of streams or wetlands onsite or offsite (where accessible) to
determine if visible sedimentation has occurred.
5. Visible Stream Turbidity — If the discharge from a site results in visible stream
turbidity, inspection records must record that evidence and actions taken to
reduce sediment contributions.
C. The State reserves the right to use its own resources to duplicate monitoring and verify
the work required by the Contractor in this section.
1. The Sedimentation Pollution Control Act requires persons responsible for land -
disturbing activities to inspect a project after each phase of the project to make
sure that the approved erosion and sedimentation control plan is being followed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-19 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2. The self -inspection program is separate from the weekly self -monitoring program
of the NPDES Stormwater Permit for Construction Activities. The focus of the
self -inspection report is the installation and maintenance of erosion and
sedimentation control measures according to the approved plan. The inspections
should be conducted after each phase of the project, and continued until
permanent ground cover is established.
3. The Self -Inspection Report form may be found at the end of this section and is
also available as an Excel spreadsheet from the Land Quality web site,
http://www.dIr.enr.state.nc.us/pages/sedimentation new.html
D. Sites discharging to streams named on the state's 303(d) list as impaired for sediment -
related causes may be required to perform additional monitoring, inspections or
application of more stringent management practices if it is determined that the additional
requirements are needed to assure compliance with the federal or state impaired -waters
conditions. Inspection records must be maintained for each inspection event and for
each discharge location. If a discharge covered by this permit enters a stream segment
that is listed on the Impaired Stream List for sediment -related causes, and a Total
Maximum Daily Load (TMDL) has been prepared for those pollutants, the Permittee
must implement measures to ensure that the discharge of pollutants from the site is
consistent with the assumptions and meets the requirements of the approved TMDL.
The DWQ 303(d) list can be found at: http://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/tmdI/General 303d.htm/.
3.13 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL STRUCTURES
A. At such time that temporary erosion and sediment control structures are no longer
required under this item, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its intent and
schedule for the removal of the temporary structures. The Contractor shall obtain the
Engineer's approval in writing prior to removal. Once the Contractor has received such
written approval from the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove, as approved, the
temporary structures and all sediments accumulated at the removed structure shall be
returned upgrade and stabilized so they do not re -erode. In areas where temporary
control structures are removed, the site shall be left in a condition that will restore
original drainage. Such areas shall be evenly graded and seeded as specified in Section
7 Final Grading and Landscaping.
-- END OF SECTION —
(The Inspection Record for Activities under Stormwater General Permit NCG01000 and the
Land Quality Self -Inspection Report Form follows this Section.)
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-20 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

INSPECTION RECORD
FOR ACTIVITIES UNDER STORMWATER GENERAL PERMIT NCG010000
PROJECT: MONITORING FOR THE WEEK BEGINNING:
All erosion and sedimentation control measures and stormwater discharge outfalls must be inspected at least once per seven calendar days and within 24 hours after any storm event of
greater than 0.5 inches of rain per 24 hour period. Permittee must keep a record of inspections onsite and send copies of inspection reports to the Engineer monthly. Inspection records
must be maintained for each inspection event and for each discharge location.
RAINFALL: Gauge must be maintained on site. Record amount daily.
Day/Date Rainfall Name
Amount Of
inches Ins ector
CONTROL MEASURE INSPECTION: May require additional pa Yes.
By this signature, I certify (in accordance with Part II Section B (10) of the
NCGO10000 permit) that this report is accurate and complete to the best of
my knowledge:
(Signature of Permittee or Designee) Date
Measure Identification (i.e., silt fence, sediment
pond, sediment trap, ground cover)
Date and
time of
inspection
Name of
inspector
Operating
properly?
(Y/N)
Describe maintenance needs/corrective actions taken
(may need to attach additional information)
Date
corrective
action
taken
STORMWATER DISCHARGE OUTFALL INSPECTION: Mav require additional pages
Stormwater
Discharge
Outfall
Identification
Date and
time of
inspection
Name of
inspector
Evidence of other pollutants discharging from the
site (i.e., oil sheen, discoloration, cement wastes,
sanitary waste, fertilizers, or fuel or material storage
leakage)
Erosion seen near
outfall? (Y/N)
Describe actions taken to correct/prevent sedimentation
Date
corrective
action
taken
VISIBLE SEDIMENTATION AND/OR STREAM TURBIDITY: Any visible sedimentation observed during inspections must be recorded, corrected, and cleaned up. Take immediate corrective action to
control the discharge of sediments outside the disturbed limits of the site.
Visible
Describe actions taken to
Date
Visible
Describe actions taken to
Date
Visible decrease in
Describe actions taken to
Date
sedimentation
control future releases and
corrective
sedimentation
control future releases and
corrective
stream clarity
reduce sediment
corrective
found outside site
actions taken to clean up or
action
found in streams,
actions taken to clean up or
action
(increased
contributions
action
limits? (Y/1)
stabilize the sediment that has
taken
wetlands, or
stabilize the sediment that has
taken
turbidity/cloudiness)?
taken
If Yes, was DWQ
left the site
buffers? (Y/N)
left the site
(Y/N)
contacted?
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-21 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Has all land disturbing activity been completed? (Y/N) Has the final permanent ground cover been completed & established? (Y/N)
SELF -INSPECTION REPORT FOR LAND DISTURBING ACTIVITY AS REQUIRED BY NCGS 113A-54.1
PROJECT NAME: PROJECT NO.:
NAME OF INSPECTOR: AFFILIATION*:
(*Landowner, Financially Responsible
Partv or Aaent)
ADDRESS OF INSPECTOR:
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
Signature:
(Landowner, Financially Responsible Party or Agent)
Phase of Approved Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan: Mark (X)
Installation of perimeter erosion and sediment control measures
Clearing and grubbing of existing round cover
Completion of any phase of grading of slopes or fills
Installation of storm drainage facilities
Completion of construction or development
Establishment of permanent ground cover sufficient to restrain erosion
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURES INSPECTED:
Date:
Name/Number/
Location of
Measure (List
Measures Installed Since Last
Report
Measure
Operating
Significant
Deviation
Proposed
Actual
all measures
Dimensions
Dimensions
Properly
from Plan?
on Plan)
feet
feet
(Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
Describe Corrective Actions Needed
31240-008: 04-18-19 7-22 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

8 - FINAL GRADING AND LANDSCAPING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for final grading, topsoiling,
seeding, and miscellaneous site work not included under other Sections, but required to
complete the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Under this Section,
all areas of the project site disturbed by excavation, materials storage, temporary roads,
etc., shall be reseeded as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 1 General Project Requirements.
1. Product Data
2. Certification of all materials
3. Three (3) copies of composition and germination certification and of test results
for grass seed.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Furnish and submit certification for the materials used.
2.02 TOPSOIL
A. Upon completion and approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall place the
topsoil over all areas disturbed during construction under any contract except those
areas which will be paved, graveled or rip rapped. Topsoil shall not be placed in a frozen
or muddy condition and shall contain no toxic materials harmful to grass growth. Topsoil
shall be as defined under Section 3 Earthwork.
2.03 WATER
A. Water shall be furnished to the Contractor by the Owner from existing facilities as
directed by the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall furnish all hoses and connections necessary to complete the
landscaping work.
2.04 FERTILIZER
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

A. Fertilizer shall be a complete commercial fertilizer with components derived from
commercial sources. Fertilizer analysis shall be determined from field soil sampling in
appropriate number taken by the Contractor and analyzed by the N.C. Department of
Agriculture or other independent laboratory. Contractor shall furnish fertilizer in
accordance with the recommendations of the N.C. Department of Agriculture.
B. One -quarter of the Nitrogen shall be in the form of nitrates, one -quarter in the form of
ammonia salts, and one-half in the form of natural organic Nitrogen. Available
Phosphoric Acid shall be free from superphosphate, bone, or tankage. Potash shall be
Sulphate of Potash. Elements shall conform to the standards of Association of Official
Agricultural Chemists.
C. Fertilizer shall be delivered in standard size bags marked with the weight, analysis of
contents, and the name of the manufacturer. Fertilizer shall be stored in weatherproof
storage areas and in such a manner that its effectiveness will not be impaired.
2.05 LIME
A. At least 50% shall pass a No. 200 U.S.S. mesh sieve. At least 90% shall pass a No. 100
U.S.S. mesh sieve and 100% shall pass a No. 10 U.S.S. mesh sieve. Total carbonates
shall not be less than 80% or 44.8% Calcium Oxide equivalent. For the purpose of
calculation, total carbonates shall be considered as Calcium Carbonate.
2.06 GRASS SEED
A. The Contractor shall furnish the kinds and amounts of seed to be seeded in all areas
disturbed by the construction work. All seed shall be labeled to show that it meets the
requirements of the North Carolina Seed Law. All seed must have been tested within
six (6) months immediately preceding the planting of such material on the job.
B. The inoculant for treating legume seed shall be a pure culture of nitrogen -fixing bacteria
prepared specifically for the species. Inoculants shall not be used later than the date
indicated on the container. The quality of the seed shall conform to the following:
Minimum Minimum Maximum
Seed Purity Germination Weed Seed
Type (%) (%) (%)
Fescue (fungus free)
98
90
1.00
Hybrid Rye
98
85
0.10
German Millet
98
85
0.50
Browntop Millet
98
85
0.50
C. All seed shall be in conformance with N.C. Seed Law restrictions for restricted noxious
weeds.
D. Seed mixtures to be used on the project shall be as follows:
P - 150#/acre Kentucky 31 Tall Fescue
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(Add 25#/acre German Millet (Setaria italica) in May. Add 25#/acre
Hybrid Rye (Seca/e cereale) during Nov.)
TW - 120#/acre Hybrid Rye (Secale cereale) and 50#/acre Hybrid Rye (Lolium
multiflorum x L. boucheanum)
TS - 40#/acre Brown Top Millet (Urochloa ramosa) or 50#/acre German Millet
(Setaria italica)
Note: P - Permanent Seeding
TW - Temporary Winter Seeding
TS - Temporary Summer Seeding
E. On cut and fill slopes 2:1 or steeper add 10#/acre of German Millet or Browntop Millet
the P seed mixture.
2.07 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH
A. For use in hydroseeding grass seed in combination with fertilizers and other approved
additions, shall consist of especially prepared wood cellulose fibers such as "Wood-Lok
300" manufactured by Applegate Mulch, "Enviro-Mix" manufactured by Profile, or equal,
and have no growth or germination inhibiting factors, and be dyed green.
B. The wood cellulose fiber shall have the additional characteristic of dispersing rapidly in
water to form a homogeneous slurry and remain in such state when agitated in the
hydraulic mulching unit, or adequate equal, with the specified materials.
C. When applied, the wood cellulose fiber with additives will form an absorptive mat but not
a plant inhibiting membrane, which will allow moisture, natural or mechanical, to
percolate into underlying soil.
D. The mulch shall be supplied, compressed in packages containing 50 pounds of material
having an equilibrium air dry moisture content at time of manufacture of 12% plus or
minus 3%. Wood cellulose fiber mulch shall be stored in a weatherproof storage area
and in such a manner that effectiveness will not be impaired.
2.08 STRAW MULCH
A. Straw used for mulch shall be small grain hay. Hay shall be undamaged, air dry,
threshed straw, free of undesirable weed seed. Straw mulch is not required for seeded
areas treated with a temporary soil stabilizer.
2.09 TEMPORARY SOIL STABILIZER
A. The temporary agent for soil erosion control shall consist of an especially prepared
plant -based or cementitious highly concentrated powder which, when mixed with water,
forms a thick liquid such as "DustOut" manufactured by DustOutTM, "Stabilizer"
manufactured by Stabilizer Solutions, or "SoiLokTm" as manufactured by Prime Resins,
or equal, and having no growth or germination inhibiting factors. The agent shall be
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

used for bare soil stabilization or hydroseeding grass seed in combination with other
approved amendments resulting in a highly viscous slurry which, when sprayed directly
on the soil, forms a wind and rain resistant crust.
2.10 ROLLED EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS
A. The rolled erosion control products (RECPs) and Turf Reinforcement Mats (TRMs) shall
be as specified in Section 7 Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
2.11 RIPRAP AND HERBICIDES
A. Furnish and install sufficient quantity of landscape gravel or riprap to cover over the
ground to a minimum 4-inch depth for gravel and 24-inch depth for riprap, unless
otherwise noted, or indicated on the Drawings. Also furnish and apply an approved
herbicide to the subgrade surface just prior to installing the landscape gravel or riprap.
B. During placing, the stone shall be graded so that the smaller stones are uniformly
distributed through the mass. The Contractor may place the stone by mechanical
methods, augmented by hand placing where necessary or ordered by the Engineer. The
placed riprap shall form a properly graded, dense, neat layer of stone.
C. All topsoil and vegetative matter shall be removed from the subgrade surfaces below
areas to receive non -vegetative permanent cover prior to the application of the weed
killer (herbicide) and to the placement of landscape gravel, riprap, or other hardscaping.
Apply commercial -type herbicide as preemergence control of miscellaneous grasses
and broadleaf weeds in granular or liquid form such as "Treflan", "Dymid", or equal.
Methods and rates of application shall be in strict compliance to manufacturer's
directions and acceptable to the Engineer.
D. The herbicide selected shall be safe for use around ornamental plantings, have
long-lasting weed control, and shall be resistant to leaching away under excessive
rainfall.
E. A second application of the herbicide shall be made on the surface of the landscape
gravel, riprap, or other hardscapes sometime after the first six (6) months, but not later
than 12-months. Same methods and rates apply as specified previously.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 GRADING
A. After approval of the rough grading, the Contractor shall commence his preparations of
the subgrade for the various major conditions of the work as follows:
Bare soil for riprap area at subgrade (24-inches below final grade, or as directed
by the Engineer).
2. Topsoil for lawn and road shoulder seed area - scarify 2-inch depth of subgrade
(4-inches below final grade) prior to placing topsoil.
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Final surface grading of the topsoiled, landscape graveled, and riprapped areas shall be
mechanically raked or hand raked to an even finished surface alignment.
3.02 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be spread in place for quantity required for lawn and road shoulder seed
areas at 4-inch consolidated depth, and sufficient quantity for certain plant beds and
backfill for shrubs and trees as specified.
3.03 SEEDBED PREPARATION
A. Contractor shall prepare all areas to receive temporary or permanent seeding measures
prior to planting.
B. Topsoil shall be placed in areas to be seeded and roughened with tracked equipment or
other suitable measures. Slopes steeper than 3:1 may be roughened by grooving,
furrowing, tracking, or stairstep grading. Slopes flatter than 3:1 should be grooved by
disking, harrowing, raking, operating planting equipment on the contour.
C. Soil amendments including, but not limited to, lime and fertilizer shall be spread as
necessary, and at the rates specified in this Section. Seeding shall be as per the type
and rates specified in this Section. Seed shall be broadcast as soon as possible
following roughening, before surface has been sealed by rainfall.
3.04 HYDROSEEDING AND GRASS
A. The Contractor shall grow a stand of grass by hydroseeding method on all disturbed
areas. The Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory growth of grass
throughout the period of the one-year guarantee.
B. The Contractor's work shall include the preparation of the topsoil and bare soil seed
bed, application of fertilizer, limestone, mulching, inoculant, temporary soil stabilizer,
watering, and all other operations necessary to provide a satisfactory growth of sod at
the end of the one-year maintenance period. Areas without satisfactory sod at the end of
one (1) year shall be replanted until satisfactory growth is obtained and acceptable to
the Engineer.
C. All areas to be seeded shall be done by the hydraulic seeding method including all
additives and amendments required. A "Reinco", "Finn", or "Bowie" type hydromulcher
with adjustable nozzles and extension hoses, or equal, shall be utilized. General
capacity of tank should range from 500 to 2,500 gallons, or as approved by the
Engineer.
D. Hydraulic seeding shall be carried out in three steps. Step one shall consist of the
application of lime. In step two the seed mixture shall be mixed with the fertilizer, wood
cellulose fiber mulch, and any required inoculants and applied to the seed bed. Step
three shall consist of application of top dressing during the first spring or fall, whichever
comes first, after step two.
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. Top dressing shall consist of a commercial grade fertilizer plus Nitrogen or other
analysis as may be recommended by soil testing. Types and application rates of seed
mixtures, lime, fertilizer, and wood cellulose fiber mulch, shall be as shown in the
Seeding Schedule.
F. Ingredients for the mixture and steps should be dumped into a tank of water and
thoroughly mixed to a homogeneous slurry and sprayed out under a minimum of
300-350 pounds pressure, in suitable proportions to accommodate the type and capacity
of the hydraulic machine to be used. Applications shall be evenly sprayed over the
ground surface. The Contractor shall free the topsoil of stones, roots, rubbish, and other
deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site. The bare soil, except existing
steep embankment area, shall be rough raked to remove stones, roots, and rubbish
over 4-inches in size, and other deleterious materials and dispose of same off the site.
G. No seeding should be undertaken in windy or unfavorable weather, when the ground is
too wet to rake easily, when it is in a frozen condition, or too dry. Any bare spots shown
in two to three weeks shall be recultivated, fertilized at half the rate, raked, seeded, and
mulched again by mechanical or hand broadcast method acceptable to the Engineer.
H. Areas that have been seeded with a temporary seed mixture shall be mowed to a height
of less than 2-inches and scarified prior to seeding with the permanent seed mixture.
The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded areas
against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes shall
be protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall be
repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense.
The Contractor shall water newly seeded areas of the lawn and road shoulder mix once
a week until the grasses have germinated sufficiently to produce a healthy turf, or unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer. Each watering shall provide three (3) gallons per
square yard. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary hoses, sprinklers, and
connections.
K. The first and second cutting of the lawn grasses only shall be done by the Contractor.
All subsequent cuttings will be done by the Owner's forces in a manner specified by the
Contractor.
3.05 DITCH AND SWALE EROSION PROTECTION
A. All ditches and swales indicated on the Drawings shall be lined with a rolled erosion
control product (RECP) or Turf Reinforcement Mat (TRM). The area to be covered shall
be properly graded and hydroseeded before the RECP or TRM is installed. Installation
shall be in accordance with Section 6 Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all seeded areas through the end of
his 1-year warranty period. Maintenance shall include but not be limited to, annual
fertilization, initial mowing, repair of seeded areas, irrigation to establish growth, and
weed control. The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, protection for all seeded
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

areas against trespassing and damage at all times until acceptance of the work. Slopes
shall be protected from damage due to erosion, settlement, and other causes and shall
be repaired promptly at the Contractor's expense.
B. Annual fertilization shall consist of an application of 500#/acre of 10-10-10 commercial
grade fertilizer, or its equivalent and 60#/acre of nitrogen in early fall, or other analysis
as may be determined by soil test. Annual fertilization shall be in addition to top dressing
and shall be performed by the Contractor each fall season after planting until the work is
substantially complete.
C. Mowing shall be scheduled so as to maintain a minimum stand height of 4-inches or as
directed by the Engineer or Owner. Stand height shall be allowed to reach 8 to
10-inches prior to initial mowing, or as appropriate for type of vegetation planted.
D. All seeded areas shall be inspected on a regular basis and any necessary repairs or
reseedings made within the planting season, if possible. If the stand should be over 60%
damaged, it shall be re-established following the original seeding recommendations.
E. Weed growth shall be maintained mechanically and/or with herbicides. When chemicals
are used, the Contractor shall follow the current North Carolina Agricultural Experiment
Stations' weed control recommendations and adhere strictly to the instructions on the
label of the herbicide. No herbicide shall be used without prior approval of the Engineer
or Owner.
3.07 CLEANUP
A. The Contractor shall remove from the site all subsoil excavated from his work and all
other debris including, but not limited to, branches, paper, and rubbish in all landscape
areas, and remove temporary barricades as the work proceeds.
B. All areas shall be kept in a neat, orderly condition at all times. Prior to final acceptance,
the Contractor shall clean up the entire landscaped area to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3.08 SEEDING SCHEDULE
A. All seeding and mulching to be completed by the Contractor shall conform to the
following schedule. No permanent seeding shall be performed from May 1 - August 31
and November 1 - February 14. Temporary seed mixtures will be used during these
times if seeding is necessary. Areas seeded with temporary seed mixtures shall be
reseeded by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner with permanent seed as
directed by the Engineer.
B. Application rates of seed mixtures, lime, fertilizer, mulch and top dressing are shown in
the schedule.
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

SEEDING SCHEDULE
Application Rates (Pounds/Acre)
Seed
Planting
Strawb
Annual
Mixture
Season
Limea
Seed
Fertilizer
Mulch
Topdressinga
Fertilizer
Comments
P
Feb. 15-April 30
4000
150
1000
4000
500 of
Same as
Preferred planting seasons are Sept. 1 —
Sept. 1-Oct. 31
10-10-10
Topdressing
Sept. 30 and Feb. 15 — March 30.
60 of Nitrogen
TW
Jan. 1-May 1
2000
170
750
4000
-
-
Over seed with Type P seed mixture during
next planting season.
TS
May 1-Aug. 15
2000
40
750
4000
-
-
Over seed with Type P seed mixture during
next planting season.
TF
Aug. 15-Dec. 30
2000
120
1000
4000
-
-
Over seed with Type P seed mixture during
next planting season.
Footnotes:
a. Contractor shall confirm application rates and/or chemical analysis or established by soil test.
b. On cut and fill slopes 2:1 or steeper, add 10#/acre German or Browntop Millet to Type P seed mixture. Use scarified seed for spring
plantings and unscarified for fall plantings.
C. Apply tackifier at rate of 0.10 gallon per square yard (10 gal/1000 ft2), or as specified by manufacturer, to tack straw mulch.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 8-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

9 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Provide all labor, equipment, materials and services necessary for the manufacture,
transportation and placement of all plain and reinforced concrete work, as shown on the
Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
B. The requirements in this section shall apply to the following types of concrete:
1. Class Al Concrete: Normal weight structural concrete to be used in all structures
qualifying as environmental concrete structures that are designed in accordance with
ACI 350 including pump stations, tanks, basins, process structures, and any
structures containing fluid or process chemicals or other materials used in treatment
process.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of the Specifications, all work herein shall conform to or
exceed the applicable requirements of the following documents. All referenced
specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at the time of
Bid.
1. International Building Code
2.
ACI 214
Guide to Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete
3.
ACI 301
Specifications for Structural Concrete
4.
ACI 304
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
5.
ACI 305
Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
6.
ACI 306
Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
7.
ACI 309
Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
8.
ACI 318
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and
Comentary
9.
ACI 350
Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures
10.
ASTM C 31
Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following:
Sources of all materials and certifications of compliance with specifications for all
materials.
2. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of the Portland Cement or
Blended Cement to be used.
3. Certified current (less than 1 year old) chemical analysis of fly ash or slag cement to
be used.
4. Aggregate test results showing compliance with required standards, i.e., sieve
analysis, potential reactivity, aggregate soundness tests, petrographic analysis,
mortar bar expansion testing, etc.
5. Manufacturer's data on all admixtures stating compliance with required standards.
6. Concrete mix design for each class of concrete specified herein.
7. Field experience records and/or trial mix data for the proposed concrete mixes for
each class of concrete specified herein.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests on materials used in the production of concrete shall be required as specified in
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing
laboratory approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Trial concrete mixes shall be tested when required in accordance with Article 3.01 at no
additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 HYDRAULIC CEMENT
A. Portland Cement
Portland Cement shall be Type II conforming to ASTM C 150. Type I cement may be
used provided either fly ash or slag cement is also included in the mix in accordance
with Articles 2.02 or 2.03 respectively.
2. When potentially reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are to be used in
concrete mix, cement shall meet the following requirements:
a. For concrete mixed with only Portland Cement, the total alkalies in the
cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the
percentage of K20) shall not exceed 0.40%.
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

For concrete mixed with Portland Cement and an appropriate amount of fly
ash (Article 2.02) or slag cement (Article 2.03) the total alkalies in the
Portland Cement (calculated as the percentage of NA2O plus 0.658 times the
percentage of K20) shall not exceed 0.85%.
3. When non -reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix,
total alkalies in the cement shall not exceed 1.0%.
4. The proposed Portland Cement shall not contain more than 8% tricalcium aluminate
and more than 12% tetracalcium aluminoferrite.
2.02 FLY ASH
A. Fly ash shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 618 for Class F, except that the loss on
ignition shall not exceed 4%. Fly ash shall also meet the optional physical requirements for
uniformity as shown in Table 3 of ASTM C 618.
B. For fly ash to be used in the production of type IP cement, the Pozzolan Activity Index shall
be greater than 75% as specified in Table 3 of ASTM C 595.
C. Where reactive aggregates as defined in Article 2.05 are used in concrete mix, the fly ash
constituent shall be between 15% and 25% of the total weight of the combined Portland
Cement and fly ash. The percentage of fly ash shall be set to meet the mean mortar bar
expansion requirements in provisions of Article 2.05.G.2.
D. For Type Al concrete as required for use in environmental concrete structures, i.e. process
structures or fluid containing structures, inclusion of fly ash or slag cement in the concrete
mix, is mandatory.
E. Additional fly ash shall not be included in concrete mixed with Type IS or IP cement.
2.03 WATER
A. Water used for mixing concrete shall be clear, potable and free from deleterious substances
such as objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities.
B. Water shall not contain more than 100 PPM chloride.
C. Water shall not contain more than 500 PPM dissolved solids.
D. Water shall have a pH in the range of 4.5 to 8.5.
E. Water shall meet requirements of ASTM C 1602.
2.04 AGGREGATES
A. All aggregates used in normal weight concrete shall conform to ASTM C 33.
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Fine Aggregate (Sand) in the various concrete mixes shall consist of natural or
manufactured siliceous sand, clean and free from deleterious substances, and graded within
the limits of ASTM C 33.
C. Coarse aggregates shall consist of hard, clean, durable gravel, crushed gravel or crushed
rock. Coarse aggregate shall be size #57 or #67 as graded within the limits given in ASTM
C 33 unless otherwise specified.
D. Aggregates shall be tested for gradation by sieve analysis tests in conformance with
ASTM C 136.
E. Aggregates shall be tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM C 88. The loss
resulting after five cycles shall not exceed 10 percent for fine or coarse aggregate when
using either magnesium sulfate or sodium sulfate.
F. All aggregates shall be evaluated in accordance with ASTM C 1778 to determine potential
reactivity. All aggregates shall be considered reactive unless they meet the requirements
below for non -reactive aggregates. Aggregates with a lithology essentially similar to sources
in the same region found to be reactive in service shall be considered reactive regardless of
the results of the tests above.
Non -reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
A petrographic analysis in accordance with ASTM C295 shall be performed to
identify the constituents of the fine and coarse aggregate. Non -reactive aggregates
shall meet the following limitations:
(a) Optically strained, microfractured, or microcrystalline quartz, 5.0%,
maximum.
(b) Chert or chalcedony, 3.0%, maximum.
(c) Tridymite or cristobalite, 1.0%, maximum.
(d) Opal, 0.5%, maximum.
e) Natural volcanic glass in volcanic rocks, 3.0%, maximum.
2. Concrete mixed with reactive aggregates shall meet the following requirements:
(a) If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and fly
ash or slag cement is included in proposed concrete mix design, proposed
concrete mix including proposed aggregates shall be evaluated byASTM C-
1567. Mean mortar bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.
Tests shall be made using exact proportion of all materials proposed for use
on the job in design mix submitted.
(b)
31240-008: 04-18-19
If aggregates are deemed potentially reactive as per ASTM C-1778 and a
straight cement mix without fly ash or slag cement is proposed for concrete
9-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

mix design, aggregates shall be evaluated by ASTM C-1260. Mean mortar
bar expansions at 16 days shall be less than 0.08%.
G. Contractor shall submit a new trial mix to the Engineer for approval whenever a different
aggregate or gradation is proposed.
2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. Air entraining agent shall be added to all concrete unless noted otherwise. The agent shall
consist of a neutralized vinsol resin solution or a purified hydrocarbon with a cement catalyst
which will provide entrained air in the concrete in accordance with ASTM C 260. The
admixture proposed shall be selected in advance so that adequate samples may be
obtained and the required tests made. Air content of concrete, when placed, shall be within
the ranges given in the concrete mix design.
B. The following admixtures are required or used for water reduction, slump increase, and/or
adjustment of initial set. Admixtures permitted shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM C
494. Admixtures shall be non -toxic after 30 days and shall be compatible with and made by
the same manufacturer as the air -entraining admixtures.
Water reducing admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A and shall contain
no more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are "Eucon Series" by the
Euclid Chemical Company, "Master Pozzolith Series" by BASF, and "Plastocrete
Series" by Sika Corporation.
2. High range water reducer shall be sulfonated polymer conforming to ASTM C 494,
Type F or G. The high range water reducer shall be added to the concrete at either
the batch plant or at the job site and may be used in conjunction with a water
reducing admixture. The high range water reducer shall be accurately measured
and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician.
A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation of the
job site system. Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 100
mixer revolutions after the addition of the high range water reducer. Acceptable
products are "Eucon 37" or Plastol 5000 by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Master
Rheobuild 1000 or Master Glenium Series" by BASF, and "Daracem 100 orAdvaflow
Series" by W.R. Grace.
3. A non -chloride, non -corrosive accelerating admixture may be used where specifically
approved by the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type C or
E, and shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking
water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non -corrosive test data
from an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year's duration) using an
acceptable accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential
measures. Acceptable products are "Accelguard 80/90 or NCA" by the Euclid
Chemical Company and "Daraset" by W.R. Grace.
4. A water reducing retarding admixture may be used where specifically approved by
the Engineer. The admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type D and shall not
contain more than 0.05% chloride ions. Acceptable products are "Eucon NR or
Eucon Retarder 100" by the Euclid Chemical Company, "Pozzolith Retarder" by
BASF, and "Plastiment" by Sika Corporation.
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanate or more than 0.05 percent chloride ions
are not permitted. The addition of admixtures to prevent freezing is not permitted.
D. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data including the chloride ion content of each
admixture and certification from the admixture manufacturer that all admixtures utilized in the
design mix are compatible with one another and properly proportioned prior to mix design
review.
2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. The proportions of cement, aggregates, admixtures and water used in the concrete mixes
shall be based on the results of field experience or preferably laboratory trial mixes in
conformance with Section 5.3. "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial
Mixtures" of ACI 318 and ACI 350. When trial mixes are used they shall also conform to
Article 3.01 of this Section of the Specifications. If field experience records are used,
concrete strength results shall be from concrete mixed with all of the ingredients proposed
for use on job used in similar proportions to mix proposed for use on job. Contractor shall
submit verification confirming this stipulation has been followed. Field experience records
and/or trial mix data used as the basis for the proposed concrete mix design shall be
submitted to the Engineer along with the proposed mix.
B. Structural concrete shall conform to the following requirements. Cementitious materials
refer to the total combined weight of all cement, fly ash, and slag cement contained in the
mix.
Compressive Strength (28-Day)
a. Concrete Class Al
2. Water/cementitious materials
ratio, by weight
a. Concrete Class Al, A5,
4,500 psi (minimum)
Maximum Minimum
0.42 0.39
3. Slump range 4" nominal unless high range water reducing
admixture is used.
8" max if high range water reducing admixture is
used.
4. Air Content
a. Class Al 6% ±1.5%
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 TRIAL MIXES
A. When trial mixes are used to confirm the quality of a proposed concrete mix in accordance
with Section 5.3, "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" of
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

ACI 318 and ACI 350, an independent qualified testing laboratory designated and retained
by the Contractor shall test a trial batch of each of the preliminary concrete mixes submitted
by the Contractor. The trial batches shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and
admixtures proposed for the project. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that
the testing laboratory can obtain enough samples to satisfy requirements stated below.
Tests on individual materials stated in PART 2 -- PRODUCTS should already be performed
before any trial mix is done. The cost of laboratory trial batch tests for each specified
concrete mix will be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall furnish and deliver the
materials to the testing laboratory at no cost to the Owner.
B. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare a minimum of fifteen (15) standard test
cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 in addition to conducting slump (ASTM C 143), air
content (C 231) and unit weight (C 138) tests. Compressive strength test on the cylinders
shall subsequently be performed by the same laboratory in accordance with ASTM C 39 as
follows: Test 3 cylinders at age 7 days; test 3 cylinders at age 21 days; test 3 cylinders at
age 28 days and test 3 cylinders at 56 days. The cylinders shall be carefully identified as
"Trial Mix, Contract No. , Product ." If the average 28-day compressive
strength of the trial mix is less than that specified, or if any single cylinder falls below the
required strength by more than 500 psi, the mix shall be corrected, another trial batch
prepared, test cylinders taken, and new tests performed as before. Any such additional trial
batch testing required shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. Adjustments to
the mix shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for
extra compensation to the Contractor.
3.02 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
A. All concrete shall be machine mixed. Hand mixing of concrete will not be permitted. The
Contractor may supply concrete from a ready mix plant or from a site mixed plant. In
selecting the source for concrete production the Contractor shall carefully consider its
capability for providing quality concrete at a rate commensurate with the requirements of the
placements so that well bonded, homogenous concrete, free of cold joints, is assured.
B. Ready -Mixed Concrete
At the Contractor's option, ready -mixed concrete may be used meeting the
requirements for materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified
herein and in accordance with ASTM C 94.
2. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically -actuated counters by which the
number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter
shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab.
The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
3. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 100
revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the
manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed
designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. All materials
including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution
counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing.
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the
mixed batch, as discharged, is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to
consistency, mix and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1 /4 and 3/4
points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch when
the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when
the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the work
unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by
additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring
and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general
mechanical condition of the unit and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before
a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted.
5. Ready -mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site for the work and discharge shall
be completed before the drum has been revolved 300 revolutions and within the time
requirements stated in Article 3.03 of this Section.
6. Each and every concrete delivery shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket
containing at least the following information:
a. Date and truck number
b. Ticket number
C. Mix designation of concrete
d. Cubic yards of concrete
e. Cement brand, type and weight in pounds
f. Weight in pounds of fine aggregate (sand)
g. Weight in pounds of coarse aggregate (stone)
h. Air entraining agent, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces
i. Other admixtures, brand, and weight in pounds and ounces
j. Water, in gallons, stored in attached tank
k. Water, in gallons, maximum that can be added without exceeding design
water/cementitious materials ratio
I. Water, in gallons, actually used (by truck driver)
M. Time of loading
n. Time of delivery to job (by truck driver)
7. Any truck delivering concrete to the job site, which is not accompanied by a delivery
ticket showing the above information will be rejected and such truck shall
immediately depart from the job site.
8. The use of non -agitating equipment for transporting ready -mixed concrete will not be
permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready -mixed
concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready -
mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at
the batching plant by the Engineer.
31240-008: 04-18-19 9-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

10 - PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall construct all precast concrete items as required in the Contract
Documents, including all appurtenances necessary to make a complete installation.
1.02 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all work
specified herein shall conform to the applicable requirements of the following documents. All
referenced specifications, codes, and standards refer to the most current issue available at
the end of the Bid.
North Carolina Building Code
2. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
3. PCI Standard MNL-116 - Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Precast and Prestressed Concrete Products
4. PCI Design Handbook
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit the following for review.
Shop drawings for all precast concrete items showing all dimensions, locations, and
type of lifting inserts, and details of reinforcement and joints.
2. A list of the design criteria used by the manufacturer for all manufactured, precast
items.
3. Design calculations, showing at least the design loads and stresses on the item,
shall be submitted. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer registered in the State of North Carolina.
4. Certified reports for all lifting inserts, indicating allowable design loads.
5. Information on lifting and erection procedures.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All manufactured precast concrete units shall be produced by an experienced manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of such items. All manufactured precast concrete and
site -cast units shall be free of defects, spalls, and cracks. Care shall be taken in the mixing
of materials, casting, curing and shipping to avoid any of the above. The Engineer may elect
31240-008: 04-18-19 10-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARTY FILTER RELOCATION

to examine the units at the casting yard or upon arrival of the same at the site. The Engineer
shall have the option of rejecting any or all of the precast work if it does not meet with the
requirements specified herein or on the Drawings. All rejected work shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications
The precast concrete manufacturing plant shall be certified by the Prestressed Concrete
Institute, Plant Certification Program, prior to the start of production. Certification is only
required for plants providing prestressed structural members such as hollow core planks,
double-T members, etc.
C. Plant production and engineering must be under direct supervision and control of an
Engineer who possesses a minimum of five years experience in precast concrete work.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE
A. Concrete materials including portland cement, aggregates, water, and admixtures shall
conform to Section 9 — Cast -in -Place Concrete.
B. For prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall
be 5,000 psi unless otherwise specified. Minimum compressive strength of concrete at
transfer of prestressing force shall be 3,500 psi unless otherwise specified.
C. For non -prestressed concrete items, minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days
shall be 4000 psi unless otherwise specified.
2.02 BEARING PADS
B. Plastic bearing pads shall be multi -monomer plastic strips which are non -leaching and
support construction loads with no visible overall expansion, manufactured specifically for
the purpose of bearing precast concrete.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 FABRICATION AND CASTING
A. All precast members shall be fabricated and cast to the shapes, dimensions and lengths
shown on the Drawings and in compliance with PCI MNL-116. Precast members shall be
straight, true and free from dimensional distortions, except for camber and tolerances
permitted later in this clause. All integral appurtenances, reinforcing, openings, etc., shall be
accurately located and secured in position with the form work system. Form materials shall
be steel and the systems free from leakage during the casting operation.
B. All cover of reinforcing shall be the same as detailed on the Drawings.
31240-008: 04-18-19 10-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARTY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Because of the critical nature of the bond development length in prestressed concrete panel
construction, if the transfer of stress is by burning of the fully tensioned strands at the ends
of the member, each strand shall first be burned at the ends of the bed and then at each end
of each member before proceeding to the next strand in the burning pattern.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate the communication of all necessary information concerning
openings, sleeves, or inserts to the manufacturer of the precast members.
E. The manufacturer shall provide lifting inserts or other approved means of lifting members.
3.02 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND STORING
A. Precast members shall not be transported away from the casting yard until the concrete has
reached the minimum required 28 day compressive strength and a period of at least 5 days
has elapsed since casting, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
B. No precast member shall be transported from the plant to the job site prior to approval of
that member by the plant inspector. This approval will be stamped on the member by the
plant inspector.
C. During handling, transporting, and storing, precast concrete members shall be lifted and
supported only at the lifting or supporting points as indicated on the shop drawings.
D. All precast members shall be stored on solid, unyielding, storage blocks in a manner to
prevent torsion, objectionable bending, and contact with the ground.
E. Precast concrete members shall not be used as storage areas for other materials or
equipment.
F. Precast members damaged while being handled or transported will be rejected or shall be
repaired in a manner approved by the Engineer.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Erection shall be carried out by the manufacturer or under his supervision using labor,
equipment, tools and materials required for proper execution of the work.
B. Contractor shall prepare all bearing surfaces to a true and level line prior to erection. All
supports of the precast members shall be accurately located and of required size and
bearing materials.
C. Installation of the precast members shall be made by leveling the top surface of the
assembled units keeping the units tight and at right angles to the bearing surface.
D. Grouting between adjacent precast members and along the edges of the assembled precast
members shall be accomplished as indicated on the drawings, care being taken to solidly
pack such spaces and to prevent leakage or droppings of grout through the assembled
precast members. Any grout which seeps through the precast members shall be removed
before it hardens.
31240-008: 04-18-19 10-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARTY FILTER RELOCATION

E. In no case shall concentrated construction loads, or construction loads exceeding the design
loads, be placed on the precast members. In no case shall loads be placed on the precast
members prior to the welding operations associated with erection, and prior to placing of
topping (if required).
F. No Contractor, Subcontractor or any of his employees shall arbitrarily cut, drill, punch or
otherwise tamper with the precast members.
G. Precast members damaged while being erected will be rejected or shall be repaired in a
manner approved by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 10-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARTY FILTER RELOCATION

11 - MIC COATING SYSTEM
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENTS
A. Furnish and install special coating systems in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. MIC Coating System
1. Install Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC) coating system atthe intermediate
pump station wetwell
1.02 REFERENCE SPECFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of these Specifications the Work shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the following documents:
1. SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 Surface Preparation of Concrete
2. NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
3. SSPC The Society of Protective Coatings
4. ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1. Manufacturer's product data and material safety data sheets for each coating product
provided. Include manufacturer's color chart for each product supplied.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations specific to environmental
conditions, surface preparation, substrate conditions, and application procedures.
3. Complete shop drawings including location and details for all terminations and
transitions.
4. Certifications:
a. Furnish affidavits from the manufacturer certifying that materials furnished
conform to the requirements specified.
b. Certify concrete repair and coating products have been checked for
compatibility.
C. Certification from manufacturer stating the applicator and applicator's assigned
personnel are certified and have received specific training for the application of
the MIC coating system.
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

d. Certificate from applicator stating the assigned personnel have received
specific training for the application of the MIC coating system.
e. Submit manufacturer's representative or independent inspector's NACE or
SSPC certification.
5. Submit manufacturer's representative name, address and telephone number who will
inspect work.
6. Provide list of at least 10 applications in high HzS environments in Southeast States
including contact names, address, phone numbers and date of installation for both the
coating system and the applicator.
7. Field Data Records and Installation Reports.
8. Product Warranty.
9. Closeout Submittals:
a. As -built drawings which include coating application limits, transitions, and
terminations.
b. Photos
C. Quality assurance records, field data records and installation reports
d. Certificate of Surface Preparation
e. Test and evaluation reports including pull -off strength (adhesion) and spark
testing.
Final Report
g. Final Certified Warranty
1.04 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Products shall be manufactured by company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with a minimum of five continuous years of experience for performance
in similar applications in wastewater treatment plants and wastewater collection systems.
B. The Contractor performing the work shall be fully qualified, experienced and equipped to
complete this work expeditiously and in a satisfactory manner and shall be an approved
installer of the coating system as certified and licensed by the manufacturer. The Contractor
shall have successfully installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet of the proposed system and
shall have a minimum of five (5) years service for applying the selected lining or coating system
as documented by verifiable references. There shall be no exceptions to this experience
requirement. The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for review
and approval before any work is performed. The following information is required.
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

The number of years of experience in performing this type of specialized work and in
installing the specified coating system.
2. Name of the manufacturer and supplier for this work and previous work listed below.
3. A list of municipal clients that the Contractor has performed this type of work including
names, phone numbers, and square feet of material installed.
4. The Contractor shall submit a certified statement from the manufacturer that he/she is
a certified and/or licensed installer of the coating.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The supplier shall be responsible for the provisions of all test requirements specified in the
referenced ASTM Standards as applicable. The supplier shall also bear the cost of all tests
specified in Paragraph 3.05, Field Testing and Acceptance of MIC Coating System. In
addition, all coating products to be installed under this Contract may be inspected at the plant
for compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory provided by the
Owner. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer's cooperation in these inspections. The
cost of plant inspection of all products and materials approved for this Contract shall be borne
by the Owner.
B. Inspections of the coating products and materials may also be made by the Engineer or other
representatives of the Owner after delivery. The products and materials shall be subject to
rejection at any time on account of failure to meet any of the Specification requirements, even
though samples may have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture.
Materials rejected after delivery shall be marked for identification and shall be removed from
the job at once.
Provide adequate time and access for inspections for the following major activities:
a. Pre -surface preparation
b. Monitoring of surface preparation
C. Post -surface preparation
d. Monitoring of repair and resurfacing product application
e. Post repair and resurfacing products
Monitoring of coating application
g. Post application inspection and testing
h. Corrective actions and final inspection
C. Pre -installation Meeting
1. At least two weeks prior to beginning work, the Contractor shall conduct a Pre -
installation Meeting to discuss coating procedures and submittals. Attendees shall
include the Coating Applicator, Owner, Engineer, Manufacturer's Technical
Representative, Testing and Inspection Agencies (if applicable), Concrete Repair
subcontractor (if applicable) and the Contractor. The minimum agenda includes:
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

a. Environmental condition requirements
b. Surface temperature requirements
C. Surface pH requirements
d. Surface preparation procedures
e. Cleaning procedures
f. Testing procedures to determine moisture content of concrete
g. Proper procedures to fill substrate
h. Application equipment
i. Proper application of primer
j. Proper application of coating system
k. Proper termination and transition details
I. Inspection of coating during and after application
M. Testing of coating.
n. Repair methods
o. Documentation requirements
P. Approval Procedures
D. Field Data Records
1. Maintain daily Quality Assurance Records including the following:
a. Date
b. Atmospheric Temperature and Humidity
C. Substrate pH
d. Substrate Temperature
e. Dew Point
f. Product Batch Numbers
g. Mixing Time for Each Part and the Combined Parts of a Coating System
h. Pot Life
i. Curing Time of Primer and Finish Layers
j. Holiday Test Results and Repair Data
k. Foreman or Supervisor's Signature
1.06 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Provide the services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative who shall
adequately supervise the surface preparation and application of the coating and lining
products. The manufacturer's representative shall be available to evaluate the coating at each
step through the process and shall supervise the lining or coating application until the installer
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

has shown through the proper surface preparation and application of the lining or coating that
the system will be installed in accordance with all manufacturer recommendations.
B. Manufacturer's technical representative or authorized inspector shall be currently certified by
NACE or SSPC.
C. A manufacturer's technical representative shall observe the application of the complete system
a minimum of two days at the beginning of the application at each structure specified to receive
MIC coating system. The manufacturer's technical representative shall provide guidance to
ensure proper application of the system.
D. The manufacturer's technical representative shall submit to the Engineer a final report, at the
completion of the work, identifying the products used, verifying and certifying that surfaces and
lining systems were properly applied, free of pinholes, blisters and other blemishes that will
compromise the coating performance and that the coating systems were proper for the
exposure and surface. Discrepancies that are found during the final inspection shall be
repaired and reinspected until system is completely satisfactory.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Care shall be taken in shipping, handling and placing to avoid damaging the products. Extra
care may be necessary during cold weather construction. Any product or material damaged in
shipment shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer.
B. Products shall be delivered to the site in clearly labeled containers and packaging. While
stored, the products shall be adequately packaged and protected. Products shall be stored in
a manner as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Any product showing deterioration, or which has been exposed to any other adverse storage
condition that may have caused damage, even though no such damage can be seen, shall be
marked as rejected and removed at once from the work.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. All lining and coatings installed shall be guaranteed by the Contractor fora period of two years
from the date of final acceptance. During this period, all defects discovered in the coating, as
determined by the Owner or Owner's Engineer shall be repaired or replaced in a satisfactory
manner by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. The Contractor is responsible for properly preparing the structures for coating prior to the
installation of the systems, including stopping all leaks, patching voids, protecting or removing
and handling all mechanical equipment such as valves and valve assemblies and weirs,
cleaning surfaces, removing rubble, etc.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 PRIMER
A. Primer shall be moisture tolerant, suitable for the environmental conditions, and compatible
with the MIC coating. Primer shall be as recommended and preferably manufactured by the
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

manufacturer of the MIC Coating System. If approved by manufacturer, MIC Coating System
can be self -priming.
B. Primer shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer to achieve a superior coating
system performance. Manufacturer shall select primer based on substrate moisture,
environmental conditions and humidity, substrate temperature, pH, and other properties.
2.02 MIC COATING SYSTEM
A. Provide MIC Coating System on surfaces indicated to receive MIC Coatings in this
specification and on drawings. MIC Coating System is to be applied only by Factory Trained
and Certified Applicators.
B. The MIC Coating shall be an epoxy mortar system such as Raven 405 as manufactured and
applied by Raven Lining Systems. Additional approved systems include: Sauereisen
Sewergard 210S: Stonhard Stonchem 510: Sherwin-Williams, Dura-Plate 5900 or6100; and
Tnemec Series 434 top coated with Series 435.
C. The MIC Coating shall be applied in one or two coats, as recommended by MIC Coating
manufacturer, for a total DFT of 100 to 120 mils. In addition to MIC Coating, fill bugholes,
depressions, and irregularities in surfaces with any dimension greater than 0.0625 inch with
epoxy filler recommended by manufacturer and apply primer at 10 mils recommended by
manufacturer to achieve superior performance.
D. MIC Coating System shall meet the following minimum characteristics:
1. Total Film Thickness of System including primers shall not be less than 100 mils
(unless otherwise noted).
2. Chemical Resistance of 10% of sulfuric acid.
3. Water Vapor Permeance of 0.002 perms per ASTM E96, Method E.
4. Concrete Tensile Pull Strength 350 psi ASTM D4541.
5. Tensile Strength of 2,750 psi ASTM D412.
6. Abrasion Resistance, CS17 Wheel <120mg loss, ASTM D4060, 1000 gm load/1000
cycles.
7. Minimum Shore Hardness D50, ASTM D2240.
8. Resistant to negative water infiltration.
9. 100% solids epoxy mortar system containing aggregate and/or fiber reinforcement.
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION OF IN -PLACE CONDITIONS
A. Equipment, vehicles, buildings, and other finished items shall be protected from damage and
overspray. Sensitive equipment shall be wrapped in plastic and tape.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Surfaces to receive coating shall be clean and free of dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign
materials.
B. Concrete and masonry surfaces shall cure for 28 days minimum prior to coating. Moisture
content of concrete and masonry surfaces shall conform to manufacturer's recommended
limits, and as listed in SSPC-SP13/NACE 6 Section 6 Acceptance Criteria Table 1. Surfaces
shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D4263 — Plastic Sheet Test, ASTM F1869 — Calcium
Chloride and ASTM F2170 — Relative Humidity Gauge as recommended bythe manufacturer.
C. Concrete and spall repair materials shall be cured in accordance with concrete and spall repair
materials manufacturer's printed cure time prior to coating with epoxy coatings.
D. Test surfaces to ensure they are within requirements of the manufacturer. Do not begin coating
work until moisture is within manufacturer's recommended range. Any leaks shall be repaired
as all surfaces shall be free of visible moisture and floating water.
E. Minimum surface preparation of concrete shall provide a surface profile as required by the
coating manufacturer. Remove all laitance, weak concrete, dirt, and other contaminants.
Remove all fins, protrusions, and similar imperfections to allow a uniform surface after surface
preparation. Under no circumstance shall surface preparation be less than manufacturer's
recommendation to provide the best possible installation. Moisture levels of concrete shall be
tested and documented and within acceptable ranges prior to application of coating.
F. Bugholes, depressions, and irregularities in surfaces with any dimension greater than 0.0625
inch shall be filled with epoxy filler recommended by manufacturer.
G. Where the surface deterioration is less than or equal to 1/2 inch (as measured from the final
finished surface to the prepared surface to be repaired) skim coats of epoxy modified
cementitious mortar shall be applied to restore and smooth surface irregularities to the final
finished surface. Epoxy modified mortar system shall be manufactured by same manufacturer
of MIC Coating System.
H. Where the surface deterioration is greater than 1/2 inch the surface shall be repaired to final
finished surface using Spall Repair Patching Material. Surface material shall be applied in
strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Materials
shall be cured a minimum of 10-days or as recommended bythe repair material manufacturer
for the site conditions. Manufacturer of MIC Coating System shall confirm proposed spall
repair patching material is compatible with MIC Coating System.
I. Where manufacturer requires additional surface preparation, to provide best possible
installation, additional requirements shall be performed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Provided written certification on the coating manufacturer's letterhead, signed by an officer of
the company that the surface preparation meets the requirements of the coating manufacturer.
3.03 PRIMER APPLICATION
A. Apply tolerant primer at 10 mils or as recommended by manufacturer to achieve superior
performance. Test moisture and pH levels of concrete and document. Apply primer when
surface is within acceptable ranges prior to application of primer.
3.04 MIC COATING APPLICATION
A. All methods, procedures of mixing, application and curing of the coating material shall be
accomplished in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations.
B. Apply MIC Coating in a minimum of two coats in addition to primer and filler. Apply MIC
coating in two (2) coats of 50 to 60 mils each for a total DFT of 100 to 120 mils in strict
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.
C. Application shall be by certified and experienced personnel only. Application of coating
systems shall take place when the temperature of the concrete is stable or falling to ensure a
minimal amount of out gassing by concrete. Use dehumidification units, fans or other means to
provide an adequate environment for application and cure when the environment is not
adequate for application or cure.
D. Application shall produce at a minimum a totally bonded coating, corrosion proof, free of
blisters, pinholes and any and all blemishes that may be precursors to failure. Promptly correct
or remove, and repair areas that fail visual inspection or testing. Recoat time between coats
shall be documented and shall not exceed manufacturer's requirements. Where recoat times
are exceeded the coating shall be prepared in strict accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations including scarification to provide sufficient profile.
E. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for terminating coating into a chase and providing 1"
radius inside corners, and easing outside corners. Provide a 1-1/2 inch cant cove along the
floor/wall transition.
3.05 FIELD TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE OF MIC COATING
A. Field acceptance of the MIC coating system shall be based on the Engineer's evaluation of the
appropriate installation of each coat per field inspections, on observation of the measurements
of the wet film thickness, and on the observation of spark testing and adhesion testing
conducted on the cured liner.
B. Pre -application testing shall be conducted by applying the MIC Coating at 20 mil thickness over
a 5 square foot area where directed to demonstrate the coating application to the inspector(s).
C. During application of each layer of the MIC coating, the Contractorshall measure the thickness
and uniformity of the coating bythe use of a wet film thickness gage meeting the requirements
of ASTM D4414. The wet film thickness shall be tested continuously for the Contractors own
use. At least three such tests will be observed by the Engineer or Owner for each coat in each
500 square feet.
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. The MIC coating shall provide a continuous monolithic surfacing with uniform thickness
throughout and be free of pinholes, slumps and drips.
E. All surfaces shall be inspected via high voltage spark testing when all coating work is complete
and the coating is hard to the touch.
The structure environment shall be properlyvented priorto testing to ensure hazardous
conditions do not exist.
2. High voltage spark testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D4787. The
spark testing equipment shall be initially set at 100 volts per 1 mil of applied film
thickness of the coating and then adjusted as necessary per ASTM D 4787.
3. All detected holidays shall be marked and the area of the liner shall be repaired. The
surface area around the coating shall first be abraded using an appropriate grit paper
or other hand abrasion tool. After abrading and cleaning the area, the area shall be
patched by hand application of the coating material. All repair procedures shall follow
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
F. The pull -off strength (adhesion) of the liner shall be tested using any one of the five Test
Methods (A, B, C, D or E) described in ASTM D-4541. The Contractor shall propose the
method and equipment to be used in the tests. The liner adhesion shall be tested in one area
for each structure or each 1000 square feet of coated area. At least three replicate pull -off tests
shall be performed for each area. The Contractor shall also submit his proposed method for
reinstatement of the area of the coating affected by the test. Repair of test areas shall be made
by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
G. There shall be no groundwater infiltration or other leakage through the structure walls after
coating. If leakage is found, it shall be eliminated with an appropriate method as recommended
bythe coating manufacturer and approved bythe Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.
H. All pipe connections shall be open and clear.
There shall be no cracks, voids, pinholes, uncured spots, dry spots, lifts, delaminations orother
type defects in the lining.
If any defective coating is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be repaired or replaced
in a satisfactory manner within 72 hours and at no additional cost to the Owner. This
requirement shall apply for the entire guarantee period.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 11-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

12 - DISK FILTRATION SYSTEM
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, assistance with control system programming as
needed, local operator interface panel and incidentals required to install, test, complete
and make ready for operation as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein, one disk
filtration system to be relocated from Terrible Creek WWTP to Brighton Forest WWTP.
The relocation shall include, but not limited to, fabricated stainless tanks, filter disks, center
tube, backwash system, and filter system instrumentation and controls including level
sensors, and valves.
B. Filter system shall be installed at Brighton Forest WWTP as shown on the Drawings and
as specified herein.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Field painting is included in Section 1.
B. Electrical Work, except as specified herein, is included in Section 21.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre -installation Conference:
1. Prior to beginning the relocation of the filter system, a qualified factory engineer of the
filter manufacturer shall hold a preconstruction conference with the Contractor,
relevant subcontractors, the Engineer and the Owner. The conference shall include,
but not be limited to, the following items for discussion and procedural instruction:
a. Setting, connecting, leveling and fastening equipment and piping.
b. Installation of appurtenances.
c. Coordination with instrumentation.
d. Coordination with prime contractor.
B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative:
1. Provide services of a manufacturer's service engineer specifically trained on type of
equipment specified. Submit qualifications of service engineer for approval. Man -day
requirements listed below are exclusive of travel time and do not relieve the
Manufacturer of obligation to provide sufficient service to place equipment in
satisfactory operation.
31240-008: 04-17-19 12-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

a. Preconstruction conference and installation: 1 Man -day.
b. Inspect final installation and conduct full operational demonstration for Filter: 1
Man -days.
c. Start-up, commission, and operation and maintenance instruction for: 1 Man -days.
d. Supervise final field acceptance testing of all installed filters: 1 Man -days.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that the disk filtration system shall function as
a complete unit to filter suspended solids from secondary treated wastewater effluent from
activated sludge clarifiers. The filter system shall be designed to operate on a continuous
basis and while receiving varying flows.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Platform
1. The existing access platforms around the filter unit shall be relocated with the filter unit
by the Contractor.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
�c�i71te7 - I
A. Contractor shall install the disk filter system per the equipment manufacturer's directions
and the drawings. The Contractor will provide all supports and anchoring required to install
the disk filter unit. The plumbing/interconnecting piping, field wiring, conduit, electrical
connections and terminations, and pad shall be provided by the Contractor as detailed on
the drawings and specifications. Contractor shall provide adequate crating and protection
of the disk filter automatic backwash filter during relocation to the project site. Installation
instructions will be provided that specifically outline installation of the disk filter. Lifting
instructions shall be provided to assist the Contractor.
B. Prior to beginning the construction of the filtration system, a qualified factory engineer of
the filter equipment manufacturer shall hold a preconstruction conference with the
Contractor, relevant subcontractors, Engineer, the Owner, and the operational person(s)
designated by the Owner.
C. The Contractor shall confirm leveling and grouting requirements for the equipment with
the manufacturer to ensure proper installation.
31240-008: 04-17-19 12-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be completed by Contractor in strict accordance with the respective
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the
Drawings.
B. When cutting of pipe and structural members are required, the cutting shall be done by
machine in a neat workmanlike manner without damage to the pipes or members. Cut
ends shall be smooth and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or members.
C. After installation, pipe lines and structural members shall be washed clean with steam or
hot water to remove any foreign material picked up during transport.
D. Joint welding of stainless steel pipe, structural members and accessories shall be in
accordance with the AWS Standards. The strength of the weld shall develop the strength
of the pipe and structural member.
E. The filter unit shall be kept thoroughly clean throughout installation. The Contractor shall
inspect the unit and clean any debris from the unit by hand or by vacuuming prior to start-
up and commissioning.
3.03 FIELD TESTING
A. Preliminary field-testing, inspection and checkout of the filter unit, following installation,
shall be performed by a qualified representative of both the equipment supplier and
Contractor. Sufficient tests shall be conducted to demonstrate to the Engineer that all
system components are fully operational, that control and instrumentation components
have been calibrated and properly adjusted, that all connecting piping is leak -proof and
properly anchored and that the entire unit is ready for continuous safe operation. The
purpose of the checkout shall be to ensure that each individual system component has
been correctly installed, shall operate fully in the manner intended, and is ready to perform
its function as part of an integrated system when placed in continuous operation.
B. When all preceding equipment tests have been satisfactorily performed, effluent is
available and can be suitably handled through the filtration system, and when so
authorized by the Engineer, the filtration unit shall be started. Provide the equipment
suppliers' representative to supervise the Owner's operating personnel during the start-up
period. Start-up operations shall be continued until it is satisfactorily demonstrated that the
filter equipment is suitable for continuous online service.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 12-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

13 - BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Reference Section 1 - General Project Requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 BUTTERFLY VALVES (WATER SERVICE)
A. Butterfly valves (water service) shall be of the rubber -seated, tight -closing type conforming
to the latest revision of AWWA C504 Specifications. The manufacturer shall have a
minimum of 5 years experience in manufacturing butterfly valves of the sizes required in
accordance with AWWA C504 Specifications. All butterfly valves shall be the product of
one manufacturer. Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by Pratt, Mueller Co.,
DeZurik, or equal. Each valve shall be performance and leak tested as specified in AWWA
C504 revised as follows: In addition to the testing requirements of AWWA C504, each
butterfly valve shall be thoroughly cleaned and opened and closed at least three (3) times
prior to testing. Certified copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to shipment of the valve.
B. Butterfly valves shall be Class 150B, unless otherwise indicated in the valve schedules,
and of the short body design with mechanical joint or flanged ends, as shown on the
Drawings.
C. Valve bodies shall be epoxy coated cast iron conforming to ASTM A-126, Grade B, ASTM
A-48, Class 40 or Ductile Iron ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Where required to meet
design operating conditions, valve bodies shall be manufactured of higher strength
materials. Valve bodies shall have integral hubs for housing shaft bearings and seals.
D. Butterfly valves shall be of the concentric or eccentric shaft types. Valve discs shall be
constructed of epoxy coated ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. Disks shall be of
the 'offset" design to provide a full 360 degree seating surface with no external ribs
transverse to flow, and shall comply with the latest revision of AWWA C504 Specifications.
The valve manufacturer shall furnish Shop Drawings which include end clearance
dimensions when the disc is in the full open position.
E. The resilient valve seat shall be synthetic rubber designed to seat against a pressure
differential of 150 psi on either side of the valve, unless otherwise indicated. The resilient
seat shall be mechanically attached to the valve disc or valve body. Any required seat
attachment hardware shall be stainless steel. The resilient seat shall be capable of being
adjusted or replaced in the field without moving the valve disc along the shaft axis, or
removing the valve from the line. The mating seat surface shall be stainless steel or
monel.
31240-008: 04-17-19 13-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

The seats shall be factory tested as per AWWA C504 at a test pressure of 150 psig, unless
otherwise indicated, and post adjusted for differential pressures indicated herein.
F. Valve shafts shall be one-piece or two-piece units of stainless steel construction suitably
sized to transmit the torques required to operate the valves under the conditions listed in
the valve schedule with appropriate safety factor. Shafts shall be securely attached to
valve disc by means of conservatively sized corrosion -resistant taper pins, threaded at
one end and secured with lockwashers and nuts (i.e.: mechanically attached). Provide
O-ring seal on taper pin if required to prevent leakage. Shaft key shall be constructed of
corrosion -resistant material.
G. Shaft bearings shall be contained in the integral hubs of the valve body and shall be the
permanently self -lubricated, corrosion resistant, sleeve type of teflon or heavy-duty
bronze. The valve assembly shall be furnished with a factory set two-way thrust bearing
designed to center the valve disc in the valve seat at all times. End cover bolts shall be
of stainless steel construction.
H. The shaft seal shall be either the bronze cartridge type with at least two O-rings, monolithic
V-Type, or pull down packing type. If monolithic V-Type or pull down packings are utilized,
it shall be self-adjusting, self -compensating type. Packing shall be as manufactured by
Chevron, or equal. Butterfly valves with pull down packings shall be designed with an
extension bonnet so that repacking can be done without removal of the actuator. For
buried valves with pull down packing the packing gland cover assembly shall be heavy
duty, soil and water resistant. Stuffing boxes for pull down packing shall have a depth
sufficient to accept at least four rings of self -compensating type packing specifically
selected for the operating pressures to be encountered. Stuffing box bolts, studs and nuts
shall be stainless steel.
The "O" ring type shaft seal shall be contained in a removable bronze cartridge. The
bronze cartridge shall be manufactured from ASTM B505 copper alloy UNS #C93200 and
shall meet the requirements of AWWA C504 for bronze, Grade E. The "O" ring material
shall be nitrile, BUNA-N rubber, as intended for use with potable water or wastewater and
per ASTM D-2000 with a hardness of 70 Shore A Durometer.
Manual operators for butterfly valves 18-inches in diameter or larger shall be the worm
gear type conforming to AWWA C504. Manual operators for butterfly valves mounted
above 6 feet from the operating floor shall be equipped with worm gear chainwheel
actuators. Operators shall be equipped with adjustable AWWA limit stops, shall be sized
according to Table IV for Class 150B, and shall require a minimum of 15 turns for 90
degrees or full stem valve travel. The capacity of the manual operator shall be adequate
to drive the valve under the differential pressure of 150 psi and maximum anticipated flow,
unless otherwise indicated in the appropriate valve schedule.
K. The manufacturer shall certify that the butterfly valves are capable of operating in
continuous duty service under these pressures and flow conditions.
L. Each valve shall by hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the operator
has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test certification
and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to shipment.
31240-008: 04-17-19 13-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

M. All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the exception
of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with two coats
(10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for corrosion
resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 13-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

14 - CHECK VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Reference Section 1 - General Project Requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES (WATER SERVICE)
A. Unless otherwise specified, check valves 3-inches and less shall be bronze, Y-pattern,
swing check valves of the regrinding type. Valves shall have a minimum 200 psi
non -shock cold water pressure rating and shall be as manufactured by Jenkins Bros.
Corp., Crane Company, or equal.
B. Check valves larger than 3-inches shall be cushioned swing check valves rated for a
minimum working pressure of 200 psi and shall be of the "Shockless Swing -Check" type
as manufactured by G.A. Industries, or equal.
C. Valve closure shall be controlled by an external weighted lever arm, the action of which
is cushioned by a hydraulic oil or pneumatic cylinder. Counterweights and cushion
cylinders shall be designed so that adjustments can be made in the field to minimize
surge and to prevent backflow and hammering noises during actual service conditions.
The hydraulic oil or pneumatic cushion system shall be completely self-contained.
D. Valve bodies, cover discs, levers, and disc arms shall be constructed of heavy cast iron
or cast steel fully conforming to the latest revision of ASTM A-126 Class B or Class
WCB, respectively. Valve ends shall be Standard American 125 pound flat -faced
flanged, in accordance with ANSI B16.1. Each valve disc shall be suspended from a
noncorrosive shaft which shall pass through a stuffing box and be connected on the
outside of the valve to the cushion and counterweight mechanism.
E. Valve seating shall be rubber -to -metal designed for drop -tight shutoff. The body seat
ring shall be made of bronze or stainless steel and the disc seat ring of 80 Durometer
rubber. Body and disc seats shall be renewable.
F. With the exception of the valve body and seat, all parts in contact with water shall be
manufactured from noncorrosive materials. Internal corrosive surfaces shall be shop
painted with two coats of epoxy for corrosion resistance. Exterior surfaces shall be
painted in accordance with the requirements of Section 1 - General Project
Requirements.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 14-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

15 - PLUG VALVES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Reference Section 1 - General Project Requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug valves shall be of the non -lubricated, eccentric seating plug type with synthetic
rubber -faced plugs as manufactured by DeZurik Company, Pratt, Milliken, or equal. All
valves shall be provided with limit stops and rotate 90' from fully open to fully shut. The
minimum working pressure for all valves shall be 150 psi, and the test pressure shall be
at least 270 psi for valves up through 12-inch and at least 230 psi for valves 14-inch and
larger. The port area of valves shall be at least 80 percent of full pipe area for valves
less than 24-inches and 70 percent for valves 24-inches and larger, unless otherwise
specified herein. The body materials shall be of epoxy coated cast iron or semi -steel,
unless specified otherwise. Seats shall have a welded overlay of 90 percent pure nickel
and machined to a finish containing no stress cracks. Plug facings shall be of Hycar, or
equal and completely suitable for use with domestic sewage.
B. The shaft seal shall be either the bronze cartridge type with at least two O-Rings,
monolithic V-Type, U-Cup Type, or pull down packing type. If monolithic V-Type, U-Cup
Type, or pull down packings are utilized, it shall be self-adjusting, self -compensating
type. Packing shall be as manufactured by Chevron, or equal. Plug valves with pull
down packings shall be designed with an extension bonnet so that repacking can be
done without removal of the actuator.
C. All buried valves shall have mechanical joint ends (unless otherwise shown), conforming
to ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C 111), and shall be operated with a standard AWWA 2-inch
square nut through a totally enclosed worm gear actuator. Valve boxes shall be
installed with all buried plug valves and shall be as specified herein.
D. Unless otherwise shown, all exposed valves 4-inches in diameter and larger shall have
flanged ends conforming to ANSI B16.1-125/150 pound standard with face-to-face
dimensions of standard plug valves. Valves smaller than 4-inches in diameter shall
have screwed ends, unless otherwise noted.
E. Valves 8-inches in diameter and larger shall be handwheel or floorstand operated where
required or indicated on the Drawings through totally enclosed worm gear actuators,
unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Valves 6-inches in diameter and
smaller shall have lever operators, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings.
Manual operators for plug valves mounted above 6 feet from the operating floor shall be
equipped with worm gear chainwheel actuators.
31240-008: 04-17-19 15-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

F. The manufacturer shall certify that the plug valves are capable of operating in
continuous duty service under these pressures and flow conditions.
G. Each valve shall by hydrostatically tested and tested for bubble tightness after the
operator has been mounted and adjusted. Copies of the hydrostatic and leakage test
certification and certification of conformance shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to
shipment.
H. All internal and external ferrous components and surfaces of the valves, with the
exception of stainless steel and finished or bearing surfaces, shall be shop painted with
two coats (10 mils min. dry film thickness) of the manufacturer's premium epoxy for
corrosion resistance. Damaged surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 15-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

16 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All ductile iron pipe and specials shall be marked with the manufacturer's name or
trademark, size, weight, thickness class, the date of manufacture, and the word
"Ductile".
B. Ductile iron pipe (DIP) of the sizes shown or specified shall conform to ANSI A21.51
(AWWA C151), Grade 60-42-10 for ductile iron pipe centrifugally cast in metal molds or
sand -lined molds. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.50 (AWWA C150) for
thickness design and shall be supplied in 18 or 20 foot nominal lengths or as required to
meet the requirements of the Drawings. Fittings and specials shall be cast iron or ductile
iron, conforming to the requirements of ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110) or ANSI A21.53
(AWWA C153) and shall have a minimum rated working pressure of 250 psi.
C. Minimum Class 53 pipe shall be used for flanged spools.
D. The Drawings indicate work affecting existing piping and appurtenances. The Contractor
shall take whatever measurements that are required to complete the work as shown or
specified.
PART 2 -- PRODUCT
2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All pipe and fittings shall be cement mortar lined. Linings shall conform to American
Standard Specifications for Cement Mortar Lining for Cast Iron Pipe and Ductile Iron
Pipe and Fittings, ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104) and shall be standard thickness. The
mortar lining shall be protected with the bituminous seal coat. All buried DIP and fittings
shall have a bituminous coating on the exterior surfaces in accordance with ANSI
A21.51 (AWWA C151). All exposed DIP and fittings shall have a shop applied prime
coat in accordance with Section 1 — General Project Requirements.
B. All exposed ductile iron pipe shall have flanged joints.
C. Flanged joints and fittings shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi with 125 lb.
American Standard flanges. All flanges and fittings shall conform to the requirements of
ANSI B16.1. Flanges shall be ductile iron and shall be of the threaded or screw on type.
The face of the flanges shall be machined after installation of the flange to the pipe. No
raised surface shall be allowed on flanges. Flanged pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ANSI Specification A21.15, (AWWA C115). Pipe lengths shall be
fabricated to meet the requirements of the Drawings.
31240-008: 04-17-19 16-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. Gaskets shall be the "Ring Gasket" type, 1/8-inch minimum thickness, cloth inserted
rubber, red rubber or neoprene and shall be suitable for the service intended. Gaskets
for glass lined pipe shall be TORUSEAL flange gasket, or equal. Bolts shall be of the
size and length called for and in accordance with the "American Standard" and comply
with the requirements of the ANSI/AWWA Standards. The bolts for flanged joints shall
be a minimum ASTM A307; Grade B carbon steel and be in accordance with ANSI
A21.10, (AWWA C110). The bolts shall have hexagonal heads and nuts, no washers
shall be used.
E. Bell and spigot pipe shall be provided with push on, O-ring rubber gasket, compression
type joints and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111).
Fittings and specials shall be supplied with mechanical joints as specified for mechanical
joint pipe. If required by installation conditions, pipe shall have cast -on lugs for
adequately tying it together.
F. Mechanical joints and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A21.11,
(AWWA C111). Joints shall be made employing a tapered rubber gasket forced into a
tapered groove with a ductile iron follower ring. If required by installation conditions,
pipe and fittings shall have cast -on lugs for adequately tying the pipe and fittings
together. These shall be in conformance with standard practice and as outlined under
the appropriate AWWA Specifications.
G. Bolts for mechanical joints shall be high strength corrosion resistant low -alloy steel tee -
head bolts with hexagonal nuts.
H. Mechanical coupling joint pipe and fittings shall be split type, shouldered end. Coupling
materials shall be malleable iron. Couplings shall have a minimum pressure rating and
service equal to that of the connected piping. Gaskets shall be of rubber. Bolts and nuts
shall be heat treated carbon steel track bolts and shall be plated. After installation,
buried couplings shall receive two heavy coats of coal tar epoxy (min. 24 mil thickness)
which is compatible with the finish of the couplings. Couplings shall be as manufactured
by Victaulic Company of America Style 31, or equal.
Restrained joint pipe shall consist of factory manufactured bolted retainer rings, ductile
iron locking segments held in place by rubber retainers, or ductile iron retaining rings
that lock over the bell of the joint and are secured to prevent rotation, and factory welded
retainer beads or rings on the spigot of the pipe. All components of the bolted or snap
ring assemblies shall be constructed of corrosion -resistant, high strength, low -alloy steel.
Restrained joint pipe shall be Flex -Ring or Lock -Ring type joints as manufactured by
American Cast Iron Pipe Company, HP LOK or TR Flex as manufactured by US Pipe,
Bolt-Lok or Snap-Lok as manufactured by Griffin Pipe Products, TR Flex or Super Lock
as manufactured by Clow Water Systems Co., or approved equal.
Restrained fittings for piping systems 16-inches in diameter and greater shall have
factory restraint systems identical to the factory restrained joint pipe specified in Item K
above. All fittings shall be minimum pressure Class 250 unless otherwise specified.
K. Restrained fittings for pipe systems 14-inches in diameter and smaller shall be
Mechanical Joint fittings with restraint assemblies such as Stargrip by Star Pipe
Systems, Mega Lug by EBAA Iron, ONE LOK by Sigma, Grip Ring by Romac, or
31240-008: 04-17-19 16-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

approved equal. Where threaded -rods are allowed, the rods and tabs shall be designed
for the specified restraint system design pressure, shall have lengths less than 10 feet
between fittings, and shall be painted with two heavy coats of coal tar epoxy after
installation.
L. The manufactured systems for thrust restraint indicated above shall be used where
restrained joint ductile iron pipe and fittings are specified or indicated on the drawings.
Gripping gaskets are not an acceptable form of restraint. Thrust restraint and
harnessing systems such as threaded -rods, friction clamps, retainer glands shall be
used only where specifically specified herein, indicated on the drawings or if allowed by
the Engineer in isolated applications where conditions warrant and necessitate their use.
Concrete thrust blocks may be used in accordance with the schedule indicated on the
drawings, if applicable.
M. Cast Iron Soil Pipe shall conform to the standards of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
(CISPI) Specification HS-67, and also ANSI Specification A-112.5.2 for Hub & Spigot
pipe or A.112.5.1 for Hub & Spigot pipe or A.112.5.1 for No -Hub Pipe. Pipe class shall
be "Extra Heavy: (XH).
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All piping shall be installed by skilled workmen and in accordance with the best standard
practice for piping installation as shown on the Drawings, specified or recommended by
the pipe manufacturer. Proper tools and appliances for the safe and convenient
handling and installing of the pipe and fittings shall be used. Great care shall be taken to
prevent any pipe coating from being damaged on the inside or outside of the pipe and
fittings. All pieces shall be carefully examined for defects, and no piece shall be installed
which is known to be cracked, damaged, or otherwise defective. If any defective pieces
should be discovered after having been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with
a sound one in a satisfactory manner by the Contractor and at his own expense. Pipe
and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned before they are installed and shall be kept clean
until they are accepted in the complete work. All piping connections to equipment shall
be provided with unions or coupling flanges located so that piping may be readily
dismantled from the equipment. At certain applications, Dresser, Victaulic, or equal,
couplings may also be used. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be
free to expand and contract without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to
which it is connected. All piping shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no
abrupt changes in line or grade and shall be supported and braced against movement,
temporary, or permanent. All exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and
horizontal angles properly related to adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance
of good workmanship.
B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all waste and vent piping shall pitch uniformly at a
1/4-inch per foot grade and accessible cleanouts shall be furnished and installed as
shown and as required by local building codes. Installed length of waste and vent piping
shall be determined from field measurements in lieu of the Drawings.
31240-008: 04-17-19 16-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. All piping shall be installed in such a manner that it will be free to expand and/or contract
without injury to itself or to structures and equipment to which it is connected. All piping
shall be erected to accurate lines and grades with no abrupt changes in line or grade
and shall be supported and braced against movement, temporary, or permanent. All
exposed piping shall be installed with vertical and horizontal angles properly related to
adjoining surfaces or pipes to give the appearance of good workmanship.
D. Ductile iron pipe (DIP) shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the
Ductile Iron Pipe Handbook published by the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association,
and AWWA C600.
E. Where it is necessary to cut ductile iron pipe in the field, such cuts shall be made
carefully in a neat workmanlike manner using approved methods to produce a clean
square cut. The outside of the cut end shall be conditioned for use by filing or grinding a
small taper, at an angle of approximately 30 degrees.
F. Field welding of ductile iron will not be permitted.
3.2 JOINTS IN PIPING
A. Flanged joints shall be brought to exact alignment and all gaskets and bolts or studs
inserted in their proper places. Bolts or studs shall be uniformly tightened around the
joints. Where stud bolts are used, the bolts shall be uniformly centered in the
connections and equal pressure applied to each nut on the stud. Pipes in all lines
subject to temperature changes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place to
compensate for expansion when hot.
3.3 FLUSHING AND TESTING
A. At the conclusion of the installation work, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all new
liquid conveying pipe by flushing with water or other means to remove all dirt, stones,
pieces of wood, etc., which may have entered the pipe during the construction period. If
after this cleaning any obstructions remain, they shall be corrected by the Contractor, at
his own expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Liquid conveying pipelines shall be
flushed at the rate of at least 2.5 feet per second for a duration suitable to the Engineer
or shall be flushed by other methods approved by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 16-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

17 - PVC/CPVC PIPE AND THERMOPLASTIC HOSE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. Reference Section 1 - General Project Requirements.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 1785, D 1784
and F 441, "normal impact" pipe, Schedule 40 or 80 as specified.
B. Fittings used with this pipe shall be socket type or flanged type as specified herein or
indicated on the Drawings. Plastic piping shall be installed in full accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations for the specific installation. No field bending or
distortion of the pipe will be permitted.
C. PVC pipe shall be Type 1 Grade 1 conforming to ASTM D 1784 and D 1785. Fittings
shall conform to the following standard specifications:
Socket Type (Schedule 40); ASTM D 2466
Socket Type (Schedule 80); ASTM D 2467
D. Provide flanged fittings of the same material as the specified pipe and material
conforming to ANSI B16.5 at all valves and equipment except at true (double) union
valves. Flange gaskets shall be natural rubber. Where flanged piping is used with
chemical systems, the gasket material shall conform to the requirements of the following
table. Flange bolts shall be type 316 stainless steel minimum.
E. Solvent cement for socket type joints shall conform to ASTM D 2564 for PVC pipe and
fittings. Solvent cement for chemical service shall be Weld -On 724 as manufactured by
IPS Corporation, or equal.
F. C900-Class 200 shall be in sizes between 4 inches and 12 inches and shall meet the
requirements of AWWA C900 "Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe" and shall
conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241. The pipe shall be a
minimum of DR 14 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures
determined by the depth of burial in the field.
1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A
PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying
lengths shall be 20-feet (±1 inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the
total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths.
31240-008: 04-17-19 17-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Reruns of reclaimed material shall not be accepted.
2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push -on, O-ring rubber gasket,
compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM 2672.
Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.
3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 914 psi for all sizes when
tested in accordance with D2241.4.
4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 985 psi applied
in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced
in ASTM D2241.
5. Fittings for C900-Class 200, DR 14 shall be ductile iron, bolted mechanical joint.
G. C900-Class 150 shall be in sizes between 4 inches and 12 inches and shall meet the
requirements of AWWA C900 "Poly Vinyl Chlorine (PVC) Pressure Pipe" and shall
conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241. The pipe shall be a
minimum of DR 18 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden pressures
determined by the depth of burial in the field.
Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A
PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying
lengths shall be 20-feet (±1 inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the
total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths.
Reruns of reclaimed material shall not be accepted.
2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push -on, O-ring rubber gasket,
compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM 2677.
Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.
3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 435 psi for all sizes when
tested in accordance with D2241.
4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 755 psi applied
in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced
in ASTM D2241.
5. Fittings for C900-Class 150, DR 18 shall be ductile iron, bolted mechanical joint.
H. PVC pressure rated pipe (PR 160) shall be in sizes between 1 1/2 inches and 12 inches
and shall conform to all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and ASTM D2241 and shall
be a minimum of SDR 26 and shall be capable of withstanding the overburden
pressures determined by the depth of burial in the field.
1. Pipe material shall be made from clean, virgin, NSF approved Class 12454-A
PVC compound conforming to resin specification ASTM D1784. Standard laying
lengths shall be 20-feet (1± inch). Random lengths of not more than 15% of the
total footage of each size may be shipped in lieu of the standard lengths.
31240-008: 04-17-19 17-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Reruns of reclaimed materials shall not be accepted.
2. The pipe shall have bell and spigot ends with push -on, O-ring rubber gasket,
compression type joints conforming to the requirements of ASTM 2672.
Elastomeric gaskets shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477.
3. Minimum pipe stiffness (F/dY) at 5% deflection shall be 135 psi for all sizes when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2241.
4. The pipe shall be designed to pass a quick burst test pressure of 500 psi applied
in 60 to 70 seconds when tested in accordance with ASTM D1599, as referenced
in ASTM D2241.
5. The pipe shall be designed to pass for 1000 hours a sustained test pressure of
340 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1598, as referenced in ASTM
D2241.
Fittings for PR 160, SDR 26 shall be PVC and designed for the pipe being supplied.
J. Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene (ABS) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D
2661. Pipe and fittings shall have socket type couplings with solvent cement joints.
Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM D 2235.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 17-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

18 - SUBMERSIBLE NON -CLOG PUMP
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install submersible non -clog pumps at the locations shown
on the Drawings and as specified herein. All pumps shall be supplied by the same
manufacturer.
1.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump Schedule:
Intermediate Pump Station 1
Arrangement
1 duty + 1 standby
Design Capacity (gpm)*
200
Total Dynamic Head (ft.)
23
Motor Horsepower
3
Max. Pump Speed (rpm)
1,800
Suction Condition
Flooded
Min. Size of Solids (in.)
3
Discharge Diameter (in.)
4
Control Panel Rating
480 Volt, 3 Phase
NEMA 4X SS
*Capacity per pump for Duplex units.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The pumps shall be submersible sewage pumps as manufactured by Fairbanks Morse,
Flygt, ABS, or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. The pump and all related equipment shall be designed for the wastewater applications
specified herein and shall be suitable for continuous or intermittent operation. The pump
shall be bottom suction, side discharge construction and shall be supplied with a foot
mounted discharge connection elbow and integral sliding rail removal system of the
pump manufacturer's design matched to the pumps being supplied.
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. The lifting cover, stator housing, and volute casing shall be close -grained cast iron
conforming to ASTM A48-Class 30, 35, or 40. Ductile iron pump volute shall be furnished
if recommended by pump manufacturer for specified pressure rating. All exposed nuts,
bolts, washers, and other fastening devices shall be AISI type 316 stainless steel.
C. Casing shall be a smooth surface devoid of blowholes, pits, burrs, or other irregularities.
The casing shall have a suction cover, which can be easily removed for easy access to
the impeller. All non -stainless steel metal surfaces coming in contact with the pumped
media shall be protected by a factory applied spray coating of Supplier's modified acrylic
primer and finish. The volute shall be single piece, non -concentric design and shall have
smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solids which can pass
through the impeller. Pump volute shall be provided with a cleanout port to allow for
removal of any foreign material blocking or impeding performance of the pump.
D. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with
nitrile or Viton rubber O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by
metal -to -metal contact between machined surfaces. This will result in controlled
compression of the O-rings without the requirement of a specific torque limit. Secondary
sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease or other devices shall
not be acceptable.
E. The impeller shall be hard alloy gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48 Class 30, 35, or
40. Impellers shall be dynamically balanced, closed non -clogging design with multiple
vanes. The impeller shall be capable of handling solids of specified sphere size, fibrous
materials, heavy sludge, and other matter found in normal wastewater applications. The
impeller shall be mechanically secured to the motor shaft per manufacturer's
recommendations utilizing machined stainless steel components. Adhesive or friction -
type fits are not acceptable. Impeller shall be coated with the same system applied to the
interior of the casing.
F. A wear ring system shall provide efficient sealing between the volute and impeller.
Casing and impeller wear ring shall be of stainless steel construction. Supplier shall
submit AISI grades of stainless steel proposed for the wear rings. Rings shall be drive
fitted to the volute inlet and heat -shrink fitted to the impeller.
G. Shafting shall be constructed of AISI 329 stainless steel or 400 Series stainless steel for
the pump and motor, sufficiently large in diameter to transmit safely the maximum torque
developed by the drive unit and of such a design as to provide a rigid support for the
impeller and to prevent excessive vibration. The shaft shall be suitably heat -treated,
turned, ground, and polished over its entire length.
H. Shaft Seals
1. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical shaft seal system
consisting of two totally independent seal assemblies of high-pressure design. The
seals shall operate in a lubricant reservoir that hydrodynamically lubricates the
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

lapped seal faces at a constant rate. The lubricant chamber shall be designed to
prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant expansion capacity. The drain and
inspection plug, with positive anti -leak seal shall be easily accessible from the
outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped media for lubrication. Seal
lubricant shall be FDA Approved, nontoxic.
2. The lower, primary seal unit, located between the pump and the lubricant chamber
shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating, industrial duty,
corrosion resistant, seal rings (Tungsten carbide/Tungsten carbide or Tungsten
carbide/silicon carbide). The lower seal shall be independent of the impeller hub.
3. The upper, secondary seal unit, located between the lubricant chamber and the
motor housing, chamber shall contain one stationary and one positively driven
rotating, industrial duty, corrosion resistant, seal rings (ceramic/carbon or carbo/Ni-
resist).
4. Each seal interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system. The seals
shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment and shall be capable of operating
in either clockwise or counter clockwise direction of rotation without damage or loss
of seal. The seal system shall not be damaged when run dry. No external source of
seal cooling or lubrication water shall be required.
5. The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable nor equal to the dual
independent seal specified: shaft seals without positively driven rotating members,
or conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or
double spring acting between the upper and lower seal faces. Cartridge type
systems will not be acceptable. No system requiring a pressure differential to offset
pressure and to effect sealing shall be used.
The pump shaft shall rotate on at least two (2) heavy duty permanently lubricated
bearings. Bearings shall be designed to carry all radial and axial thrust loads and shall
have a minimum AFBMA B-10 life of 100,000 hours at all points along the usable portion
of the pump curve at maximum pump speed.
The Slide Rail Mounting System shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings and as
specified herein.
A rail system shall be provided and installed for each pump. The pump shall be
easily removed from the wetpit for inspection or service without entering the pit or
disconnecting piping.
2. The pump shall be provided with a foot mounted discharge connection elbow
constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A48-Class 30 or 35, permanently
installed in the wet well along with the discharge piping. The discharge connection
elbow shall be constructed with a 125 lb. ANSI standard flat faced flange. The
pump shall be automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

lowered into place, and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. Sealing of
the pumping unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a
simple downward motion of the pump.
3. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pump unit. The entire weight
of the pump unit shall be guided by the guide bar(s) and pressed tightly against the
discharge connection elbow to provide positive sealing under all conditions.
4. The entire sliding rail system shall be designed to safely withstand all stresses
imposed thereon by vibration, torque, shock and all possible direct and eccentric
loads. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor of the sump.
5. Lower guide bar holders shall be integral with the discharge connection. Guide
bars shall be of at least standard weight 316 stainless steel pipe of a conservative
size adequate for its intended use. The guide bars shall not support any portion of
the weight of the pump.
6. All anchor bolts, lifting bolts, eye lugs and lifting cable, etc. necessary for a
complete installation and maintenance of the pump shall be constructed of Type
316 stainless steel and shall be adequately designed for its intended use.
7. All metal to metal interfaces where movement might occur shall be non -sparking.
The slide mounting system for the influent pumps shall meet or exceed
Underwriters Laboratory requirements for operation in a Class I, Division 1, Group
D hazardous location.
K. All anchor bolts, lifting bolts, eye lugs, etc. necessary for complete installation and
maintenance of the pump shall be furnished by Supplier and constructed of Type 316
stainless steel and shall be adequately designed for its intended use.
2.03 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. The pump manufacturer shall provide the power and control cables between the pump
and the local disconnect switch, junction box, or control panel (see Drawings) and shall
be responsible for reviewing the electrical drawings as necessary to determine the
required cable length. All pumps for the same pumping application shall be provided with
the same length of cable. No splices shall be allowed unless specifically indicated on the
Drawings. Cables shall be PVC or oil resistant cloroprene rubber jacketed type SPC
cable suitable for submersible pump applications, shall be sized according to NEC and
ICEA standards, and shall meet with MSHA approval. Stainless steel strain relief
connectors shall be furnished for all cables.
B. Cable Entry Water Seal
1. The cable entry water seal design shall insure a watertight and submersible seal
without specific torque requirements. The cable entry shall be comprised of a
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by stainless steel washers all having
a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside
diameter and compressed by the entry body containing a strain relief function,
separate from the function of sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a
shoulder in the pump top. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be
separated by a stator lead sealing gland or terminal board, which shall isolate
gaining access through the pump top. The junction chamber containing the
terminal board shall be sealed from the motor by an elastomer compression seal
O-ring. Connection between the cable conductors and stator leads shall be made
with threaded compressed type binding post permanently affixed to the terminal
board and thus perfectly leak proof. Each pump shall be equipped with separate
terminal board that totally isolates the incoming power supply from the pump motor.
2. An acceptable alternate cable entry seal shall include cable leads shall enter at the
top of the motor and shall allow the cable -to -motor connection to be accomplished
in the field without soldering. All power and control lead wires shall be double
sealed as they enter the motor in such a manner that cable -wicking will not occur.
This sealing system shall consist of a rubber grommet followed by epoxy that is
high in adhesive qualities and has a low coefficient of expansion. Each conductor
shall have a small section of insulation removed to establish a window area of bare
wire and each wire shall be untwisted and surrounded by epoxy potting material. A
cable strain relief mechanism shall be an integral part of the sealing system. The
cable sealing system shall be capable of withstanding an external pressure test of
1,200 psi as well as a cable assembly pull test as required by Underwriters
Laboratories. Power and control leads shall be terminated on a sealed terminal
board. The terminal board and its bronze lugs shall be O-ring sealed.
C. Electrical Requirements
Motors
Intermediate
Pumps
Rating
460V, 3 ph, 60 Hz
Horsepower
3
Speed, rpm
1800
Insulation
Class F
Explosion Proof
No
Inverter Duty
No
Service Factor
1.15
Motor Winding Temperature Switches
Yes
RTDs
No
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Motors Intermediate
Pumps
Cooling Jacket I No
D. The pump motor shall be a squirrel -cage induction type, housed in a watertight chamber.
The stator winding and stator leads shall be moisture resistant. The use of bolts, pins, or
other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing shall not be allowed.
E. The motor shall be guaranteed for continuous unsubmerged duty, capable of sustaining
a minimum of ten (10) starts per hour without overheating.
F. The motor shall be provided with pre -lubricated radial and thrust bearings which are
designed to carry the entire load which may be imposed upon it under all operating
conditions.
G. All motors shall be of nationally known manufacture, shall be housed in enclosures
specifically designed for submersible pump application.
H. Moisture detector probes shall be provided in the oil -seal chamber. The pump
manufacturer shall provide a moisture detection relay compatible with the probes. The
relay shall be installed in the location shown on the Drawings.
2.04 CONTROL PANELS
A. Motor starters and controls for each pump installation shall be provided in a NEMA 4X
stainless steel control panel. Power cable between the pumps and the control panel shall
be furnished by the pump supplier. Each control panel shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
A single fused or circuit breaker type NEMA 4X lockable disconnect switch
operable from outside the control panel.
2. A motor circuit protector and full voltage nonreversing magnetic starter for each
pump. The motor starter shall be NEMA Size 1 (minimum) for each pump.
3. Each pump shall be provided with a Hand -Off -Auto (H-O-A) control switch on the
front of the control panel with control in the automatic mode by the plant control
system.
4. Control power shall be 120 VAC from an integral, fused control power transformer.
5. Each control panel shall include an individual alarm/indicating pilot light for: Pump
Running, Seal Failure (Moisture Intrusion), Motor Winding High Temperature, and
Power On. Seal failure and motor over temperature alarms shall seal -in and stop
the associated pump. A reset pushbutton shall be provided.
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.05 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be included:
One (1) — Spare pump
One (1) — Set of lower and upper wearing rings
One (1) — Set of motor and pump bearings
One (1) — Complete mechanical seal assembly (upper and lower)
Two (2) — Complete sets of gaskets and "O" ring seals
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in
accordance with Section 2 - Equipment General Provisions.
Service
Number of Trips
Number of Days/Trip
Installation and Testing
1
1
Startup and Training
1
1
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 18-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

19 — WET WELL MOUNTED NON -CLOG PUMP
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install wet well mounted non -clog pumps at the
locations shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. All pumps shall be supplied
by the same manufacturer.
1.02 OPERATING CONDITIONS AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pump Schedule:
Intermediate Pumn Station 1
Arrangement
1 duty + 1 standby
Design Capacity (gpm)*
200
Total Dynamic Head (ft.)
23
Motor Horsepower
3
Max. Pump Speed (rpm)
1,200
Suction Condition
Flooded
Min. Size of Solids (in.)
3
Discharge Diameter (in.)
4
Control Panel Rating
480 Volt, 3 Phase
NEMA 4X SS
*Capacity per pump for Duplex units.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. The pumps shall be wet well mounted non -clog pumps as manufactured by Smith &
Loveless or approved equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. The pump and all related equipment shall be designed for the wastewater applications
specified herein and shall be suitable for continuous or intermittent operation. The pump
shall be bottom suction, side discharge construction and shall be factory -installed on a
welded steel base with a hinged fiberglass cover.
B. The baseplate of the pump station structure shall be AISI type 316 stainless steel.
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. The pumps shall be (4") vertical, centrifugal non -clog type of heavy cast-iron
construction. The shaft shall be solid stainless steel through the mechanical seal. The
shaft bearing nearest the pump impeller shall be locked in place so that endplay is
limited to the clearance within the bearing. The dimension from the lowest bearing to the
top of the impeller shall not exceed 6".
D. The pump shall have an integral adapter providing a large water reservoir above the
impeller to provide for positive exclusion of air from the impeller. The seal shall be
inside this area to assure lubrication.
E. The pump shaft shall be sealed against leakage by a single mechanical seal
constructed so as to be automatically drained and primed each time the pump is drained
and primed. The seal shall be of carbon and ceramic materials with the mating surfaces
lapped to a flatness tolerance of one light band. The rotating ceramic shall be held in
mating position with the stationary carbon by a stainless steel spring. The entire seal
assembly shall be held in place by a bronze seal housing to prevent excessive heat
buildup.
F. The pump volute shall be furnished with mounting lugs and bolted to the station floor
plate, forming a gas -tight seal.
G. The pump impeller shall be of the enclosed mono -port type made of close -grained cast-
iron.
H. Hinged Fiberglass Cover
The pump station shall be enclosed by a hinged fiberglass cover made of molded
reinforced orthophthalic polyester resins. The outside of the enclosure shall be
coated with a polyester protective in -mold coating. The cover shall have a suitable
drip -lip around the edge and shall be provided with a hasp and staple connection
to the floor plate to allow the pump chamber to be locked with a padlock.
2. The cover shall be attached with a multi -segment stainless steel hinge,
constructed of 7 gauge type 304 SS with a 3/8" diameter stainless steel pin.
Stainless steel bolts with tamperproof heads and a full width 3/8" thick anodized
aluminum backing plate shall anchor the hinge to the fiberglass cover.
3. Dual high-pressure gas struts shall be provided to counteract the dead weight of
the cover assembly and limit the maximum lifting force required for opening to less
than 20 pounds. The cover shall be self -latching upon opening, with a manually
operated release for closing. Duplex heavy gauge safety chains shall be provided
to prevent over -extension. All hardware and components of the cover assembly
that are exposed to the weather shall be constructed of corrosion -resistant
materials
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. Heavy extruded aluminum, adjustable ventilating louvers shall be provided on
each end of the fiberglass cover, which are capable of being closed during cold
weather operation.
5. An aluminum manway cover fabricated of 1/4" treadplate, located exterior to the
fiberglass pump chamber shall be provided, complete with padlocking provisions.
The manway shall be an integral part of the station floor plate and provide access
to the wet well. The minimum open area of the manway access into the wet well
shall be at least 4.2 square feet
The pump suction connections shall be drilled and tapped for a 125-pound American
Standard flange for easy attachment of the suction risers. The discharge line from each
pump shall be fitted with a clapper -type check valve and eccentric plug valve. The check
valve shall be of the spring -loaded type with external lever arm and an easily replaced
resilient seat for added assurance against vacuum leaks. Check valves shall have
stainless steel shaft with replaceable bronze shaft bushings. An operating wrench shall
be provided for the plug valves. The suction and discharge connections, where they
pass through the pump station baseplate shall be sealed by gaskets, rather than being
welded.
J. A single 6-8 mil dry film thickness coating of Supplier's self -priming Cycloaliphatic Amine
Epoxy shall be factory applied to the base. After curing, a 2-3 mil DFT top coating of
Supplier's moisture -cured Aliphatic Polyurethane protective finish shall be applied to the
top of the base. Stainless steel, aluminum and other corrosion -resistant surfaces shall not
be coated.
K. A vacuum priming system shall be furnished to prime the main pumps. The system shall
include two vacuum pumps. Vacuum pumps shall have corrosion -resistant internal
components. The vacuum priming system shall be complete with large port vacuum
control solenoid valves, Supplier's prime level sensor, float -operated check valves to
protect the vacuum pumps, and all necessary shut-off valves. The float -operated check
valves shall have a transparent body for visual inspection. All hoses and tubing used in
the priming system shall be at least 3/8" nominal diameter. The priming system shall
automatically provide positive lubrication of the mechanical seal each time a main pump
is primed.
L. A ventilating blower capable of delivering 250 CFM at 0.1" (118 I/s at 2.5 mm) static
water pressure shall be provided in order to remove the heat generated by continuous
motor operation. The ventilating blower shall be turned on and off automatically by a
preset thermostat. A heavy extruded aluminum louvered grille with adjustable openings
shall cover the discharge of the blower. A similar grille shall be provided in the other
end of the station enclosure for air intake. A 500-watt electric heater controlled by a
preset thermostat shall be furnished. The heater shall be rigidly mounted in the station
to prevent removal.
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

M. A 4" Bourdon tube -type compound vacuum/pressure gauge with 3-1/2" dial, fitted with a
brass stop valve and a manual air relief valve shall be provided for each pump. The
gauges shall be mounted apart from the pumps, on a bracket attached to the control
panel support structure, and connected to the pump discharge taps by flexible tubing to
minimize vibration. The range of each gauge shall be selected to place the normal
operating discharge pressure reading in the middle one-third of the scale and the gauge
shall also be capable of measuring up to 30" HG (1.0 bar) of vacuum. The dial shall be
white with black markings and the gauge itself shall have an accuracy of 1 % of scale.
The gauge shall be American made, with a Zytel Nylon case with 1/2" blow-out plug,
stainless steel bezel, acrylic lens and phosphorus bronze tube with brass socket.
Temperature compensation shall be provided by an internal compensating diaphragm.
Gauges shall be protected from the service fluid by a Buna-N elastomer "boot"
diaphragm within the stem, and the Bourdon tube and the space between the Bourdon
tube and the internal isolating diaphragm shall be filled with low temperature instrument
oil, completely isolating the gauge components from the fluid being measured.
N. All anchor bolts, lifting bolts, eye lugs, etc. necessary for complete installation and
maintenance of the pump shall be furnished by Supplier and constructed of Type 316
stainless steel and shall be adequately designed for its intended use.
O. To allow on -site maintenance of the pumps, a stanchion with lifting arm shall be
provided to lift each pump. The lifting arm shall have a hook over the center of the motor
to support a hoist for removal of the motors, impellers and pumps from the station.
2.03 ELECTRICAL AND CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. The pump manufacturer shall provide the power and control cables between the pump
and the local disconnect switch, junction box, or control panel (see Drawings) and shall
be responsible for reviewing the electrical drawings as necessary to determine the
required cable length. All pumps for the same pumping application shall be provided
with the same length of cable. No splices shall be allowed unless specifically indicated
on the Drawings. Cables shall be PVC or oil resistant cloroprene rubber jacketed type
SPC cable suitable for submersible pump applications, shall be sized according to NEC
and ICEA standards, and shall meet with MSHA approval. Stainless steel strain relief
connectors shall be furnished for all cables.
B. Electrical Requirements
Motors Intermediate
Pumps
Rating 460V, 3 ph, 60 Hz
Horsepower 3
Speed, rpm 1800
Insulation Class F
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Motors
Intermediate
Pumps
Explosion Proof
No
Inverter Duty
No
Service Factor
1.15
Motor Winding Temperature Switches
Yes
RTDs
No
Cooling Jacket
No
C. The pump motor shall be a squirrel -cage induction type, housed in a watertight
chamber. The stator winding and stator leads shall be moisture resistant. The use of
bolts, pins, or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing shall
not be allowed.
D. The motor shall be guaranteed for continuous unsubmerged duty, capable of sustaining
a minimum of ten (10) starts per hour without overheating.
E. The motor shall be provided with pre -lubricated radial and thrust bearings which are
designed to carry the entire load which may be imposed upon it under all operating
conditions.
F. All motors shall be of nationally known manufacture, shall be housed in enclosures
specifically designed for submersible pump application.
G. Moisture detector probes shall be provided in the oil -seal chamber. The pump
manufacturer shall provide a moisture detection relay compatible with the probes. The
relay shall be installed in the location shown on the Drawings.
H. To control the operation of the pumps with variations of liquid level in the wet well, a
minimum of three (3) displacement switches shall be provided. A 30' cord shall be
provided with each switch. The cord shall have a corrosion -resistant vinyl jacket and be
multi -stranded in order to prevent fatigue. The displacement switch cords shall enter the
wet well through cord grip seals mounted to a removable, gasketed floor plate. The floor
plate shall allow the displacement switches to be adjusted or removed and replaced
without having to enter or reach into the wet well. An automatic alternator with manual
switch shall be provided to change the sequence of operation of the pumps every eight
hours.
An adjustable displacement switch shall be provided to sense a high water level
condition. The switch shall hang into the wet well and shall activate a contact to indicate
the high water condition.
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.04 CONTROL PANELS
A. Motor starters and controls for each pump installation shall be provided in a NEMA 4X
stainless steel control panel. Power cable between the pumps and the control panel
shall be furnished by the pump supplier. Each control panel shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:
A single fused or circuit breaker type NEMA 4X lockable disconnect switch
operable from outside the control panel or mounted in a separate NEMA 4X
stainless steel enclosure.
2. A motor circuit protector and full voltage nonreversing magnetic starter for each
pump. The motor starter shall be NEMA Size 1 (minimum) for each pump.
3. Each pump shall be provided with a Hand -Off -Auto (H-O-A) control switch on the
front of the control panel with control in the automatic mode by the plant control
system.
4. Control power shall be 120 VAC from an integral, fused control power transformer.
5. Each control panel shall include an individual alarm/indicating pilot light for: Pump
Running, Seal Failure (Moisture Intrusion), Motor Winding High Temperature, and
Power On. The panel shall also include a 24 VDC PLC interposing relay and an
Elapsed Time Meter. Seal failure and motor over temperature alarms shall seal -in
and stop the associated pump. A reset pushbutton shall be provided.
2.05 SPARE PARTS
A. The following spare parts shall be included:
One (1) — Complete pump shaft seal assembly
One (1) — Volute gasket and seal gasket
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. The services of a qualified manufacturer's technical representative shall be provided in
accordance with Section 2 - Equipment General Provisions.
Service
Number of Trips
Number of Days/Trip
Installation and Testing
1
1
Startup and Training
1
1
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-17-19 19-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

20 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for
furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into satisfactory operation all low
voltage electric motors as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All motors
required for this Contract shall comply with this Section unless otherwise noted.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Motors and related accessories shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the
following standards as applicable:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
a. IEEE 112 — Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators
2. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
a. NEMA MG 1 — Motors and Generators
3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 547 — Standard for Safety Thermal Protectors for Motors
b. UL 674 — Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous (Classified)
Locations
C. UL 1004-1 — Standard for Rotating Electrical Machines
d. UL 1004-3 — Standard for Thermally Protected Motors
e. UL 1004-8 — Standard for Inverter Duty Motors
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings.
2. Spare Parts List.
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Individual shop drawings for electric motors shall be submitted in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 1, General
Project Requirements, unless submitted as a part of the shop drawings for the driven
equipment.
D. Shop drawings for electric motors shall include motor data sheets, dimensioned drawings,
wiring diagrams for devices such as space heaters, temperature devices, and shaft
grounding rings. Shop drawings shall identify electric characteristics and design,
mechanical construction, manufacturer's name, type and pertinent specifications for the
use intended, along with the name of the equipment to be driven
E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies
of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar
information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the
Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the
Owner by the Contractor.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and
shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. Electric motors shall be manufactured by Baldor/Reliance Electric Company; Nidec
Motors; Toshiba Industrial and Power Systems, Inc.; Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.;
General Electric Company; or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest standards of NEMA, including, but not
limited to MG-1 and MG-2, IEEE, ANSI and to the requirements specified herein.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Type
Unless otherwise noted, motors specified herein shall be polyphase squirrel cage,
NEMA Design B, or single-phase capacitor or repulsion start induction motors.
Special equipment requiring a motor drive with unusual characteristics shall be
equipped with a definite purpose motor to meet the necessary requirements.
2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all motors 1/2 horsepower or larger shall be
three- phase, 60 Hertz, NEMA Design B, squirrel cage induction motors designed
for operation at 480 volts or greater as specified herein or shown on the Drawings.
3. Unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification for the driven
equipment, or as required by the dynamic characteristics of the load as determined
by the manufacturer of the machine to be driven, all polyphase squirrel cage
motors shall be designed to withstand the starting voltage shown on the Drawings
and shall have torque and locked rotor current characteristics as specified for
NEMA Design B motors.
4. All motors 2 horsepower and smaller shall have windings encapsulated with a
flexible epoxy compound, or insulated with a flexible epoxy compound, or insulated
with the manufacturer's premium quality system which shall be subject to
acceptance by the Engineer.
5. Unless otherwise noted, all motors smaller than 1/2 horsepower shall be standard
single-phase capacitor start or repulsion start induction type designed for operation
on 120 volts or 208 volts, 60 Hz alternating current. The motor shall deliver rated
load without exceeding an 80 degrees C temperature rise while operating in a 40
degrees C ambient temperature. Small fan motors less than 1/4 HP may be
split -phase or shaded pole type. Shaded pole motors rated more than
1/4 horsepower are not acceptable. Fractional horsepower motors shall be
completely equipped with all necessary auxiliary components for starting and
labeled as "Thermally Protected". Insulation shall be Class B, except that
submersible motors shall have epoxy encapsulation. Unless otherwise noted, the
motors shall be totally enclosed. Small fan motors may be of the open type where
they are suitably protected from moisture dripping and lint accumulation. Motors
shall be provided with sealed ball bearings lubricated for 10 years normal use.
6. Where specified, vertical hollowshaft motors shall be designed to carry the motors',
pumps', and associated equipment's full thrust. The motors shall be equipped with
grease lubricated spherical roller thrust bearings and lower radial guide bearings.
Vertical hollowshaft motors shall be fitted with nonreversing ratchet assemblies
where required by equipment specifications. Vertical adjustment shall be provided
by means of a lockable nut at the top of the shaft.
7. Vertical hollowshaft motors shall have adequate thrust bearings to carry all motor
loads and any other operating equipment loads. Horizontal motors shall not be
installed where subjected to external thrust loads.
C. Rating
1. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service through its
acceleration range and throughout its rated load range. The rating of the motors
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

offered shall in no case be less than the horsepower shown on the Drawings or
elsewhere specified. It should be noted that the motor sizes indicated on the
Drawings or as otherwise specified herein, are motor sizes required to operate the
specific equipment which is specified. Higher rated motor sizes may be
determined from the actual equipment submitted, approved, purchased, and
installed. Protective devices, motor starters, disconnect switches, and other
necessary equipment shall be furnished and installed for the actual motor sizes
required at no additional cost.
2. Motor ratings shall be based on continuous operation. The maximum temperature
rise for open and drip proof type motors shall not exceed 90 degrees C, and for
totally enclosed type motors shall not exceed 80 degrees C.
D. Motor Winding Insulation
Insulation shall be as specified for each particular type or class of motor. The
insulation system shall provide a high dielectric strength, long life covering for the
windings which may be required to operate in a continually damp, corrosive, and/or
chemically contaminated environment. The insulation shall be resistant to attack
by moisture, acids, alkalies, abrasives, and mechanical and thermal shock. Leads
shall be sealed with a non -wicking, non-hydroscopic insulation material.
2. Motor insulation resistance may be checked at any time after delivery to the job
site or during the warranty period. Encapsulated motor stators may be subjected
to insulation testing while completely submerged in water. Any motor not meeting
the requirements specified herein will be rejected and shall be promptly replaced
at no cost to the Owner.
3. Torque and locked rotor current characteristics for three phase motors shall be
NEMA Design B.
4. Unless otherwise specified, non -inverter duty motors shall be furnished with a
Class F insulation system. Unless otherwise specified, inverter duty motors shall
be furnished with a Class H insulation system. In either case, temperature rise
shall be limited to that for Class B insulation. Output torque and speed
characteristics of each motor shall be suitable to operate the driven equipment
through the full range of acceleration and operating load conditions without
exceeding the nameplate current rating, and/or temperature rise.
E. Nameplates
The motor manufacturer's nameplate shall be engraved, embossed, or stamped
on a stainless -steel sheet and fastened to the motor frame with No. 4 or larger oval
head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Printed or laser -etched nameplates are
not acceptable.
2. Nameplates shall include as a minimum, Items a through m as listed in Article 1.04
in addition to that required by NEMA standards. The nameplate shall be positioned
so as to be readily visible for inspection as installed in the facility.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

F. Design
Motors shall be designed to accelerate and drive the connected equipment under
all normal operating conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.
2. Motors specified for operation with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty
rated. Motors shall be considered inverter duty rated only if they meet all of the
requirements for NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
3. Motors shall be designed to output 100 percent of nameplate horsepower under
continuous duty service without exceeding the temperature rise specified herein
when controlled by the actual drives furnished. Inverter duty motors shall be
designed to operate down to 10% of full load speed without the need for a line
powered cooling fan.
4. Unless otherwise specified, electric motors shall be furnished with service factors
in accordance with NEMA MG-1 as follows:
Type of Motor Service Factor
Non -inverter Duty 1.15
Inverter Duty 1.0
5. Design selection with respect to the driven machine shall be such that the
requirements do not exceed 85 percent of the motors' maximum rating modified
by service factor, ambient temperature, enclosure, altitude and electrical service.
The electrical service conditions shall be assumed to be 10 percent undervoltage,
5 percent underfrequency, and 3 percent voltage unbalance. Altitude shall be
assumed to be the project site elevation plus 10 percent. Ambient temperature
shall be assumed to be 95 degrees F in exterior locations, 104 degrees F (40
degrees C) in interior locations, and 122 degrees F (50 degrees C) within housings
or enclosures; except where higher temperatures may be encountered within or
on individual items of equipment. The applicable paragraphs of NEMA MG-1 shall
be used in making the design selection.
6. Motors used with belt drives shall have sliding bases to provide for belt take up.
7. Terminal boxes shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required quantity
and size of conduits. Gasketed terminal boxes shall be furnished with all
splash -proof and totally enclosed motors. NEMA ratings of the terminal boxes
shall be suited for the application. Motors located in hazardous locations shall be
furnished with terminal boxes suitable for the specific Class, Division, and Group
suitable for the application. Terminal boxes shall be sized to accommodate
accessory equipment such as motor differential current transformers, where
required.
8. Terminal boxes for horizontal motors shall be located on the left-hand side when
viewing the motor from the drive shaft end and shall be so designed that conduit
entrance can be made from above, below, or either side of the terminal box.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

G. Construction
1. Frames, mounting means, and shafts shall meet NEMA Standards for the
horsepower, RPM, and enclosure selected. Enclosures shall be selected
according to the degree of mechanical protection required and shall not be of
aluminum construction. All motors shall have a manufacturer's standard shop
machinery finish, consisting of a rust -resisting priming coat of zinc chromate and a
finish coat of alkyd machinery enamel.
2. Motors shall have cast iron frames and a heavy gauge steel terminal box, with
neoprene gaskets between the frame and the box and between the box and its
cover. A grounding lug(s) shall be provided inside the terminal box.
3. Motors weighing more than 50 pounds shall be equipped with at least one lifting
eye. All lifting hardware shall be corrosion resistant.
4. When located outdoors, or elsewhere if specified, motors shall be totally enclosed,
non -ventilated (TENV) or totally enclosed, fan -cooled (TEFC) machines, unless
otherwise noted. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with two (2) 1/4 inch
drain holes drilled through the bottom of the frame, which allows complete drainage
of the frame. Where specified, TEFC motors controlled by a variable frequency
drive shall be provided with a separately powered cooling fan motor that runs at
60HZ to ensure proper cooling of the motor at low speeds. Cooling fan motor shall
be suitable for 120VAC, single phase operation. Vertically oriented motors located
outdoors shall be provided with a drip cover over the fan end to prevent
accumulation of precipitation.
5. Unless otherwise specified, or required, motors rated less than 200 horsepower
shall be furnished with bearings of the grease lubricated, antifriction ball type with
conveniently located grease fittings and drain plugs. A means of preventing
bearings from becoming overgreased shall be provided. Bearings shall have a
minimum B-10 life of 20,000 hours.
6. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Rotor windings shall be
one-piece cast aluminum. Where applicable, rotors shall be constructed with
integral fins.
7. All motors shall be provided with factory -installed one -hole terminations (ring
terminals) on the ends of all motor leads. Terminations shall be identified for use
with cables that have stranding other than Class B, and shall be the irreversible
compression type.
H. Power Factor and Efficiency
All motors, including vertical hollowshaft motors, in the range of 1-500 horsepower,
inclusive, shall be designed specifically for energy efficiency and high power factor.
The motor efficiency and power factor shall meet or exceed the values listed in the
table below when the motors are tested in accordance with the NEMA preferred
test method IEEE 112A, Method B, Dynamometer. Each motor shall meet the
minimum guaranteed efficiency value indicated in the table below. All tests shall
be performed in accordance with the procedures contained in NEMA Standard
MG 1-12.58.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

TABLE 12-11
FULL -LOAD EFFICIENCIES OF ENERGY EFFICIENT MOTORS
ENCLOSED MOTORS
2 POLE
4 POLE
6 POLE
8 POLE
HP
Nominal
Efficiency
Minimum
Efficiency
Nominal
Efficiency
Minimum
Efficiency
Nominal
Efficiency
Minimum
Efficiency
Nominal
Efficiency
Minimum
Efficiency
1
75.5
72
82.5
80
80
77
74
70
1.5
82.5
80
84
81.5
85.5
82.5
77
74
2
84
81.5
84
81.5
86.5
84
82.5
80
3
85.5
82.5
87.5
85.5
87.5
85.5
84
81.5
5
87.5
85.5
87.5
85.5
87.5
85.5
85.5
82.5
TABLE 12-12
FULL -LOAD EFFICIENCIES FOR NEMA PREMIUM- EFFICIENCY ELECTRIC MOTORS
RATED 600 VOLTS OR LESS (RANDOM WOUND)
OPEN MOTORS
2 POLE
4 POLE
6 POLE
HP
Nominal
Efficiency
Minimum
Efficiency
Nominal
Efficienc
Minimum
Efficiency
Nominal
EfficiencyEfficienc
Minimum
1
77
74
85.5
82.5
82.5
80
1.5
84
81.5
86.5
84
86.5
81.5
2
85.5
82.5
86.5
84
87.5
81.5
3
85.5
82.5
89.5
84
88.5
86.5
5
86.5
84
89.5
84
89.5
87.5
7.5
88.5
86.5
91
89.5
90.2
88.5
N(1TF.q-
(1) Motor data for continuous duty, NEMA Design B, 1.15 service factor, 40 degrees
Celsius ambient, Class F insulation, 3 phase, 460 volt, at listed speed rating.
(2) TEFC efficiencies apply to both horizontal and vertical motors.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Motors shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
3.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Motors shall be properly protected from weather hazards. Motors shall not be allowed to
be wrapped tightly in plastic while outdoors. Motors delivered to the site which will not be
put in service for a time in excess of 30 calendar days, whether in storage or installed,
shall have the shafts rotated a minimum of five (5) rotations every 30 days.
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Motors provided with space heaters shall have temporary power applied to the heaters no
later than 30 calendar days after delivery to the site until permanent power can be applied
to the heaters.
C. Motors that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have not been properly protected shall be
inspected by the manufacturer's representative. Any required electrical corrections for
testing shall be made at the Contractor's expense prior to acceptance and/or use.
D. All motors shall operate without any undue noise or vibration and shall show no signs of
phase unbalance.
3.03 TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions
and Section 1.
Witnessed Shop Tests
a. All motors shall be shop tested and inspected in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's standard procedures. The manufacturer's
testing and inspection procedures shall demonstrate that the equipment
tested conforms to the requirements specified, all other applicable
requirements, and shall be approved by the Engineer.
In addition to the efficiency and power factor testing specified herein, each
motor shall be tested to determine compliance with the applicable
requirements of the IEEE, ANSI and NEMA. Tests shall be as follows:
(1) Motors less than 50 HP
2. Field Tests
a
c
31240-008: 04-18-19
(a) Each motor shall be subjected to a standard, short
commercial test including the following:
i) Running current, no load
ii) Locked rotor current
iii) High potential
iv) Winding resistance
v) Bearing inspection
Field tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
specified in the General Conditions and Basic Electrical Requirements.
All electric motors furnished for this project one (1) horsepower or larger
shall have the information required in the following tabulation completed.
See Exhibit "A" on following page.
All field testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
20-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(EXHIBIT A)
MOTOR TEST RECORD
Measured
Amperage
Motor
Nameplate
Under Normal
Identification
Specified
Nameplate
Amperage
Operating
Remarks
Location
Horsepower
Horsepower
(FLA)
Conditions
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 20-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

21 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment, and perform all work
and services necessary for, or incidental, to the furnishing and installation of all electrical
work as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract Documents and completely coordinate with the work of other trades involved in the
general construction. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or
necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation shall be furnished and installed as
part of this work. The Contractor shall obtain approved Shop Drawings showing wiring
diagrams, connection diagrams, roughing -in and hook up details for all equipment and
comply therewith. All electrical work shall be complete and left in operating condition in
accordance with the intent of the Drawings and the Specifications for the electrical work.
B. Where the word "Contractor" appears in these Technical Specifications it shall be construed
to mean the Electrical Contractor.
C. The contractor shall reference the functional descriptions and other requirements found in
Section 3 for additional requirements pertaining to work under this contract. The functional
descriptions referenced herein shall be considered as part of the work required under this
contract.
D. The contractor shall be responsible for all interconnecting devices, conduit, wire, and
appurtenances not furnished by others but required for the operation of equipment as
described in the functional descriptions whether specifically shown on the drawings or not.
E. The scope of work for this project primarily includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1. Furnish and install new circuit breakers, conduit and wiring associated with the
Installation of (1) new Tertiary Filter and (1) new tertiary Pump Station.
2. Relocation of (1) existing area lighting fixture.
F. Maintaining the operation of these facilities during the duration of the construction period is
essential and required. The Contractor shall furnish and install temporary equipment as
required to maintain facility operation. Reference Section 1 of the Specifications for
construction sequencing and specific operational constraint information.
G. All electrical equipment shall conform to the applicable NEMA specifications. All electrical
equipment shall be properly identified in accordance with these Specifications and Contract
Drawings. All panelboards, starters, control panels, cabinet enclosures, junction boxes, pull
boxes, and equipment switches shall be identified as indicated on the drawings. Phenolic
nameplates shall be provided matching the style and size of nameplates on similar existing
equipment.
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

H. All materials, equipment, sizes and capacities of electrical equipment incorporated in the
project shall conform to the latest requirements of the current National Electric Code, the
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association, the State and local electrical codes, and to
applicable rules and regulations of the local electrical utility serving the project.
I. All material and equipment must be the product of an established, reputable, and approved
manufacturer; must be new and of first class construction; must be designed and
guaranteed to perform the service required; and must bear the label of approval of the
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., where such approval is available for the product of the listed
manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.
J. When a specified or indicated item has been superseded or is no longer available, the
manufacturer's latest equivalent type or model of material or equipment as approved by the
Engineer shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Where the Contractor's selection of equipment of specified manufacturers or additionally
approved manufacturers requires changes or additions to the system design, the Contractor
shall be responsible in all respects for the modifications to all system designs, subject to
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor's bid shall include all costs for all work of the
Contract for all trades made necessary by such changes, additions or modifications or
resulting from any approved substitution.
L. Furnish and install controls for each piece of equipment requiring controls under this
Contract. The controls shall be the size and type recommended bythe manufacturer for the
application and as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. Refer to Section 3 of
the Specifications for control, connection and coordination descriptions and requirements.
M. Furnish and install all stands, racks, brackets, supports, and similar equipment required to
properly serve the equipment which is furnished underthis Contract, or equipment otherwise
specified or indicated on the Drawings.
N. All electrical components and systems, including electrical equipment foundations, shall be
designed to resist operational forces as well as lateral sway and axial motion from seismic
and thermal forces.
1.02 DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in satisfactory condition ready for operation,
all conduits, cables, and all other material needed for the complete lighting, power, control
and other electrical systems shown or indicated in the Contract Drawings. Additional
conduits and the required wiring shall be installed by the Contractor wherever needed to
complete the installation of the specific equipment furnished.
1.03 EQUIPMENT LOCATION
A. The Drawings show the general location of feeders, transformers, outlets, conduits, and
circuit arrangements. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to
indicate all of the details involved. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural
and finish conditions affecting all of his work and shall arrange such work accordingly;
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

furnishing such fittings, junction boxes, and accessories as may be required to meet such
conditions. The Contractor shall refer to the entire Drawing set to verify openings, special
surfaces, and location of other equipment, or other special equipment priorto roughing -in for
panels, switches, and other outlets. The Contractor shall verify all equipment dimensions to
ensure that proposed equipment will fit properly in spaces indicated.
1.04 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. The Contractor shall examine the site and become familiar with conditions affecting the
work. The Contractor shall investigate, determine, and verify locations of any overhead or
buried utilities on or near the site, and shall determine such locations in conjunction with all
public and/or private utility companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction. All costs,
both temporary and permanent to connect all utilities, shall be included in the Bid. The
Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and coordinating with the local utility for
temporary and permanent services.
B. In addition, the Contractor shall relocate all duct banks, lighting fixtures, receptacles,
switches, boxes, and other electrical equipment as necessary to facilitate the Work included
in this project. Costs for such work shall be included in the Bid.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in Section 1 - General Project
Requirements, Submittals and the requirements of the individual specification sections, the
Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
Shop Drawings
2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
3. Spare Parts List
4. Special Tools List
5. Proposed Testing Methods and Reports of Certified Shop Tests.
6. Reports of Certified Field Tests.
7. Manufacturer's Representative's Certification.
B. Submittals shall be sufficiently complete in detail to enable the Engineer to determine
compliance with Contract requirements.
C. Submittals will be approved only to the extent of the information shown. Approval of an item
of equipment shall not be construed to mean approval for components of that item for which
the Contractor has provided no information.
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.06 APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Conformance
All work, equipment and materials furnished shall conform with the existing rules,
requirements and specifications of the Insurance Rating Organization having
jurisdiction, the serving electrical utility company, the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), the National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), the Insulated Cable Engineers
Association (ICEA), the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), the American
National Standards Institute (ANSI), the requirements of the Occupational Safety
Hazards Act (OSHA), and all other applicable Federal, State and local laws and/or
ordinances.
2. All material and equipment shall bear the inspection labels of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., if the material and equipment is of the class inspected by said
laboratories.
3. All work shall be in accordance with local codes.
B. Nonconformance
Any paragraph of requirements in these Specifications, or Drawings, deviating from
the rules, requirements and Specifications of the above organizations shall be invalid
and their (the above organizations) requirements shall hold precedent thereto. The
Contractor shall be held responsible for adherence to all rules, requirements and
specifications as set forth above. Any additional work or material necessary for
adherence will not be allowed as an extra, but shall be included in the Bid.
Ignorance of any rule, requirement, or Specification shall not be allowed as an
excuse for nonconformity. Acceptance by the Engineer does not relieve the
Contractor from the expense involved for the correction of any errors which may exist
in the drawings submitted or in the satisfactory operation of any equipment.
C. Certification
Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain certificate(s) of inspection
and approval from the National Board of Fire Underwriters or similar inspection
organization having jurisdiction and shall deliver same to the Engineer and the
Owner.
1.07 TESTS
A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall perform tests for operation, load
(Phase) balance, overloads, and short circuits. Tests shall be made with and to the
satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall perform all field tests and shall provide all labor, equipment, and
incidentals required for testing and shall pay for electric power required for the tests. All
defective material and workmanship disclosed shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that all circuits
and devices are in good operating condition. Test shall be such that each item of control
equipment will function not less than five (5) times.
C. The grounding system shall be tested to assure continuity and compliance with the contract
requirements. Reference project drawings for specific testing requirements.
D. Insulation resistance testing of all incoming and outgoing cables for switchgear, motor
control centers, lighting and power distribution panelboards, and similar equipment shall be
done after the cables are in place and just prior to final terminations. All data shall be
recorded, as per Exhibit "A", attached to the end of this Section.
E. Feeder circuits shall be tested with the feeder conductors disconnected from the supplied
equipment. Each individual power circuit shall be tested at the panel or motor control center
with the power equipment connected for proper operation.
F. The equipment to be tested shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
• Conduit System
• Cable and Wire
• Grounding System
G. Refer to each specific specification section for detailed field tests.
H. The Contractor shall complete the installation and testing of the electrical installation at least
two (2) weeks prior to the start-up and testing of all other equipment. During the period
between the completion of electrical installation and the start-up and testing of all other
equipment, the Contractor shall make all components of the Work available as it is
completed for their use in performing Preliminary and Final Field Tests.
Before each test commences, the Contractor shall submit a detailed test procedure, and
also provide test engineer resume, manpower and scheduling information for the approval
by the Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish detailed test procedures for any of
his equipment required as part of the field tests of other systems.
Just prior to the final acceptance of a piece of equipment, the Contractor shall perform an
infrared inspection to locate and correct all heating problems associated with that electrical
equipment. The infrared inspection shall include both digital and IR pictures which shall be
submitted to the Owner for record purposes.
The infrared inspection shall apply to all new equipment and existing equipment that is in
any way modified under this Contract. All heating problems detected with new equipment
furnished and installed under the Scope of this Contract shall be corrected by the
Contractor. All problems detected with portions of existing equipment modified under this
Contract shall also be corrected by the Contractor.
Any problems detected with portions of existing equipment that were not modified under this
Contract are not the responsibility of the Contractor. Despite the Contractor not being held
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

responsible for these problems, the Contractor shall report them to the Owner and Engineer
immediately for resolution.
1.08 DOCUMENTATION
A. The work requirements of this Section is in addition to and does not supersede testing and
adjusting specified in other portions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer test records and reports for all testing.
1.09 SCHEDULES AND FACILITY OPERATIONS
A. Since the testing required in Article 1.08 above shall require that certain pieces of equipment
be taken out of service, all testing procedures and schedules must be submitted to the
Engineer for review and approval one (1) month prior to any work beginning. When testing
has been scheduled, the Engineer must be notified 48 hours prior to any work to allow time
for load switching and/or alternation of equipment. In addition, all testing that requires
temporary shutdown of facility equipment must be coordinated with the Owner/Engineer so
as not to affect proper facility operations.
B. At the end of the workday, all equipment shall be back in place and ready for immediate use
should a facility emergency arise. In addition, should an emergency condition occur during
testing, at the request of the Owner, the equipment shall be placed back in service
immediately and turned over to Owner personnel.
C. In the event of accidental shutdown of Owner equipment, the Contractor shall notify Owner
personnel immediately to allow for an orderly restart of affected equipment.
1.10 MATERIALS HANDLING
A. Materials arriving on the job site shall be stored in such a manner as to keep material free of
rust and dirt and so as to keep material properly aligned and true to shape. Rusty, dirty, or
misaligned material shall be rejected. Electrical conduit shall be stored to provide protection
from the weather and accidental damage. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be stored on
even supports and in locations not subject to direct sun rays or excessive heat. Cables shall
be sealed, stored, and handled carefully to avoid damage to the outer covering or insulation
and damage from moisture and weather. Adequate protection shall be required at all times
for electrical equipment and accessories until installed and accepted. Materials damaged
during shipment, storage, installation, or testing shall be replaced or repaired in a manner
meeting with the approval of the Engineer. If space heaters are provided in a piece of
equipment, they shall be temporarily connected to a power source during storage.
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(EXHIBIT A)
TEST DATA - MEGOHMS
TEST NO.
Date:
Company:
Time:
Location:
Circuit:
Circuit Length:
Aerial:
Duct:
Buried:
No. of Conduc-
tors
Size:
AMG
MCM
Shld:
Insulation Material:
Insulation Thickness:
Voltage Rating:
Age:
Type: Pothead Terminal
Location: Indoors
Outdoors
Number and Type of Joints:
Recent Operating History:
Manufacturer:
State if Potheads or Terminals were grounded during test:
List associated equipment included in test:
Miscellaneous Information:
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(EXHIBIT A)
TEST DATA - MEGOHMS
TEST NO.
Part Tested:Test Made:
Hours/Days:
After Shutdown:
Grounding Time:Dry Bulb Temperature:
Wet Bulb Temperature:
Test Voltage:
Equipment Temperature:
How Obtained:
Relative Humidity:
Absolute Humidity:
Dew Point:
Megohmmeter: Serial Number:
Range:
Voltage:
Calibration Date
Test Connections
To Line
To Line
To Line
Test Connections
To Line
To Line
To Line
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To
To
To
To
To
To
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
3 Minute
5 Minutes
2 Minute
6 Minutes
3/4 Minute
7 Minutes
1 Minute
8 Minutes
2 Minutes
9 Minutes
3 Minutes
10 Minutes
4 Minutes
10/1 Minutes
Ratio
Remarks:
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, the materials to be provided under this Specification shall be the
products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of all such items and shall be
the manufacturer's latest design. The products shall conform to the applicable standards of
UL and NEMA, unless specified otherwise. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
standards are not recognized. Equipment designed, manufactured, and labeled in
compliance with IEC standards is not acceptable.
B. All items of the same type or ratings shall be identical. This shall be further understood to
include products with the accessories indicated.
C. All equipment and materials shall be new, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
D. The Contractor shall submit proof if requested by the Engineer that the materials,
appliances, equipment, or devices that are provided under this Contract meet the
requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., in regard to fire and casualty hazards. The
label of or listing by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., will be accepted as conforming with
this requirement.
2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Unless specifically noted otherwise, any reference in the Specifications or on the Drawings
to any article, service, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment by name, make, or
catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing the type, function, and standard of
quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases
may, at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, or item of equipment
which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified.
2.03 CONCRETE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all concrete required for the installation of all electrical work,
Concrete shall be Class A unless otherwise specified. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall
meet the appropriate requirements referenced in the drawings.
B. The Contractor shall provide concrete equipment pads for all free standing electrical
apparatus and equipment located on new or existing floors or slabs. The Contractor shall
provide all necessary anchor bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The
exact location and dimensions shall be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in
advance of the scheduled placing of these pads. Equipment pads shall be 4 inches high
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings and shall conform to standard detail for
equipment pads shown on the Contract Drawings. Equipment pads shall not have more
than 3" excess concrete beyond the edges of the equipment.
C. The Contractor shall provide concrete foundations for all free standing electrical apparatus
and equipment located outdoors or where floors or slabs do not exist and/or are not or
provided by others under this Contract. The Contractor shall provide all necessary anchor
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

bolts, channel iron sills, and other materials as required. The location and dimensions shall
be coordinated for each piece of equipment well in advance of the scheduled placing of the
foundations. Equipment foundations shall be constructed as detailed on the Drawings or if
not detailed on the Drawings shall be 6 inches thick minimum reinforced with #4 bars at 12-
inch centers each way placed mid -depth. Concrete shall extend 6 inches minimum beyond
the extreme of the equipment base and be placed on a compacted stone bed (#57 stone or
ABC) 6 inches thick minimum.
2.04 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Ratings
Unless specified otherwise in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings,
cabinets and enclosures shall be:
a. NEMA 1A (gasketed) when located in environmentally controlled spaces
such as control rooms, electric rooms, and similar locations.
b. NEMA 12 when located in dry, indoor process areas.
C. NEMA 4X stainless steel when located in damp/wet, indoor, or corrosive
process areas.
d. NEMA 4X stainless steel for all outdoor locations.
e. Suitable for the specific Class, Division, and Group when located in
hazardous locations.
B. Construction - Steel
Enclosures shall be fabricated from 14 gauge steel with seams that are continuously
welded. Doors shall have full length piano hinges with the door removable by pulling
the hinge pin.
2. A rolled lip shall be provided around three sides of the door and around all sides of
the enclosure opening. The gasket shall be attached with oil -resistant adhesive and
held in place with steel retaining strips. Exterior hardware, such as clamps, screws,
and hinge pins, shall be stainless steel. Door latches for NEMA 4X cabinets and
enclosures shall be all stainless steel, fast operating clamp assemblies that do not
require bolts or screws to secure. A hasp and staple shall be provided for
padlocking. Interior panels shall be provided. Each enclosure shall have a print
pocket.
3. NEMA 1A and 12 enclosure finish shall be white enamel interior, light grey enamel,
ANSI 61 exterior, over phosphatized surfaces. Interior panels shall be white enamel.
Special finishes and colors shall be furnished as required.
4. NEMA 4X enclosures and enclosures suitable for hazardous locations shall be
unpainted.
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-10 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Coordination
The Work shall be coordinated between all trades to avoid delays and unnecessary
cutting, channeling and drilling. Sleeves shall be placed in concrete for passage of
conduit wherever possible.
B. Damage
The Contractor shall perform all chasing, channeling, drilling and patching necessary
to the proper execution of his Contract. Any damage to the building, structure, or
any equipment shall be repaired by qualified mechanics of the trades involved at the
Contractor's expense. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the repair of damaged
equipment would not be satisfactory, then the Contractor shall replace damaged
equipment at his own expense.
C. Existing Equipment
Provide a suitable cover or plug for openings created in existing equipment as the
result of work under this Contract. For example, provide round plugs in equipment
enclosures where the removal of a conduit creates a hole and the enclosure.
Covers and plugs shall maintain the NEMA rating of the equipment enclosure.
Covers and plugs shall be watertight when installed in equipment located outdoors.
3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation and backfill required for the installation of all
electrical work. All excavation and backfilling shall be in complete accordance with the
applicable requirements referenced in the drawings.
3.03 CORROSION PROTECTION
A. Wherever dissimilar metals, except conduit and conduit fittings, come into contact, the
Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil
polyethylene tape, or gaskets.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 21-11 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

22 - CONDUIT
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install conduits and conduit fittings to complete the
installation of all electrically operated equipment as specified herein, indicated on the
Drawings, and as required.
B. Requirements for conduit clamps, support systems, and anchoring are not included in this
Section. Reference Section 28 — Electrical Supporting Devices, for these requirements.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Conduits and conduit fittings shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the
following standards as applicable:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. ANSI B1.20.1 — Pipe Threads, General Purpose
b. ANSI C80.1 — Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit
C. ANSI C80.3 — Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing
d. ANSI C80.5 — Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit
e. ANSI FB 1 — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 1 — Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit
b. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -Steel
C. UL 6A — Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -Aluminum, Red Brass, and
Stainless Steel
d. UL 360 — Standard for Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit
e. UL 467 — Grounding and Bonding Equipment
f. UL 514B — Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings
g. UL 651 — Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Conduit and Fittings
h. UL 797 — Electrical Metallic Tubing -Steel
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

i. UL 1203 - Standard for Explosion -proof and Dust -ignition -proof Electrical
Equipment for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations
j. UL 1479 — Standard for Fire Tests of Penetration Fire Stops
k. UL 1660 — Liquid -tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit
3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
a. NEMA RN 1 — PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
b. NEMA TC-2 — Electrical PVC Conduit
C. NEMA TC-3 — PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
B. Others
1. ACI-318 — Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Specification 1 — General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Product data sheets for conduits and fittings.
2. Conduit identification methods and materials.
3. Evidence of training for all personnel that will install PVC coated rigid metal
conduit.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Conduits are categorized by the circuit type of the wiring to be installed inside. Conduits
are defined as follows:
Power Conduits — Conduits that carry AC or DC power wiring from a source to a
load. Conduits that carry lighting and receptacle wiring.
2. Control Conduits — Conduits that carry AC or DC discrete control wiring between
devices and/or equipment. Conduits that carry fiber optic cables between devices
and/or equipment.
3. Instrumentation Conduits — Conduits that carry AC or DC analog signal wiring
between devices and/or equipment.
B. Conduit categories are indicated on the Drawings by the leading letter of the conduit tag.
Conduit tag leading letters are defined as follows:
P — Power Conduit
2. C — Control Conduit
3. 1 — Instrumentation Conduit
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Conduit and conduit fitting products are specified in the text that follows this article.
Reference Part 3 herein for the application, uses and installation requirements of these
conduits and conduit fittings.
B. All metallic conduit fittings shall be UL 514B and UL 467 Listed, and constructed in
accordance with ANSI FB 1. All metallic conduit fittings for use in Class I Division I
hazardous areas shall be UL 1203 Listed. All non-metallic fittings shall be UL 651 Listed
and constructed in accordance with NEMA TC-3.
C. Flexible conduit couplings for use in Class I Division I hazardous areas shall have threaded
stainless steel end fittings and a flexible braided core. Flexible braid shall be constructed
of stainless steel where available in the conduit trade size required for the application.
Where stainless steel braid is not available, the braid shall be provided with a PVC coating.
No other braid types or materials are acceptable.
D. Where threading is specified herein for conduit fitting connections, the fittings shall be
manufactured to accept conduit that is threaded to ANSI B1.20.1 requirements.
E. Conduit expansion fittings for all conduit materials of construction shall be capable of 4
inches of movement along the axis of the conduit for trade sizes 2 inches or less.
Expansion fittings shall be capable of 8 inches of movement along the axis of the conduit
for trade sizes greater than 2 inches.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

F. Conduit deflection fittings for all conduit materials of construction shall be provided with a
flexible neoprene outerjacket that permits up to % inch of expansion/contraction along the
axis of the conduit as well as up to % inch of parallel misalignment between the conduit
axes. Outer jacket shall be secured to the conduit hubs by stainless steel clamps.
G. Conduit seals shall either be Listed and labeled for 40% fill, or conduit reducing fittings
and a trade size larger conduit seal shall be provided to achieve 25% or less fill within the
seal. Percentage fill calculation shall be based on the conductors to be installed. Conduit
seals shall be provided with breathers and/or drains where required by the NEC.
H. Conduit insulating bushings shall be constructed of plastic and shall have internal
threading.
Additional conduit and conduit fitting requirements are specified in the articles that follow
based on the specific conduit material of construction to be used.
2.02 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS) CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
A. Conduit
Conduit shall be hot dip galvanized on the inside and outside, and made of heavy
wall high strength ductile steel. Conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with
ANSI C80.1, and shall be UL 6 Listed.
2. Conduit shall be provided with factory -cut 3/4 inch per foot tapered threads at each
end in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threads shall be cut prior to galvanizing to
ensure corrosion protection adequately protects the threads. Conduit shall be
provided with a matching coupling on one end and a color -coded thread protector
on the other.
B. Conduit Bodies for use with Rigid Galvanized Steel
Conduit bodies shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy
which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Conduit bodies shall have integral
threaded conduit hubs.
2. Conduit bodies for Class I Division I hazardous areas shall be provided with
integrally threaded covers constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron
alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish.
3. Conduit bodies for all other areas shall be provided with covers that are affixed in
place by stainless steel screws which thread directly into the conduit body. Covers
that utilize wedge nuts or any other method of attachment to the conduit body are
not acceptable. Covers shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable
iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Covers shall be provided with
matching gasket.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Conduit Couplings, Nipples, and Unions for use with Rigid Galvanized Steel
Couplings and nipples shall be threaded and shall be constructed of hot dipped
galvanized steel. Split -type couplings that use compression to connect conduits
are not acceptable.
2. Unions shall be threaded, rain -tight, and constructed of an electro-galvanized
malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish.
D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with Rigid Galvanized Steel
Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of an
electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated with an acrylic paint finish.
Expansion and deflection fittings shall have threaded conduit connections.
2. Expansion fittings shall have an integral bonding jumper and deflection fittings shall
have an external bonding jumper.
E. Conduit Seals for use with Rigid Galvanized Steel
Conduit seals shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy
which is coated with an acrylic paint finish. Conduit seals shall have threaded
conduit connections.
F. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with Rigid Galvanized Steel
Conduit hubs shall be constructed of stainless steel and shall have threaded
connections to the conduit and enclosure. Hubs shall have a plastic insulated
throat and shall be watertight when assembled to an enclosure.
2. Conduit locknuts shall be constructed of zinc plated steel. Locknuts shall have
internal threading. Locknuts with integral gasket or seal are not acceptable.
Locknuts shall have integral bonding screw where required for proper bonding.
3. Conduit bonding bushings shall be constructed of zinc plated malleable iron.
Bonding bushings shall have a threaded conduit connection. Bonding bushing
shall be provided with properly sized set screw for connecting bonding conductor
and an integral plastic insulator rated for 150 degrees C located in the throat.
2.03 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
A. Conduit
Conduit shall be Schedule 40 or 80 (dependent on application) polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) construction, manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC-2, UL 651 Listed,
and suitable for conductors with 90 degree C insulation.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Conduit Bodies for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Conduit bodies shall be constructed of PVC. Conduit hubs shall be integral to the
conduit body and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection.
2. Conduit body shall be provided with cover that is affixed in place by stainless steel
screws which thread directly into the conduit body. Covers that utilize wedge nuts
or any other method of attachment to the conduit body are not acceptable. Covers
shall be provided with matching gasket.
C. Conduit Couplings and Unions for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Conduit couplings and unions shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth
inside to accept a glued conduit connection.
D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of
PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a glued conduit connection.
E. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Conduit hubs shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept a
glued conduit connection. Hubs shall have external threads and an accompanying
PVC locknut, and shall be watertight when assembled to an enclosure.
2. Conduit locknuts shall be constructed of zinc plated steel. Locknuts shall have
internal threading. Locknuts constructed of PVC and locknuts with integral gasket
or seal are not acceptable.
3. Conduit end bells shall be constructed of PVC and shall be smooth inside to accept
a glued conduit connection. End bell shall have a smooth inner surface that curves
outward towards the edge of the fitting.
2.04 PVC COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
A. General
Where an external coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is specified for conduit and
fittings, the coating shall be 40 mil (minimum) thickness. Where an internal coating
of urethane is specified for conduit and fittings, the coating shall be 2 mil (minimum)
thickness.
2. All conduit fittings shall have a sealing sleeve constructed of PVC which covers all
connections to conduit. Sleeves shall be appropriately sized so that no conduit
threads will be exposed after assembly.
B. Conduit
1. Conduit shall be hot dip galvanized on the inside and outside, and made of heavy
wall high strength ductile steel. Conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with
ANSI C80.1, and shall be UL 6 Listed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2. Conduit shall be provided with factory -cut 3/4 inch per foot tapered threads at each
end in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threads shall be cut prior to galvanizing to
ensure corrosion protection adequately protects the threads. Conduit shall be
provided with a matching coupling on one end and a color -coded thread protector
on the other.
3. Conduit shall be coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior
with a layer of urethane. Conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA
RN-1.
C. Conduit Bodies for use with PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit
Conduit bodies shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy
which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a
layer of urethane. Conduit bodies shall have integral threaded conduit hubs.
2. Conduit bodies for Class I Division I hazardous areas shall be provided with
integrally threaded covers constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron
alloy which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior
with a layer of urethane.
3. Conduit bodies for all other areas shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized
malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated
on the interior with a layer of urethane. Covers shall be affixed in place by stainless
steel screws which thread directly into the conduit body and have a plastic
encapsulated head. Covers that utilize wedge nuts or any other method of
attachment to the conduit body are not acceptable. Covers shall be provided with
matching gasket.
D. Conduit Couplings, Nipples, and Unions for use with PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel
Conduit
Couplings and nipples shall be threaded and shall be constructed of hot dipped
galvanized steel which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on
the interior with a layer of urethane. Split -type couplings that use compression to
connect conduits are not acceptable.
2. Unions shall be threaded, rain -tight, and constructed of an electro-galvanized
malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated
on the interior with a layer of urethane.
E. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized
Steel Conduit
1. Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of an
electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a PVC
jacket and coated on the interior with a layer of urethane. Expansion and deflection
fittings shall have threaded conduit connections.
2. Expansion fittings shall have an integral bonding jumper and deflection fittings shall
have an external bonding jumper.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

F. Conduit Seals for use with PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit
Conduit seals shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy
which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a
layer of urethane. Conduit seals shall have threaded conduit connections.
G. Conduit Termination Fittings for Use with PVC Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit
Conduit hubs shall be constructed of an electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy
which is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a
layer of urethane. Hubs shall have threaded connections to the conduit and
enclosure. Hubs shall have a plastic insulated throat and shall be watertight when
assembled to an enclosure.
2. Conduit bonding bushings shall be constructed of zinc plated malleable iron which
is coated on the exterior with a PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a layer
of urethane. Bonding bushings shall have a threaded conduit connection. Bonding
bushing shall be provided with properly sized set screw for connecting bonding
conductor and an integral plastic insulator rated for 150 degrees C located in the
throat.
2.05 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
A. Conduit
Conduit shall be made of heavy wall high strength 6063 alloy aluminum with
temper designation T1. Conduit shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI
C80.5, and shall be UL 6A Listed.
2. Conduit shall be provided with factory -cut 3/4 inch per foot tapered threads at each
end in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threads shall be cut prior to galvanizing to
ensure corrosion protection adequately protects the threads. Conduit shall be
provided with a matching coupling on one end and a color -coded thread protector
on the other.
B. Conduit Bodies for use with Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Conduit bodies shall be constructed of copper -free aluminum which is coated with
an aluminum enamel finish. Conduit bodies shall have integral threaded conduit
hubs.
2. Conduit bodies for Class I Division I hazardous areas shall be provided with
integrally threaded covers constructed of copper -free aluminum which is coated
with an aluminum enamel finish.
3. Conduit bodies for all other areas shall be provided with stamped copper -free
aluminum covers that are affixed in place by stainless steel screws which thread
directly into the conduit body. Covers that utilize wedge nuts or any other method
of attachment to the conduit body are not acceptable. Covers shall be provided
with matching gasket.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Conduit Couplings, Nipples, and Unions for use with Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Couplings and nipples shall be threaded and shall be constructed of heavy wall
high strength 6063 alloy aluminum with temper designation T1. Split -type
couplings that use compression to connect conduits are not acceptable.
2. Unions shall be threaded, rain -tight, and constructed of copper -free aluminum
which is coated with an aluminum enamel finish.
D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings for use with Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Conduit expansion fittings and conduit deflection fittings shall be constructed of
copper -free aluminum which is coated with an aluminum enamel finish. Expansion
and deflection fittings shall have threaded conduit connections.
2. Expansion fittings shall have an integral bonding jumper and deflection fittings shall
have an external bonding jumper.
E. Conduit Seals for use with Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Conduit seals shall be constructed of copper -free aluminum which is coated with
an aluminum enamel finish. Conduit seals shall have threaded conduit
connections.
F. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with Rigid Aluminum Conduit
Conduit hubs shall be constructed of copper -free aluminum and shall have
threaded connections to the conduit and enclosure. Hubs shall have a plastic
insulated throat and shall be watertight when assembled to an enclosure.
2. Conduit locknuts shall be constructed of copper -free aluminum. Locknuts shall
have internal threading. Locknuts with integral gasket or seal are not acceptable.
Locknuts shall have integral bonding screw where required for proper bonding.
3. Conduit bonding bushings shall be constructed of copper -free aluminum. Bonding
bushings shall have a threaded conduit connection. Bonding bushing shall be
provided with properly sized set screw for connecting bonding conductor and an
integral plastic insulator rated for 150 degrees C located in the throat.
2.06 LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
A. Conduit
Conduit shall be manufactured using a single strip of hot dip galvanized high
strength steel alloy, helically formed into a continuously interlocked flexible metal
conduit. Trade size 1-1/4 inch and smaller conduits shall be provided with an
integrally woven copper bonding strip.
2. Conduit shall be covered with an outside PVC jacket that is UV resistant, moisture -
proof, and oil -proof. Conduit shall be UL 360 Listed.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Conduit Termination Fittings for use with LFMC
Conduit termination fittings shall be constructed of either 304 stainless steel or an
electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy which is coated on the exterior with a 40
mil (minimum) PVC jacket and coated on the interior with a 2 mil (minimum) layer
of urethane. PVC coated fittings shall have a sealing sleeve constructed of PVC
which covers the connection to conduit.
2. Termination fittings shall have a threaded end with matching locknut and sealing
ring for termination to equipment, and shall have an integral external bonding lug
where required for proper bonding. Termination fittings shall have a plastic
insulated throat and shall be watertight when assembled to the conduit and
equipment.
2.07 CONDUIT BENDS
A. Rigid conduit bends, both factory fabricated and field fabricated, shall meet the same
requirements listed in the articles above for the respective conduit type and material of
construction.
Conduit bend radii for standard radius bends shall be no less than as follows:
TRADE
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
SIZE
(inches)
MIN.
4-1/2
5-3/4
7-1/4
8-1/4
9-1/2
10-1/2
13
15
16
24
30
RADIUS
(inches)
B. Conduit bend radii for long radius bends shall be no less than as follows:
TRADE
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
3-1/2
4
5
6
SIZE
inches
MIN.
N/A
12
18
24
30
30
36
36
48
48
60
RADIUS
inches
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Conduit Periphery Sealing
The sealing of the exterior surface of conduits to prevent water and/or air from
passing around the conduit periphery from one space to another (where required)
shall be through the use of one of the following:
a. A conduit sleeve and pressure bushing sealing system. Acceptable
products are FSK by OZ-GEDNEY, Link -Seal by Crouse -Hinds, or
Engineer approved equal.
31240-008: 04-25-19 22-10 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

A conduit sleeve that is two trade sizes larger than the conduit being
sealed, with 2-hour fire rated UL 1479 Listed caulk filling the entire void
between the conduit and sleeve. This method is only suitable for
penetrations in non -fire rated walls and floors between spaces within
buildings. This method shall not be used for the sealing of conduits leaving
a building and/or structure.
2. Conduit penetrations through fire -rated walls and floors shall be made with an
approved UL 1479 Listed product specifically intended for the trade size of the
conduit.
B. Primer and Cement
Nonmetallic conduit shall be cleaned with primer and connected to fittings with the
manufacturer's recommended cement that is labeled Low VOC.
C. Galvanizing Compounds
Galvanizing compounds for field application shall be the cold -applied type,
containing no less than 93% pure zinc.
D. Conduit Interior Sealing
The sealing of the inside of conduits against water ingress shall be achieved
through the use of one of the following:
a. Two-part expanding polyurethane foam sealing compound, dispensed from
a single tube which mixes the two parts as it is injected into the conduit.
Expanding foam shall be compatible with the conduit material of
construction as well as the outer jacket of the cables in the conduit.
Acceptable products are Q-Pak 2000 by Chemque, FST by American
Polywater Corporation, or Hydra -seal S-60 by Duraline.
Inflatable bag that provides seal around cables and around inside diameter
of conduit. Provide appropriate quantity of additional fittings for
applications with three or more cables in the conduit to be sealed.
Acceptable products are Rayflate by Raychem, or Engineer approved
equal. This sealing method is only applicable to conduits trade size 2 inch
and larger.
C. Neoprene sealing ring provided with the required quantity and diameter of
holes to accommodate the cables in each conduit. Sealing ring shall be
compressed by two stainless steel pressure plates. Acceptable products
are type CSB by OZ-GEDNEY, or Engineer approved equal. This sealing
method is only applicable to metallic conduits containing 4 or less cables.
2. The use of aerosol -based expanding foam sealants or any other method of sealing
against water ingress not listed above is not acceptable.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-11 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. Pull Rope
Pull ropes for empty and/or spare conduits shall be woven polyester, 1/2 inch wide,
with a minimum tensile strength of 1250 lbs.
2. Pull ropes for the Contractors use in installing conductors shall be the size and
strength required for the pull, and shall be made of a non-metallic material.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Minimum trade size for all rigid conduits shall be 3/4 inch in exposed applications and 1
inch in embedded applications. Conduits installed within ductbanks shall be allowed to be
increased in size to trade size 2 inch, at the Contractor's option, to accommodate the
saddle size of the ductbank spacers. However, no combining of circuits shall be allowed
in the larger conduits.
B. Minimum trade size for flexible conduits (where specifically allowed herein) shall be 1/2
inch in all applications.
C. Conduit routing and/or homeruns within structures is not shown on the Drawings.
Conduits shall be installed concealed wherever practical and within the limitations
specified herein. All other conduits not capable of being installed concealed shall be
installed exposed.
D. Empty and/or spare conduits shall be provided with pull ropes which have no less than 12
inches of slack at each end.
E. Nonmetallic conduits for installations requiring less than a factory length of conduit shall
be field cut to the required length. The cut shall be made square, cleaned of debris, and
primer shall be applied to ready each joint for fusing. Conduits shall then be fused together
with the conduit manufacturer's approved cement compound.
F. Metallic conduits for installations requiring less than a factory length of conduit shall be
field cut to the required length. The cut shall be made square, be cleaned of all debris
and be de -burred, then threaded. Conduit threading performed in the field shall be % inch
per foot tapered threads in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1.
G. Conduits shall be protected from moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during
construction. Install dust -tight and water -tight conduit fittings on the ends of all conduits
immediately after installation and do not remove until conductors are installed.
H. Conduits shall be installed to provide no less than 12 inches clearance from pipes that
have the potential to impart heat upon the conduit. Such pipes include, but are not limited
to, hot water pipes, steam pipes, exhaust pipes, and blower air pipes. Clearance shall be
maintained whether conduit is installed in parallel or in crossing of pipes.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-12 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Where non-metallic instrumentation conduits are installed exposed, the following
clearances to other conduit types shall be maintained:
Instrumentation conduits installed parallel to conduits with conductors energized
at 480V or above shall be 18 inches.
2. Instrumentation conduits installed parallel to conduits with conductors energized
at 240V and below shall be 12 inches.
3. Instrumentation conduits installed at right angles to conductors energized at 480V
and below shall be 6 inches.
4. Instrumentation conduits installed at right angles to conductors energized at
voltages above 480V shall be 12 inches.
Where conduit fittings do not include an integral insulated bushing, an insulated bushing
shall be installed at all conduit termination points.
K. Conduits which serve multi -section equipment shall be terminated in the section where
wiring terminations will be made.
L. Conduits shall not penetrate the floors or walls inside liquid containment areas without
specific written authorization from the Engineer. Liquid containment areas are indicated
on the Drawings.
M. In no case shall conduit be supported or fastened to another pipe or be installed in a
manner that would prevent the removal of other pipes for repairs. Spring steel fasteners
may only be used to affix conduits containing lighting branch circuits within EMT conduits
to structural steel members.
N. All field fabricated threads for rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be thoroughly coated
with two coats of galvanizing compound, allowing at least two minutes to elapse between
coats for proper drying.
O. The appropriate specialized tools shall be used for the installation of PVC coated conduit
and conduit fittings. No damage to the PVC coating shall occur during installation.
Conduit and conduit fittings with damaged PVC coating shall be replaced at the
Contractor's cost. The use of PVC coating touch-up compounds is not permitted.
P. Conduits which emerge from within or below concrete encasement shall be PVC coated
rigid galvanized steel in accordance with Standard Detail 1611102 where the conduit is
not protected by an equipment enclosure that surrounds the conduit on all sides at the
point where it emerges from the encasement.
Q. Aluminum conduits shall not be installed in direct contact with concrete surfaces. Where
aluminum conduits are routed along concrete surfaces, they shall be installed with one -
hole electro-galvanized malleable iron alloy straps with matching clamp -backs to space
the conduit'/4 inch away from concrete surface. Where aluminum conduit passes through
concrete, CMU or brick walls, the penetration shall be made such that the aluminum
conduit does not come in contact with concrete, CMU, brick or mortar.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-13 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.02 CONCEALED AND EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. Conduits are permitted to be installed concealed and/or embedded with the following
requirements:
1. Conduits shall not be installed horizontally when concealed within CMU walls, only
vertical installation is acceptable.
2. Conduits installed embedded within concrete floors or walls shall be located so as
not to affect the designed structural strength of the floor or wall. Embedded
conduits shall be installed in accordance with Standard Detail 0331604 and ACI-
318.
3. Where conduit bends emerge from concrete embedment, none of the curved
portion of the bend shall be visible. Only the straight portion of the bend shall be
visible.
4. Where multiple conduits emerge from concrete embedment or from concealment
below a concrete floor, ample clear space shall be provided between conduits to
allow for the appropriate and required conduit termination fittings to be installed.
5. Conduits installed embedded within concrete encasement of any kind shall be
installed such that conduit couplings for parallel conduits are staggered so that
they are not side by side.
B. Conduits are NOT permitted to be installed concealed and/or embedded for the following
situations:
1. Conduits shall not be installed embedded within any water -bearing floors or walls.
Conduits shall not be installed embedded within any liquid containment area floors
or walls.
2. Conduits shall not be installed concealed within CMU walls or gypsum walls that
are adjacent to Class I and II hazardous areas (Division I and Division 11).
3. Conduits shall not be installed concealed within CMU walls or gypsum walls that
are adjacent to indoor Type 1 or Type 2 chemical storage/transfer areas.
3.03 CONDUIT USES AND APPLICATIONS
A. Rigid Conduit
1. Rigid conduit for non -hazardous areas shall be furnished and installed in the
materials of construction as follows:
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-14 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

RIGID CONDUIT FOR NON -HAZARDOUS AREAS
CONDUIT CATEGORY BY WIRING/CIRCUIT TYPE
Power and Control
Instrumentation
INSTALLATION AREA
DESIGNATION/ SCENARIO
Exposed in outdoor areas
Rigid aluminum conduit
Same as Power and
Control
Concealed within underground direct-
Schedule 40 rigid non-
Rigid galvanized steel
bury or concrete -encased ductbanks
metallic PVC conduit
conduit
Concealed within non -elevated (i.e.
Schedule 40 rigid non-
Rigid galvanized steel
"slab -on -grade" construction) concrete
metallic PVC conduit
conduit
slabs
Concealed below concrete slabs
Schedule 40 rigid non-
Rigid galvanized steel
(within earth or fill material)
metallic PVC conduit
conduit
Emerging from concealment within or
PVC coated rigid
Same as Power and
below a concrete floor and transitioning
galvanized steel conduit
Control
to exposed conduit (Reference Detail
1611102)
B. Conduit Bends
All conduit bends shall be the same material of construction as the rigid conduit
listed in the tables above, with the following exceptions:
a. All 90 degree bends or combinations of adjacent bends that form a 90
degree bend where concealed within concrete or below a concrete slab
shall be rigid galvanized steel.
2. Field fabricated bends of metallic conduit shall be made with a bending machine
and shall have no kinks. Field fabricated standard radius and long radius bends
shall have minimum bending radii in accordance with the associated tables in Part
2 herein.
3. Field bending of non-metallic conduits is not acceptable, factory fabricated bends
shall be used.
4. Long radius bends shall be furnished and installed for the following specific
applications, all other bends shall be standard radius:
a. All conduits containing medium voltage cable.
b. All conduits containing fiber optic cable.
C. All conduits containing shielded VFD cable.
d. Where specifically indicated on the Drawings.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-15 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Flexible Conduit
1. Flexible conduit shall only be installed for the limited applications specified herein.
Flexible conduit shall not be installed in any other application without written
authorization from the Engineer. Acceptable applications are as follows:
a. Connections to motors and engine -generator sets (and similar vibrating
equipment)
b. Connections to solenoid valves and limit switches
C. Connections to lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings
d. Connections to lighting transformers
e. Connections to pre -fabricated equipment skids
f. Connections to HVAC equipment
g. Connections to instrument transmitters and elements
h. Where specifically indicated in the Standard Details
2. Flexible conduit length shall be limited to three (3) feet, maximum. Flexible conduit
shall not be installed buried or embedded within any material.
Flexible conduit for non -hazardous areas shall be furnished and installed in the
materials of construction as follows:
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FOR NON -HAZARDOUS AREAS
CONDUIT CATEGORY BY
WIRING/CIRCUIT TYPE
Power and Control
Instrumentation
INSTALLATION AREA
DESIGNATION/SCENARIO
Exposed in outdoor areas
Liquid -tight flexible metal
Same as Power and
conduit
Control
3.04 CONDUIT FITTING USES AND APPLICATIONS
A. General
Conduit fittings shall be furnished and installed in the materials of construction as
indicated in Part 2, herein. Conduit fitting materials of construction are dependent
on the material of construction used for the associated conduit.
2. Conduit fittings shall be provided in the trade size and configuration required to suit
the application.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-16 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Conduit Bodies
Conduit bodies shall be installed where wire pulling points are desired or required,
or where changes in conduit direction or breaking around beams is required.
2. Where conduit bodies larger than trade size 2 inches are intended to be used as
a pull -through fitting during wire installation, oversized or elongated conduit bodies
shall be used. Oversized or elongated conduit bodies shall not be required if the
conduit body is intended to be used as a pull-out point during wire installation.
C. Conduit Nipples and Unions
Conduits with running threads shall not be used in place of 3-piece couplings
(unions) or close nipples. After installation of a conduit fitting of any kind, there
shall be no more than '/4 inch of exposed threads visible. Factory fabricated all -
thread nipples may be used between adjacent enclosures, however, the same
restriction applies regarding the length of exposed threads that are visible.
D. Conduit Expansion and Deflection Fittings
Conduit expansion fittings shall be installed where required by the NEC and where
indicated on the Drawings. Expansion fittings shall also be installed for exposed
straight metallic conduit runs of more than 75 feet, in both indoor and outdoor
locations. Expansion fittings for runs of non-metallic conduit shall be installed in
accordance with the NEC.
2. Conduit deflection fittings shall be installed where required by the NEC and where
conduits are installed (exposed and concealed) across structural expansion joints.
E. Conduit Seals
Conduit seals shall be installed for conduits installed within or associated with
hazardous areas and other areas as required by the NEC. In addition, conduit
seals shall also be furnished and installed as follows:
a. All conduits entering or leaving enclosed areas which store or distribute
chlorine gas.
All conduits entering or leaving enclosed areas which store or distribute
sulfur dioxide gas.
F. Conduit Termination Fittings
Where conduits terminate at enclosures with a NEMA 4, 4X, or 3R rating and the
enclosure does not have integral conduit hubs, an appropriately sized watertight
conduit hub shall be installed to maintain the integrity of the enclosure. The use
of locknuts with integral gasket in lieu of watertight conduit hubs is not acceptable.
2. Where conduits terminate at enclosures that do not require conduit hubs, a two-
locknut system shall be used to secure the conduit to the enclosure. One locknut
shall be installed on the outside of the enclosure, and the other inside, drawn tight
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-17 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

against the enclosure wall. The locknut on the interior of the enclosure shall be
the type with integral bonding lug, or a conduit bonding bushing may be used in
place of the locknut.
3. Conduits shall not be installed such that conduit fittings penetrate the top of any
enclosure located outdoors, except in cases where specifically required by the
serving electric utility. Conduits which serve outdoor equipment or an enclosure
from above shall instead be routed into the side of the enclosure at the bottom.
The conduit termination fitting shall be provided with a conduit drain to divert
moisture from the raceway away from the enclosure.
3.05 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Conduit Periphery Sealing
All conduit penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed around the periphery
using the appropriate products specified in Part 2 herein to prevent air and/or water
entry into the structure.
2. All conduit penetrations through interior walls and floors shall be sealed through
the use of with conduit sleeves and caulk as specified in Part 2 herein.
Alternatively, mortar may be used to seal around the conduit periphery.
3. Conduit penetrations through fire -rated walls as floors shall be made with the
appropriate fire rated penetration product.
B. Conduit Interior Sealing
All conduits (including spares) entering a structure below grade shall be sealed on
the interior of the conduit against water ingress. Sealing shall be at an accessible
location in the conduit system located within the building structure and shall be via
one of the methods specified in Part 2 herein. If conduit sealing cannot be
achieved at an accessible location within the building structure, sealing shall be
placed in the conduits in the nearest manhole or handhole outside the structure.
3.06 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. The identification system for the conduits furnished and installed under this Contract shall
match the existing identification system used at the project location.
3.07 TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions
and Division 1. The following tests are required:
1. All conduit installed below grade or concrete encased shall be tested to ensure
continuity and the absence of obstructions by pulling through each conduit a swab
followed by a mandrel 85% of the conduit inside diameter. After testing, all
conduits shall be capped after installation of a suitable pulling rope.
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-18 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

3.08 TRAINING OF INSTALLATION PERSONNEL
A. All Contractor personnel that install PVC coated RGS conduit shall be trained by the PVC
coated RGS conduit manufacturer. Training shall include proper conduit system assembly
techniques, use of tools appropriate for coated conduit systems, and field
bending/cutting/threading of coated conduit. Training shall have been completed within
the past 24 months prior to the Notice to Proceed on this Contract to be considered valid.
Contractor personnel not trained within this timeframe shall not be allowed to install coated
conduit, or shall be trained/re-trained as required prior to commencement of conduit
installation.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 22-19 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

23 - UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install underground duct systems, electric manholes, and
electric handholes as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. The work shall
be complete and shall include excavation, concrete construction, backfilling, and all
materials, items, and components required for a complete system.
B. The provisions of this Division are applicable to all underground conduit work. All work
shall be coordinated with that of the various utility companies and other Contractors. The
Contractor shall adhere to all utility company requirements including the serving electric
utility.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements; Section 22 — Conduit; Section 27
— Grounding and Bonding; Section 10 — Cast -In -Place Concrete.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Products specified herein shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following
standards as applicable:
AASHTO H2O
2. ANSI/SCTE 77-2010 — Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit Shop Drawings. Each submittal shall be identified
by the applicable Specification Section.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
31240-008: 04-18-19 23-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to, the following:
1. Product data sheets.
2. Outline and dimensional drawings including detailed sections of the manholes
and/or handholes.
3. Materials specifications and structural calculations for the manholes sealed by a
Professional Engineer in the State of North Carolina.
1.05 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each electric manhole and handhole cover shall be lettered with the word "Electric", the
manhole or handhole identification number (e.g. UMH-1, EMH-1, EHH-1, etc.), manufacturer's
name or trademark, and such other information as the manufacturer may consider necessary, or
as specified, for complete identification.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The material covered by this Specification is intended to be standard material of proven
performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Material shall be fabricated,
constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall
operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings.
2.02 DUCT SYSTEM
A. The underground duct system shall be comprised of conduits, conduit bends, and conduit
fittings as specified in Section 22 — Conduit. Conduits shall be encased in reinforced
concrete envelopes, unless otherwise specified herein or indicated on the Drawings.
B. Base and intermediate conduit spacers shall be furnished to provide a minimum of two-
inch (2") separation between conduits. Conduit spacers shall be provided in the proper
size as required for the conduit that they secure. For example, a 4" conduit spacer shall
not be used to secure a 2" conduit. Conduit spacers shall be as manufactured by Carlon
Electrical Products Company, Aeroquip Corporation, Underground Devices, Incorporated,
or equal.
2.03 ELECTRIC HANDHOLES
A. The electric handholes shall be a precast polymer concrete enclosure suitable for use as
part of an underground electric raceway system. The enclosure shall meet or exceed the
requirements of ANSI/SCTE 77-2010.
B. The enclosure and cover design and test load rating shall be Tier 15. Covers shall be
provided with cover hooks.
C. The enclosure shall be the straight side design to allow easy adjustment of box to grade.
The box shall be stackable for increased depth.
31240-008: 04-18-19 23-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. Handhole opening size shall be as required to suit the application, 6" X 8", minimum.
E. The electric handholes shall be manufactured by Hubbell, Pencell Plastics equivalent,
Highline Products equivalent, or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. The underground duct system, manholes, and handholes shall be installed as specified
herein, indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
3.02 DUCT SYSTEM
A. All underground conduit shall be encased in concrete and shall be reinforced.
Encasement and reinforcement shall be as indicated in the standard details. [Concrete
electrical duct banks shall contain red dye; the red dye shall be mixed into the concrete
mix before being poured. Red dye applied to the top of concrete encasement after
placement of concrete is not acceptable.]
B. Concrete pours shall be complete from handhole to handhole and from manhole to
manhole where practicable. Partial pours in general shall not be permitted. Where a
complete pour is impractical, written authorization shall be obtained from the Engineer for
the partial pour.
C. Conduit ductbank elevations at the manholes and handholes shall be [based on minimum
ductbank cover as indicated in the standard details, or deeper to avoid conflicts with other
obstacles] [maintained as shown on the Drawings]. Where deviation is necessary to clear
unforeseen obstacles, the elevations may be changed after authorization by the Engineer.
D. Slope all conduits continuously away from structures and buildings with a minimum slope
of 3" per 100' unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
E. The minimum clearance from the top of the concrete encasement and finished grade shall
be as indicated in the standard details, except where otherwise accepted in writing by the
Engineer or shown on the Drawings.
F. Care shall be exercised during excavation for the duct banks to prevent digging too deep.
Backfilling of low spots with earth fill will not be permitted unless thoroughly compacted
and acceptable to the Engineer.
G. If a specific ductbank arrangement is shown on the Drawings, the conduits in that ductbank
shall be arranged as shown. Where no specific ductbank arrangement is shown on the
Drawings, the Contractor shall arrange conduits within each ductbank based on field
conditions. Spare conduits shown going from ductbanks into buildings or structures shall
be stubbed up in the location(s) as indicated on the Drawings.
H. A minimum of one (1) ground rod, furnished in accordance with Section 27, shall be driven
adjacent to each manhole, handhole, or other concrete box. A No. 4/0 AWG bare copper
ground cable shall be connected between this rod and the copper ground strap using a
31240-008: 04-18-19 23-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

silicon bronze connector. All ground rods shall be interconnected by means of the No. 4/0
AWG bare copper ground cable located within each duct bank. The ends of these cables
shall also be connected to substation and/or building ground buses where the conduits
terminate.
Care shall be exercised and temporary plugs shall be installed during installation to
prevent the entrance of concrete, mortar, or other foreign matter into the conduit system.
Conduit spacers shall be utilized to support conduit during the pouring of concrete to
prevent movement and misalignment of the conduits. Conduit spacers shall be installed
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise noted. Horizontal
spacing of conduit spacers along ductbank shall be as indicated on the Standard Details.
Where connections to existing underground conduits are indicated, excavate to the
maximum depth necessary. After addressing the existing conductors, cut the conduits
and remove loose concrete from the conduits before installing new concrete encased
ducts. Provide a reinforced concrete collar, poured monolithically with the new duct line,
to take the shear at the joint of the duct lines.
K. Construct concrete -encased conduits connecting to underground structures to have a
flared section adjacent to the manhole to provide shear strength. Construct underground
structures to provide shear strength. Construct underground structures to provide for
keying the concrete encasement of the duct line into the wall of the structure. Use
vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to ensure a seal between the
encasement and the wall of the structure.
L. Six (6) inches above all duct banks, the Contractor shall furnish and install a two (2) inch
wide red plastic electrical hazard tape. Tapes shall be metallic detectable type and shall
have a continuous message in bold black letters: "ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW."
Tape shall be Detectable Identoline by Brady, or equal.
M. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork including excavation, backfill, bedding,
compaction, shoring and bracing, grading and restoration of surfaces and seeded areas
disturbed during the execution of the work.
N. All conduit joints in the duct system shall be staggered such that adjacent conduits do not
have joints in the same location.
3.03 ELECTRIC HANDHOLES
A. Electric handholes shall be installed to a sufficient depth to accommodate the required
grading of ducts as well as maintaining a minimum distance of 9" from the bottom of the
lowest duct centerline entrances to finished floor line and/or highest duct centerline
entrance to roof. All handholes shall be built on, or placed over a 6" layer of well -tamped
gravel.
B. Duct envelopes and conduit with bell ends shall enter at approximately right angles to the
walls, except as may otherwise be shown on the Drawings.
C. All fully assembled handholes shall be completely watertight.
31240-008: 04-18-19 23-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

D. All individual cables and/or bundles of conductors shall be identified and "dressed" along
the wall of the enclosure. Cable racks as specified herein shall be provided if any
handhole dimension exceeds 24 inches.
3.04 TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions
and Division 1. The following tests are required:
Field tests
a. Field tests for all completed duct systems shall consist of pulling a swab
through each conduit followed by a mandrel equal in size to 85% of the
conduit inside diameter.
After testing, all conduits shall be capped after installation of a suitable pull
rope. All field tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 23-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

24 - LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, test, and place in satisfactory operating
condition, all low voltage wire and cable indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein
and/or required for proper operation. The work of connecting cables to equipment and
devices shall be considered a part of this Section. All appurtenances required for the
installation of wire and cable systems shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
B. The scope of this Section does not include internal wiring factory installed by electrical
equipment manufacturers.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements and Section 25 — Boxes.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Low voltage wire, cable, and appurtenances shall be designed, manufactured, and/or
listed to the following standards as applicable:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
a. UL 13 — Standard for Power -Limited Circuit Cables
b. UL 44 — Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables
C. UL 83 — Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables
d. UL 1277 — Standard for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with
Optional Optical -Fiber Members
e. UL 1581 — Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible
Cords
f. UL 1685 — Standard for Vertical -Tray Fire -Propagation and Smoke -
Release Test for Electrical and Optical -Fiber Cables
g. UL 2250 — Standard for Instrumentation Tray Cable
h. UL 2556 — Wire and Cable Test Methods
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM B3 — Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire
0
N
b. ASTM B8 — Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. ASTM B33 — Standard Specification for Tin -Coated Soft or Annealed
Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes
d. ASTM D69 — Standard Test Methods for Friction Tapes
e. ASTM D4388 — Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi -Conducting
and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes
3. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
a. ICEA S-58-679 — Standard for Control, Instrumentation and Thermocouple
Extension Conductor Identification
b. ICEA T-29-250 — Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with
Theoretical Heat Input Rate of 210,000 B.T.U./Hour
4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
a. IEEE 1202 — Standard for Flame Testing of Cables
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1 — General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the wire
and cable manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Reports of Field Tests
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
material's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Product data sheets for wire and cable, terminations, and pulling lubricant.
2. Cable pulling calculations (if required).
3. Wiring identification methods and materials.
D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the
Engineer can determine if the requirements of these specifications are being met. Copies
of technical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items the
Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted.
1.05 CABLE PULLING CALCULATIONS
A. Prior to the installation of the wire and cable specified herein, the Contractor shall submit
cable pulling calculations for engineer review and approval when all of the following are
true:
The amount of cable to be installed will be greater than 200 linear feet between
pull points.
2. The installation will have one or more bends.
3. The wire and cable is size #1/0 AWG and larger.
B. Cable pulling calculations shall be performed by a currently registered professional
engineer in the State of North Carolina and shall define pulling tension and sidewall
loading (sidewall bearing pressure values).
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The wire and cable to be furnished and installed for this project shall be the product of
manufacturers who have been in the business of manufacturing wire and cable for a
minimum of ten (10) years. Wire and cable shall be designed, constructed, and installed
in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when
installed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. Only one (1) manufacturer for
each wire and cable type shall be permitted.
2.02 POWER AND CONTROL WIRE AND CABLE
A. Power wire installed between the output terminals of a VFD and the respective motor shall
[consist of insulated copper conductors. Conductor insulation shall be rated for 900C in
both wet and dry locations, and 600V. Insulated conductors shall be UL 44 Listed as NEC
Type XHHW-2.][be shielded VFD cable as specified herein].
B. Power wire for all other loads and control wire shall consist of insulated copper conductors
with a nylon (or equivalent) outer jacket. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C for dry
locations, 75°C for wet locations, and 600V. Insulated conductors shall be UL 83 Listed
as NEC Type THHN/THWN.
C. Unless specified otherwise herein, conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM B-8
and B-3, with Class B or C stranding contingent upon the size. Power conductors for
lighting and receptacle branch circuits shall be solid copper per ASTM B-3.
D. Power conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 12 AWG and Control conductor size
shall be no smaller than No. 14 AWG.
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

E. Multi -conductor cable assemblies shall include a grounding conductor and an overall PVC
jacket. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in
accordance with UL 1277. Multi -conductor cable assemblies shall be UL 1277 Listed as
NEC Type TC (Power and Control Tray Cable).
F. Power wire and cable shall be as manufactured by the Okonite Company, the Southwire
Company, General Cable, Encore Wire, or equal.
2.03 INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
A. For single -analog signal applications, instrumentation cable shall consist of a single,
twisted pair or triad of individually insulated and jacketed copper conductors with an overall
cable shield and jacket. Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C in both wet and dry
locations, and 600V. The jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame
in accordance with UL 1277. Cable shall be UL 1277 Listed as NEC Type TC (Power and
Control Tray Cable).
B. For multiple -analog signal applications, instrumentation cable shall consist of multiple,
twisted pairs or triads (i.e. groups) of individually insulated and jacketed copper conductors
with individual pair/triad shields (i.e. group shields) and an overall cable shield and jacket.
Conductor insulation shall be rated 90°C in both wet and dry locations, and 600V. The
jacket shall be PVC and resistant to abrasion, sunlight, and flame in accordance with UL
1277. Cable shall be UL 1277 Listed as NEC Type TC (Power and Control Tray Cable).
C. Cable and group shields shall consist of overlapped aluminum/polyester tape/foil providing
100% coverage. Instrumentation cables shall include an overall copper shield drain wire.
Cables containing multiple twisted pairs or triads shall also include group shield drain
wires.
D. Conductors, including drain wires, shall be tin or alloy coated (if available), soft, annealed
copper, stranded per ASTM B-8, with Class B stranding unless otherwise specified.
E. Instrumentation signal conductor size shall be no smaller than No. 16 AWG.
F. Instrumentation cable shall be Okoseal-N Type P-OS (for single pair or triad applications)
or Okoseal-N Type SP-OS (for multiple pair or triad applications) as manufactured by the
Okonite Company, Belden equivalent, Southwire Company equivalent, or equal.
2.04 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A. Conductors shall be identified using a color coding method. Color coding for individual
power, control, lighting, and receptacle conductors shall be as follows:
480/277V AC Power
a. Phase A - BROWN
Phase B - ORANGE
C. Phase C - YELLOW
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

d. Neutral — GREY
2. 120/208V or 120/240V AC Power
a. Phase A - BLACK
b. Phase B - RED
C. Phase C - BLUE
d. Neutral - WHITE
3. DC Power
a. Positive Lead - RED
b. Negative Lead - BLACK
4. DC Control
a. All wiring - BLUE
5. 120 VAC Control
a. 120 VAC control wire shall be RED except for a wire entering a motor
control center compartment, motor controller, or control panel which is an
interlock. This interlock conductor shall be color coded YELLOW. For the
purposes of this Section, an interlock is defined as any wiring that brings
voltage into the above mentioned equipment from a source outside that
equipment.
6. 24 VAC Control
a. All wiring - ORANGE
7. Equipment Grounding Conductor
a. All wiring - GREEN
B. Individual conductors No. 2 AWG and smaller shall have factory color coded insulation. It
is acceptable for individual conductors larger than No.2 AWG to be provided with factory
color coded insulation as well, but it is not required. Individual conductors larger than No.2
AWG that are not provided with factory color coded insulation shall be identified by the
use of colored tape in accordance with the requirements listed in Part 3 herein. Insulation
colors and tape colors shall be in accordance with the color coding requirements listed
above.
C. Conductors that are part of multi -conductor cable assemblies shall have black insulation.
The conductor number shall be printed on each conductor's insulation in accordance with
ICEA S-58-679, Method 4. Each conductor No.2 AWG and smaller within the cable
assembly shall also be identified with a heat shrink tag with color coded background. Each
conductor larger than No.2 AWG within the cable assembly shall also be identified by the
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

use of colored tape. Heat shrink tags and colored tape shall be in accordance with the
requirements listed in Part 3 herein. Tape color and heat shrink tag background color shall
be in accordance with the color coding requirements listed above.
2.05 CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS
A. Cable pulling lubricants shall be non -hardening type and approved for use on the type of
cable installed. Lubricant shall be Yellow #77 Plus by Ideal, Cable Gel by Greenlee, Poly -
Gel by Gardner Bender, or equal.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. General
Wire and Cable shall be installed as specified herein and indicated on the
Drawings. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Drawings, wire and cable
shall be installed in separate raceways according to wiring type. For example,
power wiring shall not be combined with control wiring, and control wiring shall not
be combined with instrumentation wiring.
2. Wire shall be furnished and installed as single conductor cables, with limited
exceptions. Multi -conductor cable assemblies shall only be installed where
indicated on the Drawings, required by the NEC, or after obtaining written
permission from the Engineer.
3. Where instrumentation cables are installed in control panels, motor controllers, and
other locations, the Contractor shall arrange wiring to provide maximum clearance
between these cables and other conductors. Instrumentation cables shall not be
installed in same bundle with conductors of other circuits.
4. Instrumentation cable shielding shall be continuous and shall be grounded at one
point only.
B. Splices
Splices shall not be allowed in power or control wire and cable unless approved in
writing by the Engineer. If unique field conditions exist or pulling calculations
indicate that splices may be required, the Contractor shall submit a detailed
request indicating why splices are required to the Engineer. The Engineer shall
be under no obligation to grant such request.
2. Splicing materials shall be barrel type butt splice connectors and heat shrink tubing
as manufactured by 3M, Ideal, or equal. The use of screw -on wire connectors (wire
nuts) shall only be permitted for lighting and receptacle circuits.
3. No splicing of instrumentation cable is permitted.
C. Wire and Cable Sizes
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

The sizes of wire and cable shall be as indicated on the Drawings, or if not shown,
as approved by the Engineer. If required due to field routing, the size of conductors
and respective conduit shall be increased so that the voltage drop measured from
source to load does not exceed 2-1/2%.
D. Additional Conductor Identification
In addition to the color coding identification requirements specified in Part 2 herein,
individual conductors shall be provided with heat shrinkable identification tags.
Identification tags for individual conductors shall have a white background where
the conductor insulation is colored. Identification tags for individual conductors
shall have a colored background where the conductor insulation is black.
Background color shall match that of the taping provided on the individual black
conductors.
2. Multi -conductor cables shall be provided with heat shrinkable identification tags in
accordance with Part 2 herein.
3. All wiring shall be identified at each point of termination. This includes but is not
limited to identification at the source, load, and in any intermediate junction boxes
where a termination is made. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner and
Engineer to come to an agreement regarding a wire identification system prior to
installation of any wiring. Wire numbers shall not be duplicated.
4. Wire identification shall be by means of a heat shrinkable sleeve with appropriately
colored background and black text. Wire sizes #14 AWG through #10 AWG shall
have a minimum text size of 7 points. Wire sizes #8 AWG and larger shall have a
minimum text size of 10 points. Sleeves shall be of appropriate length to fit the
required text. The use of handwritten text for wire identification shall not be
permitted.
5. Sleeves shall be suitable for the size of wire on which they are installed. Sleeves
shall not be heat -shrunk onto control cables. Tags shall remain loose on cable to
promote easier identification. For all other applications, sleeves shall be tightly
affixed to the wire and shall not move. Sleeves shall be heat shrunk onto wiring
with a heat gun approved for the application. Sleeves shall not be heated by any
means which employs the use of an open flame. The Contractor shall take special
care to ensure that the wiring insulation is not damaged during the heating process.
6. Sleeves shall be installed prior to the completion of the wiring terminations and
shall be oriented so that they can be easily read.
7. Sleeves shall be polyolefin as manufactured by Brady, Seton, Panduit, or equal.
8. Wire identification in manholes, handholes, pull boxes, and other accessible
components in the raceway system where the wiring is continuous (no terminations
are made) shall be accomplished by means of a tag installed around the bundled
group of individual conductors or around the outer conductor jacket of a multi -
conductor cable. Identification shall utilize a FROM -TO system. Each group of
conductors shall consist of all of the individual conductors in a single conduit or
duct. The tag shall have text that identifies the bundle in accordance with the
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

'FROM' and 'TO' column for that particular conduit number in the conduit and wire
schedule. Minimum text size shall be 10 point. The tag shall be affixed to the wire
bundle by the use of nylon wire ties, and shall be made of polyethylene as
manufactured by Brady, Seton, Panduit, or equal.
9. Where colored tape is used to identify cables, it shall be wrapped around the cable
with a 25% overlap and shall cover at least 2 inches of the cable.
E. Wiring Supplies
Rubber insulating tape shall be in accordance with ASTM D4388. Friction tape
shall be in accordance with ASTM D69.
F. Training of Cable in Manholes, Handholes, and Vaults
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to train cables around
cable vaults, manholes, and handholes. Sufficient length of cable shall be provided
in each handhole, manhole, and vault so that the cable can be trained and racked
in an approved manner. In training or racking, the radius of bend of any cable shall
be not less than the manufacturer's recommendation. The training shall be done
in such a manner as to minimize chaffing.
2. Instrumentation cable shall be racked and bundled separate from AC wiring to
maintain the required separation as follows:
a. 18 inches for 480/277 VAC wiring
12 inches for 208/120 VAC wiring
C. 6 inches for 24 VAC wiring
G. Conductor Terminations
Where wires are terminated at equipment which requires lugs, connections shall
be made by solderless mechanical lug, crimp type ferrule, or irreversible
compression type lugs. Reference individual equipment specification sections as
applicable for additional termination requirements.
2. Where enclosure sizes and sizes of terminals at limit switches, solenoid valves,
float switches, pressure switches, temperature switches, and other devices make
terminations impractical due to the size of the field wiring, the Contractor shall
terminate field wiring in an adjacent junction box per the requirements of Section
16130 — Boxes, complete with terminal strips. Contractor shall install the smaller
wiring from the device to the junction box in a conduit, using the terminal strip as
the means for joining the two different wire sizes. Splicing of wires in lieu of using
terminal strips is not acceptable.
3. The cables shall be terminated in accordance with the cable and/or termination
product manufacturer's instructions for the particular type of cable.
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

4. To minimize oxidation and corrosion, wire and cable shall be terminated using an
oxide -inhibiting joint compound recommended for "copper -to -copper" connections.
The compound shall be Penetrox E as manufactured by Burndy Electrical, or
equal.
5. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks mounted within
equipment or junction boxes. Unless otherwise noted, coiling up of spare
conductors within enclosure is not acceptable.
H. Pulling Temperature
Cable shall not be installed when the temperature of the jacket is such that damage
will occur due to low temperature embrittlement. When cable will be pulled with an
ambient temperature of 40°F or less within a three (3) day period prior to pulling,
the cable reels shall be stored three (3) days prior to pulling in a protected storage
area with an ambient temperature of 55°F or more. Cable pulling shall be
completed during the work day for which the cable is removed from the protected
storage. Any cable reels with wire remaining on them shall be returned to storage
at the completion of the workday.
3.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall install the fiber optic cable furnished by the General Contractor and/or
the Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor. The cable shall be installed in its
respective raceway system(s) as specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, and in
accordance with the cable manufacturer's instructions. Reference Division 17 for
additional information regarding the fiber optic cable.
3.03 TESTING
A. All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General
Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required:
Shop Test
a. Wires and cables shall be tested in accordance with the applicable ICEA
Standards. Wire and cable shall be physically and electrically tested in
accordance with the manufacturer's standards.
2. Field Tests
a. After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for continuity. Testing
for continuity shall be "test light" or "buzzer" style.
After installation, some wires and cables shall be tested for insulation
levels. Insulation resistance between conductors of the same circuit and
between conductor and ground shall be tested. Testing for insulation levels
shall be as follows:
For #8 AWG and larger 600V wire and cable, apply 1,000 VDC from
a Megohmmeter for one (1) minute. Resistance shall be no less
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-9 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

than 100 Megohms. Insulation testing is not required for power and
control cables smaller than #8 AWG.
Instrumentation signal cable shall be tested from conductor to
conductor, conductor to shield, and conductor to ground using a
Simpson No. 260 volt -ohmmeter, or approved equal. The
resistance value shall be 200 Megohms or greater.
B. Wires and cables shall be tested after required terminations are made, but before being
connected to any equipment.
C. If tests reveal defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or
shall replace the cable as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner.
All conductors of a multi -phase circuit shall be replaced if one conductor fails the required
testing. If part of a multi -set (parallel conductors per phase) circuit fails testing, only the
set containing failure shall be replaced.
D. All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall supply all testing
equipment. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer.
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-10 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(EXHIBIT A)
TEST DATA - MEGOHMS
TEST NO.
Date:
Company:
Time:
Location:
Circuit:
Circuit Length:
Aerial:
Duct:
Buried:
No. of Conductors
Size:
AWG
MCM
Shield:
Insulation Material:
Insulation Thickness:
Voltage Rating:
Age:
Type: Pothead Terminal
Location: Indoors
Outdoors
Number and Type of Joints:
Recent Operating History:
Manufacturer:
State if Potheads or Terminals were grounded during test:
List associated equipment included in test:
Miscellaneous Information:
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-11 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

(EXHIBIT A)
TEST DATA - MEGOHMS
TEST NO.
Part Tested:
Test Performed:
Hours/Days:
After Shutdown:
Grounding Time:
Dry Bulb Temperature:
Wet Bulb Temperature:
Test Voltage:
Equipment Temperature:
How Obtained:
Relative Humidity:
Absolute Humidity:
Dew Point:
Megohmmeter: Serial Number: Range:
Voltage:
Calibration Date:
Test Connections
To Line
To Line
To Line
Test Connections
To Line
To Line
To Line
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To Earth
To
To
To
To
To
To
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
1/4 Minute
5 Minutes
1/2 Minute
6 Minutes
3/4 Minute
7 Minutes
1 Minute
8 Minutes
2 Minutes
9 Minutes
3 Minutes
10 Minutes
4 Minutes
10/1 Minute Ratio
Remarks:
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 24-12 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The scope of work under this Section includes furnishing and installing all pull boxes,
junction boxes, and outlet boxes.
B. Requirements for other boxes and enclosures are not included in this Section. Reference
each specific Division 16 equipment Section for requirements related to that equipment's
respective enclosure.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements, and Section 22 — Conduit.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Boxes shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards as
applicable:
1. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes
2. UL 514C - Standard for Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes, and
Covers
3. UL 50 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non -environmental Considerations
4. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations
5. UL 1203 — Standard for Explosion -proof and Dust -ignition -proof Electrical
Equipment for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
6. NEMA 250 — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer(s) and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
0
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
Product data sheets for boxes, terminal strips, and all accessories
2. Overall bill of material for all boxes included under this Contract to summarize
exactly what is being submitted for review. Bill of material shall at a minimum show
each box type (i.e. pull, junction, or outlet), quantity, material of construction,
dimensions, and proposed installation location.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the
procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 1.
B. As -built drawings showing dimensions, internal box layout, terminal strip information, and
terminal strip identification information shall be provided for all junction boxes. As -built
drawings are not required for pull boxes or outlet boxes.
1.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each pull and junction box shall be identified with the box name as indicated on the
Contract Drawings (e.g. PPB-XXX, CJB-YYY) or as directed by the Engineer. A
nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each box. Nameplates
shall be as specified in Section 29 — Electrical — Identification.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade,
and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
2.02 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. General
1. All pull and junction boxes shall be UL listed and labeled.
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2. Pull and junction boxes shall not be provided with eccentric or concentric
knockouts.
3. Pull and junction boxes mounted embedded in concrete shall be UL listed for
embedment.
4. Where metallic boxes are used they shall be of all welded construction. Tack
welded boxes are not acceptable.
B. Pull Boxes
1. All pull boxes shall be provided with a matching gasketed cover. For covers with
dimensions of 24 inches by 24 inches or less, the cover shall be held in place by
machine screws. Other screw types are not acceptable. For covers with
dimensions greater than 24 inches by 24 inches, the cover shall be hinged and
held in place by screw -operated clamp mechanisms. Hinge pins shall be
removable. Clamp mechanism material of construction shall match that of the
associated box.
2. Pull boxes shall not have any wire terminations inside, other than those for
grounding/bonding. A ground bar shall be provided with the necessary number of
screw type terminals. Twenty (20) percent of the total amount of terminals
otherwise required for the pull box (minimum of two) shall be provided as spare
terminations. Boxes requiring any other wire terminations shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with the requirements for junction boxes herein.
3. Pull boxes shall be 6 inches wide by 6 inches tall by 4 inches deep, minimum. For
applications requiring larger boxes, the box shall be sized in accordance with the
fill requirements and dimensional requirements of the NEC.
4. Barriers shall be provided in pull boxes to isolate conductors of different voltages,
types, and functions. Barrier material of construction shall match that of the box.
Isolation shall be provided between the following groups:
a. Power wiring
b. AC control wiring
C. DC control wiring
d. Instrumentation wiring
C. Junction Boxes
1. Junction boxes used for lighting and receptacle circuits only shall be provided with
a matching gasketed cover held in place by machine screws. Other screw types
are not acceptable.
2. Junction boxes for all uses other than lighting and receptacle circuits shall be
provided with a hinged, gasketed cover. Hinge pins shall be removable. Cover
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

shall be held in place by screw -operated clamp mechanisms. Clamp mechanism
material of construction shall match that of the associated box.
3. Barriers shall be provided in junction boxes to isolate conductors and terminal
blocks of different voltages, types, and functions. Barrier material of construction
shall match that of the box. Isolation shall be provided between the following
groups:
a. Power wiring
AC control wiring
C. DC control wiring
d. Instrumentation wiring
4. Junction boxes used for lighting and receptacle circuits only shall be allowed to
have screw -on (wire nut) type connectors for wire terminations/junctions.
5. Junction boxes for all uses other than lighting and receptacle circuits shall be
provided with terminal strips, consisting the necessary number of screw type
terminals. Current carrying parts of the terminal blocks shall be of ample capacity
to carry the full load current of the circuits connected, with a 10A minimum capacity.
Terminal strips shall be rated for the voltage of the circuits connected. A separate
ground bar shall be provided with the necessary number of screw type terminals.
Twenty (20) percent of the total amount of terminals otherwise required for the
junction box (minimum of two) shall be provided as spare terminations. When
barriers are provided within the box, separate terminal strips shall be provided in
each barrier area. Terminals shall be lettered and/or numbered to conform to the
wiring labeling scheme in place on the project.
6. Junction boxes shall be 6 inches wide by 6 inches tall by 4 inches deep, minimum.
For applications requiring larger boxes, the box shall be sized in accordance with
the fill requirements and dimensional requirements of the NEC. Terminal blocks
(including spare terminals) shall be considered when sizing the junction box.
D. Enclosure Types and Materials
In non -hazardous locations, pull and junction boxes shall be furnished with the
following enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the
designation of the area in which they are to be installed. Area designations are
indicated on the Drawings.
AREA DESIGNATION
ENCLOSURE TYPE AND
MATERIAL
All Outdoor Areas
NEMA 4X, Type 304 Stainless Steel
2. Non-metallic enclosures, NEMA 7 enclosures, and NEMA 9 enclosures shall be
provided with threaded integral conduit hubs.
2.03 OUTLET BOXES
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

A. General
Outlet boxes shall be provided with a trim appropriate for the wiring device installed
inside. Reference Section 26 — Wiring Devices, for outlet box trim requirements.
An appropriate outlet box trim is required to achieve the NEMA rating of the outlet
boxes as specified herein.
B. Surface Mount Outlet Boxes
Outlet boxes shall be the deep type, no less than 2.5 inches deep.
2. Outlet boxes shall be provided in single or multi -gang configuration as required,
sized in accordance with the requirements of the NEC.
3. In non -hazardous locations, outlet boxes shall be furnished with the following
enclosure type and material of construction, dependent upon the designation of
the area in which they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the
Drawings.
AREA DESIGNATION ENCLOSURE TYPE AND MATERIAL
All Outdoor Areas NEMA 4X, Cast Aluminum
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Pull and Junction Boxes
Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be solidly attached to structural members prior
to installation of conduit and set true and plumb. Boxes shall not be supported by
their associated conduits.
2. Wooden plugs are not permitted for securing boxes to concrete. Appropriately
rated anchors specifically suited for use in concrete shall be used.
3. Box penetrations for conduits shall be made with a punch tool, and penetrations
shall be of the size required for the conduit entry and/or hub. Oversized
penetrations in boxes are not acceptable.
4. Watertight conduit hubs shall be provided for boxes where a NEMA 4X enclosure
rating is specified. Reference Section 22 — Conduit, for conduit hub requirements.
5. Pull and junction boxes may be installed flush mounted in gypsum, concrete or
CMU walls where appropriate provided that covers are easily removed or opened.
6. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided in the enclosure type and material of
construction required for the area in which it is installed. Reference the
requirements in Part 2 herein, and the area designations indicated on the
Drawings.
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

B. Outlet Boxes
Outlet boxes shall be solidly attached to structural members prior to installation of
conduit and set true and plumb. Boxes shall not be supported by their associated
conduits.
2. Wooden plugs are not permitted for securing boxes to concrete. Appropriately
rated anchors specifically suited for use in concrete shall be used.
3. Flush mounted outlet boxes shall be arranged and located so that the and grout
lines fit closely around the boxes, and so placed that the cover or device plate shall
fit flush to the finished wall surface.
4. Outlet boxes shall be flush mounted in finished areas and other areas where
practical. Flush mounted outlet boxes shall not be installed in hazardous areas
and type 1 or 2 chemical storage/transfer areas.
5. For the below -named items, mounting heights from finished floor, or finished grade
to top is applicable, depending on the type of wiring device to be installed in the
outlet box. Mounting heights for outlet boxes shall be as follows, unless otherwise
specified herein, indicated on the Drawings, or required by the Americans with
Disability Act (ADA):
a. Light switches and wall mounted occupancy sensors, 48 inches
Receptacles in indoor dry process/non-process areas, 16 inches
C. Receptacles in indoor wet process areas and all indoor chemical
storage/transfer areas, 48 inches
d. Receptacles in outdoor locations, 24 inches
6. Outlet boxes shall be provided in the material of construction required for the area
in which it is installed. Reference the requirements in Part 2 herein, and the area
designations indicated on the Drawings.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 25-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

26 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all switches, occupancy sensors, and receptacles
as shown on the Drawings.
B. All switches and receptacles shall be furnished and installed in outlet boxes. Reference
Section 25 — Boxes, for outlet box requirements.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements, and Section 24 — Low Voltage
Wire and Cable.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Wiring devices shall be designed, manufactured, and/or listed to the following standards
as applicable:
1. UL 20 — General Use Snap Switches
2. UL 498 — Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
3. UL 943 — Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
4. UL 1203 — Standard for Explosion -proof and Dust -ignition -proof Electrical
Equipment for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by
the applicable specification section.
1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
31240-008: 04-18-19 26-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to:
1. Product data sheets.
1.05 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish 10% (minimum of 1) spare of each receptacle, switch, and
plug furnished and installed for this project.
B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes,
quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing
material" are not acceptable.
C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory
control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those
parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the same parts number.
1.06 IDENTIFICATION
A. Each switch and receptacle shall be identified with the equipment item number,
manufacturer's name or trademark, and such other information as the manufacturer may
consider necessary, or as specified, for complete identification.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and
shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
B. The Contractor shall use the products of a single manufacturer for each type of wiring
device.
C. The Contractor shall use the products of a single manufacturer for all device plates. Plate
variations are allowed for the following devices:
1. Where the selected plate manufacturer does not manufacture a suitable finish
plate.
2. For heavy-duty receptacles rated at more than 30A.
3. Where non-standard plates are required, specified, or shown.
D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all wiring devices and device plates.
E. In non -hazardous areas, provide specification grade devices manufactured by Appleton,
Crouse -Hinds, Leviton, Hubbell, Pass & Seymour, or Engineer approved equal.
31240-008: 04-18-19 26-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

F. In hazardous areas, provide devices manufactured by Appleton, Cooper Crouse -Hinds,
Hubbell-Killark, or Engineer approved equal.
2.02 WIRING DEVICES
A. Wall switches for non -hazardous areas shall be rated for the current required to suit the
application, but not less than 20A. Double pole, three-way, and four-way switches shall
be provided where indicated on the Drawings, and as required. Switches shall be rated
for 120-277VAC and shall be UL 20 Listed.
B. Convenience receptacles for non -hazardous areas shall be rated for 20A at 125VACand
shall be UL 498 Listed. Receptacles shall be weather resistant where installed in wet or
damp locations.
C. Special purpose receptacles (welders, lab equipment, etc.) shall be provided with the
proper NEMA configuration and ampacity as indicated on the Drawings. The coordinating
plug for each special purpose receptacle shall be provided with the equipment which it is
serving.
D. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be rated for 20A at 125VACand shall be
UL 943 Listed. Receptacles shall be weather resistant where installed in wet or damp
locations.
E. Wall switches for hazardous areas shall be the factory sealed type, UL 1203 Listed for use
in the hazardous area. Wall switches shall be rated for 120-277VAC, and shall be rated
for the current required to suit the application, but not less than 20A
F. Receptacles for hazardous areas shall be rated 20A at 120-240VAC. Receptacles shall
be UL 1203 listed for use in the hazardous area, utilizing delayed -action construction.
G. All wiring devices shall be approved for use with stranded conductors, if stranded
conductors are to be used with the device. Reference Section 16123, Low Voltage Wire
and Cable for conductor requirements
2.03 DEVICE PLATES
A. Device plates for indoor flush -mounted receptacles and switches shall be made of Type
304 stainless steel, not less than 0.032 of an inch thick, with beveled edges and milled on
the rear so as to lie flat against the wall. Devices plates shall be provided with a gasket.
B. Device plates for outdoor installations, indoor wet process areas, and chemical
storage/transfer areas shall be Appleton Type FSK, Crouse -Hinds #DS185, or equal for
wall switches. Device plates for receptacles shall be "in -use" style. "In -use" weatherproof
covers shall be rugged, minimum 3 '/4" depth, die-cast aluminum as manufactured by
Thomas & Betts "Red Dot," Intermatic International, Inc., or equal.
C. Device plates for indoor dry process and non -process areas with surface mounted boxes
shall be Crouse -Hinds DS32, or equal for switches, and Crouse -Hinds DS23 or equal for
receptacles.
31240-008: 04-18-19 26-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Where more than one (1) switch occurs at one (1) location, gang plates shall be used.
B. All device plates shall be set true and plumb and shall fit tightly against the finished wall
surfaces and outlet boxes.
C. Wiring device box (outlet box) mounting heights shall be as specified in Section 25, Boxes.
D. When indicated height would place any of the equipment at an unsuitable location such
as at a molding or break in wall finish, the Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the
Engineer for a decision.
E. All receptacles shall have a self-adhesive label installed on the top at the respective device
plate that indicates which panel and which circuit number the receptacle is supplied from.
Labels shall have a white background and black lettering in 14 point font.
3.02 CIRCUITING
A. Convenience receptacles shall be grouped on circuits separate from the lighting circuits.
A maximum of eight (8) convenience receptacles are permitted per 20A, 120V circuit,
unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 26-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

27 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding systems complete in accordance with
the minimum requirements established by Article 250 of the NEC. Article 250 of the NEC
shall be considered a minimum requirement for compliance with this Specification.
B. Grounding of all instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer/system requirements and IEEE 1100. Conflicts shall
be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer.
C. In addition to the NEC requirements, building structural steel columns, equipment frames
and equipment supports shall be permanently and effectively grounded:
D. Reference 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment and materials covered under this Section shall be designed, manufactured,
and/or listed to the following standards as applicable:
1. UL 467 — Grounding and Bonding Equipment
2. IEEE 81 — Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System.
3. IEEE 1100 — Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Electronic
Equipment
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop Drawings
2. Reports of certified field tests.
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section.
31240-008: 04-18-19 27-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Product data sheets.
2. Drawings and written description of how the Contractor intends to furnish and
install the grounding system.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by these specifications shall be standard equipment of proven
performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed,
constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall
operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
2.02 GROUND RODS AND GRID
A. Ground rods shall be rolled to a commercially round shape from a welded copper -clad
steel manufactured by the molten -welding process or by the electro-formed process
(molecularly bonded). They shall have an ultimate tensile strength of 75,000 pounds per
square inch (psi) and an elastic limit of 49,000 psi. The rods shall be not less than 3/4
inch in diameter by 10 feet in length; and the proportion of copper shall be uniform
throughout the length of the rod. The copper shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.010
inch at any point on the rod. Ground rods shall be UL 467 listed. The ground rods shall
be manufactured by Erico Products, Blackburn, or equal.
B. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non current -carrying metallic
parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductors in
nonmetallic raceways and neutral conductors of wiring systems shall be grounded.
C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be
extended to the ground grid surrounding the structure. The ground grid shall also be
connected to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water
pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp or lug connection to a plugged tee. If
flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street
side of the flanged connection.
D. Where ground fault protection is employed, care shall be taken so that the connection of
the ground and neutral does not interfere with the correct operation of the ground fault
protection system.
31240-008: 04-18-19 27-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

2.03 FITTINGS
A. Grounding connections to equipment shall be bolted. Cable end connections shall be
made by hydraulic crimp or exothermically welded. Split bolt type connectors are not
acceptable. Fittings shall be UL 467 listed.
2.04 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. An insulated equipment grounding conductor, which shall be separate from the electrical
system neutral conductor, shall be furnished and installed for all circuits. Insulation shall
be of the same type as the ungrounded conductors in the raceway and shall be green in
color. Equipment grounding conductors shall be furnished and installed in all conduits.
Use of conduits as the NEC required equipment grounding conductor is not acceptable.
2.05 EQUIPMENT GROUNDS
A. Equipment grounds shall be solid and continuous from a connection at earth to all
distribution panelboards. Ground connections at panelboards, outlets, equipment, and
apparatus shall be made in an approved and permanent manner.
B. For all control panels, disconnect switches, and other electrical enclosures, equipment
grounds and bonding jumpers shall be terminated individually on a ground bar or
mechanical lugs. No wire nuts will be permitted.
2.06 EXOTHERMIC WELDS
A. All exothermic welding shall be completed per welding kit manufacturer's instructions.
Exothermic welds shall be CadWeld by Erico or ThermoWeld.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Metal surfaces where grounding connections are to be made shall be clean and dry. Steel
surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scale, rust, grease, and dirt. Copper and
galvanized steel shall be cleaned with emery cloth to remove oxide before making
connections.
B. Ground Grid
1. A main ground grid shall be provided for each structure and interconnecting
structure grids consisting of driven ground rods as shown on the Drawings.
Ground rods shall be driven straight down into the earth, or if objects are
encountered, at an angle to avoid the obstruction.
2. The ground rods shall be interconnected by the use of copper cable exothermically
welded to the rods. The grounding cables shall be installed after the excavations
for the building have been completed and prior to the pouring of concrete for the
footings, mats, etc. Copper "pigtails" shall be connected to the ground grid and
shall enter the buildings and structure from the outside and shall be connected to
31240-008: 04-18-19 27-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

steel structures, and equipment as described in this Section and as required to
provide a complete grounding system. The copper pigtails shall be exothermically
welded to the ground grid, and connected to building reinforcement steel by
hydraulic crimp.
3. Grounding conductors shall be continuous between points of connection; splices
shall not be permitted.
4. Where conductors are exposed and subject to damage from personnel, traffic, etc.,
conductors shall be installed in metal raceway. The raceway shall be bonded to
the grounding system.
5. Where subsurface conditions do not permit use of driven ground rods to obtain
proper ground resistance, rods shall be installed in a trench or plate electrodes
shall be provided, as applicable and necessary to obtain proper values of
resistance.
6. Buried exothermic welds and ground ring shall not be backfilled until inspected by
Engineer.
C. Raceways
Conduit which enters equipment such as switchgear, motor control centers,
transformers, panelboards, variable frequency drives, instrument and control
panels, and similar equipment shall be bonded to the ground bus or ground lug,
where provided, and as otherwise required by the NEC.
3.02 TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions
and Division 1. The following tests are required:
Witnessed Shop Tests
a. None required.
2. Field Tests
a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified
in the General Conditions, Division 1, and NETA Acceptance Testing
Specifications, latest edition.
Fall of potential tests shall be performed on the ground grid per IEEE81
recommendations by a third party, independent testing firm. A fall of
potential plot shall be submitted at the conclusion of testing for Engineer
review. Documentation indicating the location of the rod and grounding
system as well as the resistance and soil conditions at the time the
measurements were made shall be submitted. Testing shall show that the
ground grid has 5 ohms resistance or less. Due to soil conditions and/or
unforeseen field conditions, ground resistances greater than 5 ohms may
be acceptable if specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. Ground
resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather not less
31240-008: 04-18-19 27-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

than 48 hours after rainfall and with the ground grid under test isolated from
other grounds.
C. Continuity tests for the grounding electrode conductor shall be performed.
Test will be accepted when a resistance of less than 1 ohm is shown for
this conductor.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 27-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

28 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install structural supports for mounting and installing all
conduit, electrical equipment, lighting, alarm systems, instrumentation, and
communications equipment furnished under this Contract.
B. Equipment shall be installed strictly in accordance with recommendations of the
manufacturer and best practices of the trade resulting in a complete, operable, and safe
installation. The Contractor shall obtain written installation manuals from the equipment
manufacturer prior to installation.
C. Reference Section 21 — Basic Electrical Requirements.
1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Equipment and materials covered under this Section shall be designed, manufactured,
and/or listed to the following standards as applicable:
ASTM A123 — Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
2. ASTM A153 — Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
3. ASTM A240 — Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium -Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications.
4. ASTM A276 — Standard Specification for Steel Bars and Shapes
5. ASTM B783 — Standard Specification for Materials for Ferrous Powder Metallurgy
Structural Parts
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit the following:
1. Shop drawings
2. Structural support calculations (if required)
B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification section.
31240-008: 04-18-19 28-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.04 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
1. Product data sheets.
2. Complete assembly, layout, installation, and foundation drawings with clearly
marked dimensions.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of
proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be
designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade,
and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Support channel shall be 1-5/8" by 1-5/8" minimum, with 12 gage material thickness.
B. Support channel, support channel fittings, and threaded rod shall be furnished with the
following material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which
they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the Drawings.
AREA DESIGNATION MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
All Outdoor Areas Type 304 Stainless Steel
C. Fastening hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, and screws) shall be furnished with the
following material of construction, dependent upon the designation of the area in which
they are to be installed. Area designations are indicated on the Drawings.
AREA DESIGNATION MATERIAL OF CONSTRUCTION
All Outdoor Areas Type 304 Stainless Steel
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete or Masonry Inserts
31240-008: 04-18-19 28-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

The Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all anchor
bolts, masonry inserts, and similar devices required for installation of equipment
furnished under this Contract.
2. If a time delay for the arrival of any special inserts or equipment drawings, etc.
occurs, the Contractor may, if permitted by the Engineer, make arrangements for
providing approved recesses and openings in the concrete or masonry and, upon
subsequent installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for filling in such
recesses and openings. Any additional costs that may be incurred by this
procedure shall be borne by the Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall furnish leveling channels for all switchgear, switchboards,
motor control centers, and similar floor mounted equipment. The leveling channels
shall be provided for embedment in the equipment housekeeping pads.
Coordination of the installation of these channels with the concrete pad is essential
and required. Pad height shall be as required to maintain concrete coverage of
the reinforcement bars while not causing associated equipment to exceed the
maximum mounting height requirements of the NEC.
B. Support Fastening and Locations
1. All equipment fastenings to columns, steel beams, and trusses shall be by beam
clamps or welded. No holes shall be drilled in the steel.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications,
handrails/guardrails shall not be utilized as supports for electrical equipment,
devices, or appurtenances. Handrails/guardrails shall not be cut, drilled, or
otherwise modified in order to accommodate electrical supports without written
approval from the Engineer.
3. All holes made in reflected ceilings for support rods, conduits, and other equipment
shall be made adjacent to ceiling grid bars where possible, to facilitate removal of
ceiling panels.
4. Support channel shall be provided wherever required for the support of starters,
switches, panels, and miscellaneous equipment.
5. All equipment, devices, and raceways that are installed on the dry side of a water
bearing wall shall not be installed directly onto the wall. Support channel shall be
used to allow ventilation air to pass behind the equipment, devices, or raceway.
6. All supports shall be rigidly bolted together and braced to make a substantial
supporting framework. Where possible, control equipment shall be grouped
together and mounted on a single framework.
7. Aluminum support members shall not be installed in direct contact with concrete.
Stainless steel or non-metallic "spacers" shall be used to prevent contact of
aluminum with concrete.
8. Actual designs for supporting framework should take the nature of a picture frame
of support channels and bracket with a plate for mounting the components. The
31240-008: 04-18-19 28-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

Contractor is responsible for the design of supporting structure; Contractor shall
submit design details to the Engineer for acceptance before proceeding with the
fabrication.
9. Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate these
metals as required with neoprene washers, nine (9) mil polyethylene tape, or
gaskets.
10. For all installations where fiberglass supporting materials are required, the
Contractor shall submit structural calculations and the details of the proposed
system of support. Structural calculations shall be signed and sealed by a
registered professional engineer in the state in which the project is located.
11. For the following installations where conduits are provided with a support system
suspended from the above or attached to a vertical structure, the Contractor shall
submit structural calculations and details of the proposed system of support.
Structural calculations shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional
engineer in the state in which the project is located.
a. A quantity of twelve (12) or more conduits trade size 1" and smaller are
proposed for a conduit support rack.
b. A quantity of eight (8) or more conduits trade sizes 1 '/2" to 2 1/2" are
proposed for a conduit support rack.
C. A quantity of four (4) or more conduits trade sizes 3" and larger are
proposed for a conduit support rack.
12. Single conduits installed exposed along walls and ceilings shall be secured to the
wall or ceiling with a one -hole conduit clamp and clamp -back. Where multiple
conduits are installed exposed together, support channel and conduit clamps shall
be used.
C. Equipment, boxes, and enclosures which are factory -constructed with integral mounting
provisions (such as brackets, mounting feet, bolt holes, etc.) shall be installed/supported
utilizing those mounting provisions. Equipment, boxes and enclosures shall not be field
modified to enable mounting by any other means. Equipment, boxes, and enclosures that
are field -modified by any means which compromises the UL Listing or NEMA rating of the
enclosure/assembly shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost
to the Owner
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 28-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

29 - ELECTRICAL - IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 -- GENERAL
1.01 THE REQUIREMENT
A. All electrical equipment shall be properly identified in accordance with these Specifications
and the Contract Drawings. All switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, variable
frequency drives, lighting and distribution panelboards, combination starters, control
panels, pull and junction boxes, enclosures, disconnect switches, control stations, and
similar equipment shall be identified in the manner described, or in an equally approved
manner.
B. The types of electrical identification specified in this section include, but are not limited to,
the following:
Operational instructions and warnings.
2. Danger signs.
3. Equipment/system identification signs.
4. Nameplates.
1.02 SIGNS
A. "DANGER -HIGH -VOLTAGE" signs shall be securely mounted on the entry doors of all
electrical rooms.
1.03 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. The Contractor shall coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in the
electrical identification work with the corresponding designations shown, specified or
scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and
operation/maintenance of the electrical systems and equipment.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions
and Section 1, General Project Requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the
equipment manufacturer and submit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by
the applicable specification section.
31240-008: 04-18-19 29-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data
listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed
equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents.
B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review
for resubmittal.
C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to:
Product data sheets.
PART 2 -- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard material of proven
performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Material shall be fabricated,
constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall
operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.
2.02 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be engraved, high pressure plastic laminate, white with black lettering.
B. Nameplates shall be attached to NEMA 4X enclosures utilizing UL-recognized mounting
kits designed to maintain the overall UL Type rating of the enclosure. Mounting kit
fasteners shall be stainless steel Type AHK10324X as manufactured by Hoffman, or
equal.
2.03 HIGH VOLTAGE SIGNS
A. Standard "DANGER" signs shall be of baked enamel finish on 20 gage steel; of standard
red, black and white graphics; 14 inches by 10 inches size except where 10 inches by 7
inches is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and except where a larger
size is needed for adequate identification.
2.04 CONDUIT IDENTIFICATION
A. Conduit identification shall be as specified in Section 22 — Conduit.
2.05 WIRE AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
A. Field installed wire and cable identification shall be as specified in Section 24 — Low
Voltage Wire and Cable.
B. A plastic laminate nameplate shall be provided at each panelboard, motor control center,
switchgear assembly, and switchboard assembly. This nameplate shall be used to clearly
31240-008: 04-18-19 29-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

convey the conductor identification means used at that piece of equipment (i.e. Phase
A=Brown, Phase B=Orange, C = Yellow).
C. Wiring identification for factory installed wiring in equipment enclosures shall be as
specified in the respective section.
2.06 BOX IDENTIFICATION
A. Pull, junction and device box identification shall be as specified in Section 25 — Boxes.
PART 3 -- EXECUTION
3.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be attached to the equipment enclosures with (2) two stainless steel
sheet metal screws for nameplates up to 2-inches wide. For nameplates over 2-inches
wide, four (4) stainless steel sheet metal screws shall be used, one (1) in each corner of
the nameplate. The utilization of adhesives is not permitted.
3.02 OPERATIONAL IDENTIFICATION AND WARNINGS
A. Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of
the electrical systems and electrically connected mechanical systems and general
systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by
unauthorized personnel, install plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction,
or warnings on switches, outlets, and other controls, devices, and covers or electrical
enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized
tags with clearly written messages adequate for the intended purposes. Signs shall be
attached as specified above for nameplates.
3.03 POWER SOURCE IDENTIFICATION
A. After installation of all field equipment (i.e. valves, motors, fans, unit heaters, instruments,
etc) install nameplates at each power termination for the field equipment. Nameplate data
shall include equipment designation (tag number), power source (MCC number,
panelboard, etc), circuit number, conduit number from schedule and voltage/phase.
B. Contractor to coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner regarding exact nameplate
placement during construction.
C. Nameplates shall be as specified herein.
- END OF SECTION -
31240-008: 04-18-19 29-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

30 - CONTROLAND INFORMATION SYSTEM
SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 — GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall provide, through the services of an instrumentation and control
system subcontractor, components, system installation services, as well as required and
specified ancillary services in connection with the Instrumentation, Control and Information
System.
B. The System includes materials, labor, tools, fees, charges, and documentation required
to furnish, install, test and place in operation a complete and operable instrumentation,
control and information system.
C. The system shall include measuring elements, signal converters, transmitters, local
control panels, digital hardware and software, operator workstations, remote telemetry
units, signal and data transmission systems, interconnecting wiring, and pertinent
accessories.
D. The scope of the work to be performed under this Division includes but is not limited to
the following:
1. The Contractor shall retain overall responsibility for the instrumentation and control
system as specified herein.
2. Furnish and install process instrumentation and associated taps and supports as
scheduled or shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted or supplied by
equipment vendors.
3. Furnish and install local control panels, field panels and associated cabinets and
panels as shown on the Drawings.
4. Furnish and install digital control system hardware and software as specified.
5. Final termination and testing of instrumentation and control system signal wiring
and power supply wiring at equipment furnished.
6. Furnish, install and terminate special cables for devices (e.g., instruments, printers,
radios). Furnish and terminate control system communication network cables.
7. Furnish and install surge protection devices for digital equipment, local control
panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation provided under this section,
including connections to grounding system(s) provided
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-1 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

8. Coordinate grounding requirements with the electrical subcontractor for digital
equipment, local control panels, remote telemetry units, and instrumentation
provided under this section. Terminate grounding system cables at equipment
provided under this section.
9. Provide system testing, calibration, training and startup services as specified
herein and as required to make systems fully operational.
E. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to construct a complete and working installation.
Items of equipment or materials that may reasonably be assumed as necessary to
accomplish this end shall be supplied whether or not they are specifically stated herein.
1.02 RELATED ITEMS
A. Field mounted switches, torque switches, limit switches, gauges, valve and gate operator
position transmitters, sump pump controls, and other instrumentation and controls
furnished with mechanical or electrical equipment not listed in the instrument schedule
shall be furnished, installed, tested, and calibrated as specified under other sections
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Additional and related work includes the following:
Instrument A.C. power source and disconnect switch for process instrumentation,
A.C. grounding systems, and A.C. power supplies for equipment, control panels
and accessories.
2. Conduit and raceways for instrumentation and control system signal wiring,
grounding systems, special cables and communication network cables.
3. Instrumentation and control system signal wiring.
4. Install control system communication network cables.
5. Furnish and install grounding systems for digital equipment, local control panels,
remote telemetry units, and instrumentation. Grounding systems shall be
complete, ready for termination by the instrumentation subcontractor.
6. Termination of instrumentation and control system signal wiring at equipment.
7. Final wiring and termination to A.C. grounding systems and to A.C. power sources
(e.g., panelboards, motor control centers, and other sources of electrical power).
1.03 GENERAL INFORMATION AND DESCRIPTION
A. Where manufacturers are named for a particular item of equipment, it is intended as a
guide to acceptable quality and performance and does not exempt such equipment from
the requirements of these Specifications or Drawings.
B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that equipment (including field
instrumentation and control system hardware and software) offered under this section
shall be furnished and installed by the instrumentation subcontractor, or under the
supervision of the instrumentation subcontractor, who shall assume complete
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-2 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

responsibility for proper operation of the instrumentation and control system equipment,
including that of coordinating signals, and furnishing appurtenant equipment.
C. The Contractor shall retain total responsibility for the proper detailed design, fabrication,
inspection, test, delivery, assembly, installation, activation, checkout, adjustment and
operation of the entire instrumentation and control system. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the delivery of detailed drawings, manuals and other documentation
required for the complete coordination, installation, activation and operation of mechanical
equipment, equipment control panels, local control panels, field instrumentation, control
systems and related equipment/systems and shall provide for the services of a qualified
installation engineer to supervise activities required to place the completed facility in stable
operation under full digital control.
D. The instrumentation and control system shall be capable of simultaneously implementing
all real time control and information system functions, and servicing all operator service
requests as specified, without degrading the data handling and processing capability of
other system components.
E. Control system inputs and outputs are listed in the Input/Output Schedule. This
information, together with the functional control descriptions, process and instrumentation
diagrams, and electrical control schematics, describes the real time monitoring and control
functions to be performed.
F. The mechanical, process, and electrical drawings indicate the approximate locations of
field instruments, control panels, systems and equipment as well as field mounted
equipment provided by others. The instrumentation subcontractor shall examine the
mechanical, process and electrical drawings to determine actual size and locations of
process connections and wiring requirements for instrumentation and controls furnished
under this Contract. The instrumentation subcontractor shall inspect equipment, panels,
instrumentation, controls, and appurtenances, either existing or furnished on the Project
to determine requirements for interfacing with the control and information system. The
Contractor shall coordinate the completion of required modifications with the associated
supplier of the item furnished.
G. The instrumentation subcontractor shall review and approve the size and routing of
instrumentation and control cable and conduit systems furnished by the electrical
subcontractor for suitability for use with the associated cable system.
H. The Contractor shall coordinate the efforts of each supplier to aid in interfacing systems.
This effort shall include, but shall not be limited to, the distribution of approved shop
drawings to the electrical subcontractor and to the instrumentation subcontractor
furnishing the equipment under this section.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a signal transmission system free from
electrical interference that would be detrimental to the proper functioning of the
instrumentation and control system equipment.
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-3 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

The Owner shall have the right of access to the subcontractor's facility and the facilities of
his equipment suppliers to observe materials and parts; witness inspections, tests and
work in progress; and examine applicable design documents, records, and certifications
during all stages of design, fabrication, and tests. The instrumentation subcontractor and
his equipment suppliers shall furnish office space, supplies, and services required for
these observation activities.
K. The terms "Instrumentation", "Instrumentation and Control System", and "Instrumentation,
Control and Information System" shall hereinafter be defined as equipment, labor,
services, and documents necessary to meet the intent of the Specifications.
1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM SUBCONTRACTORS
A. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be regularly engaged in the
detailed design, fabrication, installation, and startup of instrumentation and control
systems for water and wastewater treatment facilities, remote telemetry systems for water
supply/distribution systems, and remote telemetry systems for wastewater collection
systems. Instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall have a minimum of five
years of such experience, and shall have completed a minimum of three projects of similar
type and size as that specified herein. Where specific manufacturers/models of major
hardware or software products (PLC, HMI software, network, etc.) are specified to be used
on this project, the instrumentation and control system subcontractor shall have completed
at least one project using that specified hardware or software. As used herein, the term
"completed" shall mean that a project has been brought to final completion and final
payment has been made.
B. Acceptable instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be CITI, LLC; Custom
Controls Unlimited, Inc.; MR Systems, Inc.; Piedmont Automation, Inc.; Revere Control
Systems; Sunapsys, Inc.; Systems East, Inc.; or equal.
C. Acceptable instrumentation and control system subcontractors shall be CITI, LLC;
Industrial Control Systems, Inc.; Systems East, Inc.; CIM Automation Systems - M.C.
Dean; E-Merge Systems, Inc.; Optimum Control Corporation; Revere Control Systems;
SL Controls (Sherwood Logan); Sunapsys, Inc.; or equal.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Solid State: Wherever the term solid state is used to describe circuitry or components in
the Specifications, it is intended that the circuitry or components shall be of the type that
convey electrons by means of solid materials such as crystals or that work on magnetic
principles such as ferrite cores. Vacuum tubes, gas tubes, slide wires, mechanical relays,
stepping motors or other devices will not be considered as satisfying the requirements for
solid state components of circuitry.
B. Bit or Data Bit: Whenever the terms bit or data bit are used in the Specification, it is
intended that one bit shall be equivalent to one binary digit of information. In specifying
data transmission rate, the bit rate or data bit rate shall be the number of binary digits
transmitted per second and shall not necessarily be equal to either the maximum pulse
rate or average pulse rate.
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-4 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

C. Integrated Circuit: Integrated circuit shall mean the physical realization of a number of
circuit elements inseparably associated on or within a continuous body to perform the
function of a circuit.
D. Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF): The MTBF shall be calculated by taking the
number of system operating hours logged during an arbitrary period of not less than six
months and dividing by the number of failures experienced during this period plus one.
E. Mean Time to Repair (MTTR): The MTTR shall be calculated by taking the total system
down time for repair over an arbitrary period of not less than six months coinciding with
that used for calculation of MTBF and dividing by the number of failures causing down
time during the period.
F. Availability: The availability of a non -redundant device or system shall be related to its
MTBF and MTTR by the following formula:
A = 100 x (MTBF/(MTBF + MTTR)) Percent
The availability of a device or system provided with an automatically switched backup
device or system shall be determined by the following formula:
A=A2+1 -((1- Al) *(1 -Al))
where:
Al = availability of non -redundant device or system
A2 = availability of device or system provided with an automatically switched backup
device or system
G. Abbreviations: Specification abbreviations include the following:
A - Availability
2. ADC -Analog to Digital Converter
3. Al -Analog Input
4. AO - Analog Output
5. AVAIL - Available
6. BCD - Binary Coded Decimal
7. CSMA/CD - Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect
8. CPU - Central Processing Unit
9. CRC - Cyclic Redundancy Check
10. CS - Control Strategy
11. DAC - Digital to Analog Converter
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-5 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
DBMS - Data Base Management System
DI - Discrete Input
DMA - Direct Memory Access
DO - Discrete Output
DPDT - Double Pole, Double Throw
DVE - Digital to Video Electronics
EPROM - Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory
FDM - Frequency Division Multiplexing
FSK - Frequency Shift Keyed
HMI - Human Machine Interface (Software)
I/O - Input/Output
LAN - Local Area Network
LCD — Liquid Crystal Display
LDFW - Lead Follow
MCC - Motor Control Center
MTBF - Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR - Mean Time To Repair
OS - Operating System
PAC - Programmable Automation Controller
PCB - Printed Circuit Board
PID - Proportional Integral and Derivative Control
PLC - Programmable Logic Controller or Programmable Controller
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory
RAM - Random Access Memory
RDY - Ready
RMSS - Root Mean Square Summation
RNG - Running
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-6 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

39. ROM - Read Only Memory
40. RTU - Remote Telemetry Unit
41. SPDT - Single Pole, Double Throw
42. ST/SP - Start/Stop
43. TDM - Time Division Multiplexing
44. UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply
45. VFD — Variable Frequency Drive
H. To minimize the number of characters in words used in textual descriptions on displays,
printouts and nameplates, abbreviations may be used subject to the Engineer's approval.
If a specified abbreviation does not exist for a particular word, an abbreviation may be
generated using the principles of masking and or vowel deletion. Masking involves
retaining the first and last letters in a word and deleting one or more characters (usually
vowels) from the interior of the word.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Instrumentation equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for ambient conditions
specified. All system elements shall operate properly in the presence of telephone lines,
power lines, and electrical equipment.
B. Inside control rooms and climate -controlled electrical rooms, the temperature will normally
be 20 to 25 degrees C; relative humidity 40 to 80 percent without condensation and the
air will be essentially free of corrosive contaminants and moisture. Appropriate air filtering
shall be provided to meet environmental conditions (e.g., dust).
C. Other indoor areas may not be air conditioned/heated; temperatures may range between
0 and 40 degrees C with relative humidity between 40 and 95 percent.
D. Field equipment including instrumentation and panels may be subjected to wind, rain,
lightning, and corrosives in the environment, with ambient temperatures from -20 to 40
degrees C and relative humidity from 10 to 100 percent. All supports, brackets,
interconnecting hardware, and fasteners shall be aluminum, type 316 stainless steel, or
metal alloy as otherwise suitable for chemical resistance within chemical feed/storage
areas shown on the installation detail drawings.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
(NOT USED)
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-7 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 FINALACCEPTANCE
A. Final acceptance of the Instrumentation, Control and Information System will be
determined complete by the Engineer, and shall be based upon the following:
1. Receipt of acceptable start up completion and availability reports and other
documentation as required by the Contract Documents.
2. Completion of the Availability Demonstration.
3. Completion of control system training requirements.
4. Completion of punch -list items that are significant in the opinion of the Engineer.
B. Final acceptance of the System shall mark the beginning of the warranty period.
- - END OF SECTION - -
31240-008: 04-18-19 30-8 BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION

TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA, NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
ROVE
APRIL 2019
=mlUQlUA(\ AR I A
F / \IN
north carofina
WA3HINU I UN
HOMES F►4IRSTONE
l375
CHAIN 14EIOHTS
BURNSIDEBELMONT
ESTATES
JENMAR ACRES
SAWYERS MILL
a$
BLA►CKBU€ N
ESTATES
Wake
Technics
Cori' m uni
C of lecie
COUNTRY SIDE
BRIGHTON RANSDELL PARK
AMHERST FOREST
HOWSONc RIDGE
'EDEN ROCK
SITE
WEST OAKS
TCREEK
CROOKED
ERRINGTON CREEK SOUTH
LOCATION MAP
NTS
Hazen
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
BAN?
OLa OAF
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION

4
ABBREVIATIONS
PROCESS PIPE DESIGNATIONS
AB
ANCHOR BOLT
FAB
FABRICATE
N
NORTH
T
TREAD
AC
ALTERNATING CURRENT/
F&C
FRAME AND COVER
NA
NOT APPLICABLE
T&B
TOP AND BOTTOM
ASBESTOS CEMENT
F&G
FRAME AND GRATE
NF
NEAR FACE
T&G
TONGUE AND GROOVE
ACT
ACOUSTIC TILE
FC
FLUSHING CONNECTION
NIC
NOT IN CONTRACT
TAN
TANGENT
A❑
AREA DRAIN
FD
FLOOR DRAIN
NO
NUMBER
TBM
TEMPORARY BENCH MARK
AD]
ADJUSTABLE
FDN
FOUNDATION
NOM
NOMINAL
TC
TOP OF CURB
AFF
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
FE
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
NPW
NON POTABLE WATER
TDH
TOTAL DYNAMIC HEAD
AGGR
AGGREGATE
FF
FINISH FLOOR
NTS
NOT TO SCALE
TECH
TECHNICAL
AL
ALUMINUM
FH
FIRE HYDRANT
TEL
TELEPHONE
A
AIR
ALLOW
ALLOWANCE/ALLOWABLE
FIN
FINISH
TEMP
TEMPERATURE
ATO
AERATION TANK OVERFLOW
ALT
APPROX
ALTERNATE
APPROXIMATE
FIX
FL
FIXTURE
FLASHING/FLOOR
TER
TERRAZZO
BPD
BYPASS DISCHARGE
ARCH
ARCHITECTURAL
FLEX
FLEXIBLE
THERM❑
THK
THERMOSTAT
THICK
BPS
BYPASS SUCTION
ASB
ASPH
ASBESTOS
ASPHALT
FLG
FLUOR
FLANGE
FLUORESCENT
OC
ON CENTER
THRU
THROUGH
BW
FILTER BACKWASH WATER
AT
ASPHALT TILE
FLXC
FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
OD
OUTSIDE DIAMETER
TOD
TOF
TOP OF DECK
BWp
BACKWASH DRAIN
FM
FORCE MAIN
OF
OFF
OUTSIDE FACE
OFFICE
TOM
TOP OF FOOTING
TOP OF MASONRY/MANHOLE
C
CENTRATE
FPRF
FRP
FIREPROOF
OPER
OPERATOR
TOS
TOP OF SLAB
CE
CLARIFIER EFFLUENT
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED
POLYESTER LAMINATE
OPNG
❑PENING
TOW
TOP OF WALL
CG
CHLORINE GAS
Opp
OPPOSITE
TOL
TOLERANCE
FT
FEET
ORIG
ORIGINAL
TPS
TWISTED PAIR SHIELDED
CLS
CHLORINE SOLUTION
B
BORING
FTG
FOOTING/FITTING
OT
OPEN TRUSS
TRANS
TRANSFORMER
D
DRAIN
BD
BOARD
FURR
FURRINGIFURRED
OVH❑
OVERHEAD
TYP
TYPICAL
DS
❑IGESTED SLUDGE
BFE
BOTTOM OF FITTING ELEV
EFF
EFFLUENT
BFV
BUTTERFLY VALVE
BITUM
BITUMINOUS
UG
UNDERGROUND
FBP
FILTER BYPASS
$
BL
BASELINE
G
GAS/GAS LINE
UH
UNFIN
UNIT HEATER
UNFINISHED
FD
FLOOR DRAIN
BLDG
BUILDING LINE
BUILDING
GA
GAUGE
PAR
PARALLEL
UND
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
FE
FILTER EFFLUENT
8LK
BLOCK
GAL
GALV
GALLON
GALVANIZE❑
PC
POINT OF CURVE/PIECE
UR
URINAL
GR
GRIT
BM
BENCH MARK
GC
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
PCC
POINT OF COMPOUND CURVE
UTIL
UTILITY
HOCL
HYPOCHLORITE
BOC
BACK OF CURB
GEN
GENERATOR
PCF
POUNDS PER CUBIC FOOT
BOG
BOTTOM
GI
GALVANIZED IRON
PE
PLAIN END
HS
HEAVY SLUDGE
BRG
BEARING
GL
GLASS
PE LINING POLYETHYLENE LINING
VAC
VACUUM
LD
LAND DISPOSAL
BRK
BRZ
BRICK
BRONZE
GPM
GALLONS PER MINUTE
PERF
'PERP
PERFORATED
PERPENDICULAR
VAT
VINYL ASBESTOS TILE
ME
METHANOL
BSMT
BASEMENT
GR
GV
GRADE
GATE VALVE
PI
POINT OF INTERSECTION
VCP
VEL
VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE
VELOCITY
MH
MANHOLE
BT
BUR
BOLT
GW
GUY WIRE
�
PNL
PROPERTY LINE/PLATE
PANEL
VENT
VENTILATING/VENTILATION
ML
MIXED LIQUOR
BV
BUILT-UP ROOFING
BALL VALVE
GWB
GYPSUM WALL BOARD
pp
POWER POLE
VERT
VERTICAL
NPW
NON -POTABLE WATER
GWF
GLAZED WALL FINISH
PREFAB
PREFABRICATED
VOL
VOLUME
NRCY
NITRIFIED RECYCLE
GYP
GYPSUM
PRV
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
VP
VENT PIPE
PS
PUMPING STATION
VWC
VINYL WALL COVERING
P
POLYMER
PSF
POUNDS PER SQUARE FOOT
PAE
POST AERATION EFFLUENT
C
CLOSET/CARPET/CHANNEL
H
HEIGHT
PSI
POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH
PD
PLANT DRAIN
CAB
CABINET
HB
HOSE BIBB
PT
PTN
POINT OF TANGENT/POINT
PARTITION
W
WEST/WIDTH
PS
PRIMARY SLUDGE
CB
CE
CATCH $ASIN
CENTER TO CENTER
HDW
HEX
HARDWARE
HEXAGONAL
PV
PLUG VALVE
W1
WITH
PW
POTABLE WATER
CE
CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT
HM
HOLLOW METAL
PVC
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
WC
WF
WATER CLOSET
WIDE FLANGE
RAS
RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE
CEM
CEMENT
H
HORIZONTAL
PVMT
PW
PAVEMENT
POTABLE WATER
WH
WALL HYDRANT
RBR
RECLAIM BASIN RETURN
CER
CF
CERAMIC
CUBIC FEET
HPP
HPT
HORSEPOWER
HIGH POINT
WI
WROUGHT IRON
RD
ROOF DRAINWL
CFM
CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE
HTR
HEATER
W/L
WATER LEVEL
WATER LINE
RS
RAW SEWAGE
CI
CAST IRONICUBIC INCHES
HVAC
HEATING,VENTILATION AND
WO
WINDOW OPENING
S
SAMPLE
CIP
CAST IRON PIPE
AIR CONDITIONING
W/O
WITHOUT
CENTER LINE
HW
HOT WATER
QTY
QUANTITY
WP
WATERPROOF
SR
SERVICE AIR
CL' --2
CHLORINE
HWL
HIGH WATER LEVEL
WPFG
WATER PROOFING
SBS
SODIUM BISULFATE SOLUTION
CLG
CEILING
HWY
HIGHWAY
WPT
WALL PENETRATING TYPE
SC
SCUM
CLKG
CAULKING
HYD
HYDRAULIC
WSE
WATER SURFACE ELEVATION
CLR
CLEAR
W5P
WEATHERSTRIP
SD
STORM DRAIN
CMP
CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
R
RADIUS/RISER
WT
WEIGHT
SDO
SLUDGE DRAWOFF
CMU
co
CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
CT
I
IRON
RCP
REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE
WV
ATER VALVE
5E
SECONDARY EFFLUENT
COL
COOLUMNLUMN
ID
INSIDE DIAMETER
RD
ROAD/ROOF DRAIN
WWF
WELDED WIRE FABRIC
SL
SLUDGE
CONC
CONCRETE
IF
IN
INSIDE FACE
INCH
RECIR
RECP
RECIRCULATION
RECEPTACLE
SLF
SLUDGE FEED
CONTT
CONSTRUCTION
CONT
CONTINUOUS
INCL
INCLUDED
RECT
RECTANGULAR
YD
YARD
SPD
SUMP PUMP DISCHARGE
CONTR
CONTRACTOR
INF
INFLUENT
RED
REDUCER
YR
YEAR
SR
SCRUBBER RECIRCULATION
CORP
CORPORATION
INS
INSULATION
REF
REFERENCE
CORR
CORRIDOR
INT
INTERIOR
REG
REGISTER
SS
SANITARY SEWER
CP
CONCRETE PLANK
INV
INVERT
REINF
REINFORCING
SU
SUPERNATANT
CRS
COURSE
REM
READ
REMOVE
REQUIRED
TDS
THICKENED DIGESTED SLUDGE
CT
CERAMIC TILE
CTJ
CONTROL JOINT
REST
RESTRAINED
TE
TERTIARY EFFLUENT
CU
COPPER
]
JOIST
REV
REVISE
TS
THICKENED SLUDGE
CV
CW
CHECK VALVE
JB
]UNCTION BOX
RF
RFG
ROOF
ROOFING
TWAS
THICKENED WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
CY
COLD WATER
CUBIC YARD
JCT
JT
JUNCTION
]DINT
�
RESTRAINED JOINT
V
VENT
RM
RND
ROOM
ROUND
WAS
WASTE ACTIVATED SLUDGE
RO
ROUGH OPENING
RPM
REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE
DC
DIRECT CURRENT
L
LENGTH/ANGLE
RR
RAILROAD
DET
DETAIL
LA
LINE AHEAD
RT
RIGHT
DF
DRINKING FOUNTAIN
LAB
LABORATORY
RTU
REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT
DIA d)
DIAMETER
LAM
LAMINATED
RW
RAW WATER
DIAG
DIAGONAL
LAT
LATERAL
RIW
RIGHT OF WAY
DIM
DIMENSION
LAV
LAVATORY
DIP
DUCTILE IRON PIPE
LB
POUND/LINE BACK
LEGEND
DISCH
❑ISCHARGE
LF
LINEAR FEET
DIST
DI
DISTRIBUTION
DOUBLE
LG
LONG
MATERIALS
SYMBOLS
DL
JOIST
DEAD LOAD
LL
LLH
LIVE LOAD
LONG LEG HORIZONTAL
S
SOUTH/SLOPE
DN
DOWN
LLV
LONG LEG VERTICAL
SAN
SANITARY
DOZ
DR
DOZEN
DOOR
LP
LPT
LIGHT POLE
LOW POINT
5BL
SD
SURVEY BASELINE
SCHEDULE
\/\
���
_
GRADE OR EARTH I.11- ROCK
GATE VALVE
�t
WALL PENETRATION
5D
STORM/SITE
1
DWG
DRAWING
LT
LIGHT
DRAIN
BUTTERFLY VALVE
DWL
DOWEL
LTG
LIGHTING
SECT
SECTION
MECHANICAL COUPLING
LVR
LWL
LOWER
LOW WATER LEVEL
SERV
SEW
SF
SERVICE
SEWER
SQUARE FEET
®
ASPHALT RAVING STEEL
PLUG VALVE
WELDED JOINT
SHT
SHEET
SI
SQUARE INCH
SWING CHECK VALVE
E
EA
EASTJEASEMENT
EACH
MAINT
MAINTENANCE
5IM
S]
SI L
STEE EL 3 JOIST
SAND
INSULATION
FLANGED JOINT
GLOBE VALVE
ECC
ECCENTRIC
MATL
MATERIAL
SPEC
SPECIFICATION
MECHANICAL, PUSH ON OR
EF
EACH FACE
MAX
MAXIMUM
SQ
SQUARE
RESTRAINED JOINT
EFF
E
EFFLUENT
EXIST IRON PIPE
MECH
METiB
MECHANICAL
MEMBRANE
SS
SST
SANITARY SEWER
STAINLESS STEEL
GRAVEL
WATER SURFACE
PINCH VALVE
ELL
ELEVATION
MET
®
SLUICE GATE
METAL
5T
STREET
DIAPHRAGM VALVE
ELEC
ELECTRIC/ELECTRICAL
MFR
MANUFACTURER
STA
STATION
ELL
ENGR
ELBOW
ENGINEER
MG
MGD
MILLION GALLONS
MILLION GALLONS PER DAY
STD
STG
STANDARD
STORAGE
�
CONCRETE
GRATING
BALL VALVE
L '
SLIDE GATE/STOP GATE
ENT
ENTRANCE
MH
MANHOLE
STIR
STIRRUP
, a
FLUSHING CONNECTION
EGG
EDGE OF GRAVEL
MIN
MINIMUM
STL
STEEL
EDP
EQ
EDGE OF PAVEMENT
EQUAL
MISC
M]
MISCELLANEOUS
MECHANICAL JOINT
STR
SUB
STRUCTURAL
SUBSTITUTE
CONC. FILL OR
V 1 7
v v
GROUT
BALL CHECK VALVE
HOSE BIBB
EQPT
EQUIPMENT
MLDG
MOLDING
SUP
SUPPLY
v vw,,;, CHECKERED PLATE
v v
HARNESSED FLANGED
EW
EACH WAY
M❑
MASONRY OPENING
SUPT
SUPERINTENDENT
ADAPTER
QUICK DISCONNECT
EX
EXISTING
MOD
MODIFY/MODIFIED
SUR
SURFACE
FITTING
EXC
EXH
EXCAVATE
EXHAUST
ICON
MOT
MONUMENT
MOTOR
SUSP
5W
SUSPENDED
®
CONC. MASONRY UNIT GLASS
� HARNESSED SLEEVE
EXP
EXPANSION
MTD
MOUNTED
SWBD
SWITCH
SWITCHBOARD
' TYPE COUPLING
YARD HYDRANT
EXT
EXTERIOR
MTG
MOUNTING
SWD
SIDE WATER DEPTH
MULT
MULTIPLE
5YM
SYMMETRICAL
�
BRICK
� WOOD BLOCKING
SLEEVE TYPE COUPLING
� 0
FIRE HYDRANT
t —r HARNESSED
SOIL BORING
�F FLEXIBLE COUPLING
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
0412019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
CHECKED BY: C. TODD ]OHNSON ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112n 1 pf
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
Hazen
mar-
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
SHEET NO. SHEET TITLE
GENERAL
CVR COVER
G1 ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND AND ❑RAWING INDEX
DEMO
Cl OVERALL SITE PLAN
CIVIL
C3 SITE AND PIPING
C4 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL PLAN
MECHANICAL
M01 HYDRAULIC PROFILE
M10 SITE AND PIPING
M 101 EFFLUENT FILTER PLAN AND SECTIONS
M102 INTERMEDIATE PUMP STATION PLAN AND SECTIONS
ELECTRICAL
E101
ELECTRICAL PLAN
E102
PANEL SCHEDULE & SINGLE LINE
E103
CONDUIT SCHEDULE
ED1
ELECTRICAL STANDARD DETAILS
ED2
ELECTRICAL STANDARD DETAILS
STANDARD DETAILS
D01
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
D02
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
D03
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
D04
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
SECTION AND DETAIL KEYING
DRAWINGS ARE CROSS REFERENCED IN THE FOLLOWING METHOD:
(A) A SECTION CUT ON DRAWING A3 IS IDENTIFIED AS FOLLOWS:
SECTION LETTER
A
A6 DRAWING WHERE SECTION IS SHOWN
(B) THE SECTION SHOWN ON DRAWING A6 IS IDENTIFIED AS FOLLOWS:
SECTION LETTER
A
DRAWING FROM WHERE SECTION WAS TAKEN
A3
DETAILS ARE CROSS REFERENCED IN A SIMILAR MANNER, EXCEPT DETAILS
ARE IDENTIFIED BY A SQUARE WITH A NUMBER IN THE UPPER HALF.
STANDARD DETAILS ARE REFERENCED BY A UNIQUE SEVEN DIGIT NUMBER
AND ARE SHOWN ON THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS BY ONE OF TWO METHODS:
r---- - - - - -�
1509203 REFERENCED ITEM
'----------�
OR:
SEE 1509203 REFERENCED ITEM-
� — — — — J
STANDARD DETAILS ARE COMPILED IN APPROXIMATE NUMERICAL ORDER IN
THE BACK OF THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS ON THE D* DRAWINGS.
��
FUOUA NAR;NA
north carolina
GENERAL
ABBREVIATIONS, LEGEND,
AND DRAINING INDEX
G� � ply MUST c
l L I T Y p�
9� vl
5�
G 4D C2 p
—J.r
LIN ETYPES
PROPOSEDITEMS
EXISTING ITEMS
— — — — — HIDDEN ITEMS
• Z- , ' DEMOLITION ITEMS
CENTERLINE
MATCH LINE
DATE: APRIL 2919
HAZEN NO.: 31249-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:
Gl

N
O
w
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER
CHECKED BY: C. TOD❑ JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
OVERALL SITE PLAN
CAIR?
�d F�-S51p�
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES Ha e
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION 2 00 54, It
eNGIN� \� HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
QTyY S. ��' RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLiNA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TOWN OF FUQUAY—VARI NA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
FUO UN( -VAR I NIA
north caroling
NOTES:
I. CONTRACTOR SHALL MOVE THE AQUADISK FILTER
AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE INFLUENT AND EFFLUENT
VALVES, CONTROL PANEL, BACKWASH PUMP AND
PIPING, AND THE ACCESS PLATFORM, STAIRS AND
HAND RAIL TO THE BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP AT
4809 GOLDLEAF CT, APEX, NC 27539.
2. CONTRACTOR TO LEAVE EXISTING CONCRETE PAD
AND SIDEWALK IN PLACE.
SITE WORK
DEMOLITION
SITE DEMOLITION PLAN
DATE:
HAZEN NO,:
CONTRACT NO.:
DRAWING
NUMBER.
APRIL 2019
31240-008
1
Cl

GENERAL NOTES:
1. SITE INFORMATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED BY SITE SURVEY PREPARED BY JOYNER KEENY, PLLC DATED DECEMBER 2018.
2. HORIZONTAL CONTROL IS REFERENCED TO THE NORTH AMFRICAN DATUM OF 1983 (NAD 83). VERTICAL CONTROL IS REFERENCED TO THE
NORTH AMERICAN VERTICAL DATUM OF 1988 (NAVD 88).
3. FLOOD PLAIN ELEVATIONS FROM FEDERAL EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT AGENCY (FEMA) FLOOD INSURANCE RATE MAP FIRM PANEL 0678
MAP NUMBER 3720067800J DATED MAY 2, 2006
100 YEAR FLOOD ELEVATION = 265.6' TO 265,8'
4. WETLAND POINTS DELINATED BY HAZEN AND SAWYER AND LOCATED BY JOYNER KEENY ON 12-19-18.
5. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY FIELD CONDITIONS BEFORE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY
EXISTING ELEVATIONS AND DIMENSIONS WHERE NEW WORK WILL MATCH EXISTING. DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION
OF THE ENGINEER FOR RESOLUTION PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF WORK.
6. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN ALL THE NECESSARY PERMITS FROM THE APPROPRIATE AUTHORITIES, DEPARTMENTS, AND/OR AGENCIES
HAVING JURISDICTION PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK.
7. CONTRACTOR SHALL TAKE CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO EXISTING PAVEMENT. TREES, VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, AND UTILITIES THAT ARE
NOT INDICATED TO BE DEMOLISHED OR REMOVED. ANY DAMAGE TO EXISTING PAVEMENT, TREES, VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, AND UTILITIES
NOT INDICATED TO BE DEMOLISHED OR REMOVED SHALL BE REPAIRED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
8. UTILITIES HAVE BEEN PLOTTED FROM AVAILABLE SURVEY INFORMATION. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO VERIFY THEIR EXACT
LOCATION AND TO AVOI❑ DAMAGE TO THEM. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT NORTH CAROLINA 811 AT PHONE NUMBER 811 OR
1-800-632-4949 TO REQUEST UNDERGROUND UTILITY LOCATION MARK -OUT AT LEAST THREE (3) WORKING DAYS BUT NO MORE THAN TEN (10)
WORKING DAYS PRIOR TO BEGINNING EXCAVATION, INCLUDING SOIL DRILLING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO CONTACT AND REQUEST
UTILITY LOCATION MARK -OUT FROM BURIED UTILITY OWNERS WITH UTILITIES ON THE PROJECT SITE THAT ARE NOT PARTICIPANTS OF NORTH
CAROLINA 811.
9. WHERE PROPOSED WORK IS iN THE VICINITY OF UTILITY POLES, SUCH THAT SUPPORT OF THE POLE(S) WILL BE REQUIRED, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR NOTIFYING THE UTILITY OF THE WORK. IT WILT` BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO
COORDINATE WITH THE UTILITY FOR SUPPORT OF THE POLE.
10, WHERE OVERHEAD POWER LINES ARE PRESENT, CONTRACTOR MUST CONTACT THE UTILITY PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES TO
DETERMINE THE MINIMUM REQUIRED EQUIPMENT CLEARANCE (MEC) DISTANCE BASED UPON LINE STRENGTH.
11. DURING EXCAVATION AND PLACEMENT OF UTILITIES THE CONTRACTOR SMALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE SAFETY REGULATIONS
AND SHALL SUBMIT TO THE ENGINEER FOR APPROVAL SHEET PILING, SHORING AND/OR BRACING DESIGNS AS MAY BE NECESSARY
TO COMPLY WITH THESE REGULATIONS.
12, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DESIGN AND INSTALLATION OF ALL EXCAVATION SUPPORT AT LOCATIONS AS
MAY BE SUGGESTED ON CONTRACT DRAWINGS OR FOR THEIR OWN CONVENIENCE. CONTRACTOR SHALL. SUBMIT ALL NECESSARY
CALCULATIONS, DRAWINGS, ETC. PREPARED BY A PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA AS
MAY BE NECESSARY FOR REVIEW BY THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. REQUIREMENTS FOR EXCAVATION SUPPORT DESIGN
MAY BE FOUND IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK, SECTION 3.03 AND IN NOTES ON DRAWING S-1.
13. GROUNDWATER FROM ALL DEWATERING OPERATIONS SHALL BE DISCHARGED THROUGH A SILT BAG OR OTHER APPROVED
SEDIMENT FILTERING DEVICE TO AN ENVIRONMENTALLY ACCEPTABLE LOCATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS, OR AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER.
14. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL DEBRIS GENERATED DURING THE PROJECT OFF SITE AT A PROPERLY
PERMITTED DISPOSAL FACILITY.
15. CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO SAVE AND MAINTAIN ALL PROPERTY IRONS, MONUMENTS, OTHER PERMANENT POINTS
AND LINES OF REFERENCE AN CONSTRUCTION STAKES. A NORTH CAROLINA REGISTERED LAND SURVEYOR AT THE CONTRACTOR'S
EXPENSE SHALL REPLACE PROPERTY IRONS, MONUMENTS, AND OTHER PERMANENT POINTS OF REFERENCE DESTROYED BY THE
CONTRACTOR.
16, STAKING POINT COORDINATES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED BY CONTRACTOR AND ANY DISCREPANCIES
BROUGHT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ENGINEER IN WRITING. COORDINATES SHOWN ARE GENERALLY TO CENTERLINE OF ROADWAY,
OUTSIDE WALL FACE OF STRUCTURE, CENTER OF MANHOLE, DROP, OR YAR❑ INLET, BACK OF CURB, AND CENTER OF CURB INLET AT
BACK OF CURB.
17. FOR REFERENCE POINTS, SEE DRAWING C3 - SITE PLAN.
TABLE OF EXISTING MONUMENTS
NO COORDINATES ELEVATION SHOWN ON
JK NAIL #8 N: 688,050,23 270.23 C3
E: 2,079,716.25
JK NAIL #9 N: 687,978,70 271.12 C3
E: 2,079,932.78
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. MCNICOL
DRAWN BY: C. MCNICOL
CHECKED BY: M. SANTOWASSO
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 11r
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
OVERALL EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTORL NOTES
1. THE CONTRACTOR IS ENCOURAGED TO PHASE CONSTRUCTION TO MINIMIZE EXPOSED SOIL AREAS
THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT.
2. ALL ONSiTE ACTIVITIES SHALL BE MANAGED TO INSURE NO ADVERSE IMPACTS TO WATER QUALITY
OCCUR DURING AND AFTER CONSTRUCTION. THE ACTIVITIES, AS DESCRIBED IN SPECIFICATION
SECTION 02276, AND OTHERS, REQUIRE OVERSIGHT THROUGHOUT THE CONSTRUCTION AN
DEVELOPMENT PROCESS TO ASSURE THAT ALL WATER QUALITY STANDARDS ARE PROTECTED. SEE
SPECIFICATION SECTION 02276 FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS.
3. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURE
WHETHER OR NOT SHOWN ON THE PLANS TO PROTECT ADJACENT CREEKS, RIVERS, ROADWAYS, ETC,
FROM SILTATION AND EROSION.
4. EACH EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURE SHALL BE INSPECTED ON A WEEKLY BASIS
AND WITHIN 24 HOURS FOLLOWING A STORM EVENT GREATER THAN ONE INCH. EACH MEASURE SHALL
BE MAINTAINED AS INDICATED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 02276-
5. ALL PIPE WORK SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH STANDARD CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES.
ONLY THE LENGTH OF TRENCH IN WHICH PIPE CAN BE INSTALLED IN ONE DAYS TIME SHALL BE OPEN
AT ANY TIME, WITH SPOIL MATERIAL PLACED ON THE UPHILL SIDE OF THE TRENCH. PIPING SHALL BE
CAPPED AT THE END OF EACH WORK DAY TO PREVENT SEDIMENT FROM ENTERING PIPE. TRENCH
SHALL BE BACKFILLED AT END OF EACH WORK DAY AND DISTURBED AREA SEEDED WITH TEMPORARY
SEEDING MEASURES, AS APPROPRIATE.
6, ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES SHALL REMAIN IN PLACE UNTIL CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE,
PERMANENT VEGETATION IS ESTABLISHED ON ALL DISTURBED AREAS, AND APPROVAL BY THE
ENGINEER IS GIVEN. AREAS WHERE EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURES ARE
REMOVED SHALL BE REGRADED AND SEEDED TO MATCH ORIGINAL SITE CONDITIONS.
EROSION & SEDIMENTATION CONTROL CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
1, NO CONSTRUCTION ORLAND DISTURBANCE ACTIVITIES SHALL BEGIN UNTIL TEMPORARY SEDIMENT
AND EROSION CONTROL MEASURES HAVE BEEN INSTALLED. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL SILT FENCE
AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS FOR TEMPORARY PERIMETER EROSION CONTROL.
2. ONCE SILT FENCE HAS BEEN INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES MAY BEGIN.
3. TEMPORARY SEEDING MEASURES SHALL BE EMPLOYED THROUGHOUT THE DURATION OF
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES ON ANY AREA WHICH WILL REMAIN UNDISTURBED FOR MORE THAN 7
WORKING DAYS, OR 14 CALENDAR DAYS, WHICHEVER IS SHORTER. ALL SLOPES STEEPER THAN 3H:1V
SHALL BE PLANTED OR OTHERWISE PROVIDED WITH TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT GROUND COVER,
DEVICES, OR OTHER STRUCTURES SUFFICIENT TO RETAIN EROSION WITHIN 7 CALENDAR DAYS. ALL
OTHER SLOPES OF 3H:1V OR FLATTER, EXCEPT THOSE GREATER THAN 50 FT IN LENGTH, SHALL BE
PROVIDED WITH TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT GROUND COVER, DEVICES, OR OTHER STRUCTURES
SUFFICIENT TO RESTRAIN EROSION WITHIN 14 CALENDAR DAYS.
4. PERMANENT SEEDING SHALL BE INSTALLED, AT ANY TIME, FOR ALL AREAS REACHING FINAL GRADE
WHICH WILL NOT BE DISTURBED AGAIN.
5. UPON COMPLETION OF FINAL GRADING, PERMANENT STRUCTURAL OR VEGETATIVE STABILIZATION
SHALL BE ESTABLISHED.
6. ALL EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURES SHALL BE MAINTAINED THROUGHOUT THE
DURATION OF CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES AND THE SITE HAS BEEN PERMANENTLY STABILIZED WITH
STRUCTURAL AND/OR PERMANENT VEGETATIVE MEASURES.
7. CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM SITE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ONCE EVERY SEVEN CALENDAR
DAYS AND WITHIN 24 HOURS AFTER ANY STORM EVENT GREATER THAN 112 INCH OF RAIN PER 24 HOUR
PERIOD.
8. ❑NCE PERMANENT STABILIZATION HAS OCCURRED, TEMPORARY SEDIMENT CONTROL MEASURES MAY
BE REMOVED UPON APPROVAL FROM THE ENGINEER. ANY AREAS DISTURBED BY THE REMOVAL OF
EROSION CONTROL MEASURES SHALL BE RETURNED TO THE ORIGINAL, OR BETTER, CONDITION
BEFORE SEEDED, MULCHED, AND FERTILIZED,
9, THE NORTH CAROLINA SEDIMENTATION POLLUTION CONTROL ACT REQUIRES PEOPLE RESPONSIBLE
FOR LAND DISTURBING ACTIVITIES TO INSPECT EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURES
AFTER EACH PHASE OF THE PROJECT UNTIL PERMANENT GROUND COVER IS ESTABLISHED. THE SELF
INSPECTION PROGRAM IS SEPARATE FROM THE WEEKLY MONITORING PROGRAM OF THE NPDES
STORMWATER PERMIT FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. THE FOCUS OF THE SELF -INSPECTION
REPORT IS TO ENSURE THE INSTALLATION OF EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL MEASURES
ARE CONTINUALLY PERFORMING AS INTENDED.
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
NPOR5 Stomr rwater Discharge Permit for Construction ActMtias (NCC,01)
NCRENRIdivision of Water C,mality
NEW STABILIZATION TIMEFRAMES
{Effective Aug. 3, 291 f }
SITE AREA DESCRIPTION
STABILIZATION
TIMEFRAME EXCEPTIONS
Perimeter dikes, Swales, ditches, slopes
7 days
None
High quality Water (HOW) Zones
7days
None
Slopes steeper than 3A
7 days
If slopeS are 10' or less in length and are
not steeper than 2:1, f4 days are allowed.
Slopes 3:1 or flatter
14 days
7 days for slopes greater than 5U' in length.
All
other areas with slopes flatter than 4*1
14 days
None, except for perimeters and HQW Zones.
Ha e
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TEMPORARY SEEDING SCHEDULE
SPECIES RATE Ib/ac SEEDING DATES
GERMAN MILLET 40 SUMMER: MAY 1ST -AUGUST 15TH
RYE (GRAIN) 120 FALL: AUGUST 15TH-DECEMBER 30TH (SEE NOTE 1).
RYE (GRAIN) 120 WINTER: JANUARY 1ST -MAY 1ST
NOTES:
1. TOPDRESS WITH 50 Ib/ac NITROGEN IN MARCH.
2. APPLY 2000 Ib/ac GROUND AGRICULTURAL LIMESTONE AND 750-1,000 lb/ac 10-10-10 FERTILIZER.
APPLICATION RATES AND CHEMICAL ANALYSIS SHALL BE CONFIRMED OR ESTABLISHED BY SOIL TEST.
3. APPLY 4,000 Ib/ac SMALL GRAIN STRAW MULCH.
4. TACK MULCH BY APPLYING ASPHALT TACK AT A RATE OF 0.10 gal/yd2 (10 gal/1,000 W).
5. REFERTILIZE IF GROWTH IS NOT FULLY ADEQUATE, RESEED, REFERTILIZE AND MULCH IMMEDIATELY
FOLLOWING EROSION OR OTHER VISIBLE SIGNS OF DAMAGE.
PERMANENT SEEDING SCHEDULE
SPECIES RATE (Iblac) SEEDING DATES
KENTUCKY 31 FALL: AUGUST 25TH-SEPTEMBER 15TH (SEE NOTE 1),
TALL FESCUE LATE WINTER: FEBRUARY 15TH-MARCH 21ST.
(OR ALTA TALL FESCUE) 150 AFTER AUGUST 15TH, USE UNSCARIFIE❑ SEED.
GERMAN MILLET 10 ADD BETWEEN MAY 1ST -AUGUST 15TH
RYE (GRAIN) 40 ADD BEFORE MAY 1ST AND AFTER AUGUST 15TH
NOTES:
1. FALL IS BEST FOR TALL FESCUE
2. BETWEEN MAY 1ST AND AUGUST 15TH, ADD 10 LB/AC GERMAN MILLET.
3. PRIOR TO MAY 1 ST OR AFTER AUGUST 15TH ADD 40 LB/AC RYE (GRAIN).
4. APPLY LIME AND FERTILIZER ACCORDING TO SOIL TESTS, OR APPLY 4,000 LB/AC GROUND
AGRICULTURAL LIMESTONE AND 1,000 LB/AC 10-10-10 FERTILIZER.
5, LIME AND FERTILIZER ARE TO BE DISKED INTO THE SOIL SURFACE TO A MINIMUM DEPTH OF 4 INCHES.
6. APPLY 4,000 LB/AC GRAIN STRAW OR EQUIVALENT COVER OF ANOTHER SUITABLE MULCH.
7. ANCHOR BY TACKING WITH ASPHALT (0.10 GAL-ND2), ROVING, OR NETTING OR BY CRIMPING WITH A
MULCH ANCHORING TOOL.
8, REFERTILIZE IN THE SECOND YEAR UNLESS GROWTH IS FULLY ADEQUATE.
9, RESEED, FERTILIZE, AND MULCH DAMAGED AREAS IMMEDIATELY
SEED BED PREPARATION
1. CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE ALL AREAS TO RECEIVE TEMPORARY OR PERMANENT SEEDING
MEASURES PRIOR TO PLANTING.
2. TOPSOIL SHALL BE PLACED IN AREAS TO BE SEEDED AND ROUGHENED WITH TRACKED EQUIPMENT OR
OTHER SUITABLE MEASURES. SLOPES STEEPER THAN 3:1 MAY BE ROUGHENED BY GROOVING,
FURROWING, TRACKING, OR STAIRSTEP GRADING. SLOPES FLATTER THAN 3:1 SHOULD BE GROOVED BY
DISKING, HARROWING, RAKING, OPERATING PLANTING EQUIPMENT ON THE CONTOUR.
3. SOIL AMENDMENTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LIME AND FERTILIZER SHALL BE SPREAD AS
NECESSARY, AND AT THE RATES SHOWN IN THE SEEDING SCHEDULE. SEEDING SHALL BE AS PER TYPE
AND RATES SHOWN IN THE SEEDING SCHEDULE. SEED SHALL BE BROADCAST AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
FOLLOWING ROUGHENING, BEFORE SURFACE HAS BEEN SEALED BY RAINFALL.
MULCHING AND TACKING AGENTS
1. MULCH MUST COVER A MINIMUM OF 80 PERCENT OF THE SOIL SURFACE AND MUST BE SECURED BY
TACKING, CRIMPING, OR NETTING.
2. WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH SHALL BE USED IN HYDROSEEDING GRASS SEED IN COMBINATION WITH
FERTILIZERS AND OTHER APPROVED ADDITIONS.
3. NETTING WITH PLASTIC MESH AND/OR PLASTIC TWINE SHALL BE USED IN WETLAND AND RIPARIAN
BUFFERS TO PROTECT SMALL ANIMALS.
HYDROSEEDING
1. HYDROSEEDING SHALL BE CARRIED OUT IN THREE STEPS_ STEP ONE SHALL CONSIST OF THE
APPLICATION OF LINE. IN STEP TWO THE SEED MIXTURE SHALL BE MIXED WITH THE FERTILIZER, WOOD
CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH, AND ANY REQUIRED INOCULANTS AND APPLIED TO THE SEED BED. STEP
THREE SHALL CONSIST OF APPLICATION OF TOP DRESSING DURING THE FIRST SPRING OR FALL,
WHICHEVER COMES FIRST, AFTER STEP TWO.
2. INGREDIENTS FOR THE MIXTURE AND STEPS SHOULD BE DUMPED INTO A TANK OF WATER AND
THOROUGHLY MIXED TO A HOMOGENEOUS SLURRY AND SPRAYED OUT UNDER A MINIMUM OF 300-350
POUNDS PRESSURE, I SUITABLE PROPORTIONS TO ACCOMMODATE THE TYPE AND CAPACITY OF THE
HYDRAULIC MACHINE TO BE USED. APPLICATIONS SHALL BE EVENLY SPRAYED OVER THE GROUND
SURFACE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FREE THE TOPSOIL OF STONES, ROOTS, RUBBISH AND OTHER
DELETERIOUS MATERIALS AND DISPOSE OF SAME OFF THE SITE. THE BARE SOIL, EXCEPT EXISTING
STEEP EMBANKMENT AREA, SHALL BE ROUGH RAKED TO REMOVE STONES, ROOTS, AND RUBBISH OVER
4-INCH IN SIZE, AND OTHER DELETERIOUS MATERIALS AND DISPOSE OF SAME OFF THE SITE.
3. NO SEEDING SHOULD BE UNDERTAKEN IN WINDY OR UNFAVORABLE WEATHER, WHEN THE GROUND IS
TOO WET TO RAKE EASILY, WHEN IT IS IN A FROZEN CONDITIONS, OR TOO DRY. ANY BARE SPOTS
SHOWN IN TWO TO THREE WEEKS SHALL BE RECULTIVATED, FERTILIZED AT HALF THE RATE, RAKED,
SEEDED, AND MULCHED AGAIN BY MECHANICAL OR HAND BROADCAST METHOD ACCEPTABLE TO THE
OWNER.
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
'000011,01"
FUQUAY-VAR' KI A
north carolina
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
CIVIL
GENERAL CIVIL NOTES
DATE: AP R I L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.:
DRAWING
NUMBER: �-+��77
l� L

t
v
N
o 4n

a
a�
o �
o
N
aCID
CONSTRUCTION
ENTRANCE, TYP
0Z57701
LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE, TYP
->DNF
100-YR FLOOD PLAIN 0
BOUNDARY, TYP
TREE LINE, TYP
SILT FENCE, TYP
0zz70a0
TEMPORARY SLOPE J
MATTING, TYP
D02 0
D
RELOCATED TERTIARY 7
FILTER, SEE M101
LIGHT POLE, SEE d
ELECTRICAL PLAN —�--
Ir
H•
r-
a
LOD
r
0
a
0 00
❑ Qa7 �
007 ------
❑D7
•
r- � D -• r
o •`•
Dal •
•
•
<�D C� -
a a o
GATE
STOP C' -
js IS is
is
co o
M '
1
1
TOTAL LIMITS OF DISTURBANCE = 0.56 ACRES
1
B'CHAINLINK
x
WOOD ❑ TRANSFORMER
SHED DIALER ON CONC PAD
TRANSFORMER "L" STANDBY GENERATOR
_I ONco Lj
CONC PAD
PANEL BOARD "L" Q07 (307 ❑07
zi
z -- - —__ c
U -
60
X SERVICE ENTRANCE CIRCUIT BREAKER
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
WOOD EMERGENCY POWER DISCONNECT
STEPS 1114 11PANELBOARD "MDP"
INFLUENT PUMP CONTROL PANEL
LP1UE�``�
� r
� x
I
007
_ 007
I
0p7
001 0D7
WOOD i �LP1UE is
STEPS
1A !r !! !! I RIPRAP11a
of
! cc I U ❑
x o ! � —�► !► i ! it !! !! �l ! r Lu
Lu CO �` � _ -❑ 1-� �rY —1�2AIr!! r Lu
r
aZ gTION TANKS iRA_ 7A,� L�
UV '- -SLUDGE!WOOD
C �HOIG WA L�ZA" � F'`'�`! !1 !I j TANKS Qf 1s j—�1�j UA +TIDN
!! TANKS m
!
28 AERATION TANKS ��1`�
I - 7s !! I I !! r! SLUDGE !! I I
I! ! I I I ! HOLDING !! FLOW
TANKS I I EQUALIZATION
TANKS i
B t
TERTIARY PUMP
STATION, SEE M102 CONIC
STEPS�,�
VALVE VAULT,
SEE M102
2 4' -
sL00K
SEE NOTE 1, TYP. BLDG
- 272
4' CONCRETE SIDEWALK
�-L
SF �
5F
5F
6"CHAINLINK x SF ---- SF
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. MCNICOL
DRAWN BY: C. MCNICOL FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
CHECKED BY: M. SANTOWASSO
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
1 REGULATORY REVIEW 04/2019 TSD MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
REV ISSUED FOR DATE BY IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
Hazen
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.. C-0381
� SF � SF � SF
� SF
� SF
x --- ~ SF
x
x
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
LANDING
pw:>lwa-1.1
xLL
-' JUL
SF ­-` SF co
��
FLIQUAYNAR I NA
north carolina
l�
NOTES:
1. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFERENCE EARTHWORK
SPECIFICATION SECTION FOR SOIL AND SUBGRADE
REQUIREMENTS.
EXTENTS OF WETLANDS
INFLUENT PUMP
STATION
10 5 0 10,
1"=10'-0" 16.: iiiiiiii:
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
CIVIL
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION
CONTROL PLAN
DATE: AP RI L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:

m
a
0
U
P
vp
N
CONDITION
TERTIARY PUMP STATION DISC FILTER UV FACILITY
HIGH WATER ALARM=272.00
DESIGN AVG DAY
LOW LEVEL {PUMPS
0.117 MGD)
282 80
OFF)=267.50 272 20
PEAK HOUR, LARGEST
TREATMENT UNIT OUT OF
SERVICE (0.288 MGD)
282.90 272 40
330
310
290
270
250
240
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER
CHECKED BY: C. TODD JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
€SSUED FOR
DATE
By
oQ�H CAl�d�r
r: of 5 S/q,
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
9r
ONLY- NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION 20050 Z
�aTyY S. DF�
EFFLUENT 4'0
MH NO. 1
GRADE 271.00
-7-•••........................................................................................... I ..... .............
EL 271.00
8' DIP................................ ... ..
UV EFFLUENT INV. 264.27--�
WEIR EL 272.08 EL 261.90
PARTIAL HYDRAULIC PROFILE (NEW FILTER FLAN PATH)
N.T.S.
Hazen
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
......................................................................................... .....................
MIDDLE CREEK ELEVATION
EL 266.00 (100 YR FLOOD)
...................................... MIDDLE.CREEK ELEVATION....
EL 258.26 {NORMAL}
8" DIP EL 260.70
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST W1NTP F
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
330
310
290
270
250
24❑
DATE: APRI L 2019
Afte
A A ��,, �� ppA WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
`J OUR( A R i NIMECHANICAL CONTRACT NO,. 1
north Carolina HYDRAULIC PROFILE DRAWING
NUMBER:
MOl

O
o �
v �
N w
Q
O �

U
4
rb
F
9
r
PROJECT T. ❑EVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER
CHECKED BY: C. TOD❑ JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
PArA l
112"=1'-0"
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
CAR
E.SSIpy�� �p
E
Ha-e
NGfN'L#tj{ HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
Y S. �RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
EL 286.70
FIN GRADE 275.20
FROM PUMP
STATION
FILTER NO 4
rm7
CONTROL,
PANEL
BACKWASH PUMP;
SEE NOTE 2.
C
EW, T& T&B
12" MIN #57 STONE \
COMPACTED SUBGRADE PER
SPECIFICATIONS, SEE CIVIL DRAWINGS.
TOWN OF FUQUAY—VARI NA
NORTH CAROLI NA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
tt7
I N
C10x10
2-314" S
BOLTS
L4x4x 11
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
SECTION B
112"=V-0" M101
5"
2" 1 112"
318" AL
=112 AL, SEE NOTE 1.
"3�16 V
ry 314"0 SST ADHESIVE
r ANCHOR W16" EMBED
DETAIL lo
1-112"=1'-0" M
AL GRATING
0553000
C10x10.4
L3x3x114 AL
112" SST BOLT
DETAIL 2
1-112"=1'_D" M101
V Q VN( \/AR i KII ■
north carof+na
NOTES:
AL HANDRAILS
1 •
CONTRACTOR SHALL LEVEL STAIR BASEPLATE WITH 1
0552000
INCH NON -SHRINK GROUT.
2.
ALL 2" PVC PIPING SHALL BE INSULATED AND HEAT
TRACED. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A 1" THICKNESS AND
BE HEAVY DENSITY SECTIONAL PIPE INSULATION WITH
VAPOR BARRIER AND SELF -REELING LAP. HEAT
TRACING SHALL HAVE A CABLE HEAT RATING OF 3
AL GRATING
WATTS PER FOOT.
0553000
3.
ALL CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE GRADE
60 DEFORMED BARS WITH MINIMUM CONTACT LAP
SPLICES OF 2'-6".
EL 283.20
4.
REFERENCE STANDARD DETAIL 0551005 FOR
ALUMINUM STAIRS.
2" BACKWASH OUTLET,
SEE NOTE 2.
2" PVC BACKWASH OUTLET,
SEE NOTE 2.
SUPPORT 2" PVC OFF
CONC SLAB WITH
FIBERGLASS UNISTRUT,
SEE NOTE 2.
#5@8",TYP
#5@8",TYP
TOP OF SLAB
—I r EL 275.45
24"
EFFLUENT FILTER
MECHANICAL
PLAN AND SECTIONS
DATE: APRIL 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:

d
ti

LIGHTING:
x
X POLE -MOUNTED FIXTURE
RECEPTACLES:
X DENOTES RECEPTACLE TYPE (TYP.):
GFCI DENOTES GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPT
UPS DENOTES UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
WPCR DENOTES WEATHERPROOF CORROSION RESISTANT
# DENOTES CIRCUIT NUMBER (TYP.)
RECEPTACLES:
X X X
LEFT: SIMPLEX
(p# R# P# MIDDLE` DUPLEX
RIGHT: QUADRUPLEX
SWITCHES
X WALL SWITCH:
x DENOTES TYPE:
# NO SUBSCRIPT DENOTES SINGLE -POLE SWITCH
3 DENOTES 3-WAY SWITCH
4 DENOTES 4-WAY SWITCH
M DENOTES MANUAL MOTOR STARTER
# DENOTES CIRCUIT NUMBER
WPCR DENOTES WEATHERPROOF CORROSION RESISTANT
SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAMS
XFMR
kVA
A I 480-1201208V
YA �� TRANSFORMER
7 73P/4W
TRANS
PROTECTIVE RELAY:
NUMBER DENOTES IEEE DEVICE FUNCTION
MOTOR AND TYPICAL ADDITIONAL DEVICES
TSH MSH CF TSH: TEMPERATURE SWITCH
HP RPM MSH: MOTOR SPACE HEATER
CF: COOLING FAN
TE ME TE. TEMPERATURE ELEMENT
ME: MOISTURE DETECTOR
INSTRUMENT TAG:
X DENOTES INSTRUMENT TYPE
>_ Y DENOTES INSTRUMENT NUMBER
SEE DRAWING 11 FOR INSTRUMENT ABBREVIATIONS
n100A FUSE
100A
3P
100A
30A 30A
D
3P 3P
30A
3P
800AF
800AP
N.C. 800AT
LSIGZ
CTR
100AF1
100AT
I
0
30A
3P
A
800AF
800AP
N.C. 800AT
LSIGZ
CTR
V
800AF
ETU 800AP
800AT
LSIG
600:5
(3)
50:5
(1)
480:120
A
(3)
<C
J,
x
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
DISCONNECT SWITCH
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
LOW -VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER:
LEFT: FIXED -MOUNT
RIGHT: DRAWOUT
E.O_ DENOTES ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
LSIG DENOTES INSTALLED TRIP FUNCTIONS:
L DENOTES LONG-TIME
S DENOTES SHORT -TIME
I DENOTES INSTANTANEOUS
G DENOTES GROUND FAULT
Z DENOTES ZONE -SELECTIVE INTERLOCKING
CTR ❑ENOTES BREAKER -SPECIFIC CT AN RATIOS
LOW -VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
LEFT: THERMAL -MAGNETIC TRIP UNIT
RIGHT: ELECTRONIC TRIP UNIT
MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR
GROUND
CT:
NUMBERS DENOTE CT WINDING RATIO AND CT QUANTITY
GFCT:
NUMBERS DENOTE GFCT WINDING RATIO AND GFCT QUANTITY
PT:
NUMBERS DENOTE PT WINDING VOLTAGES AND PT QUANTITY
DRAW -OUT ELEMENT
LEFT: PANELBOARD
RIGHT: COMBINATION POWER UNIT
X DENOTES PANEL ID
SURGE ARRESTOR
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
-
DESIGNED BY: D, PHELPS
DRAWN BY: B.L. JOHNSON
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING ` -�-
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
SINGLE -LINE DIAGRAMS, CONT'D.
500kW
48QV,30,4W
F---------7 ATS
si S21 48OV, 800A
Q 1 3O 4W 4P
65kA
1 tr OPEN TRANSITION
r ATS
151 S21 480V, 800A
I I O 130 4W 4P
65kA
I 1 OPEN TRANSITION
I
100AF1 ATS
100AT
1 48OV,800A
I si11 3201 30 4W 4P
1 65kA
II L 1 OPEN TRANSITION
L_.------ATS
S�} - - - - - -5) 480V, 800AF/800AT
I 30 4W 4P
1 165kA
L OPEN TRANSITION
Tn-- TnI
1 51) -_-----s)1 ATS
1 480V, 800AF/800AT
110 4W 4P
I 1 65kA
11 OPEN TRANSITION
i_ — — L
GENERATOR
CONTACTOR -STYLE ATS OR MTS
CONTACTOR -STYLE ATS OR MTS
WITH OFF POSITION
CONTACTOR -STYLE ATS OR MTS,
SERVICE -ENTRANCE RATED
MCCB-STYLE ATS OR MTS
DRAWOUT CB -STYLE ATS OR MTS
MISC PLAN VIEW SYMBOLS
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
{�L)
`[�]'
GROUND RODS:
LEFT: BURIED
RIGHT: IN TESTWELL
DUCTBANK SECTION CUT IDENTIFIER:
EE)
DBXX DENOTES DUCTBANK ID
EXX DENOTES DRAWING NUMBER WHERE
SECTION CUT IS LOCATED
DB DUCTBANK TAG:
X DENOTES DUCTBANK ID
x ----
TRAY (X J
X Y
Y
x
#
�-xxxx
P-XXX-XXX
WIRING
CABLE TRAY TAG:
X DENOTES CABLE TRAY ID
Y DENOTES SCHEDULE REFERENCE
INSTRUMENT TAG:
X DENOTES INSTRUMENT TYPE
# DENOTES INSTRUMENT NUMBER
SEE DRAWING 11 FOR INSTRUMENT ABBREVIATIONS
CONDUIT TAGS:
P DENOTES POWER
C DENOTES CONTROL
I DENOTES INSTRUMENTATION
XXXX DENOTES CONDUIT ID
XXX-XXX DENOTES CONDUIT ID
CONDUIT HOME RUN
CONDUIT EXPOSED
CONCRETE ENCASED CONDUIT
CONDUIT CONCEALED
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
CONCRETE ENCASED DUCTBANK
LEFT: CONDUIT RISE (TURN UP)
RIGHT: CONDUIT DROP (TURN DOWN)
C A Rol
Sa e
-v
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES S
ONLY NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
ON } 41- HAZEN AND SAWYER
Q 4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
C16 J.Rp`� RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
j( LICENSE NO.: C-0381
ABBREVIATIONS
AE
ANALYSIS ELEMENT
AFG
ABOVE FINISHED GRADE
AHU
AIR HANDLING UNIT
AIC
AMPERE INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AIT
ANALYSIS INDICATING TRANSMITTER
ANSI
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
ASCE
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
ASME
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
AF
AMPERE FRAME
AT
AMPERE TRIP
ATS
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
BC
BYPASS CONTACTOR
BKR
BREAKER
(LJV)CP
(LOCAUVENDOR) CONTROL PANEL
CPT
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER
CT
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
DB
DUCTBANK
DSW
DISCONNECT SWITCH
(')HH
HAND HOLE*
(*)MH
MANHOLE"
EO
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED
ETM
ELAPSED TIME METER
ETU
ELECTRONIC TRIP UNIT
FAAP
FIRE ALARM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
FACP
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
FS
FLOW SWITCH
FSL
FLOW SWITCH LOW
FVNR
FULL VOLTAGE NON -REVERSING
FVR
FULL VOLTAGE REVERSING
GFCI
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER
GFCT
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSFORMER
GNG
GO -NO G❑
GND
GROUND
HOA
HAND -OFF -AUTO
HPU
HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT
IC
INPUT CONTACTOR
IEEE
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERS
ISO
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR
STANDARDIZATION
(")JB
JUNCTION BOX*
LCS
LOCAL CONTROL STATION
LP
LIGHTING PANEL
LS
LEVEL SWITCH
LSL
LEVEL SWITCH LOW
LSLL.
LEVEL SWITCH LOW -LOW
LSH
LEVEL SWITCH HIGH
LSHH
LEVEL SWITCH HIGH -HIGH
LT
LEVEL TRANSMITTER
MFR
MULTI -FUNCTION RELAY
MH
MANHOLE
MOD
MOTOR OPERATED DAMPER
MOG
MOTOR OPERATED GATE
MOL
MOTOR OPERATED LOUVER
MOV
MOTOR OPERATED VALVE
MPR
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY
MTD
MOUNTED
MTS
MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH
MWTS
MOTOR WINDING TEMPERATURE SWITCH
NC
NORMALLY CLOSED
NEC
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
NEMA
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSN
NFPA
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION
NO
NORMALLY OPEN
NTS
NOT TO SCALE
OC
OUTPUT CONTACTOR
OL
OVERLOAD
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
ABBREVIATIONS. CONT.
(*)PB
PULLBOX*
PC
PHOTOCELL
PCC
POINT OF COMMON COUPLING
PE
PRESSURE ELEMENT
PIT
PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER
PLC
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER
PP
POWER PANEL
PST
PHASE SHIFTING TRANSFORMER
PT
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
PTT
PUSH TO TEST
RCS
REMOTE CONTROL STATION
RECP
RECEPTACLE
RIO
REMOTEI/O
RM
ROOM
RT❑
RESISTANCE THERMAL DEVICE
RTU
REMOTE TELEMETRY UNIT
RVAT
REDUCED VOLTAGE AUTO TRANSFORMER
RVSS
REDUCED VOLTAGE SOLID STATE
SA
SUPPLY AIR
S.E.
SERVICE ENTRANCE
SP. C.
SPARE CONDUIT
SPD
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
SSOL
SOLID STATE OVERLOAD
SST
STAINLESS STEEL
TB
TEST BLOCK
TC
TIMED CLOSE
TO
TIMED OPEN
TSH
TWISTED SHIELDED
TX
TRANSFORMER
TYP
TYPICAL
UPS
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
VFD
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
WPCR
WEATHER PROOF CORROSION RESISTANT
WT
WALK THROUGH
XFMR
TRANSFORMER
*DESIGNATED ABBREVIATIONS CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING PREFIXES:
E ELECTRIC
P POWER
C CONTROL
I INSTRUMENTATION
F FIBER
A
FU0UA_Y-VA_ R I KIA
north carolina
NOTES:
1. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL
UNDERGROUND CONCRETE ENCASED ELECTRICAL
CONDUITS SHALL BE PER STANDARD DETAIL 1611801.
2. BOND ALL NEW CONCRETE ENCASED GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS TO EXISTING GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS IN ALL MANHOLES, PULL
BOXES, CABLE TRAYS, AND SIMILAR LOCATIONS
WHERE APPLICABLE.
3. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED OR NOTED, ALL WALL
MOUNTED ELECTRICAL PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND
SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MOUNTED 6'4' (MAX)
FROM THE TOP OF THE PANEL TO FINISHED FLOOR OR
GRADE.
4. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL LIGHTING SWITCHES,
CONTROL SWITCHES, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT SMALL
BE MOUNTED WITH THEIR CENTERLINE
APPROXIMATELY 4'-0" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR, SLAB,
OR GRADE.
5. A SEPARATE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR
SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EACH CIRCUIT (SEPARATE
CONDUCTOR IN THE CONDUIT). THE CONDUCTOR
SHALL BE TERMINATED AT THE PROPER DEVICE,
TERMINAL, OR LUG AT THE POWER SOURCE (MCC
GROUND BUS, PANELSOARD GROUND BUS, ETC.).
GROUND CONDUCTOR SIZE SHALL BE PER THE LATEST
EDITION OF THE NEC.
6. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS INSTALLED IN HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH CHAPTER 5, ART. 500 OF THE LATEST EDITION OF
THE NEC. CONTRACTOR SHALL SEAL ALL CONDUITS
LEAVING HAZARDOUS AREAS. WALL AND FLOOR
OPENINGS SHALL BE SEALED WITH FIREPROOF
COMPOUND.
7. ALL EQUIPMENT LOCATED IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
SHALL BE SUITABLE FOR THE CLASS, DIVISION, AND
GROUP RATING OF THE LOCATION,
8. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, EXISTING
PAVEMENT SHALL BE SAW CUT AND REMOVED TO
ALLOW FOR THE INSTALLATION OF NEW ELECTRICAL
DUCTBANKS. AFTER INSTALLATION, REPLACE
PAVEMENT WITH NEW TO MATCH ORIGINAL
CONDITIONS.
9, REFERENCE SECTION 1 FOR CONSTRUCTION
SEQUENCING REQUIREMENTS.
10. CONDUIT HOMERUNS ARE NOT SHOWN ON THE
DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO CONDUIT
AND WIRE SCHEDULES, RISER DIAGRAMS, SINGLE LINE
DIAGRAMS, AND OTHER DRAWINGS FOR CONDUIT AND
WIRE REQUIREMENTS.
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
ELECTRICAL
LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES
DATE: APRIL 2019
HAZEN NO.: 3 24Q-DOS
CONTRACT NO-:
DRAWING
NUMBER:
E1

N
x
x
2flNE
7pQrR
IOVYR la YR
1 R ir7f]YR
� 100Y
xY
z
Z
r
0 1 J�
cn +
x f
j 1
ll
WOOD 1 1
STEPS 1
1
1
►
\
GATE
STOP C�
,
6'cHAINLINK A
,
+
w
6`CHAINLINK
i
— HAND HOLE NOA WOOD
SHED
EXISTING PANEL "L" AND
mo-Yi� 10DYR l DIALER EQUIPMENT, SEE E102
� 1!QaYk
MOVIR 17
YR �700YR EXISTING PANEL "MOP" AND
SERVICE EQUIPMENT, SEE E102
DB
DB
7vo>
1 O0
IIP-
Ak
\
,
I ..
EMERGENCY STANDBY
GENERATOR
x
iOQYR
loftR
---� r WOOD
STEPS
1A 11 II 11 r~--ter--
r~ —
1-`���1� 1 11 11 j j It 11 `~—�, r--- cc
ui 0i 1cr zA
w Y 11 11 AERATION TANKS
�������—_ 11 11 �1A-7A !1 SLUDGE r[ ►1 1
HoKSG I1 E FLOW 1
I I I A11 QUALIZATION I
L��� „ TANKS
—
�-- I1 11 I I I
I
F`~~� AERATION TANKS 1 I I I [ I
r1 I I I[ 16 ra 11
� L-- HDLorNE 11 r i 1
TAN G 11 KS FLOW 1
------------- -- �~~--� ---� I ! I 1I 'FBI, !1 EQ rAN1ZATrON 1
KS
DtSEFFL-T€-R-AND TERTIARY —�� !1 1I r1 "ll j
PUMP STATION SEEEt02 -_-- -- CONC
-J[
STEPS--
DB
BLOCK
13LDG
1 �
1 x
� x
6'CHAINLIIVK
x
X
x`
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: D. PHELPS
DRAWN BY. B.L. JOHNSON
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
a-e
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
x
'101110004K
x
i
I
�
x
1
LPUE
r
i gpflYR
t OUYRr
-RIPRAPI ❑
10
IV
x
1Ia �
WOOD
WALL
k
WOOD
LANDING
6"RISER
x
x
z
z +
r
�x
x
F-UQUN(-VAR'INA
north carolina
x
>al
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN
DUCTBANK SCHEDULE
DB
1
P-1001, P-1002
DB
2
P-1007, C-1001
P-1001, P-1002,
DB
3
P-1007, C-1001
P-1001, P-1009
DB
4
C-1003
(�B
5
P-1002, C-1004
1 I I
DATE: APRI L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:
E101

NOTES:
c�64
s
NEW DIALER
WOOD Lj EXISTING DIALER
SHED
EXISTING
TRANSFORMER
EXISTING PANEL "L"
�f ~ GROUNDING ELECTRODE
1 j CONDUCTOR, SEE NOTE 6
— rcara
� r°art DB
� Tgpr� � 700yFZ I� I 2
- 7ffI7yR 7I f!
� ,oQya4 f
TayR
1 raov; �
1 fi 11301 i7r r.Y
GROUNDING ELECTRODE
_ CONDUCTOR DB
DB ---- -- `— --- 1
EXISTING PANEL "L" AND DIALER EQUIPMENT
1/411=11-0,1
EXISTING UTILITY
TRANSFORMER
1fi11301
DB fr�
1 r —
r r J EXISTING INFLUENT
PUMP CONTROL PANEL
r - EXIS G SERVICE ENTRANCE
r CIRCUIT BREAKER
EXISTING PANEL "MDP"
EXISTING AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
SWITCH GROUNDING ELECTRODE
CONDUCTOR, SEE NOTE 5
EXISTING EMERGENCY POWER
DISCONNECT — J MI
EXISTING PANEL "MDP" AND SERVICE EQUIPMENT
114"=1`-D"
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: D. PHELPS
DRAWN BY: B.L. JOHNSON
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING -
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
DISC FILTER AND TERTIARY PUMP STATION
1/4"=1'-pPp
DISC FILTER AND TERTIARY PUMP STATION GROUNDING
1/4" =1'-0"
�N CARo
o�
�SSG
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES S
Hazen
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION i? 2 —
1 SIN 6� HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TOWN OF FUQUAY—VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
'10009000"
FUQUR( AR I Isla
north carolina
1. FURNISH AND INSTALL (1) NEMA 4X LIGHT SWITCH
ON EXTERIOR OF DISC FILTER ADJACENT TO THE
DISC FILTER CONTROL PANEL. ATTACH SWITCH
AND CONDUIT WITH SS HEAVY DUTY BEAM CLAMPS.
DO NOT DRILL HOLES INTO DISC FILTER.
2. FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW CONCRETE BASE AND
ANCHOR BOLTS FOR RELOCATED POLE AND AREA
LIGHT. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN THE POLE
AND LIGHT FROM THE TERRIBLE CREEK WTF AND
TRANSPORT TO THE BRIGHTON FOREST FACILITY
FOR INSTALLATION. THE AREA LIGHT SHALL BE
POWERED FROM EXISTING PANEL "L", CIRCUIT 24.
3. FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW ALUMINUM RMC AND
LFMC ON DISC FILTER, REPLACING ALL ORIGINAL
PVC CONDUIT. FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW WIRING
AS REQUIRED.
4. FURNISH AND INSTALL (3) 2" SCHEDULE 80 PVC
CONDUITS FROM THE TERTIARY PUMP STATION
CONTROL PANEL DOWN, INTO WET WELL. INSTALL
TERTIARY PUMP STATION LATEX FOAM SEALANT INSIDE OF CONDUIT AS IT
ENTERS THE PANEL AND AROUND CABLES AFTER
INSTALLATION.
TERTIARY PUMP Not
$• CONNECT 410 BARE COPPER GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS IN NEW DUCTSANKS TO
EXISTING GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM.
WETWELL LEVEL FLOATS
(LSH, LSL, LSHH)
6. CONNECT 410 BARE COPPER GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS FROM GROUND ROD IN
TERTIARY PUMP STATION
HANDHOLE Not TO FRAME OF RELOCATED DISC
CONTROL PANEL
FILTER AND TO FRAME OF THE ALUMINUM
PLATFORM.
TERTIARY PUMP Not
7. CONNECT 410 BARE COPPER GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR FROM DUCTBANK TO
REBAR IN FOUNDATION OF THE NEW VALVE VAULT.
8. CONNECT 410 BARE COPPER GROUNDING
ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR FROM DUCTBANK TO
REBAR IN FOUNDATION OF THE NEW TERTIARY
PUMP STATION AND THE SUPPORT FRAMING FOR
THE TERTIARY PUMP STATION CONTROL PANEL.
9. FURNISH AND INSTALL (1) CORROSION RESISTANT
(CR) DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WITH IN -USE METALLIC
COVER ON EXTERIOR OF DISC FILTER ADJACENT TO
THE DISC FILTER CONTROL PANEL. INSTALL 24"
AFG. ATTACH RECEPTACLE AND CONDUIT WITH SS
HEAVY DUTY BEAM CLAMPS. DO NOT DRILL HOLES
INTO DISC FILTER.
10. PROVIDE EXPANSION FITTINGS ON ALL CONDUIT
STUB -UPS NEXT TO EXISTING
STRUCTURESIEQUIPMENT PER DETAIL 1611811.
TERTIARY PUMP STATION
TERTIARY PUMP STATION
CONTROL PANEL
SEE NOTE 8
ELECTRICAL
DISC FILTER AND EQUIPMENT PLANS
DATE: APRI L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
El 02

480/277 VOLTS
3 PHASE, 4 WIRE
MODS
DESCRIPTION
WIRE
TRIP
POLE
CKT
No.
1
-
WWTP CONTROL PANEL
100
3
3
5
7
-
PUMP CONTROL PANEL
40
3
9
11
13
TERTIARY DISK FILTER
20
3
15
17
19
TERTIARY PUMPS
30
3
21
23
-
SPACE
25
-
SPACE
27
-
SPACE
29
MODIFICATION (MODS) LEGEND:
EPD - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (30mA)
GFCI - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (5mA)
LOD - LOCK -ON DEVICE
LFD - LOCK -OFF DEVICE
ETU - ELECTRONIC TRIP UNIT
EXISTING P�
MAIN LU
2251
VOLT-AMPERES
A B - C
15,200
15,200
15,200
4,750
4,750
4,750
2,166
2,166
2,166
1,666
1,666
1,666
TOTAL 23,782 1 23,782 23,782
PHASE TOTAL
34,242 1 30,402 28,342
2081120 VOLTS
3 PHASE, 4 WIRE
EXISTING
MAIN E
15(
MODS
DESCRIPTION
WIRE
TRIP
POLE
CKT
VOLT-AMPERESNo.
A
B
C
-
METER PUMP POLYMER
20
1
1
1,500
1,500
1,000
360
_
1,500
360
360
_
-
1,500
1,000
360
-
-
METER PUMP NAOH
20
1
3
-
METER PUMP ALUM
20
1
5
-
HOT BOX RECEPT.
20
1
7
-
LIGHTS/GFI BUILDING
20
1
9
-
ELECTRIC HEAT
20
1
11
-
ELECTRIC HEAT
20
1
13
-
GFCI AT FILTER NOAA
20
1
15
-
EQUIPMENT RACK LT/RECEPT.
20
1
17
-
GFCI AT FILTER NO.2A
20
1
19
-
SPARE
20
1
21
-
SPARE
20
1
23
-
SPARE
20
1
25
-
SPARE:
20
1
27
-
SPARE
20
1
29
MODIFICATION (MODS) LEGEND:
EPD - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (3OmA)
GFCI - GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (5mA)
LO❑ - LOCK -ON DEVICE
LFD - LOCK -OFF DEVICE
TOTAL
4,360
8,960
2,220 2,860
PHASE TOTAL
6,620 4,560
_
PROJECT
ENGINEER: T. DEVINE
DESIGNED BY: D. PHELPS
T5D
BY
DRAWN BY: B.L. JOHNSON
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
0412019
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
�NEL "MDP"
TYPE: NEMA 4X
ONLY
MOUNT: SURFACE
.3P
VOLT-AMPERES
CKT
No
POLE
TRIP
WIRE
DESCRIPTION
MODS
A
B
C
8,960
2
6,620
4
3
70
PANEL "L" XFMR
-
4,560
6
1,500
8
1
20
AREA LIGHTING CKTS 1 & 2
-
10
-
-
12
3
15
SURGE ARRESTOR
-
14
_
16
-
18
3
PUMP HOUSE XFMR FOR PANEL
-
20
-
22
SPACE
-
24
SPACE
-
-
26
SPACE
-
-
28
SPACE
-
-
30
SPACE
-
10,460 6,620 4,560
TOTAL
TOTAL LOAD (VA)
92,986
TOTAL LOAD (A)
112
NOTES:
35kAIC
'ANEL "L"
FAKER
3P
TYPE:: NEMA 4X
MOUNT: SURFACE
VOLT-AMPERES
CKT
No
POLE
TRIP
WIRE
DESCRIPTION
MODS
A
B
C
1,500
1,500
1,500
1,500
1,500
100
1,400
1.400
100
200
-
-
-
2
1
20
GFCI AT FILTER NO.2B
-
4
1
20
GFCI AT FILTER NO.1 B
-
6
1
20
CLAR. 2B
-
8
1
20
BATTERY CHARGER
-
10
1
20
BLOCK HEATER
-
12
1
20
FLOW METER - RECORDER
-
14
1
20
UV SYSTEM
16
1
20
UV SYSTEM -
DIALER
18
1
20
20
1
20
DISK FILTER HEAT TRACE RECEPT EPD
22
1
20
ALARM DIALER I
AREA LIGHT
24
1
20
26
1
20
SPARE
SPARE
-
28
1
20
-
30
1
20
SPARE
-
4,600 4,400 1,700
TOTAL LOAD (VA)
20,140
TOTAL LOAD (A)
56
TOTAL
NOTES:
22kAIC
o�,�N CA/Ha en
aC
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION 2 -
INS HAZEN AND SAWYER
Q 4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
` LICENSE NO.: C-0381
UTILITY XFMR
75kVA
0
23.BkV-2771480V
3P14W
PADMOUNT
F_
225AF
1
225AT.
l
125kW
480V,30,4W
225AF
225AT
225AF 1
� z25AT3l
s1
52
ATS2771480V
225AM PS
L�30
4W 4P
OPEN TRANSITION
PANEL
"MDP"
XFMR
45kVA
48OV-120/208V
YA
3P14W
DRY TYPE N3R
PANEL
EXISTING UTILITY
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
DRIVE DRUM LEVEL BACKWASH BACKWASH PUMP TERTIARY TERTIARY WETWELL LEVEL
UNIT SWITCH(ES) PUMP RUN DRY LEVEL PUMP PUMP
SENSORS Not Nat
DISC FILTER AND TERTIARY PUMP STATION
RISER DIAGRAM
NOTES:
1. FURNISH AND INSTALL (2) NEW 20 AMP 3 POLE
CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN POSITIONS 13/15/17 AND
19/21/23 OF PANELBOARD "MDP". THE NEW CIRCUIT
BREAKERS SHALL MATCH THE KAIC OF THE
EXISTING BREAKERS.
2. FURNISH AND INSTALL (1) NEW 20 AMP SINGLE POLE
TYPE EPD CIRCUIT BREAKER IN POSITION 20 OF
PANELBOARD "L". THE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER
SHALL MATCH THE KAIC OF THE EXISTING
BREAKER.
3. LOW VOLTAGE POWER WIRING SHALL BE
STRANDED THHN 90C FOR DRY LOCATIONS AND
THWN 75C FOR WET LOCATIONS-
4. LOW VOLTAGE POWER WIRING FOR VF❑
APPLICATIONS SHALL BE XHHW 1 XHHW-2 RATED
90C AND 60OV.
5. LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE THHN
90C FOR DRY LOCATIONS AND THWN 75C WET
LOCATIONS.
6. INSTRUMENTATION CABLE FOR ANALOG CIRCUITS
SHALL BE SINGLE SHIELDED TWISTED PAIRS 600V
RATED AND 75C MINIMUM RATED TC TYPE CABLE.
CE RECEPTACLE
CONDUIT NO.
SIZE
FROM
TO
DISC FILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
CONDUCTORS
REMARKS
P-1001
314"
PAN ELBOARD "MDP"
(3) #12, #12 GRD
P-1002
314"
PANELBOARD "MDP"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
(3) #12, #12 GRD
P-1003
314"
DISC FILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
DISC FILTER No4 DRIVE UNIT
(3) #12, #12 GRD
P-1004
314"
DISC FILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
DISC FILTER No4 BACKWASH PUMP
(3) #12, #12 GRD
P-1005
314"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
TERTIARY PUMP Nog
(3) #12, 912 GRD
P-1006
314"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
TERTIARY PUMP Not
(3) #12, #12 GRD
P-1007
314"
PANELBOARD "L"
HANDHOLE Not AND Nat
(2) #10, #10 GRD
P-1008
314"
PANELBOARD "L"
NEW ALARM DIALER
(2) #12, #12 GRD
P-1009
314"
HANDHOLE Not
HEAT TRACE RECEPTACLE
(2) #12, #12 GIRD
P-1010
314"
HANDHOLE Not
AREA LIGHT
(2) #12, #12 GRD
C-1001
314"
NEW ALARM DIALER
HANDHOLE No2
(12) #14, #14 GRD
NOT USED
C-1002
C-1003
314"
HANDHOLE No2
DISC FILTER CONTROL PANEL
(6) #14, #14 GRD
C-1004
314"
HANDHOLE No2
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
(6) #14, #14 GRD
C-1005
314"
DISC FILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
❑ISCFILTER No4 DRIVE UNIT
(2) #12, (2) #14, #12 GRD
C-1006
314"
❑ISCFILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
❑ISCFILTER N04 DRUM LEVEL SWITCHES
(4) #14, #14 GRD
C-1007
314"
DISCFILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
DISCFILTER No4 BACKWASH PUMP
(2) #12, (2) #14, #12 GRD
C-1008
314"
❑ISCFILTER No4 CONTROL PANEL
RUN DRY LEVEL SWITCHES, LSH AND LSL
(4) #14, #14 GRD
C-1009
314"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
TERTIARY PUMP Not
(6) #14, #14 GRD
C-1010
314"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
TERTIARY PUMP No2
(6) #14, #14 GRD
C-1011
(3) 2"
TERTIARY PUMP CONTROL PANEL
WETWELL LEVEL FLOATS; LSH, LSL AND LSHH
(6) #14, #14 GRD
C-1012
NOT USED
C-1013
NOT USED
C-1014
NOT USED
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST VI WTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
'10�140K
FUOUN(NAR;KIA
north carolina
ELECTRICAL
PANEL SCHEDULES, SINGLE LINE AND
RISER DIAGRAMS
DATE: APR I L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:
El03

FOR ASPHALT PAVEMENT OVER CONCRETE
err
1/2 S
FOR ASPHALT PAVEMENT
NOTES:
n
r
t
cv
W
COMPACTED
BACKFILL
SELECT BACKFILL
MATERIAL (N❑
MATERIAL LARGER
THAN 2")
TYPE A
IN EARTH
0222100
W
COMPACTED
BACKFILL
SELECT BACKFILL
MATERIAL (NO
MATERIAL LARGER
THAN 2")
CRUSHED STONE - 118
PIPE OD BELOW PIPE
(MIN 6") AND UP TO
PIPE MIDPOINT
TYPE B
0222102
W
ORIGINAL GRADE
COMPACTED BACKFILL
I
SANDBAGS-
CONTR OPTION
CONCRETE ENCASEMENT
(SEE NOTE 1)
0222104
CLASS B CONC
6" MIN ALL AROUND
PIPE
n
T
f']inr nrRRin�n
kCTED BACKFILL
z ROCK
T BACKFILL
IAL OR CRUSHED
118 PIPE OD
PIPE (MIN 6") AND
12" OVER TOP OF
TYPE A
IN ROCK
0222101
W
COMPACTED
BACKFILL
SELECT BACKFILL
MATERIAL (NO
MATERIAL LARGER
THAN 2")
CRUSHED STONE TO
A VERTICAL HEIGHT
OF 116 PIPE ❑D ON
SIDES OF PIPE AND
118 OD BELOW PIPE
(MIN 6")
TYPE C
0222103
w
%X COMPACTED BACKFILL \
611
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER
CHECKED BY: C. TODD JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
SANDBAGS-
CONTR OPTION
CLASS B CONC
SELECT BACKFILL
MATERIAL (NO
MATERIAL LARGER
THAN 2")
CONCRETE ARCH
(SEE NOTE 1)
0222105
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
TRENCH EXCAVATION LIMITS
INTERNAL
DIAMETER
OF PIPE
W
WIDTH OF TRENCH
MAX
W=MIN
4"-6"
3'-9"
2'-0"
8"-10"
3'-9"
2'-2"
12"
3"-9"
O.D.+2'
14"-16"
4'-2"
O.D.+2'
18"
41-4"
O.D.+2'
20",21"
4'-8"
O.D.+2'
24"
4'-11"
O.D.+2'
27"
5'-9"
O.D.+2'
30"
6'-7"
O.D.+2'
36"
7'-4"
❑.D.+2'
42"
8'-2"
❑.D.+2'
48"
8'-9"
O.D.+2'
54"
91-4"
O.D.+2'
60"
9'-10"
O.D.+2'
72"
11'-0"
O.D.+2'
78"
1 V-8"
O.D.+2'
84"
12'-0"
O.D.+2'
90"
12'-6"
O.D.+2'
96"
13'-0"
O.D.+2'
108"
14'-0"
O.D.+2'
DEPTH
OF
CUT
S
MAXIMUM PAVEMENT
REPLACEMENT WIDTH
0-6'
S=W+4'
>6-8'
S=W+B'
>8-10'
S=W+12'
>10-12'
S=W+16'
> 12-14'
S=W+20'
>14-16'
S=W+24'
>16-18'
S=W+28'
>18'
S=W+32'
W = TRENCH WIDTH AT BOTTOM OF
PIPE. TRENCH SIDE SLOPES SHALL
BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH OSHA
REQUIREMENTS.
0222110
UNDISTURBED
EARTH
X
W 12"
CLASS B
4 O CONCRETE
. 'L I I I
I a T
Lp N
I _ _
i
CONCRETE - MATCH
EXISTING, 6" MIN
AGGREGATE BASE
COURSE, MATCH o.
EXISTING, 6" MIN
TYPICAL TRENCH
0222107
CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK SCHEDULE*
PIPE
SIZE
(IN)
BEND
DESIGN
PRESSURE
(PSI)
90"ITEE
450
22 1J29
11 1140
5 5189
H
L
H
I L
H
L
H
L
H
L
6
1.4
2.8
1.0
2.1
0.7
1.5
0.5
1.0
XXX
XXX
100
8
1.8
3.7
1.4
2.7
1 A
1.9
0.7
1 A
XXX
XXx
100
12
2.7
5.4
2.0
4.0
1.4
2.8
1.0
2.0
XXX
XXXI
100
16
3.6
7.1
2.6
5.2
1.9
3.7
1.3
2.6
XXX
XXX
100
24
5.3
10.5
3.9
7.7
2.8
5.5
2.0
3.9
XXX
XXX
100
30
6.5
13.1
4.8
9.6
3.4
6.9
2.4
4.9
XXX
XXX
100
36
7.8
15.6
5.8
11.5
4.1
8.2
2.9
5.8
XXX
XXX
100
42
9.1
18.2
6.7
13.4
4.8
9.5
3.4
6.8
XXX
XXX
100
48 110.4
20.7
7.6
15.3
1 5.4
10.9
3.9
7.7
XXX
XXX
100
54 111.7
123.3 1
8.6
117.1
1 6.1 112.2
4.3
8.7
XXX
XXX
100
EXISTING PAVEMENT
ASPHALT BASE
COURSE, 3" MIN
AGGREGATE BASE
COURSE, MATCH
EXISTING, 6" MIN
NOTE:
SEE 022100 THROUGH
022105 FOR PIPE
BEDDING DETAILS
* BASED ON AVERAGE SOIL PASSIVE SEARING
STRENGTH OF 2000 PSF USING SF OF 1.5. CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING SHALL BE
DIMENSIONS FOR BLOCKS IN FEET USED ONLY AS APPROVED BY ENGINEER.
0222114
ADDITION DETAIL REQD
SEE STD DETAILS 0222113 THRU 0222117
TYPICAL SECTION
TEE OR BEND
112 L 112 L
CLASS B CLASS B
z CONCRETE CONCRETE
g
UNDISTURBED
\ EARTH \/
+
PLAN - TEE
Hazen
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
ti
� UNDISTURBED
EARTH
PLAN - BEND
THRUST BLOCKS
�/�]
(SEE NOTE 1)
0222108
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA
NORTH CAROLI NA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
1 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKS, ARCHES, ENCASEMENTS,
FLOWABLE FILL, ETC. SHALL BE FORMED USING
PLYWOOD OR SANDBAGS TO PROVIDE REQ'D SHAPE.
NOTES:
1. STANDARD DETAIL RESTRICTIONS ARE LISTED BELOW. FOR SITUATIONS
OUTSIDE THESE RESTRICTIONS ANCHORAGE SHALL BE AS RECOMMENDED BY
THE ENGINEER.
A) NOMINAL SOIL COVER = 4'-0" ABOVE PIPE
B) SOIL PHI = 30-
C) SOIL UNIT WEIGHT = 120 PCF
D) PIPE DESIGN PRESSURE = 100 PSI
E) PIPE SIZE s 12"0
E) VERTICAL PIPE BENDS (DOWN) < 11.25° MAX
F) ALL VERTICAL PIPE BENDS (UPWARD) < 60 MAX
G) UNDISTURBED IN -SITU EARTH SHALL BE MAINTAINED
FOR AT LEAST 10'-0" EITHER
SIDE OF THRUST COLLAR. 12"
MIN
TYPICAL CONCRETE THRUST COLLAR.
MIN OF 12" INTO UNDISTURBED
MATERIAL ALL AROUND
PROPOSED PIPELINE OVER EXIST PIPE
TYPICAL BEND� I I /// 7x
TRENCH BOTTOM
EXCAVATIONI
`I
FOR COLLAR -
!
�
I
I
TRENCH WIDTH 12" MIN j
TYPICAL CONCRETE
_I
THRUST COLLAR. MIN
I
OF 12" INTO
UNDISTURBED SOIL.
I
I
i
M
I
I
I
!
!
f
I
[V
r
I
i
I
I
!
I
THRUST COLLAR
0222111
FLOWABLE FILL FULL 6" PIPE 6"
WIDTH (N❑ ENCASEMI
REQUIRED FOR SPACI
GREATER THAN 12")
PROPOSED
PIPELINE
6" MIN
12" MAX
�...� CL PR(
PIPE PIP'.
1" THICK COMPRESSIE
JOINT FILLER MATERL4,
0222118
PROPOSED PIPELINE UNDER EXIST PIPE
DATE:
HAZEN NO.:
KIA
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
FUUUN( Vn P11 GENERAL CONTRACT NO.:
north carolrna SHEET 1 ❑RAWING
NUMBER:
APRI L 2019
31240-008
1
D01

w
fr
w
z
:3
I I
I�I
1 i
P
/I
h 4
LPL J
L�l J
8'-0" MAX
ELEVATION
SILT FENCE
50'-0" MIN
STEEL POST ---
TOP STRAND
STAY WIRES
GALV WIRE FABRIC
AND FILTER FABRIC -
BURY TOE OF FILTER
FABRIC A MIN OF 8" --
BOTTOM STRAND
GRADE LINE --�
NOTE:
1, EXTRA STRENGTH FILTER FABRIC (AS APPROVED BY
ENGINEER) WITH 5'-0" POST SPACING DOES NOT REQUIRE
MESH SUPPORT FENCE.
2. FILTER FABRIC SHALL BE WIRED DIRECTLY TO POST.
0227000
oavooaoaQpppoao 0 oogov o
00 �Pga00p o boo obaaq �p oa$
ao0a o o bow
o0a ov$
z
ao 2" - 3" COARSE
ul ©
' Q
o AGGREGATE o
[7
w Q�
oaa bo
a �a oa oo
ov Ova aq�oo
oq d aagaao o a boon a o0 oq pq
aao0o a00000b$oobo ovv4ovo
„_�
` SILT FENCE*
PLAN
EXISTING
ROADWAY
I
Poeesep� gdgddd
. oa qqo c
z I���o : i��=
illll--
35'-0" MIN
'ICI = Ila
FABRIC UNDER STONE
CROSS SECTION
U
af
z m
LL
cn
w
8"
MIN
SECTION
SILT FENCE
NOTES:
I. *SILT FENCE SHOULD BE INSTALLED TO
ENSURE CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE IS USED.
2. IF CONSTRUCTION ON THE SITES ARE SUCH
THAT THE MUD IS NOT REMOVED BY THE
VEHICLE TRAVELING OVER THE STONE, THEN
THE TIRES OF THE VEHICLE MUST BE WASHED
BEFORE ENTERING THE PUBLIC ROAD OR THE.
LENGTH OF THE CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE
EXTENDED.
3. MAINTENANCE: ADD ADDITIONAL STONE AND
"FLUFF" TOP DRESSING WITH 2" STONE.
15'-0" MIN
NEW CONSTRUCTION
SEE N.C. DENR EROSION AND SEDIMENT
CONTROL PLANNING and DESIGN MANUAL FOR
CONDITIONS WHERE PRACTICE APPLIES;
PLANNING CONSIDERATION & DESIGN CRITERIA.
GRAVEL ENTRANCE/EXIT
0257701
PROJECT T. ❑EVINE
ENGINEER.
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN BY: C. DOZIER
CHECKED BY: C. TODD JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
MEASURE 1"THEN DRAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
ISSUED FOR
04/2019
TS❑
BY
REV
DATE
�z
Qz
12" MIN
LONGITUDINAL
OVERLAP
STEEL POST
112" MESH
HARDWARE
#5 WASHED
GRADE LINE
=T MINIMUM
LENGTH
T-0" MAX
ELEVATION
STONE FILTER
0227008
TURF REINFORCEMENT
(TRM) OR ROLLED ERO:
CONTROL MAT (RECM),
PERMANENT DITCH
AT TOE OF SLOPE
02270I1
FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
EXISTING
NOTE:
1- TRM OR RECM SHALL BE STAPLED TO SLOPE AS
SPECIFIED BY MANUFACTURER-
2. PREPARE, SEED AND FERTILZE SLOPE
IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO MAT INSTALLATION.
SLOPE MATTING
DETAIL
SCALE: NTS D02
Haz n
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
SECTION
STONE FILTER
9
i�
0
E
ION ABOVE IF NECESSARY)
TYPICAL CONTRACTION JOINT
48' MAX SPACING BETWEEN
112" EXPANSION JOINTS 4'
�- 4" THICK CONCRETE WALK -�
VARIES,
c SEE PLAN
r FOR WIDTH
112" EXPANSION JOINT MATL WHEN WIDTH OF SIDEWALK, PAD, ETC
REQUIRED WHEN WALK ABUTS EXCEEDS 6% LONGITUDINAL CONTRACTION
RIGID STRUCTURES JOINTS SHALL BE PLACED AS REQUIRED
TYPICAL CONCRETE WALKWAY
0245000
GRASS LINED CHANNEL (PERMANENT) ROLLED EROSION CONTROL MAT (RECM)
RECM (TEMPORARY)
3 3
TEMPORARY
GRASS LINED CHANNEL (PERMANENT)
TRM (PERMANENT)
3
PERMANENT
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP FJQJ
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
PERMANENT
TYPICAL DITCH DETAIL
SEE DETAIL 0227014 FOR
INSTALLATION DETAIL
0227011
AY A- R N A
north carolina
3
TURF REINFORCEMENT MAT {TRM}
STONE LINING
i i r L_ n ��OTEXTILE
SEPARATOR
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
GENERAL
SHEET 2
DATE: APRIL 2019
HAZEN NO-: 31240-008
CONTRACT N0-: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:
D02

PLAN DIMENSION AS REQUIRED
a
g
BASIC DEVELOPMENT LENGTH AND SPLICE LENGTH
FOR UNCOATED BARS IN TENSION
BASED ON MATERIALS AND CONDITIONS AS FOLLOWS:
fy = 60,000 psi fc' = 4000 psi OR GREATER
CLEAR COVER? 1.5 INCHES NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE
BASIC DEVELOPMENT LENGTH
d
BAR
SIZE
CLASS B SPLICE LENGTH
1.3 xS d
CLEAR SPACING? 3"
-
CLEAR SPACING <3"
CLEAR SPACING? 3"
CLEAR SPACING <3"
BASIC
TOP "
BASK
TOP "
BASIC
TOP "
BASIC
TOP
1'-01,
1'-0"
1'-0"
1'-4"
# 3
1'-011
V-3"
V-4"
1'-81'
11-01,
11-may"
11-7"
21-111
L31-0"
# 4
i##
1I-/Ill
11-81p
2F-111
G3'-0"
21_911
.111-1311
11—a77"
21-4"
5
11-�71"
21-00'1
3''-1 i n
1'-6"
11-111,
3'-1"
41-0"
# 6
11-11"
2'-5"
4'-O"
5'-211
2'-5"
3'-111
4'-111'
64"
97
3'-1"
1
4'4
6t-411
81-3"
3'-0"
31-11 "'
61-0"
7'-9"
# 8
3'-11"
5'-111
7li1_9"
101_1,1
31-8"
4'-911
6'-9"
8'-9"
# 9
41-9"
6'-3"
8'-9"
1 V-4"
4'-6"
51-10"
T-7"
9'-10"
# 10
5'-10"
71_711
9'-10"
12'-9"
51-5"
7'-0"
8'-5"
10'-11"
# 11
7'-0"
9'-1"
10'-11"
141-211
TOP REINFORCEMENT IS ANY HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT SO PLACED THAT MORE THAN
12 INCHES OF FRESH CONCRETE IS CAST 1N THE MEMBER BELOW THE REINFORCEMENT -
FOR MATERIALS OR CONDITIONS DIFFERENT FROM THOSE STATED, LENGTHS SHOWN IN
CHART SHALL BE MODIFIED TO CONFORM TO THE PROVISIONS OF ACi 318, SECTION 12.2.
0321004
WATERSTOP WHERE
CLASS "B" REQUIRED, SEE
SPLICE + 2" SPECIFICATIONS AND
GENERAL CONCRETE
NOTES.
rr
L - FOR TYPICAL KEYWAY,
SEE 0331702
FOR SLAB OR WALL THICKNESS AND
REINFORCING, SEE DESIGN DRAWINGS.
TYPICAL CONSTRUCTION JOINT
0331701
SPAN, S
DEPTH (MIN)
CONCRETE ANCHOR (SIZE AND SPACING)
0'-0"< S 5 4'-011
1 11211
112"Ox5 112" @ 18"
4'-0"< S 5 5'-0"
1 314"
518"Ox6" @ 18"
5'_611� S � 6'-0"
2 11411
6'-0"< Ss 6'-6"
2 112"
SCHEDULE BASED ON 150 PSF
i AL GRATING
118" CLEARANCE
ALL AROUND
PIPE OD
APPROVED I 1
ADHESIVE ON �
BOTH CONTACT
SURFACES OF PAD
1209
114" MIN NEOPRENE PAD.
DUROMETER 40 TO 50
MATERIAL HARDNESS,
SEE NOTE 2
#3 TIES @12"
REQUIRED
COVER + 1"
MAX
#4 EF, TYP
\__CONC FLOOR-
6" MIN
SEE NOTE 3
w
Z ~
z
0o w
w
#5 DOWELS @12" EF
SEE NOTE 1 ;I DOWEL
/ ROTATE HOOK 90Q FROM SHOWN SO ADHESIVE
THAT HOOK IS PARALLEL TO PIPE, TYP
NOTES:
1. DOWELS MAY BE CAST IN WITH 90* HOOK OR ANCHORED WITH DOWEL ADHESIVE AT
CONTRACTORS OPTION. WHERE FLOOR IS 8" THICK OR LESS, USE #4 DOWELS
EMBEDDED TO WITHIN 2" OF BOTTOM OF FLOOR SLAB.
2. ENGINEER SHALL VERIFY THICKNESS OF PAD WILL ACCOMMODATE DESIGN
MOVEMENT, PARTICULARLY FOR OUTSIDE AERIAL PIPE.
3. COORDINATE SUPPORT WIDTH WITH PIPE STRAP ANCHORAGE REQUIREMENTS.
PROVIDE 6" MINIMUM, FROM CENTER OF PIPE STRAP ANCHOR ROD TO EDGE OF
CONCRETE.
CRADLE PIPE SUPPORT
0331601
AL CLOSURE PL 1111
CONC STAIR NOSING 7UNO-
z
0554a00 1"
---- L3 1120 112018" AL
O
u z
2-314"0 SST ADHESIVE �•� � 3116 3-SIDES
ANCHORS, 6" EMBEDMEN
CONC
AL TREAD
0551000 TYP - - - -
AL STRINGER
SEE NOTE 2, TYP
UPPER STRINGER CONNECTION TO CONCRETE
11"
1" UNO
FOR EQUIPMENT
CONFIRM BY ANCHOR
BOLT DESIGN
PUMP OR
EQUIP BASE-
0 0
i
#4@ 12 EW —'
CONC FLOOR
2" MIN
EDGE DISTANCE
SEE NOTE 3
11 MIN NON -SHRINK
GROUT SEE
NOTES 2 & 3
CONC PAD
CL ANCHOR RODS
REQUIRED
COVER + 1"
MAX - -
i �
#5 DOWELS @12" ALL
AROUND, SEE NOTE 1
#5 DOWELS 412" ALL DOWEL ADHESIVE
AROUND, SEE NOTE 1
- LEVELING CHANNEL
NOTES: ANCHORS, SEE NOTE 2
1- DOWELS MAY BE CAST IN WITH 90" HOOK OR ANCHORED WITH DOWEL ADHESIVE AT
CONTRACTORS OPTION. WHERE FLOOR IS 8" THICK OR LESS, USE #4 DOWELS EMBEDDED TO
WITHIN 2" OF BOTTOM OF FLOOR SLAB.
2. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE LEVELING CHANNELS AND LEVELING CHANNEL ANCHORS
FOR SWITCHGEAR, SWITCHBOARDS, MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
WHEN REQUIRED TO MEET EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S LEVELING TOLERANCES, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE 1" MINIMUM NON -SHRINK GROUT FCR PUMPS AND SIMILAR
EQUIPMENT WHEN REQUIRED TO MEET EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S UNIFORM BEARING
AND LEVELING REQUIREMENTS.
3, PRIOR TO PLACING CONCRETE PAD, LEVELING CHANNEL SIZE AND MEANS OF INSTALLATION,
ANCHORAGE, GROUT, CONCRETE EDGE DISTANCE, AND CONCRETE BLOCKOUTS
REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER.
4. COAT DISSIMILAR MATERIALS PER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,
5. STAGGER CHANNEL ANCHORS AND PAD DOWELS.
TYPICAL EQUIPMENT PAD
033� ofl4
e
0" OR 2" MIN
EDGE DISTANCE
SEE NOTE 3
LEVELING CHANNEL,
/ I SEE NOTES 2 AND 3
1-1 _r4" MINIMUM,
IF OVER 8",
#4@8" HORZ
s. ---
8" MIN
AL NOSING WI
NOTES
1. VERTICAL JOINTS SHALL BE FORMED BY AN
APPROVED JOINT INSERT. HORIZONTAL
JOINTS SHALL BE FORMED BY AN APPROVED
JOINT INSERT OR SAWCUTTING PERFORMED
PER SPECIFICATION
2- DEPTH SHALL BE 1 112" IN REINF CONC
DEPTH SHALL BE 113 OF CONCRETE THICK-
NESS IN UNREINFORCED CONCRETE
PAVEMENT-
318"± 11161, JOINT SEALER
114" TOOLED
RADIUS, TYP
C
w
-
_
2ww04
112"0 BACKER
ROD
TYPICAL SEALED JOINT
0325101
11" ABRASIVE SURFACE- 111 11" AL GRATING 11"
L3 112x3 112x318" AL -
UNO In AL GRATING UNO 0553000 - LINO 1"
CONC 0553000 - 111
T 1 2-314"0 SST BOLTS
2-314"0 SST BOLTS
H Z < CJP `. CJP
0 5� ` `
z _ ` SEE PLAN FOR FRAMING SEE PLAN FOR FRAMING
w - z `. '' MEMBER SIZE MEMBER SIZE
w er
v7 t - ---
2-314"0 SST ADHESIVE L3 1120 112x318" L3 112x3 112x318"
xa'-6" AL �. x0'-6" AL
ANCHORS,6"EMBEDMENT �`.�
3-SIDES 3116 ` 3-SIDES , �•
3-51i]ES 3116 I� �` �• 3116 '.
AL TREAD AL STRINGER AL STRINGER, SEE NOTE 2, TYP
0551000 TYP SEE NOTE 2, TYP
AL TREAD AL TREAD
a5510a0 AL STRINGER 0551000 TYP -
TYP
SEE NOTE 2, TYP
UPPER STRINGER CONNECTION TO CONCRETE WITH TREAD UPPER STRINGER CONNECTION TO FRAMING MEMBER UPPER STRINGER CONNECTION TO
AL STRINGER
AL TREAD -- 11" AL CLOSURE PL UNO SEE NOTE 2, TYP
0551 aD0 TYP 1 AL TREAD
- CONC a551 aaa TYP
11 u 11 LJ
z L3 112x3 112x318"x0'-8" AL
W113116x1 112" SLOTTED
- - --- �- w
AL TREAD
0551a0a TYP
11"
AL CLOSURE PL
AL GRATING
o553oaa
FRAMING MEMBER WITH TREAD
112" CLR
FROM
WALL UNO
AL TREAD
12" UNO ON PLANS
R, TYP
AL STRINGER ---- 0 I � HOLE PAR WITH STRINGER AL STRINGER `. -
SEE NOTE 2, TYP `� �� z .� - SEE PLAN FOR �
EXTRUDED ---- SEE NOTE 2, TYP
--- - � o AL CLOSURE PL FRAMING MEMBER SIZE
\� ALUMINUM FRAME ` '� } r - 1" NON -SHRINK GROUT 3-SIDES - - 2-314"0 SST BOLTS
CONTINUOUS 3-SIDES 3116
3116 S� CONC i 3'-0" UNO
�� 2-314"0 SST ADHESIVE _ L3 112x3 112x318"
I_ T _ _ AL L3x3x318, CONT 3 SIDE 16 ON PLANS
L3 112x3 1/2x3/8" AL ANCHORS, 6" EMBEDMENT 6 -- 314"0 SST ADHESIVE x0'-6" AL
>> MIN ANCHOR, 4" EMBEDMENT
316 SST CONCRETE `'+ ADHESIVE ANCHOR ANCHOR STRAPS
LOWER STRINGER CONNECTION TO CONCRETE LOWER STRINGER CONNECTION TO CONCRETE SLAB LOWER STRINGER CONNECTION TO FRAMING MEMBER TYPICAL TREAD CROSS SECTION
�
SPAN, S 1 "x114"x6" a@ 18"
- - -- — WELD TO FRAME) NOTES: 4. ALL FASTENERS SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
MIN 2 EACH SIDE 1. PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR DISSIMILAR METALS AND CONCRETE PER SPECIFICATIONS-
5. FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS PRIOR TO FABRICATION.
AT WALL AT FLOOR 2. C12x10.4 AL STRINGERS ARE TYPICAL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON PLANS- 6- NO CONCRETE REINFORCING SHALL BE CUT FOR INSTALLATION OF ADHESIVE ANCHORS UNLESS APPROVED
BY THE ENGINEER- PRIOR TO FABRICATION CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LOCATION OF ADHESIVE
ALUMINUM GRATING 3. STAIR HANDRAIL AND TOEBOARD NOT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. ANCHORS WITH REINFORCING AND LENGTHEN DIMENSIONS AS NEEDED TO CLEAR REINFORCING.
0553000 ALUMINUM STAIR DETAILS
0551005
PROJECT T. ❑EVINE DATE: APRIL 209
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON ��� CAR4(r TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA HAZEN NO-:
�° Q� ��a en NORTH CAROLINA �� 31240-008
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
DRAWN BY: C. ❑OZIER FINAL DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PURPOSES SE q� _ B R I G HTQ N FOREST WWTP FU Q UI- Y 1 AR i KI � GENERAL CONTRACT NO.:
ONLY NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION VN CHECKED BY: C. TODD JOHNSQN � �-�^ �[t, HAZEN AND SAWYER ,-north car'olina SHEET 3 DRAWING
� NGIN E
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500 NUMBER:
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1" �Ty}' S. ��� RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607 TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
1 REGULATORY REVIEW 0412019 TSD MEASURE 1"THEN DRAWING LICENSE NO.: C 0381
REV ISSUED FOR DATE BY IS NOT TO FULL SCALE D03

POLE
CONDUIT END BELL
#3 TIE
CN
n
#3 TI E
a
w
cr
d
w
Ln
a
a
a
SEE NOTE 1
0 TIES 0
12' UNO
^yDUIT STUB UPS, AS REQUIRED (NOTE 3)
NOTE 1
TIE
PLAN
--SST ANCHOR BOLTS,
NUTS, LOCK WASHERS AND
- LEVELING NUTS PER
POLE MFR REQUIREMENTS
II
r 1"t GROUT
�I I II
1
II II
I 1
I
DIA AS REQUIRED
ELEVATION
COATING ON EXPOSED
CONCRETE PER SECTION 09900,
OWNER SELECTED COLOR.
FINISH GRADE
r
to
z
#8 BARE COPPER GROUND WIRE
ENCASED ELECTRICAL
CONDUIT(S) AS REQUIRED
1 /4" SET SCREW
2'0 AL SLEEVE
7" LONG
1 1 /2" AL PIPE
POST
REMOVABLE POST
IN CONCRETE
6'-O" MAX
to
I `
TYPE I
CONDUIT
II
COMPACTED SOIL
- CLASS "A"
II CONCRETE
10' X 3/4' DIA COPPER CLAD GROUND ROD
3' CLR (TYP)
NOTES:
1. DEPTH AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE DETERMINED
BY POLE MANUFACTURER.
2. PROJECTED HEIGHT ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE 30" FOR
POLES NOT OTHERWISE PROTECTED BY A CURB OR
BOLLARDS. HEIGHT ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE 6" FOR
POLES WHERE PROTECTION IS ALREADY PROVIDED BY
CURB OR BOLLARDS. FINAL DETERMINATION OF
REQUIRED BASE HEIGHT FOR INDIVIDUAL POLES
SHALL BE MADE BY THE ENGINEER.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE
LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF CONDUITS IN THE BASE
SO THAT WHEN POLE IS INSTALLED, IT WILL FIT OVER
THE CONDUITS.
CAST —IN —PLACE POLE —MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURE BASE (RAISED BASE)
1650002
RMC CONDUIT
PVC COATED COUPLING
PVC COATED CONDUIT
4 ❑ 4
a a
a
Cl ❑ Q
a
SEE NOTE 1
RMC OR PVC CONDUIT
1. FOR ENCASED PVC CONDUIT USE PVC
TERMINAL ADAPTER, FOR ENCASED RMC
USE PVC COATED COUPLING.
FLOOR STUB —UP FOR CONDUIT
1611102
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: C. NELSON
DRAWN 8Y: C. DOZIER FINAL DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
CHECKED BY: C. TODD JOHNSON
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
REGULATORY REVIEW 04/2019 TSD MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
ISSUED FOR DATE By IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
2
LO
1 I 1 1/2' AL PIPE
tl ' POST
+
I
II
II
II
l
11
II
�
�
11
it
it
11
li
Itl
+
II
II
II
I
II
II
11
II
0
4- 3/8" HEX HEAD
BOLTS
RAILING
FLANGE
1 /4" 'D' STOP
ELEVATION (ONE SIDE ONLY)
5", MIN
1 1 /4" 1 1 /4"
5/16", MIN 1/20, MIN
I� 1/4" 'D' STOP
(ONE SIDE ONLY)
SIDE MOUNT
TO METAL
1 1/2' AL PIPE
RAILING
1/2' AL PIPE
(VERTICAL)
TOEBOARD, TYPICAL
ALL HANDRAILS
WALKING SURFACE
SURFACE MOUNTED
TO METAL
6'-O" MAX
4' MAX OC �
LO
ao
to
O
n
I
n
EXTRUDED ALUMINUM
TOEBOARD
1 1/2" ALUMINUM
RIPE POST
:AST AL
SASE FLANGE
4-1/2"0 SST BOLTS
I
3/8"o SST
SET SCREWS
SURFACE MOUNTED
TO CONCRETE
1 1/2" SCH, 40
ALUMINUM PIPE (TYP FOR 3/4'
TAT) FITTING MIN
3 3/8"��j
r7 I
ADJUSTIBLE
STAIR FITTING N
Ln
� I
�J 1 1 /2' SCH, 80
TYPE II ALUMINUM PIPE (TYP FOR
ELEVATION TYPE III STAIR/RAMTP )HANDRAIL
NOTE:
UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE
CONTRACT DRAWING, HANDRAILS SHALL BE
TYPE I.
Q�H CARp�i
=o F �SSIQH n
y7A
E
00� —
�NOIN \�4r HAZEN AND SAWYER
pTHY S. D�J 401 RALEIGH, NORTH OCAROL I A 27607 ULEVARD, SUITE 500
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
ALUMINUM HANDRAILS
0552000
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARI NA
NORTH CAROLINA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
tq
EXTRUDED AL ADAPTEF
(USED ONLY WITH AL
BASE FLANGE)
1 1/2' ALUMINUM
PIPE POST
1 1/2'x1/8' AL
CLAMP
CAST AL
BASE FLANGE n,
4-1/2"0 SST
ADHESIVE ANCHORS
(MIN 5' EMBEDMENT)
ME.
IQ
5" MIN
3 1/2' MIN
+
PLAN
3/4"
MIN
� z
SIDE MOUNT
TO CONCRETE
EDGE OF CONCRETE
3/4'
l 9/16' 0
HOLES
4-1/2"0 SST ADHESIVE
ANCHORS (MIN 5"
EMBEDMENT)
CAST AL BASE PLATE
1/ "
LUMINUM PIPE
OST
OP OF CONCRETE
/2'Ox5 1/2' SST
DHESIVE ANCHORS (MIN
EMBEDMENT), TYP
1 /2"x2' ALUMINUM
DE MOUNT BRACKET, TYP
/8"0 SET
CREWS
2 1 /2" 2 1 /2' 3/4"
PLAN
DATE:
HAZEN NO.:
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARD DETAILS
r r AN( VAR il KIA GENERAL CONTRACT NO.:
I
north carolrrla SHEET 4
FNUMRAWING
BER:
APRI L 2019
31240-008
il�

a
N
fn
FINISHED GRADE
4" MIN, 6" MAX CONCRETE
ENCASEMENT AROUND ALL DUCTS 2"(TY24" MIN COVER
DUCTBANK WIDTH AND CONCRETE
CONCRETE
HEIGHT AS REQUIRED �� �/
\ \\ \ TYP
ENCASEMENT AROUND
DUCTS,
` A
FORMWORK, SEE NOTE 5 °
° a 4 #4 REINFORCING STEEL BARS
#4 REINFORCING STEEL (U-BAR) ° DRIVEN INTO SOIL OR SET IN
SPACED EVERY 36" HORIZONTALLY v CONCRETE PAD, SPACED
ALONG LENGTH OF DUCTBANK d EVERY 72" HORIZONTALLY
\ ° c
ALONG LENGTH OF DUCTBANK,
TYP EACH SIDE
#4 REINFORCING STEEL ,� 4 v
SPACED EVERY 12" AND AT\ r,
EVERY CORNER (TYP 4 SIDES
TIE, (TYP) ° ❑ �� H
\z z
74A
/� ❑ — a LLJ
w
2" (TYP) fJ �, ❑ 4 \ �n
CONDUIT SIZES), QUANTITY AND
TYPE AS REQUIRED
n
k.
Q °
DInt[�>ZL.
\%\\%\\�/�\/�\�\�\/\Xi\\\/\�\ II
I ! �i�/�
I I
I I SPACING DEPENDS UPON NUMBER OF 1 I
I DUCTS AND TYPE OF SPACERS I
Ir I
II II
u u
NOTES:
1. CONCRETE SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATION
SECTION 03300.
2. REINFORCING STEEL AND TIES SHALT. BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH SPECIFICATION SECTION 03200. OVERLAP FOR REINFORCING STEEL SPLICES
ALONG THE DUCTBANK LENGTH SHALL BE 15", MINIMUM.
3. CONDUIT SPACERS ARE REQUIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATION SECTION
16118, HORIZONTAL SPACING OF CONDUIT SPACER ASSEMBLIES ALONG LENGTH OF
DUCTBANK SHALL AS SHOWN IN THE TABLE.
4. FOR DUCTBANKS LESS THAN 15" IN HEIGHT, THE LAP SHALL BE THE HEIGHT OF THE
DUCTBANK.
5. IN POOR SOIL CONDITIONS, DUCTBANKS SHALL BE FORMED WITH FORMING MATERIALS
TO MAINTAIN 4" MINIMUM ENCASEMENT. WHERE SOIL CONDITIONS PERMIT AND THE
EXCAVATION IS MAINTAINED FOR A 4" MINIMUM TO 10" MAXIMUM ENCASEMENT, THE
FORMWORK CAN BE OMITTED.
TYPICAL DUCTBANK SECTION
1611801
CONDUIT SPACER ASSEMBLY,
SIZE AND CONFIGURATION AS
REQUIRED
4410 BARE COPPER GROUNDING
CONDUCTOR, INSTALLED INSIDE
REINFORCING STEEL CAGE
MAX SPACING BETWEEN CONDUIT
SPACER ASSEMBLIES
CONDUIT SIZE
SPACING
1"
3 FT
1 114-2"
5 FT
2 112-3"
6 FT
3 112-5"
7 FT
6"
8 FT
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: D. PHELPS
DRAWN BY: B.L. JOHNSON FINAL DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112" 1"
1 REGULATORY REVIEW 04/2019 TSD MEASURE 1" THEN DRAWING
REV ISSUED FOR DATE BY IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
RMC CONDUIT
PVC COATED
COUPLING —
PVC COATED
CONDUIT
v
a °
a �
4
a
d °
d
SEE NOTE 1
RMC OR
PVC
NOTES: CONDUIT
1. FOR ENCASED PVC CONDUIT USE PVC
TERMINAL ADAPTER. FOR ENCASED
RMC USE PVC COATED COUPLING.
FLOOR STUB -UP FOR CONDUIT
1611102
CONDUIT RISER
CONDUIT EXPANSION
FITTINGS
BUILDING EXTERIOR —
CHAMFER EDGE OF
CONCRETE AND SLOPE
TO PROMOTE WATER
DRAINAGE
I I I I
I I I I
l I I I
! II
CONCRETE DUCTBANK uj I 1 I
EXTENDED ABOVE GRADE
1I I I I
9 II I
FINISHED GRADE I I I I
I fl h
z ELECTRICAL I I I v
DUCTBANK
� I I
� � 1
� r
a � 001 f I 1
OOP r
----- ----- — ❑
❑
SLAB ON GRADE
CONSTRUCTION
30# FELT BOND
BREAKER
DUCTBANK REINFORCING
PER STANDARD DETAIL
1611801, TYP
DUCTBANK ABUTMENT (FLOATING) TO EXISTING STRUCTURE
1611811
Ha-e
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
EGC LUG,
SEE NOTE 1
MOTOR WIRII
CONNECTIOZ
MOTOR LEAD v v ll %111U
RING TERMINAL
SS NUT, BOLT AND
LOCKWASHER
IDENTIFICATIO
INTO BOX LID
GROUND ROD
CONCRETE CC
SLOPE AWAY F
#3 TIES @ 12"
345 CONTINU(
AROUND PERII
CONCRETE EL
DUCTBANK, SII
ENTRY, (ALTEI
TYP IF REQUIF
SILICONE BRO
MECHANICAL (
I.11c]:18111►1il:t!
'ULLBOX LID
:ONDUIT STUB -UP,
BELOW
'OLYMER CONCRETE
'RECAST PULLBOX
'INISHED GRADE
VN
'VC CONDUIT WI
:ND BELLS, TYP
i", #57 STONE BASE
- CONCRETE ELECTRICAL
DUCTBANK,BOTTOM
TE ENTRY (PREFERRED), TYP
NO 5.
1. FOR SIDE ENTRY, CONDUIT DUCTBANK SHALL ENTER PULLBOX AT LOWEST POINT.
2. GROUND CONDUCTORS WITHIN DUCTBANK SHALL BE BOLTED TOGETHER AND TO GROUND ROD.
3. FOR SIDE ENTRY, CONDUIT SHALL ENTER IN INDIVIDUAL CIRCULAR HOLES APPROPRIATELY SIZED FOR THE
CONDUIT. LARGE SINGLE RECTANGULAR OPENINGS FOR MULTIPLE CONDUITS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE
4. DUCTBANK REINFORCING RE BAR SHALL PENETRATE THE SIDEWALLS OF THE BOX NO LONGER THAN 1".
POLYMER CONCRETE ELECTRICAL HANDHOLE DETAIL
\ TERMINATION BOX
i *mF: sZ!
SHORT BARREL \ L FIELD WIRING
ONE -HOLE
COMPRESSION LUG CONNECTION
INSULATION,
SEE NOTE 4
NOTES:
I. EGC LUG SHALL BE ATTACHED WITH NUT AND LOCKWASHER TO THE
MOTOR GROUNDING STUD. WHERE PROVIDED, FACTORY INSTALLED EGC
LUGS ARE ACCEPTABLE IN LIEU OF THE FIELD INSTALLED EGC LUG.
2. RING TERMINALS ON MOTOR LEADS SHALL BE FACTORY INSTALLED BY THE
MOTOR MANUFACTURER.
3. INSTALL SHORT BARREL COMPRESSION CONNECTOR ON FIELD WIRING
WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED COMPRESSION TOOL AND
CRIMPING DIE. CONNECTORS SHALL HAVE SMOOTHLY ROUNDED EDGES.
4. HEAT SHRINK OR COLD APPLIED CONNECTOR INSULATION LISTED FOR THE
PURPOSE AND AS SPECIFIED.
LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR TERMINATION
1612301
TOWN OF FUQUAY-VARINA
NORTH CAROLINA�
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP FJQUAY ARIINn
north carolina
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
ELECTRICAL
STANDARD DETAILS
DATE: APRI L 2019
HAZEN NO.: 31240-008
CONTRACT NO.: 1
DRAWING
NUMBER:
ED1

CLASS Al CONCRETE
COLLAR, (314" SLOPE
AWAY FROM BOX) —
TOP OF GRADE
#57 STONE BASE
COMPACTED FILL
#410 STRANDED BARE COPPER
GROUND CONDUCTOR TO
GROUND RING —
#4 @ 10", TYP.
243 CONTINUOUS
AROUND PERIMETER
TIER 22 RATED BOX WITH, 9 318"
DIA.x2" THICK POLYMER CONCRETE
PRECAST COVER WITH LIFTING HOLE
CONNECTOR PER SECTION 16170
i
#4 @ w,
243 CONTINUOUS
AROUND PERIMETER
— TIER 22 RATED
POLYMER CONCRETE
PRECAST PULLBOX
L
#410 STRANDED BARE COPPER
CONDUCTOR CONNECTED TO
GROUND ROD CLUSTER GROUP
-- GROUND ROD PER SECTION 16170
NOTES:
1. PRECAST PULLBOX AND COVER SHALL BE
OLDCASTLE PART NUMBER 09101187, OR APPROVED
EQUAL.
GROUND ROD TEST WELL INSTALLATION DETAIL
1617601
PROJECT T. DEVINE
ENGINEER:
DESIGNED BY: D. PHELPS
DRAWN BY: B.L. JOHNSON
CHECKED BY: G. RATASKY
IF THIS BAR DOES NOT 0 112=' 1"
MEASURE 1" THEN ❑RAWING
IS NOT TO FULL SCALE
1
REGULATORY REVIEW
04/2019
TSD
REV
ISSUED FOR
DATE
BY
FINAL. DRAWINGS - FOR REVIEW PURPOSES
ONLY - NOT RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION
�N CARS
/0
C�7
DJ.R
1
Hazen
HAZEN AND SAWYER
4011 WESTCHASE BOULEVARD, SUITE 500
RALEIGH, NORTH CAROLINA 27607
LICENSE NO.: C-0381
TOWN OF FUQUAY--VARI NA
NORTH CAROLI NA
BRIGHTON FOREST WWTP
TERTIARY FILTER RELOCATION
w
of
Ci
ll.!
co
Q
_Q
CONDUIT STUB UPS, AS
REQUIRED, SEE NOTE 3
SEE NOTE 1
#3 TIE
PLAN
POLE
CONDUIT
END BELL
SST ANCHOR BOLTS, NUTS,
LOCK WASHERS AND
LEVELING NUTS PER POLE
#3 TIE
MFR REQUIREMENTS
1 "± GROUT
cv
�
II I II
CN
I
COATING ON EXPOSED
�
I
CONCRETE PER SECTION
I I
09900, OWNER SELECTED
z
w
I I I
COLOR.
w
II I II
U)
II li
I I
11 II
I
FINISH GRADE
Ir
II
II II
II II
2 �
s i
v #8 BARE COPPER
SEE NOTE 1
I I
GROUND WIRE
#3 TIES @
II
I I I
--- ENCASED ELECTRICAL
`—'
12" UNO
I I
CONDUIT(S) AS
Imo—
REQUIRED
p
II II
2
W
Il II
-
W
— Y
il]
/X CONDUIT
G
COMPACTED
SOIL
�
I
�\
— CLASS "A" CONCRETE
#3 TIE
10' X 314" DIA COPPER
CLAD GROUND ROD
3" CLR (TYP)
❑IA AS REQUIRED
ELEVATION
NOTES:
1. DEPTH AND REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE DETERMINED BY POLE MANUFACTURER IN
ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 16500, LOADING SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH
SECTION 16500.
2. PROTECTED HEIGHT ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE 36" FOR POLES NOT OTHERWISE
PROTECTED BY A CURB OR BOLLARDS. HEIGHT ABOVE GRADE SHALL BE 6" FOR
POLES WHERE PROTECTION IS ALREADY PROVIDED BY CURB OR BOLLARDS.
FINAL DETERMINATION OF REQUIRED BASE HEIGHT FOR INDIVIDUAL POLES SHALL
BE MADE BY THE ENGINEER.
3. CONTRACTOR SHALL CAREFULLY COORDINATE LOCATION AND QUANTITY OF
CONDUITS IN THE BASE SO THAT WHEN POLE IS INSTALLED, IT WILL FIT OVER THE
CONDUITS.
CAST -IN -PLACE POLE -MOUNTED LIGHTING FIXTURE BASE
(RAISED BASE)
1650002
DATE:
�� HAZEN NO.:
�� WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT
FJ 0UAYNA-R'I IAA ELECTRICAL CONTRACT NO.:
north Carolina STANDARD DETAILS DRAWING
NUMBER:
APRI L 2019
31240-008
1
IAljo�